Engineering Design Recommendation

& Minimum Standards for

International Five Star Hotels & Resorts
 GENERAL INTRODUCTION

This document, together with T.S. Design Recommendations and Minimum

Standards, provides the recommendations and minimum standards for the
various areas, and the materials, systems and components, to be used during
the design, development and construction of all new Hotels.
This document is not deemed to supersede or override any comments, approvals
or compliance with prevailing codes and legal requirements issued by authorities
having jurisdiction over the project provided that such codes are demonstrably
higher than the minimum standards contained herein.

Code Compliance Statement

We regard the total compliance with all prevailing codes and legal
requirements issued by authorities having jurisdiction over the project to be a
minimum standard for newly constructed Hotels.

• We also acknowledges and understands the

variable nature of such codes and requirements, in particular,
where such legislation is in a formative or emerging state.
• The obligation of the Design Team Consultants shall be to design and
develop a hotel, which encompasses not only code compliant standards,
but also those, which provide the best available practices and protection
available at the time of construction.
• In locations where there is an absence of relevant code, or that are in
any way lesser than the following standards, the latter shall form the
required minimum standards for newly constructed Hotels

Life Safety and Security Minimum Standards

It is a minimum standard that all newly constructed Hotels are
designed and constructed to be in full compliance with the most recent edition of
NFPA 101 or its subsequent revision.

All life safety and security systems must also comply with T.S. Engineering
Recommendations and Minimum Standards (ER&MS), or the prevailing codes
and legal requirements issued by authorities having jurisdiction over the project,
whichever is demonstrably higher. Minimally required are the following:
• A fully zoned addressable, digital, self-diagnostic fire detection
and alarm systems covering all internal and external covered areas.
• A fully automated emergency evacuation and paging system
covering all internal and external areas.

i
GENERAL INTRODUCTION

• A fully zoned automatic sprinkler system covering all internal areas.

• A localized standpipe fire hose reel system together with portable multi-
category fire extinguishers located throughout all
internal and covered external areas.
• A fully zoned addressable, digital, self-diagnosed hazardous
gas detection and alarm system covering all internal areas.
• A fully developed threat, vulnerability and hazard analysis with
a subsequent cause and effect/ hazard consequence matrix.
• Perimeter, localized and specific hazard pro-active and re-
active components and installations.

Environmental Minimum Standards

It is a minimum standard that all newly Hotels are designed, developed, and
constructed withadherence to the following
environmental standards or the prevailing codes and legal requirements issued
by authorities having jurisdiction over the project, whichever is demonstrably
higher.
• All activities are to be harmless to the population and have
minimal environmental burden.
• All activities are to promote the protection of welfare, health,
and safety of the population.
• All activities are to seek the use of energy efficient designs, the
use of recycled and recyclable products, and minimize the use
of non-sustainable resources.

ii
Table of Contents

General Introduction ………………………………………. i

General Engineering Design Guidelines ………………………………………. 1

Scope of Work of MEP Consultants ………………………………………. 4

Site Characteristics Survey ………………………………………. 29

Sustainable Design ………………………………………. 30

Mechanical Systems ………………………………………. 31

Lift and Escalator Systems ………………………………………. 75

Electrical Systems ………………………………………. 93

Lighting Systems ………………………………………. 106

Plumbing Systems ………………………………………. 119

Communications Systems ………………………………………. 139

Audio Visual Systems ………………………………………. 173

Building Automation Systems (BAS) ………………………………………. 186

Fire & Life Safety Systems ………………………………………. 189

Guestroom Technology ………………………………………. 204

Master Antenna and Interactive TV ………………………………………. 211

Security Systems ………………………………………. 214

Testing and Commissioning ………………………………………. 254

Project Completion ………………………………………. 257

List of Spare Items ………………………………………. 262

iii
 Instructions to the Engineering Consultant
● These Engineering Recommendations and Minimum Standards (ER&MS) shall not be
regarded as specifications or scope limiting documents, nor shall the schedules and
attachments contained herein be considered as such. They are intended solely to
assist the Owner/Developer and his appointed Consultants in the development of
design documentation. Materials listed in these ER&MS shall serve solely as a guide
to quality, features and performance.
● Quantities shown in the List of Spare Items Chapter are to be assessed carefully by
the Consultant and contractors and adjusted to local conditions of availability and re-
order lead times.
● The engineering consultant has the sole responsibility for conforming to all applicable
codes and shall inform Technical Services (T.S.) in writing,
and in a timely manner, of any conflicts between such applicable codes and those
recommended in these standards. Upon notification, if T.S. ER&MS is
demonstrably greater than the applicable codes, T.S. reserves the right to interpret
and determine the applicable standards.
● The engineering consultant is responsible to incorporate T.S. Sustainable Design
Criteria in addition to his/her own sustainable initiatives and coordinate with various
consultants including the Sustainability consultant and Testing and Commissioning
consultant.
● Technical Services recommends that the supply and installation of
all building systems, components and materials is carried out only by parties having a
minimum of five (5) years documented experience in the manufacturing or installation
of work similar to that required.

Equipment and Vendor Selection Considerations

● All products shall be top of the line quality.
● The systems shall be in current production and shall be guaranteed to remain in
production for a minimum period of three (3) years from the date of installation.
● Vendors shall record date of installation and shall remain responsible to inform THE
OPERATORof any plans to discontinue production of the system or critical parts
at least three (3) years in advance of discontinuation.
● Vendors shall be able to provide parts and full service support for ten (10) years from
the date of last production of the system.

1
GENERAL ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDELINES

Documentation and Drawings

● It is the responsibility of each consultant to submit to T.S. all documentation for
review and qualified approval with the exception of structural and civil engineering
documentation, throughout the duration of the project. Documents submitted to
T.S. for review shall be in English language or dual language including English.
● All drawings submitted to THE OPERATOR will be accompanied by a transmittal
letter and will be clearly identified with reference information including the following:
- Name of project
- Name and address of consultant (s)
- Date of original drawings
- Scale
- Drawn by whom
- Checked/approved by whom
- Content
- Drawing number, indicating drawing type, i.e. architectural, electrical and revision
reference number where applicable.
- Revision number with date and description of revision in block or table form, in
order to make visible any revisions to previously submitted drawings or
documents.
- The reason for submission and stipulate what information is to be reviewed and/or
approved.
- Issue record of drawing to any party including date and name of party issued to.
● All equipment and material specifications shall be submitted to T.S.
● Throughout the duration of the project, each consultant shall submit to T.S.
updated drawing registers for all drawings prepared by them for the project.

THE OPERATOR Technical Services Drawings

● Drawings prepared and issued by T.S. are not produced for construction purposes,
they are intended and are to be used only to inform those concerned as to technical
and operational requirements. No other use may be made of such drawings without
prior written consent of THE OPERATOR Technical Services.

Material / Substance Restrictions

● Any restricted material as outlined by the EPA or local environmental codes is not to
be used in the construction or systems of the hotel.
● Chemicals (i.e. refrigerants) that contribute to the ozone layer depletion and have a
relatively higher global warming potential shall not be used in the construction or
systems of the hotel.

2
GENERAL ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDELINES

General Codes and Standards

Recommended Codes

City or Country Building Codes BC

City or Country Mechanical Codes MC
City or Country Electrical Codes EC
City or Country Plumbing Codes PC
City or Country Fire Codes FC
International Building Code IBC

Recommended Standards

American Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines for Building and Facilities ADAAG
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ARI
Air-Moving and Conditioning Association AMCA
Americans with Disabilities Act ADA
American National Standards Institute ANSI
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASHRAE
American Society of Mechanical Engineering ASME
American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM
American Water Work Association AWWA
American Wire Gauge AWG
Electrical Industry Association EIA
Electrical Testing Laboratories ETL
Factory Mutual FM
Illuminating Engineering Society IES
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IEEE
International Standards Organization ISO
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association IPCEA
National Electric Code NEC
National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA
National Fire Protection Association NFPA
National Standards Body NSB
US Environmental Protection Agency EPA
Telecommunications Industry Association TIA
Introduction
The following document outlines the minimum scope of work that the related key
Consultant, each of whose appointment shall require prior approval from T.S., shall
perform in accordance with the letter of appointment issued by the Owner/Developer.

Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing (MEP) Consultant

Phase One - Conceptual Design
 Becomefamiliar with THE OPERATOR’s MEP requirements as described in T.S.’s
Engineering Recommendations and Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
 Become familiar with THEOPERATOR’s Sustainable Design Criteria, and use as a reference in
development of the MEP designs for the project.
 Obtain a detailed design brief from the Architect / Interior Designer/ T.S. and other
members of the design team.
 Establish the quality and cost expectations of the project.
 Prepare a comparison table between local MEP building codes and T.S.’s ER&MS.
The more stringent of each comparable regulation / requirement shall govern the
design of the project.
 Document all MEP requirements, in narrative (written) and schematic (drawing) form.
 Establish general considerations as dictated by / related to: statutory regulations, local
codes and standards, ER&MS requirements and utilities (e.g. gas, electricity, water)
available at the site and develop a Design Concept report.
 Consult and coordinate with Sustainability Consultant, and as feasible and practical,
make a preliminary determination of sustainable MEP concepts / designs / products to
be incorporated into drawings and related documents.
 Prepare documentation / calculation of the related installed and operating costs of
proposed MEP concepts, and the potential for energy savings. Outline the overall
energy approach related to each proposed concept (i.e., energy in vs. energy out,
availability / use of renewal energy, cradle-to-cradle recyclability, etc.).
 Obtain a test report from a certified laboratory retained by the Owner / Developer of
the water provided to the site, and determine the type and method(s) of water
treatment necessary for all water uses at the project.
 Prepare a preliminary cost estimate of all proposed MEP systems.
 Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner/ Developer and
T.S. as required / requested.

4
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

 Present Conceptual Design concept to Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S. for
review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Schematic Design
phase.

Phase Two - Schematic Design

• “Basis of Design” report for complete MEP design of the project
• Establish space-planning / programming requirements associated with the proposed
MEP systems, including locations and approximate sizes of all plant rooms, major
equipment of each plant, major ducts, pipes and conduits and major equipments’
service clearances and access routes.
• Perform functional, system performance and life-cycle analysis calculations.
• Complete energy modeling and simulation programs. Compare results with historical
utility and performance data from T.S.-identified benchmark hotel(s) to verify the
most efficient and effective systems have been selected.
• Review initially considered sustainability features of design with Sustainability
Consultant to determine if they are still applicable; modify approach as required.
Identify any necessary modifications to MEP systems as a result of energy modeling,
simulation and review of initially considered sustainability features, and revise
accordingly.
• Provide types and quality concepts for materials, equipment, and systems.
• Develop a refined cost estimate of all MEP systems, and an estimated design
schedule timeline.
• Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and
T.S. as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S.
for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Design
Development phase.

Phase Three - Design Development

• Review approved Schematic Design concept, energy modeling and simulation data
and calculations for any additionally required changes.
• Develop more detailed plans that additionally incorporate any changes from the
Schematic Design phase that result from review of the Architect’s in-progress Design
Development drawings.
• If any Design Development MEP concepts deviate from approved Schematic Design,
a comparison table with reasons for change shall be submitted to T.S. for review
and approval.
• Prepare specifications describing all systems to be provided.
• Provide final determination of all vertical / horizontal shaft openings required for MEP
equipment in coordination with the relevant Consultants (Architect, Structural
Consultant, Interior Designer, Lighting Consultant, etc.). Identify potential conflicts.
• MEP Consultant shall finalize all equipment spaces, clearance requirements, load
calculations (HVAC, electrical, power/lighting, cold/hot water capacities, etc.).
• Coordinate with Acoustic Consultant on noise and vibration requirements.
• Provide all equipment schedules, calculations and other information as required to
Architect, Owner / Developer, Testing & Commissioning Consultant and T.S.
• Prepare MEP design package for Mock-Up Room(s). Package to include complete
drawings and specifications required replicating all MEP systems that will be
incorporated into standard guestrooms.

5
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Prior to initiation of tender information / bid documents, coordination meetings shall

take place to confirm and ensure design intent is completely reflected in all
documents, and has been pre-tender approved.
• Prepare tender information comprised of fully detailed drawings, general
specifications, equipment specifications, cut-sheets, and appropriate clauses and
conditions regarding the performance, warranties, guarantees and contractual
requirements of contractors and vendors, to be incorporated into a tender package by
others.
• Prepare a list of suitable Contractors and Vendors who are technically and
commercially capable of undertaking the MEP works, and provide to the Owner /
Developer, Architect and T.S. for review and approval prior to tender issue.
• Prepare updated budget and identify long lead-time items prior to tender issue.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S.
for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Construction
Document phase.

Phase Four - Construction Documents

• Review in-progress Construction Documents of other Consultants to identify and
correct any conflicts that exist between trades, or provide allowances as required
accommodating inclusion of other works.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to both describe the MEP work for accurate tender, and
obtain all permits, certificates, approvals, etc. to proceed with construction of the
project.
• Coordinate with the Testing & Commissioning Consultant all the required
performance clauses, testing provisions, list of items to be commissioned, warranties
and guaranties that are to be prepared by others, and received and reviewed by THE
OPERATOR prior to acceptance of the MEP systems.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all required project and descriptive documents
necessary for filing and obtaining required construction-related permits (including
calculations, reproducible drawings, electronic files of reproducible drawings,
specifications, electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents).

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s).
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s).
• Aid in the preparation and review of all MEP contracts.

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Define scope of work with the Contractor, and ensure their complete understanding of
the project’s requirements.

6
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Respond to Requests for Information (RFI’s) and Requests for Clarification (RFC’s)
by Contractor.
• Coordinate drawings/specifications, attend meetings and advise on construction
installations, deficiencies, and defective operations on systems.
• Arrange / perform the review of all Contractors' / Manufacturers’ shop drawings, and
provide written comments as required.
• Review all major / custom central plant mechanical equipment at the manufacturers’
premises prior to delivery to site.
• Research, review, and check samples of specified and submitted-for-substitution
equipment and materials. Liaise with equipment Vendors as necessary.
• Perform field inspections and monitor Contractor’s progress on site; coordinate
Contractor handover of the works.
• Assist and monitor Testing & Commissioning Consultant’s work; ensure that MEP
systems are installed and perform as per designed intent.
• Provide final inspections and reports including statements or results of operating tests
as required by the specifications.
• Review all MEP systems’ operations manual prepared by the Contractor.
• Prepare final equipment schedule for the project maintenance team.

Lighting Designer
Phase One & Two - Conceptual & Schematic Design
• Become familiar with THE PERATOR’s Lighting requirements as described in T.S.’s Design
Recommendations & Minimum Standards (DR&MS) and Engineering
Recommendations & Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
• Become familiar with THE OPERATOR’s SustainableDesign Criteria,and use as a reference in
development of the lighting designs for the project.
• Obtain a detailed design brief from the Architect/Interior Designer/T.S. and other
members of the design team.
• Establish the quality and cost expectations of the project.
• Prepare a comparison table between local energy efficiency / lighting / electrical /
building codes and T.S.’s DR&MS and ER&MS. The more stringent of each
comparable regulation / requirement shall govern the lighting design of the project.
• Document all lighting requirements, in narrative and schematic form.
• Prepare a Design Concept Report; include conceptual sketches, proposed light
sources (lamp types) and fixtures, and a preliminary cost estimate.
• Consult and coordinate with Sustainability Consultant and, as feasible and practical,
incorporate sustainable lighting concepts / designs / products into drawings and
related documents.
• Prepare preliminary: connected load evaluation, circuiting, and zoning.
• Establish “Basis of Design” criteria for lighting designs of the project.
• Prepare a refined cost estimate of all lighting systems, and an estimated design
schedule timeline.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present initial design concept and schematic documentation to Architect, Interior
Designer, Owner / Developer and T.S. for review, comments, modification and
approval before proceeding to Design Development phase.

7
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

Phase Three - Design Development

• Review approved Schematic Design concept and associated connected load
evaluation, circuiting and zoning for any additionally required changes.
• Undertake a detailed design evaluation of the light fixtures, fittings, dimming and
control systems and required fabrication of custom lighting.
• Develop more detailed plans that additionally incorporate any changes from the
Schematic Design phase that result from review of the Architect’s in-progress Design
Development drawings.
• If any Design Development lighting concepts deviate from approved Schematic
Design, a comparison table with reasons for change shall be submitted to T.S. for
review and approval.
• Prepare outline specifications and drawings of the lighting design, illustrating and
describing all fixtures and controls to be provided.
• Provide lighting fixtures and controls sourcing data, as well as specific information on
all lighting fixtures, controls, etc. that are included in the design.
• Coordinate lighting design details and intent with Architect, Interior Designer, Art
Consultant, Signage Consultant, Audio / Visual Consultant and MEP Consultant.
Prepare and provide as required drawings / details to clarify integration of lighting
design with the interior design, MEP design, etc.
• Provide all lighting fixture schedules, control information, calculations and other
information as required to Architect, Interior Designer, Owner / Developer, Testing &
Commissioning Consultant and T.S.
• Prepare lighting design package for Mock-Up Room(s) and suites. Package to
include complete drawings and specifications required replicating the light fixtures and
their locations, controls and their locations, zoning, and wiring that will be
incorporated into standard guestrooms.
• Prior to initiation of tender information / bid documents, coordination meetings shall
take place to confirm and ensure design intent is completed reflected in all
documents, and has been pre-tender approved.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to describe the lighting design work for accurate tender.
• Prepare tender information comprised of drawings, general specifications, equipment
specifications, cut-sheets, and appropriate clauses and conditions regarding the
performance, warranties, guarantees and contractual requirements of contractors and
vendors, to be incorporated into a tender package by others.
• Prepare a list of suitable Contractors and Vendors who are technically and
commercially capable of undertaking the lighting design works, and provide to the
Owner / Developer, Architect and T.S. for review and approval prior to tender
issue.
• Prepare updated budget and identify long lead-time items prior to tender issue.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S.
for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Construction
Document phase.

8
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

Phase Four - Construction Documents

• Review in-progress Construction Documents of other Consultants to identify and
correct any conflicts that exist between trades, or provide allowances as required
accommodating inclusion of other works.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to both describe the lighting design work for accurate
tender, and obtain all permits, certificates, approvals, etc. to proceed with construction
of the project.
• Coordinate with the Testing & Commissioning Consultant all required performance
clauses, testing provisions, list of items to be commissioned, warranties and
guaranties that need to be prepared by others and received by THE
OPERATOR prior to acceptance of the lighting systems.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all required project and descriptive documents
necessary for filing and obtaining required construction-related permits (including
calculations, reproducible drawings, electronic files of reproducible drawings,
specifications, electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents).

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s).
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s).
• Aid in the preparation and review of all lighting design contracts.
• Evaluate the tenders and assist with the tender interviews and appointment of the
Contractor.

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Define scope of work with the Contractor and ensure their complete understanding of
the project’s requirements.
•  Respond to Requests for Information (RFI’s) and Requests for Clarification (RFC’s)
by Contractor.
•  Coordinate drawings / specifications, attend meetings or advise on construction
installations, deficiencies, and defective operations of systems.
• Arrange / perform the review of all Contractors' / manufacturers’ shop drawings, and
provide written comments as required.
• Review all custom made lighting fixtures at the Contractor’s premises prior to delivery
to site.
• Research, review, and check samples of specified and submitted-for-substitution
equipment and materials. Liaise with equipment Vendors as necessary.
• Perform field inspections and monitor Contractor’s progress on site; coordinate
Contractor handover of the works.
• Assist in and monitor Testing & Commissioning Consultant’s work; ensure that
lighting systems are installed and perform as per design intent.
• Perform lighting system programming, lighting fixture focusing, and optimization of
lighting system with interior design, art and signage programs.
• Provide final inspections and reports, including statements or results of operating
tests as required by the specifications.

9
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Review all lighting systems’ operations manuals prepared by the Contractor.

• Attend inspections and handover as requested / required during pre-opening.

Audio Visual Consultant

Phase One & Two - Conceptual & Schematic Design

• Become familiar with THE OPERATOR’s Audio / Visual requirements as described in T.S.
Engineering Recommendations and Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
• Become familiarwith THE OPERATOR’s Sustainable Design Criteria, and use as a reference in
development of the audio and visual designs for the project.
• Obtain a detailed design brief from the Architect / Interior Designer / T.S. and
other members of the design team.
• Establish the quality and cost expectations of the project.
• Document all audio / visual requirements, in narrative and schematic form.
• Prepare a conceptual audio / visual study with types of equipment required,
connected load evaluation, acoustic zoning, and potential application of new
technologies.
• Establish “Basis of Design” criteria for all audio / visual designs of the project.
• Prepare a preliminary cost estimate of all audio / visual systems, and an estimated
design schedule timeline.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present initial design concept and schematic documentation to Architect, Interior
Designer, Owner / Developer and T.S. for review, comments, modification and
approval before proceeding to Design Development phase.

Phase Three - Design Development

• Review approved Schematic Design concept, connected load evaluation and acoustic
zoning for any additionally required changes.
• Undertake a detailed design evaluation of audio/ visual equipment, controls,
integration with lighting systems, acoustics, zoning and required fabrication of any
custom equipment.
• Develop more detailed plans that additionally incorporate any changes from the
Schematic Design phase that result from review of the Architect’s in-progress Design
Development drawings.
• If any Design Development audio / visual concepts deviate from approved Schematic
Design, a comparison table with reasons for change shall be submitted to T.S. for
review and approval.
• Prepare outline specifications and drawings of the audio / visual design, illustrating
and describing all equipment and controls to be provided.
• Provide audio / visual equipment and controls sourcing data, as well as specific
information on all audio / visual equipment, controls, etc. that are included in the
design.
• Coordinate audio / visual design details and intent with Architect, Interior Designer,
Lighting Consultant, Art Consultant, Signage Consultant, Life Safety Consultant,
Communication Technology Consultant and MEP Consultant. Prepare and provide
as required drawings / details to clarify integration of audio / visual design with the
interior design, lighting design, IT design, MEP design, etc.

10
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Provide all audio / visual equipment lists, control information, and other information as
required to Architect, Interior Designer, Owner / Developer, and T.S.
• Prepare audio / visual design package for Mock-Up Room(s) and suites. Package to
include complete drawings and specifications required replicating the audio / visual
equipment, controls and wiring that will be incorporated into standard guestrooms.
• Prior to initiation of tender information / bid documents, coordination meetings shall
take place to confirm and ensure design intent is completed reflected in all
documents, and has been pre-tender approved.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to describe the audio / visual work for accurate tender.
• Prepare tender information comprised of drawings, general specifications, equipment
specifications, cut-sheets, and appropriate clauses and conditions regarding the
performance, warranties, guarantees and contractual requirements of contractors and
vendors, to be incorporated into a tender package by others.
• Prepare a list of suitable Contractors and Vendors who are technically and
commercially capable of undertaking the lighting design works, and provide to the
Owner / Developer, Architect and T.S. for review and approval prior to tender
issue.
• Prepare updated budget and identify long lead-time items prior to tender issue.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S.
for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Construction
Document phase.

Phase Four – Construction Documents

• Review in-progress Construction Documents of other Consultants to identify and
correct any conflicts that exist between trades, or provide allowances required
accommodating inclusion of other works.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to both describe the audio / visual work for accurate tender,
and obtain all permits, certificates, approvals, etc. to proceed with construction of the
project.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all required project and descriptive documents
necessary for filing and obtaining required construction-related permits (including
calculations, reproducible drawings, electronic files of reproducible drawings,
specifications, electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents).

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s).
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s).
• Aid in the preparation and review of all audio / visual contracts.

11
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Define scope of work with the Contractor, and ensure their complete understanding of
the project’s requirements.
• Respond to Requests for Information (RFI’s) and Requests for Clarification (RFC’s)
by Contractor.
• Coordinate drawings / specifications, attend meetings or advise on construction
installations, deficiencies, and defective operations of systems.
• Arrange / perform the review of all Contractors' / manufacturers’ shop drawings, and
provide written comments as required.
• Research, review, and check samples of specified and submitted-for-substitution
equipment and material. Liaise with custom equipment Manufacturers as necessary.
• Perform field inspections and monitor Contractor’s progress on site; coordinate
Contractor handover of the works.
• Assist in calibration, programming, balancing and general optimization of audio /
visual system.
• Provide final inspections and reports, including statements or results of operating
tests as required by the specifications.
• Review all audio / visual systems operations manuals prepared by the Contractor.
• Attend inspections and handover as requested / required during pre-opening.

Security Consultant
Phase One - Conceptual Design
• Become familiar with THE OPERATOR’s Security requirements as described in T.S.’s
Engineering Recommendations & Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
• Obtain a detailed design brief from the Architect / Interior Designer / THE
OPERATOR’s Corporate Security Department / T.S. and other members of the design team.
• Establish the quality and cost expectations of the project.
• Provide analysis of the local, regional and international security situation.
• Provide analysis of site for threats, vulnerability and hazards. Specialist
subcontractors for blast mitigation, super tall building, emergency planning, etc., are
to be retained as needed.
• Prepare a preliminary cause-and-effect consequence matrix of threats and hazards
specific to the project.
• Prepare conceptual design to reflect the Consultant’s familiarity with local codes, the
requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction over the project, local customs
and best practices, and the subsequent impact on the project’s architectural design
and operation.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer, THE
OPERATOR Corporate Security Department and T.S. as required / requested.
• Prepare and present to Architect, Owner/Developer, THE
OPERATOR’s Corporate Security Department and T.S. the conceptual security
design and all supporting documentation for review, comments, modification and approval
before proceeding to Schematic Design phase.
Include in the report the assessment of the overall risk level at the project.

12
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

Phase Two - Schematic

• Establish “Basis of Design” criteria for complete Physical and Technical security
requirements of the project.
• Review in-progress Schematic Design architectural documents and other available
information including: site layout, surrounding area characteristics, building model(s),
renderings, and space-planning / programming requirements.
• Preparation of physical security schematic plan to include:
- Site location, with important information / characteristics of surrounding area
identified
- Site layout and perimeter features
- Pedestrian and vehicular approaches
- All points of authorized entry and exit
- All points of vulnerable forced entry and exit
- Internal space planning relationships
- Internal circulation of people and materials
• Preparation of Technical Security schematic plan to include:
- External and internal detection, assessment and notification systems.
- Coordinate schematic security requirements with all relevant Consultants.
• The Physical and Technical security plans shall, together with any additional specific
requirements, be combined into an integrated and fully comprehensive property and
operational security master plan.
• Prepare a preliminary cost estimate of all Physical and Technical security systems,
and an estimated design schedule timeline.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer, THE
OPERATOR Global Security Department and T.S. as required / requested.
• Present initial design concept and schematic documentation to Architect, Owner /
Developer, THE OPERATOR’s Corporate Security Department and T.S. for review, comments,
modification and approval before proceeding to Design Development phase.

Phase Three – Design Development

• Review approved Schematic Design concept of Physical and Technical security
systems to establish final requirements in accordance with agreed-upon risk profile,
and make any required changes.
• If any Design Development Security concepts deviate from approved Schematic
Design, a comparison table with reasons for change shall be submitted to T.S. for
review and approval.
• Develop more detailed plans that additionally incorporate any changes from the
Schematic Design phase that resulted from review of the Architect’s in-progress
Design Development drawings.
• Review and coordinate with relevant Consultants to ensure integration of security
requirements into: site plan, landscaping plan, architectural design, structural design,
MEP design and communication / technology systems.
• Interaction, as required, to obtain all permits and approvals issued by authorities
having jurisdiction over the project to security requirements.
• Provide detailed specifications for systems, materials, equipment and services.
Specifications must be generic, performance-based, and suitable for competitive
bidding.
EXCEPTIONS: Some Technical security items (e.g. x-ray machines, metal
detectors) may be explicitly specified by THE OPERATOR / T.S. with no substitutions

13
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

permitted. Exact items will be determined and communicated to Security Consultant

prior to issue of tender documents.
• Advise Owner / Developer and T.S. of any changes / modifications requested by
any Consultant that result in non-compliance with THE OPERATOR Global Security Department
requirements.
• Provide list of Technical security equipment, and other information as required to
Architect, Owner / Developer, and T.S.
• Prior to initiation of tender information / bid documents, coordination meetings shall
take place to confirm and ensure design intent is completed reflected in all
documents, and has been pre-tender approved.
• Prepare tender information comprised of drawings, general specifications, equipment
specifications, cut-sheets, and appropriate clauses and conditions regarding the
performance, warranties, guarantees and contractual requirements of contractors and
vendors, to be incorporated into a tender package by others.
• Prepare a list of suitable Contractors and Vendors who are technically and
commercially capable of undertaking the security systems works, and provide to the
Owner / Developer, Architect, THE OPERATOR Global Security Department and T.S. for
review and approval prior to tender issue.
• Prepare Property and Operational Security Master Plans.
• Provide updated budget and identify long lead-time items prior to tender issue.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer, THE
OPERATOR and T.S. for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to
Construction Document phase.

Phase Four - Construction Documents

• Review in-progress Construction Documents of other Consultants to identify and
correct any conflicts that exist between trades, or provide allowances required
accommodating inclusion of other works.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to both describe the security systems work for accurate
tender, and obtain all permits, certificates, approvals, etc. to proceed with construction
of the project.
• Review and approve all security system components being provided as part of the
landscaping, architectural, MEP and other Consultants' scope of work.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested. Prepare the tender information comprising of equipment
specifications, cut-sheets, drawings, and appropriate clauses and conditions
regarding the performance and contractual restraints on the Contractor, to be
incorporated into a bid package by others.
• Prepare a list of suitable Contractors and Vendors who are technically and
commercially capable of undertaking the security systems works, and provide to the
Owner / Developer, Architect and T.S. for review and approval prior to tender
issue.
• Review the final contract documents to verify proper integration of security system
components into architectural, structural, interior design, MEP, Fire Protection, and
any other Consultants’ works as required.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all required project and descriptive documents
necessary for filing and obtaining required construction-related permits (including

14
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

calculations, reproducible drawings, electronic files of reproducible drawings,

specifications, electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents).

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s).
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s).
• Aid in the preparation and review of all security system contracts.

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Define scope of work with the Contractor, and ensure their complete understanding of
the project’s requirements.
• Respond to Requests for Information (RFI’s) and Requests for Clarification (RFC’s)
by Contractor.
• Coordinate drawings / specifications, attend meetings or advise on construction
installations, deficiencies, and defective operations of systems.
• Arrange / perform the review of all Contractors' / manufacturers’ shop drawings, and
provide written comments as required.
• Research, review, and check samples of specified and submitted-for-substitution
equipment and materials. Liaise with equipment Vendors as necessary.
• Perform field inspections and monitor Contractor’s progress on site; coordinate
Contractor handover of the works.
• Assist in calibration, programming, and optimization of security system’s Technical
and Physical components.
• Provide assistance in determination of manpower requirements to support the
security master plan and all specific training that will be required.
• Provide final inspections and reports, including statements or results of operating
tests as required by the specifications.
• Review all security systems operations manuals prepared by the Contractor.
• Work with the Owner / Developer and project team to obtain all necessary licenses,
certificates and local authority approvals for project opening.
• Attend inspections and handover as requested / required during pre-opening.

Communications Technology Consultant

Phase One & Two – Conceptual Design & Schematic Design

• Become familiar with THE OPERATOR’s Communications Systems requirements as described in
T.S.’s Engineering Recommendations & Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
• Become familiar with the local environment conditions, codes, and infrastructure
communication services available.
• Obtain a detailed design brief from the Architect / Interior / T.S. and other
Members of the design team
• Establish the quality and cost expectations of the project.
• Document all communication requirements, in narrative and schematic form.
• Prepare a conceptual report and preliminary schematic design for all active and
passive communication components as it relates to cabling, voice systems, and data

15
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

networks. Establish the convergence / integration between these systems and other
systems, as determined by the availability / support of local communication services.
• Establish “Basis of Design” criteria for all communication designs of the project.
• Prepare a preliminary cost estimate of all communication systems, and an estimated
design schedule timeline.
• Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and
T.S. for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Design
Development phase.
• Present initial design concept and schematic documentation to Architect, Owner /
Developer and T.S. for review, comments, modification and approval before
proceeding to Design Development.

Phase Three - Design Development

• Obtain Front of House (FHO), Back Of House (BOH), and Public Area drawings from
the Architect, Interior Designer and T.S., along with design drawings from any
specialty design Consultant that may be employed for the projects such as Kitchen
Consultants, Spa Consultants, Restaurant Consultants, etc.
• Meet and coordinate with other Consultants / Vendors requiring integration onto the
network for identifying locations for all data and voice points.
• Prepare detailed design drawings and integration specifications and submit to Owner
/ Developer and T.S. for review and comment. These should include at minimum,
but are not limited to:
- Marked up drawing’s indicating all data, voice and electrical (as related to data
and voice outlet) requirements for all FOH, BOH and Public Area locations.
- Marked up drawings indicating all data, voice and electrical (as related to data and
voice outlet) requirements for guestrooms and suites.
- Detailed horizontal and vertical riser diagrams.
- Detailed specifications on all active and passive equipment as it relates to cabling,
data, and voice systems.
• Prepare detailed design specifications for all active and passive equipment
associated with the cabling, voice and data networks. These should include at
minimum but not limited to:
- Active Ethernet switches and related peripheral equipment such as tools, routers,
gateways, firewalls, etc.
- PABX system and all related peripheral equipment such as handsets, modems,
conference phones, and hospitality applications such as voice mail, wake up,
room / mini bar status, call accounting etc.
- Cabling systems and sub-systems such as fiber and copper riser, copper
horizontal, fiber and copper termination points, punch blocks, patch panels, cable
management systems, cable labeling systems, etc.
- UPS requirements, specifications and vendors.
• Attend coordination meetings with all relevant design Consultants such as MEP
Consultants, Electrical Consultants, Interior Designers, etc to ensure design does not
impact other designs as well that other designs does not impact Communication
design.
• Prepare communication technology design package for Mock-Up Room(s). Package
to include complete drawings and specifications required replicating technology
incorporated into standard guestrooms.
• Make final amendments to the design based on Owner / Developer and T.S.
comments.

16
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer, THE

OPERATOR and T.S. for final review, comments,modification and approval before proceeding to
Construction Document phase.

Phase Four - Construction Documents

• Review in-progress Construction Documents of other Consultants to identify and
correct any conflicts that exist between trades, or provide allowance required
accommodating inclusion of other works.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to both describe the communications technology systems
work for accurate tender, and obtain all permits, certificates, approvals, etc. to
proceed with construction of the project.
• Prepare bidding information comprising equipment, cables and installation
specifications including cut sheets, drawings, appropriate clauses and conditions
regarding performance and contractual restraints on the contractor.
• Prepare a list of suitable contractors and suppliers who are technically and
commercially capable of undertaking the works.
• Review final contract documents, and product certificates (i.e., cables, connectors
terminal equipment, etc.) prepared by contractor.
• Prepare all required performance clauses, testing provisions, list of items to be
commissioned, and warranties & guaranties that are to be prepared by others and
received and reviewed by THE OPERATOR prior to acceptance of communication technology
systems.
• Prepare tender information comprising drawings, general specifications, equipment
specifications, cut-sheets, and appropriate clauses and conditions regarding the
performance, warranties, guarantees and contractual requirements of contractors and
vendors, to be incorporated into a tender package by others.
• Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and
T.S. as required / requested.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all required project and descriptive documents
necessary for filing and obtaining required permits (including calculations,
reproducible drawings, electronic files of reproducible drawings, specifications,
electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents).

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s)
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s)
• Aid in the preparation and review of all communication technology contracts.

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Define scope of work with the Contractor, and ensure their complete understanding of
the project’s requirements.
• Respond to Requests for Information (RFI’s) and Requests for Clarification (RFC’s)
by Contractor.
• Coordinate drawings / specifications, attend meetings or advise on construction
installations, deficiencies, and defective operations of systems

17
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Arrange / perform the review of all Contractors’ / manufacturers’ shop drawings, and
provide written comments as required.
• Research, review, and check samples of specified and submitted-for-substitution
equipment and materials. Liaise with equipment Vendors as necessary.
• Perform field inspections and monitor Contractor’s progress on site; coordinate
Contractor handover of the works.
• Assist in and monitor testing and commissioning work; ensure that communication
technology systems are installed and perform as per design intent.
• Work with the Owner / Developer and project team to obtain all necessary licenses,
certificates and local authority approvals for project opening.

Phase Seven - Testing & Commissioning / Training / Handover

• Coordinate with contractor for final testing and commissioning and training.
• Review all communication technology system operations manuals prepared by the
Contractor.
• Review the final equipment schedule for the project’s maintenance team.
• Perform field inspections and coordinate Contractor handover.
• Provide final inspections and reports, including statements or results of operating
tests as required by the specifications.

Acoustic Consultant

Phase One & Two - Conceptual Design & Schematic Design

• Become familiarized with THE OPERATOR’s Acoustic requirements as described in T.S.’s
Design Recommendations & Minimum Standards (DR&MS) and Engineering
Recommendations & Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
• Obtain design brief from the Architect, Interior Designer and MEP Consultant.
• Identify and analyze source and related intensity of sounds generated in the area
surrounding the site to establishing acoustic design parameters for the project’s
envelope.
• Identify and analyze source and related intensity of sounds generated within the
building to establishing acoustic design parameters for the project’s structural system,
interior surfaces, transmission through interior surfaces, and MEP equipment.
• Establish “Basis of Design” criteria for all acoustical designs of the project.
• Consult and coordinate with Audio / Visual Consultant to insure proposed acoustic
solutions are consistent with requirements of both Consultants.
• Prepare a conceptual report that addresses acoustic noise and vibration control
criteria for internal and external areas in accordance with T.S.’s DR&MS and
ER&MS. Include recommended methods, materials and installation techniques to be
applied to: project envelop / curtain wall systems, structural system, interior surfaces,
transmission through interior surfaces, and MEP equipment.
• Prepare a preliminary cost estimate of all acoustical systems, and an estimated
design schedule timeline.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present initial design concept and schematic documentation to Architect, Owner /
Developer and T.S. for review, comments, modification and approval before
proceeding to Design Development phase.

18
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

Phase Three - Design Development

• Consult and coordinate with the Architect and Interior Designer to provide acoustic
drawings, details and specifications for sound / noise / vibration control through
project envelop / curtain wall systems, structural system, interior surfaces and
transmission through interior surfaces.
• Consult and coordinate with the MEP Consultant to provide acoustic drawings, details
and specifications for sound / noise / vibration control methods, materials and
installation techniques (including insulation, silencers, spring isolators, inertia blocks,
enclosures, etc.) for: AHU’s, FCU’s, cooling towers, generator(s), large pumps, and
penetrations through walls, floors, etc.
• Prepare tender information comprised of drawings, general specifications, equipment
specifications, cut-sheets, and appropriate clauses and conditions regarding the
performance, warranties, guarantees and contractual requirements of contractors and
vendors, to be incorporated into a tender package by others.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S.
for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Construction
Document phase.

Phase Four - Construction Documents

• Review in-progress Construction Documents of other Consultants to identify and
correct any deficiencies in acoustic design.
• Prepare details, drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting documents as
necessary to describe the required acoustic work for accurate tender.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all required project and descriptive documents
necessary for filing and obtaining required construction-related permits (including
calculations, reproducible drawings, electronic files of reproducible drawings,
specifications, electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents).

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s).
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s).
• Aid in the preparation and review of all acoustic-related contracts.

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Define scope of work with the Contractor, and ensure their complete understanding of
the project’s requirements.
• Respond to Requests for Information (RFI’s) and Requests for Clarification (RFC’s)
by Contractor.
• Coordinate drawings / specifications, attend meetings or advise on construction
installations, deficiencies, and defective operations of systems.

19
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Arrange / perform and review of all Contractors' / manufacturers’ shop drawings, and
provide written comments as required.
• Research, review, and check samples of specified and submitted-for-substitution
equipment and materials. Liaise with equipment Vendors as necessary.
• Perform field inspections and monitor Contractor’s progress on site; coordinate
Contractor handover of the works.
• Provide standards for testing and commissioning to be followed by a qualified
acoustician.
• Assist in and monitor testing and commissioning work; ensure that acoustical systems
are installed and perform as per design intent.
• Review testing results provided by the acoustician for comment, modification and
approval.
• Provide final inspections and reports, including statements or results of operating
tests as required by the specifications.

Vertical Transportation Consultant

Phase One & Two – Conceptual Design & Schematic Design

• Become familiar with THE OPERATOR’s Lift and Escalator requirements as described in
T.S.’s Engineering Recommendations & Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
• Become familiar withTHE OPERATOR’s Sustainable Design Criteria, and use as a reference in
development of the MEP designs for the project.
• Obtain detailed design brief from the Architect / Interior Designer/ T.S. and other
members of the design team.
• Establish the quality and cost expectations of the project.
• Prepare a comparison table between local mechanical / building codes and T.S.’s
ER&MS. The more stringent of each comparable regulation / requirement shall
govern the design of the project.
• Document all vertical transportation requirements, in narrative and schematic form.
• Obtain Population and traffic patterns and arrival rate.
• Conduct Traffic Analysis and Dynamic simulation for passenger and service lifts and
escalators.
• Establish general design considerations as dictated by / related to: statutory
regulations, local codes and standards, space availability and ER&MS requirements.
• Establish “Basis of Design” criteria for all vertical transportation systems of the
project.
• Develop preliminary concepts for vertical transportation systems in accordance with
T.S.’s ER&MS.
• Identify any potential conflicts or non-compliance issues with local code or ER&MS
due to project restrictions (e.g. space constraints) that limit quantity, size, installation,
etc. of vertical transportation systems. All issues must be resolved before proceeding
to Design Development phase.
• Develop a preliminary cost estimate of all vertical transportation systems.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
for review, comment, modification and approval before proceeding to Design
Development phase.

20
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

Phase Three - Design Development

• Develop more detailed plans that additionally incorporate any changes from the
Schematic Design phase that result from review of the Architect’s in-progress Design
Development drawings.
• If any Design Development vertical transportation concepts deviate from approved
Schematic Design, a comparison table with reasons for change shall be submitted to
T.S. for review and approval.
• Maintain close collaboration with Architect, Acoustic Consultant, Structural
Consultant, and MEP Consultant during entire design process.
• Prepare vertical transportation specifications that accurately apply to the unique
requirements of the project. Include requirements for: lift cabin, hoist way pit, overrun,
machine room, etc.
• Consult with Interior Designer on interior / exterior finishes, lighting and appointments
of lift cabin, doors, control panels, indicator devices, etc.
• Consult with Acoustic Consultant on required sound attenuation required at machine
rooms, shafts, etc. to comply with T.S.’s ER&MS requirements.
• Review design drawings to ensure conformance to specifications and prevailing
codes.
• Prior to initiation of tender information / bid documents, coordination meetings shall
take place to confirm and ensure design intent is completely reflected in all
documents, and has been pre-tender approved.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to describe the vertical transportation work for accurate
tender.
• Prepare tender information comprised of fully detailed drawings, general
specifications, equipment specifications, cut-sheets, and appropriate clauses and
conditions regarding the performance, warranties, guarantees and contractual
requirements of contractors and vendors, to be incorporated into a tender package by
others.
• Prepare a list of suitable Contractors and Vendors who are technically and
commercially capable of undertaking the vertical transportation works, and provide to
the Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S. for review and approval prior to tender
issue.
• Prepare updated budget and identify long lead-time items prior to tender issue.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S.
for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Construction
Document phase.

Phase Four - Construction Documents

• Review in-progress Construction Documents of other Consultants to identify and
correct any conflicts that exist between trades, or provide allowances as required
accommodating inclusion of other works.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to both describe the vertical transportation work for accurate
tender, and obtain all permits, certificates, approvals, etc. to proceed with construction
of the project.

21
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Coordinate with the Testing & Commissioning Consultant all required performan ce
clauses, testing provisions, list of items to be commissioned, warranties and
guaranties t hat need to be prepared by others and received by THE OPERATOR prior to
acceptance of the vertical transportation systems.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and H.I.T .S.
as required / requested.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all requir ed project a nd descriptive docume nts
necessary f or filing and obtaining required construction-r elated permits (in cluding
calculations, reproducible drawings, electro nic files o f reproducible drawings,
specifications, electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents).

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s).
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s).
• Aid in the preparation and review of all vertical transportation contracts.

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Define scope of work with the Contractor, and e nsure their complete understanding of
the project’s requirements.
• Respond to Requests f or Information (RFI’s) and Requests for Clarification (RFC’s)
by Contractor.
• Coordinate drawings / specification s, attend meetings or advise on constructio n
installations, deficiencies, and defective operations of systems.
• Arrange / p erform the review of all Contractors' / manufacturers’ shop drawings, and
provide written comments as required.
• Research, review, and check sa mples of specified an d submitted-for-substitut ion
equipment and materials. Liaise with equipment Vendors as necessary.
• Perform field inspectio ns and monitor Contractor’s pro gress on site; coordin ate
Contractor handover of the works.
• Assist in and monitor testing and commissioning work; ensure that vertical
transportation systems are installed and perform as per design intent.
• Review final inspections and reports, including statements or results of operating tests
as required by the specifications.
• Work with t he Owner / Developer and project team to obta in all nece ssary licenses,
certificates and local authority approvals for project opening.

Phase Seven - Testing & Commissioning / Training / Handover

• Perform contractual compliance inspection.
• Coordinate with Contractor on site for final testing, commissioning and training.
• Review final inspections and reports, including statements or results of operating tests
as required by the specifications.
• Help negotiate disputes between Contractor and Owner / Developer.
• Review operations manuals and drawings prepared by contractor.
• Work with t he Owner / Developer and project team to obta in all nece ssary licenses,
certificates and local authority approvals for project opening.

22
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

Sustainable Design Consultant

Phase One & Two - Conceptual Design and Schematic Design

• Become familiar with THE OPERATOR’s MEP requirements as described in T.S.’s
Engineering Recommendations & Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
• Become familiar with THE OPERATOR’s architecture,interior design and operations requirements
as described in T.S Design Recommendationsand Minimum Standard (DR&MS).
• Become familiar withTHE OPERATOR’sSustainable Design Criteria, and use as a reference in
development of the project’s overall approach for integrating sustainability into all
aspects of its design, construction and operation.
• Review Owner / Developer Project Requirements (OPR) and Consultants’ Basis of
Design (BOD) reports.
• Meet with all Consultants to discuss and identify opportunities for application of
sustainable concepts to all phases of the project.
• Prepare a preliminary report on development of an overall sustainability program for
the project using: life-cycle, efficiency, water, energy, waste-stream, emissions,
carbon footprint and return-on-investment calculations in the evaluation process.
• Review preliminary report with Consultants, and develop a comprehensive
conceptual, synergistic, sustainability program with final recommendations based
upon input from all Consultants.
• Present conceptual sustainability program to Owner / Developer, THE OPERATOR and T.S.
for review, comment, modification and approval.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Upon approval of conceptual sustainability program, proceed with development of
refined, “Sustainability Basis of Design” to be integrated into the Schematic, Design
Development and Construction Document phases of all Consultants.
• Meet with all Consultants to discuss and identify opportunities for application of
sustainable concepts to all phases of the project.

Phase Three & Four – Design Development & Construction

Documents
• Coordinate development of commissioning plan with MEP consultant and Testing and
Commissioning Consultant.
• Attend coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and T.S.
as required / requested.
• Review, comment and provide sustainable ideas / solutions on MEP Conceptual
Design Brief, Architectural features, and other areas during Design Development
phase.
• Perform in-depth review of MEP design for adherence to OPR and BOD prior to mid-
point (50% CD Phase) of plan development and issue of tender package.
• Identify the sustainability initiatives to be documented by the Testing &
Commissioning Consultant.
• Prepare schedule and documentation of sustainable credits / points for specific
building rating system being followed.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all required project and descriptive documents
necessary for filing and obtaining required construction-related permits (including
calculations, reproducible drawings, electronic files of reproducible drawings,

23
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

specifications, electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents) and (if
applicable) certification, listing, label, etc. in recognition of achievements related to
sustainability of project.

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• The Sustainability Consultant also is responsible for giving assistance to the Owner/
Developer regarding the sustainable solutions during the Tender & Negotiation phase.

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Coordinate with the Contractor, Testing & Commissioning Consultant and other
members of the project to ensure that specification, receipt, installation and operation
of sustainable initiatives are properly documented, and advise of any changes,
deficiencies or substitutions during construction.
• Review testing & commissioning results to ensure that the project meets all
requirement and performance as required by the OPR, BOD and T.S.

Fire and Life Safety Consultant

Phase One & Two - Conceptual Design & Schematic Design
• Become familiar with THE OPERATOR’s fire and life safety requirements as described in
T.S.’s Engineering Recommendations & Minimum Standards (ER&MS).
• Obtain and review local and national code requirements from the local authorities
having jurisdiction.
• Obtain a detailed design brief from the Owner, Architect, Interior Designer, MEP
Consultant, Security Consultant and T.S.
• Ensure a clear understanding exists of the project, and the related fire and life safety
requirements that are necessary to be in compliance with local codes and regulations.
• Prepare a comparison table between local fire and life safety codes and T.S.’s
ER&MS. The more stringent of each comparable regulation / requirement shall
govern the design of the project.
• Document all fire and life safety requirements, in narrative and schematic form.
• Prepare a conceptual design report and schematics; describe / illustrate fire and life
safety requirements for all areas of the project.
• Provide types and quality concepts for materials, equipment, and systems.
• Develop an initial cost estimate of all fire and life safety systems, and an estimated
design schedule timeline.
• Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and
T.S. as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Owner/Developer, Architect, MEP
Consultant, Security Consultant and T.S. for review, comments, modification and
approval before proceeding to Design Development phase.

Phase Three - Design Development

• Consult and coordinate fire and life safety issues with the Architect, Kitchen
Consultant, Security Consultant and MEP Consultant to ensure compliance with
Owner / Developer, local code requirements and T.S.

24
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Conduct computerized modeling of smoke and fire propagation for all key Front-Of-
House, Back-Of-House, Public areas and Guestrooms areas of the project, and
include with submission of design documentation.
• Coordinate with other Consultants the integration of fire and life safety systems with:
lighting controls, security systems, MEP systems, elevators and audio / visual
systems.
• Prepare drawings, details, diagrams, general specifications, equipment specifications,
and a refined cost estimate.
• Prepare tender information comprising drawings, general specifications, equipment
specifications, cut-sheets, and appropriate clauses and conditions regarding the
performance, warranties, guarantees and contractual requirements of contractors and
vendors, to be incorporated into a tender package by others.
• Prepare a list of suitable Contractors and Vendors who are technically and
commercially capable of undertaking the fire and life safety systems works, and
provide to the Owner / Developer, Architect and T.S. for review and approval prior
to tender issue.
• Prepare updated budget and identify long lead-time items prior to tender issue.
• Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and
T.S. as required / requested.
• Present Design Development package to Architect, Owner / Developer and T.S.
for review, comments, modification and approval before proceeding to Construction
Document phase.

Phase Four - Construction Documents

• Review in-progress Construction Documents of other Consultants to identify and
correct any conflicts that exist between trades, or provide allowances as required
accommodating inclusion of other works.
• Prepare fully detailed drawings, specifications, calculations and supporting
documents as necessary to both describe the fire and life safety work for accurate
tender, and obtain all permits, certificates, approvals, etc. to proceed with construction
of the project.
• Coordinate with the Testing & Commissioning Team all required performance
clauses, testing provisions, list of items to be commissioned, warranties and
guaranties that are to be prepared by others, and received and reviewed by T.S.
prior to acceptance of the fire and life safety systems.
• Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and
T.S. as required / requested.
• Prepare and deliver to the Architect all required project and descriptive documents
necessary for filing and obtaining required construction-related permits (including
calculations, reproducible drawings, electronic files of reproducible drawings,
specifications, electronic files of specifications, and PDF files of all documents).

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s).
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s).
• Aid in the preparation and review of all fire and life safety contracts.

25
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

Phase Six - Construction Administration

• Define scope of work with the Contractor, and ensure their complete understanding of
the project’s requirements.
• Respond to Requests for Information (RFI’s) and Requests for Clarification (RFC’s)
by Contractor.
• Coordinate drawings / specifications, attend meetings or advise on construction
installations, deficiencies, and defective operations of systems.
• Arrange / perform the review of all Contractors' / Manufacturers’ shop drawings, and
provide written comments as required.
• Research, review, and check samples of specified and submitted-for-substitution
equipment and materials. Liaise with equipment Vendors as necessary.
• Perform field inspections and monitor Contractor’s progress on site.
• Review all fire and life safety systems operations manuals prepared by the
Contractor.

Phase Seven – Testing & Commissioning / Training / Handover

• Coordinate with Contractor handover of the works.
• Provide final inspections and reports, including statements or results of operating
tests, as required by the specifications.
• Assist in and monitor commissioning of fire and life safety systems performed by
others; ensure that systems are installed and perform as per design intent.
• Work with the Owner / Developer and project team to obtain all necessary licenses,
certificates and local authority approvals for project opening.
• Review final “as built” documentation to ensure compliance with current codes and
regulations.
• Provide training for staff to Owner / Developer’s, THE OPERATOR’s and T.S.’s satisfaction
and approval

Testing & Commissioning Consultant

Phase One & Two - Conceptual Design & Schematic Design

• Review initial Owner / Developer Project Requirement (OPR) and Consultants’ Basis
of Design (BOD) reports.
• Ensure OPR and BOD are updated as required.
• Obtain Sustainable Design Criteria from the Sustainability Consultant.
• Define MEP systems’ performance requirements.
• Define MEP systems’ functional test procedures.
• Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and
T.S. as required / requested.

Phase Three & Four - Design Development & Construction

Documents
• Attend periodic coordination meetings with other Consultants, Owner / Developer and
T.S. as required / requested.
• Coordinate sustainable/green building initiatives with the Sustainability Consultant.
• Provide review of design at 50% CD stage for adherence to OPR and BOD criteria.

26
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Verify that systems as designed are capable of being properly commissioned

• Ensure that all the components necessary for verification testing (e.g. temperature
and pressure gauges, flow meters, control system interfaces, etc.) are included in the
design
• Prepare Commissioning Plan and supporting specifications
• Verify that Commissioning requirements are included in the Construction Documents.
• Prepare draft verification test procedures and coordinate testing and commissioning
schedule with overall project schedule
• Conduct/witness and document verification tests
• Draft project Handover Certifications to ensure that job is completed in a sequential
manner stage by stage, with all site verifications performed on time, and issue a copy
to T.S.

Phase Five - Tender & Contract Negotiation

• Assist in the analysis of tenders received.
• Assist with tender-related interviews of Contractor(s).
• Submit recommendations on Contractor(s) to be selected.
• Assist with appointment of Contractor(s).
• Aid in the preparation and review of all contracts.

Phase Six – Construction Administration

• Prepare Schedule of Commissioning in coordination with the Contractors and Projec Manager
• Prepare Commissioning Logic / Sequence and Acceptance Check list.
• Review and approve commissioning plans of Contractors.
• Review shop drawings in parallel with design team to ensure compliance with
commissioning aspects of OPR and BOD.
• Prepare final verification and test procedures.
• Prepare system “readiness” checklist to be completed before verification or testing is initiated
• Review material submittals and verify compliance with OPR and BOD.

Phase Seven – Testing & Commissioning / Handover / Training

• Coordinate individual commissioning activities.
• Verify the installation, start-up and performance of systems.
• Verify test results and commissioning reports with Contractors and Vendors.
• Report results, findings and create a follow-up plan for deficiencies, corrective action
and re-testing.
• Oversee and document training of project staff on: design intent, theory of system
operation, system functional operation and intersystem functional operation.
• Verify and check extended maintenance agreements on equipment and systems.
• Prepare Systems Manuals in an organized manner, which include: design intent,
balancing reports, system schematics, control strategies, and as-built drawings.
• Verify that sustainability objectives contained in the OPR and Consultants’ BOD have
been achieved.
• Supervise overall activities of the equipment commissioning process.
• Verification of all performance parameters of the plant as a system.

27
SCOPE OF WORK OF MEP CONSULTANTS

• Report results and finding to Owner and T.S.

• Issue a report with findings, and an action plan for any necessary corrective actions to
Contractor, Owner / Developer, THE OPERATOR and T.S.

Phase Eight - Warranty Phase

• Collect and assemble all warranty documents into an organized filing system.
• Document expiration dates of equipment and system warranties.
• Prepare a formal reporting procedure for recording and responding and correcting
deficiencies and problems.
• Review building operations and performance of systems within 10 months after the
substantial completion.
• Issue a report with finding and an action plan for any necessary corrective actions to
Contractor, Owner / Developer, THE OPERATOR and T.S.

28
 Introduction
● This survey will be conducted during the Preliminary Concept phase of the project
and must be concluded prior to commencing the Schematic Design Phase. The
resulting information will be used in conjunction with THE OPERATOR’s ER&MS to establish the
MEP, Sustainability, Architectural, Interior Design and Operational requirements for
the design and construction of the referenced project. This information must be
completed in conjunction with any Food and Beverage, Human Resources, Project
Descriptive, and Marketing surveys.
● The minimum administrative, technical and urban information required could be
further categorised as:
- Project Information
- Site Survey
- Site Restrictions
- Construction Data
- Existing Hotel Survey
- Climatological Data
- Sewage Disposal Service
- District Steam & Hot Water
- Electrical Service
- Gas Service
- Potable Water Service
- Telephone Service
- Television Broadcast Service
- Radio Broadcast Service
- Fire Service
- Sustainable/ Green Building Programs
- Street Cleaning Services
- Police Service
- Hospital Service

See Attachment: Site Characteristics Survey

29
 Attachment
Site Characteristics Survey
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Project Information
Project: __________________________________________________________
Address: _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
City/Area: _____________________________________________________
Country: _____________________________________________________

Project Site Office

Tel: _____________________________________________________
Fax: _____________________________________________________
Email: _____________________________________________________

Developer/Owner
Name: _____________________________________________________
Address: _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
Tel: _____________________________________________________
Fax: _____________________________________________________
Email: _____________________________________________________

Survey prepared by: _____________________________________________________

Company: _____________________________________________________
Address: _____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
Tel: _____________________________________________________
Fax: _____________________________________________________
Date: _____________________________________________________
Signature _____________________________________________________

29.1
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Owner/ Developer Primary Project Contacts: Titles:

____________________________________ __________________________________
____________________________________ __________________________________
____________________________________ __________________________________

Consultants Appointed To be Appointed

(Check ) (Check )
Project Management □ □
Quantity Surveyor □ □
Architect □ □
Resort Master Planning Consultant □ □
Landscape Designer □ □
Interior Designer □ □
MEP Consultant □ □
Vertical Transportation Consultant □ □
Structural / Civil Engineering Consultant □ □
Fire and Life Safety Consultant □ □
Kitchen Consultant □ □
Laundry Consultant □ □
Acoustic Consultant □ □
Sustainability / Environmental Consultant □ □
Lighting Consultant □ □
Communications Technology Consultant □ □
Audio Visual Consultant □ □
Security Consultant □ □
Testing and Commissioning Consultant □ □
Signage / Graphic Designer □ □
FF&E Purchasing Agent □ □
Curtain Wall / Façade Consultant □ □
Artwork Consultant □ □
Traffic Consultant □ □
Soil Consultant □ □
Main Contractor □ □
Other (specify) : _______________________________________________________________
Attach name of contact persons and addresses of appointed consultants.

29.2
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Site Survey
 Site Location (Check as appropriate)

City center Yes □ No □

Beach Resort Yes □ No □

Non-beach resort Yes □ No □

Airport Yes □ No □

City Outskirts Yes □ No □

Other (specify): _____________________________________________________________

 Documentation obtained and attached (Check  as appropriate)
City Map □ Site photographs □
□
Site Plan (including topography) □ Aerial photographs □
 City Map. Indicate the following on the city map (Check  as appropriate)

Financial district □ □
Industrial/ factory district
Government offices district □ Principal existing hotels □
Restaurant/entertainment/ shopping districts □ Proposed hotels if known
Luxury residential district(s) □ Airport(s) □
Other (specify): _________________________________________________________________
 Site plan. Mark the following on the location plan (Check as appropriate)

Traffic Lights
Pedestrian crossings □
Major buildings adjacent □
Future building/ structures adjacent to the site □
Parking lots/ garages □
Any facilities handling hazardous substances (environmental considerations)
 Accessibility to location

a. By air from airports serving location □

b. By road from highways serving location □
c. From ports serving location □
d. By passenger railways serving location □
e. By other (specify) from: _______________________________________________________
 Accessibility to site

a. By road (names) _________________________________________________________

b. By water _________________________________________________________
c. By other (specify) __________________________________________________________

29.3
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Site Survey (continued)

 Site Area
Square meters _____ sq m or Hectares _____ ha
 Site Dimensions
North boundary _____ meters East boundary _____ meters
South boundary _____ meters West boundary _____ meters
 Direction of View(s) Prominent Feature in View Distance from hotel
North ________________________ ________________________
South ________________________ ________________________
East ________________________ ________________________
West ________________________ ________________________
 Proposed location of hotel lobby entrance
Boundary (N, S, E, W) _________________________________________________________
Street _________________________________________________________
 Location of other entrances Boundary Street
Personnel (N, S, E, W) ________________________ _________________________
Deliveries (N, S, E, W) ________________________ _________________________
Trash Removal (N, S, E, W) ________________________ _________________________
 Site features (Check as appropriate)
Beach? Yes No
River? Yes No
Laker? Yes No
Oceanr? Yes No

Other natural features (specify) ____________________________________________

Surrounding natural features not on site ____________________________________________
Depth of water table below ground _____ meters
Is there bedrock or any other underlying feature, which would make excavation
difficult

FOR BEACH RESORTS ONLY

 Are permanent structures allowed on the beach? Yes No

 Is there a minimum setback from the water? Yes No

If yes, indicate distance: ____ meters

 Describe beach, e.g. wide, narrow, color of sand, rocky, sea weed, lagoon
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________

29.4
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Site Survey (continued)

 Is beach public? Yes No
_________________________________________________
If yes, any potential issues?
 Water suited for: (Check as appropriate)
Swimming Yes No
Diving Yes No
Sailing Yes No
Surfing Yes No
Other.........................................................

 Average water temperature

Summer _____ ºC Winter _____ ºC
 Tide differential (Low to High) _____ meters

Site Restrictions
 Plot Ratio _____________
 Total Gross Floor Area permitted _____ sq m
 Maximum site coverage permitted _____ sq m or _____ percentage
 Maximum site disturbance permitted _____ sq m or _____ percentage
 Maximum building height _____ meters
 Maximum number of basement levels _____
 Boundary setbacks
a. boundary setback _____ meters
b. boundary setback _____ meters
c. boundary setback _____ meters
d. boundary setback _____ meters
e. high water mark setback _____ meters
 Do additional code restrictions apply to the site? Yes No
If yes, describe: _________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Indicated on site plan Yes □ No □
 Environmental Considerations (Attach report if survey has been completed)
a. Has a soil contamination survey been carried out? Yes No
b. Has an underground water, chemical and contamination analysis Yes No
been carried out?
c. Has a hazardous gas analysis been carried out, e.g. radon? Yes No
d. Has a chemical analysis of the air been carried out for hazardous Yes No
substances?

29.5
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Site Restrictions (continued)

e. Were any hazardous substances found to be present in analysis a,
b, c or d above? If yes, give details and submit full report. Yes No
□
f. State proximity of any of the following facilities that handle hazardous substances. Example of □
such handling facilities include landfills, dumps, depositories, incinerators, processing plants,
manufacturing, power production, waste, etc.
Chemical _____ km Biological _____ km
Rubbish/Garbage _____ km Nuclear _____ km
Other (specify) ___________________________ _____ km

 Archaeological considerations YesNo

Archaeological survey required? Yes No

If yes, approximate time required to complete Days _____ Months _____

 Parking requirements
Number of spaces required to complete _____ Cars _____ Buses ____ Bicycles
Formula (i.e. number of car spaces per room) ___________________
 Any other code requirements peculiar to hotel? Yes □ No □
If yes, please list: _______________________________________________________________

Construction Data
 Structure
Reinforce concrete? Yes □ No □ Steel? Yes □ No □
Other (specify) _______________________________________________________
 Façade
Glass curtain wall Yes No Precast concrete Yes No

Stone cladding Yes No

Other (specify): _______________________________________________________
Climatological Data
 Precipitation
Rainfall annually _____ mm Maximum rate _____ mm/hr
Snowfall annually _____ mm Maximum rate _____ mm/hr
 Number of Heating/ Cooling Degree Days
Heating degree days annually _____ Degree Days (18°C base temperature)
Summer design temperature _____ Degree Days (18°C base temperature)
 Design Temperatures
Winter design temperature: _____ db/ wb

29.6
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Climatological Data (continued)

Summer design temperature: _____ db/ wb
 Average Wind Speed and Direction:
Speed Direction Speed Direction
Summer _____ _____ Winter _____ _____
Fall _____ _____ Spring _____ _____
 Number of Sunshine Hours _____ hours per year
 Identify Prevalent Natural Phenomenon
Typhoon season From ___________________ To ___________________
Hurricane season From ___________________ ___________________
To
Tornado season From ___________________ To ___________________
Monsoon season From ___________________ To ___________________
Flooding season From ___________________ To ___________________
Avalanche season From ___________________ To ___________________
Seismic Index (average) From ___________________ To ___________________
Other (specify) ____________________________________________________
Sewage Treatment Service
 Municipal system Yes □No
Size of municipal main diameter _____ mm
- Rain water system _____ mm
- Waste water system _____ mm
Distance from municipal main _____ mm
Is the system adequate for the next fifteen years? Yes □ No □
- If not, estimate how long? _____ months _____ years

Is the system reliable? Yes No □

- If no, summarize problem (s): _______________________________________________
 Annual fee/cost (US dollar) _____

 On- site treatment Yes □ No

Distance from hotel service entrance _____ meters
 Is there an effluent discharge standard? (If yes, attached copy) Yes□No□
 Off - site disposal Yes No
Distance from hotel _____ meters
 Are effluent standards established? (Attached copy) Yes No

29.7
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

District Steam & Hot Water Service

 Is district steam available? Yes No
If seasonal only From ___________________ To _____________________
Size of district steam supply:
- Main (diameter) _____ mm _____ inches
- Pressure ________________________
- Distance from the hotel _____ meters _____ feet
- Quality of steam _____ %
Is condensate returned to district steam plant? Yes □ No □
Reliability service hours interruption:
a. daily _____ hours b. monthly _____ hours c. annually _____ hours
Is the district steam system adequate for the next 15 years? Yes □ No □
- If not, estimate how long _____ months _____ years
District steam connecting fee (s) and rate (s):
a. Connecting Fee(s): Summer _____ (U.S. Dollar) Winter _____ (U.S. Dollar)
b. Minimum billing: Summer _____ (U.S. Dollar) Winter _____ (U.S. Dollar)
Is interruptible steam rate (s) available? Yes □ No □
__________________________________________________
- If yes, provide details:
______________________________________________________________________
 Controlling Agency / Utility ______________________________________________
Application lead time _____________________________________________________
- Is the district steam system adequate for the next 15 years? Yes No □
If no, estimate how long _____ months _____ years
 Is district hot water available? Yes □ No □
___________________________________________________
If yes, provide details:
_____________________________________________________________________
District hot water connecting fee(s) and rate(s):
a. Connecting Fee(s) Summer _____ (U.S. Dollar) Winter _____ (U.S. Dollar)
b. Minimum billing: Summer _____ (U.S. Dollar) Winter _____ (U.S. Dollar)
Incoming hot water temperature _____ ºC
Incoming hot water pressure _____ kPA
Return temperature _____ ºC
 Controlling Agency / Utility ______________________________________________
Application lead time _____________________________________________________

29.8
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

District Steam & Hot Water Service (continued)

- Is the district hot water system adequate for the next 15 years? Yes □ No □
If no, estimate how long _____ months _____ years

Electrical Services
 Network Characteristics (Check )
Obtain full network characteristics. Include sub station and location, available fault
current, rate schedule, rules & regulations, national and local codes, etc., and attach. □
 Voltage stability
+ _____ % - _____ %
 Number of brownout hours
Monthly _____ hours Annually _____ hours
 Number of blackout hours
a. daily _____ hours b. monthly _____ hours c. annually _____ hours
 Identify major cause(s) of service interruption _______________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
 Are two feeders/services possible? Yes No
If yes, are they from the same sub station distribution? Yes □ No
 Is the electrical service adequate for the next fifteen years? Yes No
If no, estimate how long? _____ months _____ years
 Cost of electricity (kWh) (U.S. Dollar) _____ Off- peak _____ Peak
 Controlling Agency / Utility _____________________________________________
Application lead time ___________________________________________________

Gas Service (For LPG, see below)

 Is piped- in gas available? Yes No

If no, list alternative gas sources ____________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
 Gas main:
a. Distance from hotel service entrance _____ meters
b. Size (diameter) _____ mm
c. Pressure _____ per _____
 Largest tap permitted _____ cm
 Limits on quantity of taps _______________________________________________

29.9
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Gas Service (continued)

 Reliability:
Service interruption hours
a. daily _____ hours b. monthly _____ hours c. annually _____ hours
Major cause of interruptions _____________________________________________________
 Rate schedule attached? Yes No
 Other Fuel Sources (If piped-gas service is not available, check as appropriate)
Propane Butane
□
#2 Fuel Oil #5 Fuel Oil
For propane and butane, is bulk delivery available? Yes No
If no, size of largest cylinders: _____________________________________________________
 Cost per unit (U.S. Dollar) _____ per unit
 Is supply adequate? Yes No
 Are LPG installations subject to local codes or practices? Yes No
 Controlling Agency ___________________________________________________
Application lead time ___________________________________________________

Water Service
 Water authority mains:
a. Distance from hotel service entrance _____ meters
b. Size (diameter) _____ mm
c. Pressure _____ per _____
 Age and condition of main(s), if known _____________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
 Largest tap permitted _____ mm
 Are dual services available? Yes No
3
 Limits on peak demand _____ m per _____
3
 Limits on peak consumption _____ m per _____
3
 Rate(s) applicable (U.S. Dollar) _____ m per _____
 Overall water quality:
Potable? Yes □ No □
Does local supply meet World Health
Organization (WHO) standards for drinking Yes □No □
Total hardness for each season ____________________________________________
NOTE: Please submit full laboratory report of water quality.

29.10
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Water Service (continued)

 Laboratory attached? Yes No
 Reliability:
Service interruption hours
a. daily _____ hours b. monthly _____ hours c. annually _____ hours
Identify major cause(s) of service interruptions_________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
 Is potable water service capacity adequate for the next fifteen years? Yes□No□
If not, estimate how long? _____ months _____ years
 Rate schedule attached? Yes No
 Controlling Agency / Utility _______________________________________________
Application lead time _____________________________________________________

Well? Yes No Desalination? Yes No

 Alternate sources (Check as appropriate)

Rain? Yes No □ Reverse Osmosis? Yes No

Other (specify): __________________________________________________________
Telephone Service
 Distance to nearest telephone exchange _____ km
 Type of city telephone exchange (Check as appropriate)
a. DMTF? Yes No b. Analogue Lines? Yes No

c. Digital Lines? Yes ISDN Lines? Yes No

No d.
e. High speed T1 or E1? Yes □ No □
g. Other (specify) ________________________________________________________
 Quality of telephone service (Check as appropriate)
Poor Good Excellent
a. Local
b. Long distance
c. International
 Is direct dial available for:
a. Local Yes No
b. Long distance Yes □ No □
c. International Yes No
 Maximum number of telephone exchange lines available for the hotel _____

29.11
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Telephone Service (continued)

 Reliability: Telephone service interruption hours
a. daily _____ hours b. monthly _____ hours c. annually _____ hours
 Is cellular network available? Yes No
If yes, what frequency? ____________________________________________________
 Does central office provide meter pulse? Yes No
 Overall quality & reliability of telephone service: _____________________________
 Is telephone service
Public? Yes □ No □ or Private? Yes □ No □
If private, name of company _______________________________________________
Television Broadcast Service
 Is a TV broadcast signal available? Yes No
If yes, is it?
a. Standard broadcast? Yes No

c. Digital? Yes No
b. Satellite? Yes No
d. Cable? Yes No
If yes, contact information for cable operator ____________________________________
e. High definition? Yes No

f. Multi-lingual? Yes No

If yes, specify languages ___________________________________________________

g. Stereo? Yes No
 Is TV Format
a. N.T.S.C.? Yes No b. P.A.L? Yes No

c. S.E.C.A.M.? Yes No d. TCPIP? Yes No

e. Other: _________________________________________________________________
 Indicate number of TV stations serving the area _____
Attach name of TV stations serving the area.
 Are there restrictions for in–house and pay movies by local authority? Yes No
Are there taxes/royalties for in-house pay movies? Yes □ No □
If yes, how much? _____ (U.S. Dollar)
 Are there restrictions for satellite television? Yes No
If yes, please list _________________________________________________________

29.12
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Television Broadcast Service (continued)

 Are there restrictions for cable television? Yes No
If yes, please list _____________________________________________________________

Radio Broadcast Service

 Is radio available? Yes No
If yes, how many?
a. AM mono stations? _____ b. AM stereo stations? _____
c. FM mono stations? _____ d. FM stereo stations? _____
e. Satellite radio? _____
 List type of stations:
Language and music type Format
(i.e. English rock, Chinese classical) (i.e. AM/ FM/Stereo)
________________________________ ___________________________________
________________________________ ___________________________________
________________________________ ___________________________________
________________________________ ___________________________________
Fire Service
 Is hotel within jurisdiction
of a fire district?
a. Professional? Yes No b. Private? Yes □ No □
□ □
c. Volunteer? Yes □ No
 Estimated response time _____ minutes
 How is alarm transmitted? _________________________________________________
 Is there a “hot line” or direct connection to the fire station? Yes No
 Types of firefighting equipment available ____________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
 Describe rescue equipment _______________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
 To what height can the firefighting equipment reach? _____ meters
 Type of water connection(s) required into the building _________________________
 Type of water connection(s) required into the building _________________________
 Volume of required water reserve _____
 Does a fire code exist? Yes No
If yes, please attach copy

29.13
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Fire Service (continued)

 Does the fire service provide inspections during construction? YesNo

 Does controlling agency issue Certificate of Compliance? Yes No

 List Local Codes. Please attach copy
_____________________________________ ____________________________________
_____________________________________ ____________________________________
_____________________________________ ____________________________________

Sustainable/Green Building Programs

 Does City have prevailing Sustainable / Green Building Program? Yes No
If yes, please state name of program and attach copy _____________________________
 What renewable energy is available on site? (Check as appropriate)
- Solar
- Wind
- Bio-fuel based electrical system
- Geothermal

- Wave
- Low impact Hydro- Electric power
- Deep lake cooling/ heating
- Others _____________________________________________
 Is there water use reduction requirement program? Please attach a copy? Yes No□
 Is rainwater harvesting allowed? Yes No
 Is water recycling for re-use (gray water recycling) allowed? Yes No
 Construction Materials
What regional (local) construction materials are available within 500 miles/800 km?
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________

Sanitary Collection Services

 Are garbage collection services (rubbish) available?
a. Private? Yes □ No □ b. Public? Yes □ No □
 Method of Collection
a. Loose? YesNo b. Leased? Yes □ No □

c. Container? Yes No
 If compactor
a. Rented? Yes □ No □ b. Leased? Yes □ No □

29.14
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Sanitary Collection Services (continued)

c. Purchased Yes □ No □
 Carting cost, including dump fees (U.S. Dollar) _____
 Is on-site incineration approved? YesNo

 Do incineration emission standards exist? Yes No

If yes, please attach copy.

Street Cleaning Services

 Is there street cleaning service? Yes No
If yes, how often? ________________________________________________________
 For beach resorts, is there a beach cleaning service? Yes No

Police Service
 Is hotel area patrolled by police? YesNo

If no, are there any services available? Yes No

If yes, describe ___________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
 Nearest police station and name ___________________________________________
Distance ________________ or Estimated response time _______________________

 Is there a “hot line” facility to the police station? Yes No

Hospital Service
 Nearest hospital and name ________________________________________________
Distance from hotel _____ km
 Travel time to hospital _____ minutes
 Is emergency service available? YesNo

If yes, is it 24 hours? Yes □ No

If no, hours of operations From ___________________ To ______________________

 Observation of hospital standard/ quality _______________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
 Is there ambulance service? Yes No
Estimated response time _____ minutes
 Is there an ambulance – heliport service? YesNo
 Is Emergency response available? Yes No

29.15
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Existing Hotel Survey (skip for new construction projects)

 Construction Type
Concrete? Yes □ No □ Steel? Yes□ No □
 Height _____ m
 Façade Construction ( Describe) __________________________________________
 Number of Basements _____
 Number of Podium Floors _____
 Number of Guest Rooms Floors _____
 Public Areas (list)
a. _______________________________ _____ sq m
b. _______________________________ _____ sq m
c. _______________________________ _____ sq m
d. _______________________________ _____ sq m
 Food & Beverage Outlets (list)
a. _______________________________ _____ seats _____ sq m
b. _______________________________ _____ seats _____ sq m
c. _______________________________ _____ seats _____ sq m
d. _______________________________ _____ seats _____ sq m
e. _______________________________ _____ seats _____ sq m
f. _______________________________ _____ seats _____ sq m
 Other Facilities (list)
a. _______________________________ _____ sq m
b. _______________________________ _____ sq m
c. _______________________________ _____ sq m
d. _______________________________ _____ sq m
e. _______________________________ _____ sq m
f. _______________________________ _____ sq m
 Elevators
a. Guest no. _____ Capacity _____
b. Service no. _____ Capacity _____
c. Others no. _____ Capacity _____

29.16
SITE CHARACTERISTICS SURVEY

Existing Hotel Survey (continued)

 Guest Room Floors
Number of bays ________________________________
Number of keys ________________________________
Services areas ( Housekeeping, pantries per floor) ________________________________
Fire egress (stairs per floor) ________________________________
 Room Mix
4 – bay or larger suites _____ keys _____ bays
3 – bay suites _____ keys _____ bays
2 – bay suites _____ keys _____ bays
King Rooms _____ keys _____ bays
Twin Rooms _____ keys _____ bays
Hotel Club Rooms _____ keys _____ bays
Other: _____ keys _____ bays
Other: _____ keys _____ bays
_______________________________________
Provision for expansion and upgrading:
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________

29.17
 Introduction
Hotel construction and operation have considerable environmental impact. Hotels, like
many other buildings, use resources and raw materials and also generate waste and
potentially harmful emissions. Sustainable Design consultants are required to take into
consideration the accessibility, security, health and productivity aspects of the
development while minimizing its impact on the environment. An integrated and
coordinated approach by the various stakeholders is key to the success of the
sustainable design.
Sustainable design supports the protection of the environment and conservation, and
seeks optimization of cost and benefits to the environment, society and humans without
compromising the functionality of the building.
See Attachment: Sustainable Design Criteria

See Attachment: Sustainable Design Checklist

30
 Attachments
Sustainable Design
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

30.1
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Design Philosophy

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN

1. Narrative:

We believes it is our shared responsibility to combine astute asset management with a

passionate commitment to genuine and strategic stewardship of the environment.

We are committed to designing, building and managing innovative hotels that provide our guests
with authentic and comfortable accommodations that respect the natural environment and the
local communities in which we operate.

We engage and motivate our colleagues around the world to be our ambassadors in achieving
these goals, we work with suppliers to develop and provide innovative products and solutions, and
we strive to offer our guests unparalleled service in surroundings that reduce our impact on the
environment and positively contribute to the community.

2. Design Philosophy:

As a caring hospitality company and a citizen of the communities in which we operate, We view
the incorporation of sustainable practices into our design standards as both a business imperative
and as a responsibility. We strive to operate hotels that conserve natural resources, use materials
and resources wisely, and continue to adopt appropriate environmental standards throughout the
entire life cycle of a property. In emphasizing a design approach that guides our properties to
blend harmoniously & responsibly into their local context, reduce energy & water consumption,
minimize waste & harmful emissions, and make use of sustainable materials in their construction,
We stress sustainable design as an integral component of its overall strategy.

We have adopted this Sustainable Design Criteria to be implemented in all our projects. However,
for certain projects and/or regions, some aspects of the criterion may not be advisable or readily
achievable. Therefore, the sustainable criteria items are categorized as “Minimum Standard” and
“Recommended.” The following are definitions for these terms:
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Key Features
Sustainable Criteria Definitions

MINIMUM STANDARD: A criterion that is essential to a project design and shall

be incorporated into all projects no matter the size, program, or location.
RECOMMENDED: A criterion that shall be evaluated and considered by a
licensed, experienced professional. The professional shall provide The Operator a
detailed list of benefits and challenges along with an executive summary that
presents the professional’s recommendation for this item.
In selecting items that are appropriate for a project, at no time shall these sustainable approaches
negatively impact our guest’s experience or the required brand standards and design
criteria. The goal is to incorporate responsible, sustainable methods and materials into a property
while enhancing the guest’s stay at the property.

3. Key Features:

The following criteria are to be utilized in the construction of new properties and renovations of
existing hotels:
o All building activities shall promote the protection of the welfare, health, and safety of
the population.
o All building activities shall have minimal ecological impact on the local environment.
o All design activities shall seek to maximize energy efficiency, use recycled &
recyclable products, and minimize the production of waste, harmful emissions and
the use of non-sustainable resources.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Design & Technical Criteria

Design & Technical Criteria

The intent of this document is not to establish unique design concepts credited to our
company but to provide the project owners and designers with those sustainable
approaches that shall be integrated in a 5 star hotel. In the development of these Sustainable
Design criteria, many sources were evaluated as they related to the hospitality industry and
their appropriateness to hotel brands.
Some specific minimum standards and recommendations have been modified to reflect our
Needs while other references are more directly stated by referencing
internationally recognized
organizations that provide design and/or construction guidelines. These published guidelines
shall be reviewed for the complete explanation and compliance requirements. Renewable
sources are defined by Center for Resource Solutions (CRS) Green-e products certification
requirements. Refer to www.green-e.org for additional details on Green-e program. The
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
publish three standards that pertain to The Operator projects: ASHRAE 62.1-
2004 is written for high-
rise construction, ASHRAE 62.2-2004 is written for low-rise construction, and ASHRAE 55-
2004 addresses thermal comfort. The following is a complete list of reference sources:
o United States Green Building Council's (USGBC) LEED
o World Travel & Tourism Council's (WTTC) Green Globe Programme
o American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
o Environmental Protection Act (EPA)
o City of Austin, Texas, Austin Energy Green Building Program
o Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
o National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP)
o South Coast Rule #1168VOC
o Forest Stewardship Council’s Principles and Criteria
o National Energy Policy Act
o International Performance Measurement & Verification Protocol (IPMVP) Volume III:
Concepts and Options for Determining Energy Saving in New Construction
o Montreal Protocol
o Center for Resource Solutions (CRS) Green-e products certification
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Project Approach

Project Approach:

 Design Process: MINIMUM STANDARD – The implementation of sustainable concepts

begins with the design process. At the project inception, the project design team shall follow
guiding principles starting with the facilities area program to siting & orienting the structure(s)
to selection of all the systems, components, and materials. These guiding principles shall
draw from published materials and standards developed by recognized authorities including
but not limited to:
o International Tourism Partnership – International Business Leaders Forum
o The US Green Building Council – Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
(LEED) [United States of America and Canada]
o Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) –
[United Kingdom]
o Green Globes – [United States of America and Canada]
o Green Star – [Australia]
o Japan Sustainable Building Consortium – Comprehensive Assessment System for
Building Environmental Efficiency (CASBEE) – [Japan and China]
o International Initiative for a Sustainable Built Environment (iiSBE) - SBTool –
[International]
o Energy Star – [United States of America]
o The Natural Step – [International]

Building Systems: MINIMUM STANDARD – All the building systems including the
Structure, Heating, Ventilation, & Air Conditioning (HVAC), Electrical, and Plumbing shall
consider the latest innovations and practices available for the region in which the project is
located.

Sustainability Consultant: RECOMMENDED – A certified / registered Sustainability

Consultant shall be engaged as part of the design team. This consultant should be
independent from the architectural, interior design,and engineering consulting services in
order to provide the owner/developer and operator with objective and independent
recommendations and interpretations. This consultant’s scope of services shall include
becoming familiar with the Design Criteria, comparing these Criteria with the local
regulatory requirements, and determining the availability, appropriateness,& best practices
for potential sustainable concepts.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Building Sites and Site Components

Building Sites and Site Components:

Site Characteristic Studies: MINIMUM STANDARD – Document all existing site
characteristics (solar, natural topography, prevailing winds, surface water, vegetation, and
other natural features). Plan to maintain, improve, or restore existing natural site features.
Locate the building structure(s) to minimize their impact while capitalizing on the natural site
characteristics.
Alternate Transportation: MINIMUM STANDARD - Provide a secured bicycle storage area
along with employee changing, locker, and shower facilities to encourage employees to ride
bikes to work instead of driving motor vehicles. Provide bike storage spaces for 5% of the
full-time employee count.

Outdoors Seating: MINIMUM STANDARD – Provide one (1) shaded exterior site seat for
every ten (10)-guestroom keys. The seating shall be distributed for use by hotel guests and
employees. Some appropriate areas for guest seating include the porte cochere, outdoor
dining, and pool/terrace. Employee areas shall be located adjacent to the primary employee
entry and recommended that efforts should be made to screen those from public and guest
view.
Electric, Low-emitting and Fuel-efficient Vehicles: MINIMUM STANDARD – (One of the
following is required. It is RECOMMENDED that as many as possible of these criteria be
integrated into the project).

1. Provide one reserved preferred parking stall in close proximity to the entry for every
150 room keys for guests driving electric, hybrid or flex-fuel vehicles. This parking
stall shall include an electrical power receptacle for electric vehicles.
2. Provide hotel shuttle service to public transportation terminals including bus, rail, and
airports.
3. Utilize electric powered, hybrid or flex- fuel vehicles for hotel shuttle and service use.
Light Pollution Reduction: MINIMUM STANDARD - (One of the following is required as a
MINIMUM STANDARD. It is RECOMMENDED that as many as possible of these criteria be
integrated into the project).

1. Ensure exterior lighting meets Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

(IESNA) RP-33 light trespass.
2. Eliminate up lighting of hotel flags and site landscaping elements.
3. Eliminate the building-up lighting.
4. Utilize low cut-off type light fixtures for all exterior lighting including the site and
building. Position these lights so that the perimeter lighting fixture doesn’t trespass
light beyond the property lines.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Building Sites and Site Components

Non-roof Heat Island Effect: MINIMUM STANDARD – (One of the following is required as
a MINIMUM STANDARD. It is RECOMMENDED that as many as possible of these criteria
be integrated into the project)
5. Utilize a vegetative open paving grid (at least 50% pervious) for at least 10%
(minimum) of the total combined site hardscape
6. Use a paving material with a minimum Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of 29.
7. Based on the overall site non-roof impervious surface area, provide native and
adaptive vegetative shade planting (five year grow-in) for 40% of site area.
8. Locate 50% of parking underground.
9. In a parking structure, the top floor/roof level shall have a minimum SRI 29 exposed
surface.
Drinking Water Protection: RECOMMENDED - Locate a project on a site that is NOT in a
“Drinking Water Protected Zone” or other groundwater recharge area.
Protect Open Areas: RECOMMENDED – Limit the site disturbance to 40’ (12 m) beyond
building perimeter; 10’ (3 m) beyond walkways, patios, and surface parking; 15’ (5 m) beyond
roadways and utility trenches; 25’ (8 m) beyond any pervious areas that require additional
staging.

Brownfield Sites – existing site cleanup: RECOMMENDED – Locate a project on a

previously developed site instead of a Greenfield Site where no previous disturbance or
development has taken place. When redeveloping the site, take measures to help create a
safe and healthy environment for our guests and employees.
Development Density: RECOMMENDED - Construct the hotel in close proximity to existing
community services (i.e. banks, places of worship, convenience groceries, day care, beauty
salon, laundry services, medical/dental, fitness centers, theaters, retail, & community
centers) and municipal infrastructure (i.e. sanitary sewer, domestic water, electrical, &
roadways.) (Reference source United States Green Building Council's (USGBC) LEED)

Public Transportation Access: RECOMMENDED - Locate a project when possible within

walking distance (1/4 mile (400 m)) to public transportation including buses, rail, and airports.
Maximize Vegetated Open Areas: RECOMMENDED – Provide vegetated open area equal
to 20% of the project site area. The area calculation may include vegetated roof areas if the
roof planting meets the definition of native/adaptive planting.
Rainwater Harvesting Design (Quantity): RECOMMENDED – Collect at least 20% of all
roof and/or parking area runoff and store the water to be used for site irrigation or other
approved uses.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Facility Planning and Exterior Design

Facility Planning and Exterior Design:

Building Envelope, Orientation, and Massing: MINIMUM STANDARD – A building shall

be oriented to reduce solar gain through windows & building mass while capturing prevailing
winds in the most acceptable manner. A northern hemisphere example to achieve this
requirement is as follows:

When appropriate orient the majority of guest windows to the north and south in order to
minimize air conditioning load and optimize passive heating in winter. Evaluate exterior
vertical shading for west exposure considering vertical fins, honeycombs, saw tooth
projections or trellises to shade west and possibly east glass. Eyebrows and overhangs
should be considered for southern exposures.

Building Entries: MINIMUM STANDARD – All primary entries shall use revolving doors or
double automatic sliders on a vestibule for high traffic pedestrian areas. Provide vestibules
for luggage and other entry/exit portals. Locate doors to encourage use of revolving doors
and discourage use of swinging doors. Provide windbreaks and/or construct the rest of the
building to minimize stack effect and wind gusts into the public areas of the hotel. Install
walk-off mats or grate systems to capture any contaminants brought into the building from
the visitor’s shoes and clothing.

Exterior Glazing: MINIMUM STANDARD – Insulated double pane (standard and low
emissivity) glass shall be installed into thermally broken frames. Do not use clear glass. Use
lightly tinted glass to reduce solar load yet maintain adequate vision qualities. Where external
noise is a potential problem, use ¼" (6mm) exterior glass, a 2" (50mm) air space with
absorbent sides, laminated glass inside, and 20-year life acoustic caulk at all joints or cracks.

Roof Heat Island Reduction: MINIMUM STANDARD - (One of the following is required as a
MINIMUM STANDARD. It is RECOMMENDED that as many as possible of these criteria be
integrated into the project).

1. High albedo surfaces have both a light color (high solar reflectance) and a high
emmittance to reject heat back to the environment. Approved high albedo roof
surfaces (typically white in color and smooth in texture) shall have a minimum total
solar reflectance of no less than 0.70 (ASTM E-903.)
2. Vegetative roof for 50% of roof area
3. Combination high albedo/vegetative for 75% of roof area.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Facility Planning and Exterior Design

Storage and Collection of Recyclables – Facilitate in the reduction of waste generated by

building occupants that is hauled to, and disposed of in landfills.
o Hotel Recycling Center: MINIMUM STANDARD - Each property shall provide a readily
accessible recycling area that serves the entire facility and is dedicated to the collection,
separation, and holding of recyclable materials including (at minimum) paper, corrugated
cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals.

Recyclable materials storage areas shall be located adjacent to refuse collection /

storage areas and the receiving dock in order to provide convenient recyclable materials
drop-off, holding, and collection. Trash and recycling areas must be enclosed such that
they are screened from public view. The enclosure shall be constructed of durable
materials, such as masonry, and shall be compatible with the structure to which it is
associated. Gates shall not be utilized to provide the screening enclosure. Enclosure
areas shall be constructed on a concrete pad, for longevity and safety of handlers.
Gravel, packed dirt and rutted asphalt will not be allowed.

The design assumption is that the recyclable materials will be collected at least twice a
week. Three scenarios to be considered when designing these facilities include:

1. In locations where the waste management service collects recyclables

separately, the programmed spaces shall be designed to accommodate the
recyclable materials along with all necessary equipment to minimize the required
storage volume. The recycled glass, plastic (crushed), and aluminum cans
(crushed) shall be held in 80-gallon plastic containers.
2. In locations where the waste management service collects mixed recyclables, a 3
yard3 (2.5 m3) dumpster shall be provided dedicated to the holding of recyclable
materials. However, this dumpster is in addition to the required below aggregate
required areas.
3. In locations where recycling services are limited or not available, the required
recycling spaces shall still be provided. In the future, recycling services may
become available and the property must be able to adequately handle collection
of recyclable materials at that time.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Facility Planning and Exterior Design

Preliminary Facility Program Areas

Number of Hotel Keys=R
R  130 130 < R  200 200 < R  300 300 < R  500 R > 500
2 2 2 2
Glass Recyclables 20 ft 50 ft 75 ft 90 ft
See note
area 2 2 2 2 below
(2 m ) (4.5 m ) (7 m ) (8 m )
2 2 2 2
Plastic Recyclables 25 ft 50 ft 75 ft 90 ft
See note
area 2 2 2 2 below
(2.5 m ) (4.5 m ) (7 m ) (8 m )
2 2 2 2 See note
Cardboard and 60 ft 90 ft 120 ft 150 ft
Paper Recyclables 2 2 2 2
below
area including (5.5 m ) (8 m ) (12 m ) (14 m )
bundler
2 2 2 2 See note
Aluminum Can 20 ft 40 ft 60 ft 75 ft
Recyclables area below
2 2 2 2
with crusher (2 m ) (4 m ) (6 m ) (7 m )
2 2 2 2
Miscellaneous 25 ft 50 ft 75 ft 90 ft
See note
Holding area for 2 2 2 2 below
FFE, Construction, (2.5 m ) (4.5 m ) (7 m ) (8 m )
and Universal
Recyclables

Hotels greater than 500 keys – For hotels greater than 500 keys, Operator shall provide
the design team with a preliminary area program that defines the requirements. These
spaces will be based on the location and the type of hotel being planned.

Additional Storage and Collection of Recyclables: RECOMMENDED – Combine

recycling facilities with surrounding or neighboring properties to reduce the amount of
scheduled pick-ups. As an example, in a mixed-use development, the hotel can combine
its recycling facilities with other development uses. When using this option, the recycling
facilities shall be sized for all the properties that utilize this combined facility. The Operator shall
provide the design team with a preliminary area program that defines the requirements.
These spaces will be based on the location and the type of hotel being planned.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Construction Materials, Process, and Methods

Construction Materials, Process, and Methods:

Construction Activity Pollution Prevention: MINIMUM STANDARD – Review the erosion
and sedimentation control guidelines established by the local regulatory authorities and the
United States of America Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). The more stringent
standards shall be adopted for the project. Develop an Erosion and Sedimentation Control
(ESC) plan that follows these standards and strictly adhere to the plan during the full extent
of a construction project. The plan shall reduce pollution from construction activities by
controlling rainwater runoff, and soil erosion caused by both wind (airborne dust generation)
and water (waterway sedimentation.)
Asbestos Removal: MINIMUM STANDARD - Survey all existing buildings prior to the
commencement of any work by a qualified certified specialist and identify any potential
sources of Asbestos. If asbestos is discovered, follow all the National Emissions Standards
for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) standards to encapsulate or remove the identified
hazards. Survey procedures shall follow proper regulatory procedures governed by the
location of the project.
Construction Waste Management Standard Material Use: MINIMUM STANDARD –
Utilize standard or custom ordered materials to reduce the amount of scrap and waste
associated with non-standard material sizes. Industry standards should be used to design
without cut and waste. (Example: Ceiling heights should be based on standard stud and
gypsum board sizes. If higher ceilings are desired, a solution shall be developed to prevent
excessive waste of materials.)
Low-Emitting Materials - Specify and provide all products and materials complying with the
following. Any deviations from this standard must be pre-accepted by Operator in writing prior to
use and only for performance issues.

o Adhesives & Sealants: MINIMUM STANDARD – Comply with the “South Coast Rule
#1168VOC” which limits the Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) of a sealant or
adhesive.
o Paints & Coatings: MINIMUM STANDARD - Comply with Green Seal Standard GS11.
The General Contractor shall maintain the documentation that includes manifests and
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) sheets.
o Carpet Systems: MINIMUM STANDARD - Meet the testing and product requirements
of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Green Label Plus program. All carpet adhesives shall
meet the VOC limit of 50g/L. The General Contractor and Purchasing Agent shall
maintain the documentation that includes manifests and Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS).
o Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products: MINIMUM STANDARD - Specify wood,
agrifiber products, and on-site laminate adhesives that contain no added urea-
formaldehyde resins. The General Contractor shall maintain the documentation that
includes manifests and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
o Insulation: MINIMUM STANDARD – Specify and install all insulation (excluding piping)
that contains no added urea-formaldehyde.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Construction Materials, Process, and Methods

• Regional Materials - Specify building materials and products that are extracted,
manufactured or assembled into building product components from within 500 miles
(800 Km) of the project site, thereby supporting the regional economy and reducing the
environmental impacts resulting from overseas transportation. Additionally, make efforts to
hire a local labor force that resides within 500 miles (800 Km) of the project site. Percentage
shall be calculated by dividing the cost of the regionally obtained materials, plus the labor
costs for those that reside regionally, by the value of all building materials and products
associated with Construction.

o Use Materials totaling 30%: MINIMUM STANDARD – 30% of the installed building
materials and products are extracted and manufactured, as well as the labor that
resides within 500 miles (800 Km).
o Use Materials totaling 50%: RECOMMENDED –50% of the installed building materials
and products are extracted and manufactured, as well as the labor that resides within
500 miles (800 Km).
 Construction Waste Management: Divert construction demolition and land clearing debris
from landfill disposal. Recycle land clearing debris, cardboard, metal, brick, concrete, plastic,
wood, glass, gypsum board, carpet and insulation. Designate a specific area on the
construction site for recycling and track recycling efforts throughout the construction process
(video tape and/or photographic records along with written logs).

o Divert 50% from Landfills: MINIMUM STANDARD – Recycle 50%.

o Divert 75% from Landfills: RECOMMENDED – Recycle an additional 25%, in excess
of the required 50%.
 Recycled FF&E Content - Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of the
post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content constitutes either
of the stated percentages of the total value of the materials in the project. Post-consumer
materials are generated by the facility user in their role as an end-user of the product that
can no longer be used for its intended use. The Pre-consumer waste is material that can be
diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Mechanical and electrical
components shall not be calculated. The following is how this is calculated: Total recycled
content value ($) = (% of post-consumer recycle content x material cost) + .5 X (% of pre-
consumer recycle content x material cost).

o 5% (post-consumer + ½ pre-consumer): MINIMUM STANDARD – Use materials with

recycled content of at least 5% of the total value of the materials in the project.
o 10% (post-consumer + ½ pre-consumer): RECOMMENDED – Use materials with
recycled content of at least 10% of the total value of the materials in the project.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Construction Materials, Process, and Methods

• Building Reuse: Extend the life cycle of existing building stock, conserve resources, retain
cultural resources, reduce waste, and reduce environmental impacts of new buildings as they
relate to the materials’ manufacturing and transportation. This criterion excludes windows
assemblies and nonstructural roofing materials.
o Resource Reuse 5%: MINIMUM STANDARD for Renovation Only – Use salvaged,
refurbished, or reused materials, products and furnishings for at least 5% of the value of
building materials. Consider salvage materials such as beams, posts, flooring, paneling,
doors, frames, cabinetry, furniture, brick, etc
o Maintain 75% of existing Walls, Floors and Roof: RECOMMENDED – Integrate 75%
of the existing walls, floors, and roof into the design and execution of the project.
o Maintain 100% of existing Walls, Floors and Roof: RECOMMENDED – Integrate
100% of the existing walls, floors, and roof into the design and execution of the project.
o Maintain 100% of Shell/Structure and 50% of Non-Shell/Non-Structure:
RECOMMENDED – Extend the life cycle of existing building stock, conserve resources,
retain cultural resources, reduce waste and reduce environmental impacts of new
buildings as they relate to the materials’ manufacturing and transportation. This criterion
excludes windows assemblies and nonstructural roofing materials and should include
reuse of 50% of the interior walls, doors, plumbing lines, HVAC ducts, ceilings and
lighting.
• Construction Waste Management Donation and/or Reuse: RECOMMENDED – Recycle
construction related materials by donating these materials to a charitable organization¸
(example: Habitat for Humanity) or recycle the material by remanufacturing the material into
product specific items that are reused in a new or renovated construction.

• Construction Material Selection: RECOMMENDED – Use non-wood construction methods

to create more durable buildings that do not deplete the environment of natural resources.
Reduce the impact to wood resources/environments resulting from extraction and processing
of new virgin material.

• Rapidly Renewable Materials 5%: RECOMMENDED – Reduce the depletion of finite raw
materials and long-cycle renewable materials by replacing them with rapidly renewable
materials. Use rapidly renewable building materials and products (made from plants that are
typically harvested within a ten-year cycle or shorter) for 5% of the total value of all building
materials and products used in the project. Some examples of such materials include
bamboo, wool, straw board, cotton insulation, poplar Oriented Strand Board, Sunflower seed
board, wheat board cabinets and others.

• Certified Wood: RECOMMENDED – Reduce the use of non-environmentally responsible

forest management by utilizing 100% of all wood based materials and products, certified in
accordance with the Forest Stewardship Council’s Principles and Criteria. Provide the
vendor’s or manufacturer’s Forest Stewardship Council chain of custody certificate number.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Indoor Environmental Systems

Indoor Environmental Systems:

• Minimum Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Performance: MINIMUM STANDARD - All Hotels
are to be smoke-free environments. If not advisable due to location or cultural expectations,
provisions must be made to mechanically satisfy the required air quality by separating and
exhausting smoking areas (holding them at a negative air pressure to surrounding areas) or
providing an alternative to indoor smoking accommodations for guests and staff.

• Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) Removal: MINIMUM STANDARD - Survey all existing

buildings prior to the commencement of any work and identify any potential sources of PCB’s
and remove these contaminants. Survey procedures shall follow approved proper regulatory
procedures governed by the location of the project.

• Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control: MINIMUM STANDARD – For properties

that are not tobacco smoke free, provide a Building Automation System that shall alarm when
differential pressure conditions between smoking and non-smoking areas are less than the
established parameters.

• Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan, During Construction:

MINIMUM STANDARD - Create and adhere to an IAQ management plan that shall be
created by the General Contractor (GC). The owner/developer shall have the GC provide
their plan to operator for acceptance prior to commencing work. The plan should have the
following components: Strategies, HVAC Protection, Source Control, Housekeeping and
Scheduling. In renovation projects, an indoor environmental professional may need to be
consulted to develop a process to mitigate airborne fungi or asbestos that can result from
demolition.
As part of this plan, the GC shall utilize filters with a minimum efficiency of MERV 8 on all
return air grills to maintain the integrity of the permanent HVAC system. Upon completion of
the project, the condition of the mechanical system shall be verified and cleaned if/as
necessary. During the actual construction process, portable HVAC units with MERV 8 filters
may be utilized instead of the permanent HVAC system.
• Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source Control: MINIMUM STANDARD – Evaluate the
property’s exhausted areas and HVAC systems filtration media to identify chemical and
pollutant sources.
Recognize exhaust requirements for all areas during the space planning design phase.
Areas of note shall include chemical rooms, maintenance / engineering shops, copier rooms,
recycling / trash rooms, mechanical rooms, and kitchen areas.
Provide HVAC filtration that ensures outside air is filtered to the minimum standards. In other
specific project regions, consideration shall be given to other appropriate methods such as
mist stops in sub-tropical areas, Ultraviolet (UV) light to kill fungi, and high efficiency filters
(MERV 13) on permanent HVAC units.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Indoor Environmental Systems

• Controllability of Systems, Lighting: MINIMUM STANDARD – Design and install lighting

systems that the property users shall control their lighting levels to meet individual
preferences and task needs. The following are the requirements for each user group:

o Hotel Guestrooms Users: Provide individual lighting controls in all guestrooms. These
controls shall allow the guest to adjust the quantity of fixtures illuminated and (as
designed) their intensity. There shall be a master disconnect device at the entry. In
addition to the general lighting, task lighting with individual controls shall be provided in
the work, relaxation, and sleeping zones of the guestroom. In properties that implement
a lighting control system integrated into the energy management system, the lighting
shall have dual occupancy sensors to prevent false readings.
o Meeting Space Users: Provide individual lighting controls in each meeting space
including ballrooms, meeting rooms, banquet rooms, conference rooms, business
centers, boardrooms, and Residences. Each subdivision is to be zoned separately with
local control and master controls. For those meeting spaces that have sound and light
booths, these controls shall be remotely controlled from these booth areas. These
controls shall allow meeting facility users to adjust the quantity of fixtures and light
levels, such as dimming of lamps. These controls shall consist of preset dimmers
providing at least four scenes. In properties that integrate the lighting control system into
the energy management system, the lighting shall have dual occupancy sensors to
prevent false readings.
o Food and Beverage Users: In all Food and Beverage areas including restaurants, bar,
and coffee shops, preset dimmers with at least four scenes and lockout shall be
provided. In the general dining area, these dimmers shall not be readily accessible to the
general public but shall be for control by the venue’s management. In special individual
dining rooms, the user control shall follow the requirements of meeting space users.
o BOH Users: In the back of house, the lighting control systems shall be zoned into work
areas and shall have a control sequence based on usage.
 Lighting that serves general use 24-hour activity areas shall be controlled
centrally.
Areas that have fixed operational schedules such as engineering shops and
kitchens shall be controlled at the primary use zone using a time clock system
and motion detectors.
Areas that are accessed infrequently such as storage and housekeeping rooms,
the lighting in this room shall be controlled with motion detecting sensors.
Areas where there are numerous users performing individual tasks such as open
cubicles in administration areas or front desk clerks, task lighting shall be
provided with individual controls and dimming to provide users with personalized
lighting controls.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Indoor Environmental Systems

• Controllability of Systems, Thermal Comfort: MINIMUM STANDARD – Design and install

the HVAC systems in a manner that users shall have control of their thermal comfort to meet
their individual preferences and task needs as defined in ASHRAE 55-2004. In all occupied
spaces, the ability of a user to open a window should also be considered. Other design
considerations may involve the individual space registers, radiant controls, sensors, etc. The
following are the requirements for each user group:
o Hotel Guestrooms Users: Guestrooms shall be designed with individual temperature
controls and Fan Coil Units (FCUs). Provide individual digital programmable thermostats
that are interfaced with the master lighting disconnect device at the entry that directs the
system to revert to preset conditions. When Building Automation Systems are included,
the thermostat shall also interface to the Property Management System. The individual
guestroom users shall have complete (100%) control of their thermal comfort so as to
meet individual preferences and task needs as defined in ASHRAE 55-2004. In
properties that implement an integrated energy management system, the system shall
have dual occupancy sensors to prevent false readings.
o Meeting Space Users: Provide individual digital programmable thermostats in the actual
meeting spaces including ballrooms, meeting rooms, banquet rooms, conference rooms,
business center, boardrooms, and Residences. Each subdivision is to be zoned
separately. These thermostats shall allow the meeting facility users to control their
thermal comfort to meet individual preferences and task needs as defined in ASHRAE
55-2004. The thermostats shall be located adjacent to the lighting control panels for
each subdivision room; locate temperature sensors as required for accurate reading of
room conditions. In properties that implement an integrated energy management
system, the system shall have dual occupancy sensors to prevent false readings.
o Food and Beverage Users: In all Food and Beverage areas including restaurants, bar,
and coffee shops individual digital programmable thermostats in the actual space shall
be provided. In the general dining area, these thermostats shall not be readily accessible
by the general public but are for control by the venue’s management. In special
individual dining rooms, the user control shall follow the requirements of meeting space
users allowing users to control their thermal comfort to meet individual preferences and
task needs as defined in ASHRAE 55-2004. The thermostats shall be located adjacent
to the lighting control panels for each subdivision room; locate temperature sensors as
required for accurate reading of room conditions.
o BOH Users: In the back of house, the thermal comfort control systems shall be zoned
into work areas and have a control sequence based on usage. In general use areas
where there is 24-hour activity, these spaces shall be controlled remotely by the Building
Management System to reduce nuisance temperature swings created by a few
occupants. In areas that have an operational fixed schedule such as engineering shops
and kitchens, these spaces shall be equipped with individual digital programmable
thermostats in the actual spaces. For office and shared space, Variable Air Volume
(VAV) boxes shall be provided to serve single office spaces with a localized temperature
control.

• Controllability of Guestroom Environment, Thermal Comfort: MINIMUM STANDARD –

When operable windows are provided in guestrooms, they shall be equipped with
4” restrictors and localized micro-switches that disconnect the HVAC unit(s) serving that
room when the window is opened. Sliding and hinged doors opening to the exterior shall
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Indoor Environmental Systems

also be equipped with a micro-switch that disconnects the HVAC unit(s) when they are open.

• Thermal Comfort, Design: MINIMUM STANDARD – Design and install HVAC to the
ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy standards.
This criterion is an interpretation of environmental conditions such as air temperature, radiant
temperature, humidity and air speed. It factors in personal items such as metabolic rates and
clothing levels.
• Thermal Comfort, Verification: MINIMUM STANDARD – Survey the building occupants 6
to 11 months after substantial completion. Ownership shall ensure this survey is performed
that obtains feedback from all user groups including room guests, meeting facility users, and
The Operator associates. AHSRAE Standard 55-
2004 Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human
Occupancy supplies criteria to validate the survey. If less than 80% of the occupants respond
favorably to the anonymous survey, corrective action must be taken. The timing for this
survey shall coincide with the General Contractor’s warranty period so that all corrective
actions can be addressed as part of the GC’s contractual obligations.
• Acoustical Quality: MINIMUM STANDARD – Design and verify that the background sound
levels, reverberation decay times, speech intelligibility, and sound isolation meet the
established industry standards for each occupied space. HVAC, vibration isolation, surface
finishes, floor and ceiling finishes and intermittent noise sources shall be identified to mitigate
noise sources.
• Daylight & Views - Utilize design and planning techniques that include building orientation,
increased building perimeter, specialized glazing and advanced controls to provide the
maximum amount of natural light into the regularly occupied spaces.
o Daylight 75% of Spaces: MINIMUM STANDARD - Provide a minimum 25-foot candles
of natural light into at least 75% of all regularly occupied spaces.
o Daylight 90% of Spaces: RECOMMENDED - Provide a minimum 25-foot candles of
natural light into at least 90% of all regularly occupied spaces.
• Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan, Before Occupancy:
RECOMMENDED - Collect air samples upon the completion of a project in the spaces to be
occupied. Utilize a certified laboratory, IAQ specialist, or Industrial Hygienist to collect and
test these samples. Upon verification that these tested air samples comply with the
stipulated thresholds, the spaces can be occupied.
If the air quality readings are not acceptable for the building square foot area (or square
meter area), the space shall be mechanically “flushed out” with a minimum air volume of
14,000 cu. ft/sq. ft. (or 4,267 cu. m/sq. m) This can be achieved with the existing HVAC
system, but the use of portable blowers and fans placed in strategic areas of the building
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Water Efficiency

may be utilized to assist in achieving these results. Once this criterion has been satisfied,
the building can be occupied.
• Outdoor Air Delivery (OAD) Monitoring: MINIMUM STANDARD – Install permanent
monitoring systems to provide feedback on ventilation system performance to ensure that
design minimum ventilation requirements are maintained. Provide appropriate controls for
both densely occupied and non-densely occupied spaces. The Building Automation System
shall generate an alarm when conditions are not per established parameters.

• Increased Ventilation: RECOMMENDED Increase the OAD by 30% to all occupied spaces.
Develop and implement an acceptable approach that shall benefit the mental and physical
health of the occupants, guests, and associates.

Water Efficiency:

• Wastewater Reduction: MINIMUM STANDARD – Reduce the potable water used in the
building for sewage conveyance by 50%. There are several methods to achieve this
standard. Some examples include:

o Use low-flow toilets and urinals, showerhead with restrictors, and sinks with low-flow
faucets.
o Use of non-potable water shall be evaluated and implemented where possible.
Examples of these methods include use of captured rainwater, recycled grey water, and
on-site or municipally treated wastewater to meet the required 50% reduction.
o Treatment of 50% blackwater on-site to tertiary standards. This treated water must be
infiltrated or used on the site.

• Domestic Water Efficiency: Provide approaches to reduce non-irrigation water

consumption.

o Water Use Reduction – 20%: MINIMUM STANDARD – Reduce the water use,
excluding irrigation, of a property by 20% from baseline established by the 1995 National
Energy Policy Act. The calculations are based on estimated occupant (all user groups)
usage and shall include only the following fixtures: water closets, urinals, lavatory
faucets, showers and kitchen sinks. This requirement is achieved by implementing the
use of low-flow fixtures. The baseline standard shall use the following for all areas of a
hotel including Public Areas, Back of House, and Guestrooms/Suites:

Toilets 1.6 gallons / flush (6.0 l / f)

Urinals .5 gallons / flush (2.0 l / f)
Wash Basins –non-food service areas 2.0 gallons / min. (7.5 l/m)
Wash Basins –food service areas 2.2 gallons / min. (8.3 l/m)
Showers 2.5 gallons / min. (9.5 l/m)
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Water Efficiency

Public Area faucets and flush valves equipped with automatic sensors can further be
utilized to help with this process. Consideration shall be given to storm water and grey
water for non-potable applications, such as toilet and urinal flushing and custodial uses.

o Water Use Reduction – 30%: RECOMMENDED -– Reduce the water, excluding

irrigation, use of a property by 30% from baseline established by the 1995 National
Energy Policy Act. The calculations are based on estimated occupant (all users) usage
and shall include only the following fixtures: water closets, urinals, lavatory faucets,
showers and kitchen sinks. This criterion requires a more aggressive approach in
product use and design. It is achieved by implementing the use of low-flow fixtures. The
base approach is to use the following for all areas of a hotel including Public Areas, Back
of House, and Guestrooms/Suites:

Toilets 1.28 gallons/ flush (5.0 l / f) or dual flush toilets

Urinals 1/8 gallon (1 pint) / flush (0.5 l / f)
Wash Basins –non-food service areas 1.5 gallons / min. (5.0 l/m)
Wash Basins –food service areas 2.2 gallons / min. (8.3 l/m)
Showers 1.75 gallons / min. (6.5 l/m)

Public area faucets and flush valves equipped with automatic sensors can further be
utilized to help with this process. Consideration should be given to storm water and grey
water for non-potable applications, such as toilet and urinal flushing and custodial uses.

 Landscaping Water Efficiency- Develop and provide a landscaping design that allows the
reduction or elimination of irrigation water for the vegetative areas on the hotel property.

o Reduce Irrigated Areas by 50%: MINIMUM STANDARD – Utilize native and/or

adaptive plant species in the landscape design such that the plantings require minimal
water and creative design to maximize rain coverage. Irrigation efficiencies such as drip
irrigation shall be utilized to apply water directly to the plants root system along with
smart controllers that sense ground moisture and exterior conditions.
o Irrigation Concepts: MINIMUM STANDARD – Irrigation concepts shall include
harvesting rainwater & run-off into cisterns / retention ponds, recycling wastewater such
as from condensate recovery, cooling towers blow-down, & laundries rinse cycle, and
use of non-potable water where allowed by regulatory authorities. This non-potable
water may be recovered at the site, or purchased from municipalities.
o No Irrigation: RECOMMENDED – Develop and provide a landscaping design that
requires no irrigation after the first year of growth at the site. Plants that are indigenous
or adaptive to the climate and microsystems should be utilized.
o No Potable Water Use: RECOMMENDED – Develop and provide an irrigation design
using captured rainwater, run-off, recycled waste water, recycled grey water, or water
treated and conveyed by a public agency specifically for non-potable irrigation.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Energy & Atmosphere

Energy & Atmosphere

Commissioning
• Commissioning of the Building Energy Systems: MINIMUM STANDARD – Verify that all
the energy related systems are installed, calibrated, and perform based on the project
requirements, design, and construction documents. The commissioning process shall
ensure reduced energy use, lower operating costs, and improved occupant comfort. Initiate
the commissioning process during the beginning of the design process and following the
scope below:

• Retain a Commissioning Authority that has documented experience in commissioning at

least two hotel building projects to lead, review and oversee the completion of the
commissioning process. The credentials of this consultant shall be provided and
approved by Operator prior to contracting these services.
• This Commissioning Authority shall be independent of the project’s design and
construction management and he/she reports directly to the Owner. Operator shall receive
copies of interim, draft, and final reports.
• The Commissioning Authority’s scope shall include: incorporation of commissioning
requirements into the construction documents, development and implementation of a
commissioning plan, verification of the installation and performance of the systems to be
commissioned, and completion of a summary commissioning report.
• Systems that must be commissioned include: both passive and active HVAC&R systems
and their controls, lighting and daylighting controls, domestic hot water systems, and
renewable energy systems.
• Conduct commissioning design reviews prior to mid-construction documents phase.
• Review the applicable contractor submittals of components and systems being
commissioned for compliance with project requirements and basis of design.
• Develop a systems manual for the commissioned systems
• Verify that the requirements for training are completed
• Review the building operations within 10 months after the substantial completion
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Energy & Atmosphere

Energy Performance
 Minimum Energy Performance: MINIMUM STANDARD – Establish a minimum level of
energy efficiency for the building and systems. The design must comply with the mandatory
provisions of ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 – 2004 in Section 5.4, 6.4, 7.4, 8.4, 9.4 and
10.4 and the prescriptive requirements in Sections 5.5, 6.5, 7.5 and 9.5. Alternatively to the
prescriptive requirements, the performance requirements of the same Standard addressed in
Section 11 may be met.
Scope of requirements addressed by ASHRAE 90.1 – 2004: Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential is as follows:
Section 5: Building Envelope.
Section 6: Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (including parking garage ventilation,
freeze protection, exhaust air energy recovery and condenser heat recovery for
service water heating).
Section 7: Service water heating (including swimming pools).
Section 8: Power (including all building power distribution systems.
Section 9: Lighting (including lighting for exit signs, building exterior, grounds and parking
garage).
Section 10: Other equipment (including all permanently wired electrical motors).
 Energy Performance Optimization: MINIMUM STANDARD – Ensure that the building’s
energy performance will exceed the established baseline by a minimum of 15%. Provide a
whole building Energy Simulation using the Building Performance Rating Method included in
Appendix G of ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 – 2004, which includes the comparison of the
building design against a baseline building that complies with Appendix G. Some of the
fundamental strategies that can improve energy performance are reducing demand,
harvesting free energy, increasing efficiency and recovering waste energy.
 Measurement & Verification: MINIMUM STANDARD – Develop a Measurement and
Verification plan that evaluates the building’s energy systems performance, for a minimum of
the first year of building’s operation after the completion of its construction. International
Performance Measurement & Verification Protocol (IPMVP) Volume III: Concepts and
Options for Determining Energy Saving in New Construction, April 2003, to be used for this
purpose. The plan shall be consistent with Option D of IPMVP (Whole Building Calibrated
Simulation, Savings Estimation). Compare the actual energy use of the building and its
systems with the performance predicted by a calibrated computer model. Calibrate by
adjusting the as-built simulation to reflect the actual operating conditions and parameters.
Install the necessary metering devices to measure energy use, track the performance of
estimated compared to actual performance by component or system to evaluate the energy
efficiency. (Reference source United States Green Building Council's (USGBC) LEED)
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CRITERIA

Sustainable Design Criteria

Energy & Atmosphere

Refrigerant Management
• Refrigerant Management: MINIMUM STANDARD – Specify that no Chlorofluorocarbons
(CFC) based refrigerants shall be used in the heating, ventilating, air-conditioning and
refrigerating systems of a building to help reduce ozone depletion. If existing HVAC systems
contain CFC and these systems are reused, develop a replacement schedule for these
systems.
Specify that refrigerants shall comply with the Montreal Protocol, don’t contribute to ozone
depletion, and minimize direct contributions to global warming.
Establish a threshold for the combined contributions to ozone depletion and global warming
potential. The formula providing the upper limit for these combined contributions is as follows:
LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ” 100
Where LCGWP is the Lifecycle Direct Global Warming Potential in pounds of carbon dioxide
per ton-year and LCODP is the Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential in pounds of CFC11 per
ton-year. In both cases, ton refers to the unit of cooling capacity of refrigeration systems.
For detailed calculations of this threshold for the combined contributions to ozone depletion
and global warming potential, please refer to LEED for New Construction and Major
Renovation Reference Manual Version 2.2.

Use of Renewable Energy

• On Site Renewable Energy: MINIMUM STANDARD – Explore the feasibility of using on-
site renewable energy, rather than nonrenewable energy, in order to reduce environmental
and economic impacts of fossil fuel energy use. Target 5-15% of building energy cost to be
offset by the use of on-site renewable energy.
Some of the applicable on-site renewable energy systems include: photovoltaic systems,
solar thermal system, bio-fuel based electrical system, geothermal heating systems,
geothermal electric systems, low-impact hydro electric power systems, wave and tidal power
systems. Calculations for energy cost supplied by the renewable energy systems to be as
per the proposed building performance determined in accordance with Appendix G of
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 – 2004.
• Green Power: RECOMMENDED – Use grid-source, renewable energy technologies on a
net zero pollution basis. Provide when applicable a minimum of 35% of the building’s electric
power from renewable sources under a contract for two or more years. According to LEED,
green power is derived from solar, wind, geothermal, biomass or low impact hydro sources.
Renewable sources are defined by Center for Resource Solutions (CRS) Green-e products
certification requirements. Refer to www.green-e.org for additional details on Green-e
program.
Green power may be purchased from a Green-e certified power marketer, from a Green-e
accredited utility program, through Green-e Tradable Renewable Certificates, or from supply
that meets Green-e renewable power definition. This definition may vary.

30.22
SUSTAINABLE DESIG
Operational Concept
The Mechanical Systems consist of heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning systems
(HVAC). The design and operation of these systems must minimally provide a safe and
comfortable environment for all building occupants, while conserving energy and
minimizing operating costs.

HVAC – System Design & Selection

The requirements for heating, ventilating and air-conditioning vary widely due to climatic
variations at different geographical locations. Design conditions, including outdoor and
indoor dry bulb temperatures (DB), wet bulb temperatures (WB) and relative humidity
(RH), must be carefully evaluated to ensure that the various components of HVAC
systems and plants will create a comfortable, secure and healthy environment for the
building occupants.
Cooling and heating degree days shall use 18°C as base temperature. Unnecessary
over design must be avoided by consideration of accurate diversity factors while
ensuring that adequate standby capacities are included in the design.
Sustainable Design
In combinationwith the separateTHE OPERATOR publication Sustainable Design Criteria,
regionally available sustainable design concepts are to be considered throughout the
design of the building systems for the project. As practical, the latest innovations that
reduce: energy use, water consumption, waste generation, and harmful emissions into
the environment are to be evaluated.
All consultants are expected to collaborate and contribute in creating an optimized
design that embraces efficiency and sustainability.
Design Conditions, Outdoor
Design calculations shall minimally be based on procedures and data established by
ASHRAE, unless the local engineering society or local Meteorological Department can
offer more accurate data. ASHRAE 0.4% Cooling Design Conditions, and 99.6% Heating
Design Conditions (or equivalent values) should be utilized in the required calculations.
In regions for which engineering society data are not available, an analysis shall be
made based on a minimum of five years of climatological data obtained from
Government Meteorological Departments, or the nearest airport, together with data
published by leading manufacturers of air-conditioning equipment.

31
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Design Conditions, Indoors

See Attachment: Minimum Cooling Standards
See Attachment: Minimum Heating Standards
MEP Space Requirements
The basic minimum space requirements for the installation of all MEP systems in the
building are included in the following attachment.
See Attachment: Minimum Standards - MEP Space Requirements
Space must minimally be sufficient to allow removal and replacement of all major
equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ installation instructions.
Sufficient headroom clearance must be provided together with suitable direct access to
all serviceable parts.
Final area allocations and locations for MEP equipment shall be as agreed with THE OPERATOR
International Technical Services (T.S.) Architects / Engineers during the early design
phases.
Ventilation Rates
Indoor air quality must comply with the following Minimum Ventilation Standards, or the
current issue of ASHRAE Standard 62.1 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Quality,” if
more stringent.
See Attachment: Minimum Ventilation Standards
Ventilation rates and additional or supplementary ventilation must be adequate to
prevent accumulation of heat or build up of contaminants, odors, or fumes.
In all public and guestroom areas where tobacco smoking is allowed, separate, isolated
air handler(s) shall be provided which serve only those areas. No recirculation of supply
air from smoking to non-smoking areas is permitted. In addition, electro-static filters or
similar devices to remove smoke odor are to be incorporated into the return air duct
system of the air handlers serving areas where smoking is permitted.
The system design and equipment specification should seek to improve HVAC efficiency
without reducing indoor air quality in order to minimize energy consumption. (E.g. heat
recovery systems, CO2 sensors, volatile organic compound sensors, variable speed
motors and pumps).
Ionization or electro-static filter system is also recommended to maintain or further
improve the IAQ of a space. Uses of these systems are subject to THE OPERATOR's approval of
products’ use and systems design.
Air Transfer
The design engineer shall evaluate the transfer of air from one space to another,
provided the contaminant levels of the air being transfered is suitable for this purpose.
Areas normally suitable for air transfer are typically adjacent and similar in use or
function.

32
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Room Pressurization
Mechanical supply, exhaust and transfer air needs to be provided for areas to be
maintained in positive or negative pressure with respect to their adjacent spaces as
indicated in the following.
See Attachment: Minimum Standards for Room Pressurization
System Network Zoning and Sub Metering
Zoning of distribution networks for all utilities throughout the hotel shall be designed to
provide metering for each of the following individual areas: restaurant and associated
kitchen, fitness center and spa, entertainment center, banqueting areas, casino, retail
shops, apartment units and detached buildings, for the purpose of energy management.
See Minimum Recommended Sub Metering Matrix at the BAS Chapter for Reference.
Acoustic Design Criteria
The Minimum Standards-Indoor Noise Criteria for A/C Design indicates NC (Noise
Criteria) levels, and is found within T.S. Engineering Recommendations and
Minimum Standards.
See Attachment: Minimum Standards - Indoor Noise Criteria for A/C Design
These have the following limitations:
 Values are quoted for maximum design conditions.
 The values are based on the assumption that any sound produced by properly
designed and installed HVAC equipment is typically steady and broadband in
character.
 The criteria shall be reduced by 8 dB for impulsive sounds or sound containing more
pure tones.
Methods of Evaluating HVAC System Noise
 System noise level shall be evaluated, and then controlled, to achieve a satisfactory
acoustic environment.
 To determine if the recommended NC level designs have been met, the measured
levels of at least 3 of the 4 octave bands between 250-2000 Hz should be within the
5 dB NC range.
Zoning
Zoning arrangement, control and division of the air-conditioning and air handling plant
into various subsystems shall take into consideration:
 Operational requirements of the hotel
 Internal load variations
 Hours of occupancy
 Daily and annual solar gains
 Sensible heat ratios
 Control of odors
 Ventilation rates
 Metering of individual hotel areas
Duct Velocities
Duct velocities must be within the following ranges to ensure acceptable noise levels.

33
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Fan outlets: 6.50 to 10.00 m/sec

Main duct: 5.00 to 6.50 m/sec
Branch ducts: 3.00 to 4.50 m/sec
Risers: 3.00 to 3.50 m/sec
Guestroom Risers: 3.00 to 4.50 m/sec

Piping Systems
Piping for required flow rates must be sized to avoid excessive fluid velocities resulting in
noise, high-pressure drop, and increased energy consumption. The design of piping
systems should also take full advantage of load diversities.
 Minimum Installation Parameters
- Fluid velocity shall not exceed 1.2 m/sec. in pipes 50 mm or smaller. For size
above 50 mm 2 m/sec maximum velocity for occupied areas and 3.0 m/sec for
unoccupied areas.
- Provide balancing valves in the return of major sub circuits serving different areas
or different functions.
- Automatic air vents to be installed at all high points in the system.
- All vertical risers to have automatic air vents at the top, isolation valves at top and
bottom, and a dirt leg with 10 mm drain connection.
- Piping shall not be routed through electrical equipment rooms and shall be
adequately located away from all electrical equipment, in compliance with NFPA
requirements.

Guestroom Service Shafts

The guestroom service shafts shall measure 1.5m² maximum and accommodate the
following, or as applicable to the project:
 Heating Water Supply and Return riser pipes.
 Chilled Water Supply and Return riser pipes.
 Soil, Waste, and Vent riser pipes.
 Storm Drain riser pipes.
 Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return riser pipes.
 Domestic Cold Water riser pipes.
 Exhaust riser duct.
 Primary (ventilation) Air riser duct.
 Condensate Drain riser pipes.
 Grey water (if applicable) riser pipes.
It is highly recommended that the soil and waste risers are combined to minimize space
and cost unless a grey water collection system is utilized, and the local codes do not
permit otherwise. If larger service shafts are required, prior written approval from
T.S. is required. An access panel for each shaft shall be provided on each guestroom
floor, and measure a minimum of 60 cm wide x 100 cm high. The preferred location for
the access panels is the guestroom corridor wall.

34
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Energy Conservation
Energy conservation techniques and energy efficient equipment must be incorporated
into the design wherever possible including:
 100% outside air economizer cycles
 Enthalpy Control of economizer
 Secondary/transfer use of air to ventilate and condition such areas as garages, plant
rooms and storage.
 Heat recovery from major AHU’s at exhaust air streams.
 Heat recovery from chillers for domestic hot water pre-heating.
 Heat recovery from boilers for pre-heating make-up water or domestic hot water.
 Cooling tower economizer cycle.
 Improved filtration and microbial control of supply air and within ductwork systems.
 Variable fresh air supply related to occupancy (e.g. Ballroom).
 Water treatment to reduce cooling tower water make-up requirements, preferably with
minimal chemical agents.
 Spot cooling in kitchens and laundry.
 Desiccant dehumidifiers.
 Air or ground source heat pump.
 Variable frequency drives for all 3- phase motorized equipment.
 Variable speed kitchen hood exhaust.
 Occupancy sensors tied to guestroom fan coil units.
Advanced evaluation methods should be used to determine the economic efficiency of
the energy conservation investment. Appropriately used, these can result in substantial
energy conservation, reduction of equipment investment cost and subsequent operating
costs.
Refer to the Sustainable Design chapter for additional initiatives.

Heating

Equipment and Component Selection

Careful analysis is necessary to select a heating system that is effective and both
environmentally and cost efficient. Effectiveness is determined by the ability of the
system to meet the heating needs of the building and to create a comfortable
environment for the building occupants. Costs associated with the system must be
estimated over the life cycle of the equipment.
 Hot water, as opposed to steam or electricity, is recommended as the medium for
heat transport.
 In air-conditioned spaces, the heating systems shall be selected and sized to operate
in conjunction with the air-conditioning system.
 Heating units in non-air conditioned spaces to be designed to handle the entire
heating load.
 In areas with winter outside design conditions below 5ºC., all perimeter glass areas,
unless protected by a dedicated zone of the air-conditioning system containing a
reheat coil, must be provided with a separate under floor/baseboard heating system
located below the window to offset cold drafts.

35
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 In guest bathrooms, hot water or electric under floor type heaters or towel warmers
may be provided depending on the severity of the climate and location of the
bathroom with respect to exterior walls and windows. In some countries, the towel
warmer may be used to compensate for part or total heat loss. Both units to be
equipped with separate thermostatic controls inter-locked with the guestroom
temperature controller.

Boiler Plant
Boiler Selection/Sizing
 The selection of boilers for the hotel shall be determined by load and pressure
requirements, and by local codes and regulations, which may restrict capacity,
pressure or any combination thereof. Steam boilers minimally require an operating
pressure of 8.5 bar to meet laundry high-pressure steam requirements.
 Provide a minimum of two individual units, each sized to provide approximately 2/3 of
the peak load, except in locations where heating degree-day units exceed 2,000+
(centigrade) annually or where service parts and maintenance are not reliable. In
such locations the minimum selection shall be three units, each sized for fifty percent
of peak load unless otherwise as required by local code. This variable capacity
permits one unit to be removed from service for cleaning and maintenance without
seriously impairing the operation of the hotel.
Steam Usage
 Steam boilers are minimally required for full sized laundry/valet services. In instances
where a limited quantity of steam consuming equipment is used, a small steam
generator is the preferred configuration.
See Attachment: Minimum Standards - Steam Pressure Requirements
Hot Water Boilers
 Hot water boilers are recommended for domestic hot water production and winter
heating. In instances where there are no steam requirements (e.g. no large laundry
equipment) the use of hot water boilers in conjunction with a small steam generator
for the valet shop is the preferred configuration.
 Heat pumps shall also be given consideration where they could be economically
justified.
Provision for Absorption Chiller Installation
 If absorption machines are used for central chilled water generation, the minimum
configuration is three boilers with a capacity of 50% of peak load each or as permitted
by local code.
 If the hotel requires additional steam for uses other than absorption, it is preferred that
additional boilers are installed, rated at a compatible pressure for the equipment they
intend to drive.
Boiler Design
 Boiler construction, efficiency, safety equipment and emission levels must minimally
meet current ASME codes or local prevailing codes, whichever is demonstrably the
greater.

36
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 All boilers must minimally be of an all welded construction design, packaged, fire
tube, Scotch Marine type, four pass, and furnished with guaranteed efficiency not less
than 90% at 100% of rated input.
 Combustion controls shall minimally be state-of-the-art, fully automatic, electronically
programmed and self-diagnostic. The control system shall minimally include pre
ignition purge cycle, ignition control, low and high fire control, fully automatic
combustion and fuel to air ratio to achieve highest accuracy and efficiency of
combustion. Flame out shut down, sequence cueing lights, annunciation with audible
fault alarms and automatic shut down are also required.
 The boiler shall be skid mounted and ready to connect.
 Condensing boilers shall be considered where applicable, for high efficiency and low
environmental impact.
Direct-Fired Chiller/Heater Units
 Chiller/heater combination packages should be considered where they could be
economically justified.
District Heating and Cooling Utilities
 Where available or required by local code, district heating and cooling are to be
considered after a thorough analysis of life cycle, costing and environmental impact.
- The designer shall include all necessary spaces, heat exchangers, steam traps,
pressure reducing valves, etc., commensurate with the system it serves.
- Main metering shall be provided at main pipe connecting to the city line. Statistical
metering shall comply with Section “Boiler Plant Auxiliaries” below.
- Similar requirements are applicable to cooling (chilled water) supply services.
Boiler Plant Auxiliaries
 Deaerator
- Deaerator (for high pressure, 8.5 bar boilers) shall be of the automatically
controlled packaged type, designed to reduce the oxygen content of the effluent
water to not more than 0.005 cc/liter. Surge deaerator assembly shall be a single
tank divided into two completely separated compartments with two (2) transfer
pumps and one (1) feed pump per boiler with one (1) standby pump and
automatic controls.
 Fuel Oil System
- Oil transfer pumps shall be dual rotary gear pumps directly coupled to motors,
with duplex strainers and relief and shut off valves.
 Blow Down System
- A continuous blow down system capable of handling blow down requirements of
boilers, provided with heat recovery system to preheat boiler makeup water, shall
be fitted. Blow off tank with tangential inlet and thermostatically controlled cold-
water valve to reduce temperature to a maximum of 40°C prior to discharging to
drain shall be provided.
 Sample Coolers
- Provide a minimum of two (2), one for sampling continuous blow down from each
boiler, and one for sampling the main steam header and deaerator storage
section.

37
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Alarm Devices
- Antipollution devices and alarms shall minimally include: smoke intensity
indicators, oxygen analyzers, and strip chart recorders to monitor smoke intensity,
C02 and NOx content, and stack temperature. An alarm system, both local and
linked to the BAS, shall alert the operator when preset levels are being exceeded.
 Condensate Pump Sets
- Condensate pump sets shall be packaged type duplex pumps with receiver.
Pumps shall automatically alternate every 24 hours.
 Combustion Air
- Ventilation and combustion air to be provided for each boiler, supplied by a
separate duct and fan for each boiler.
 Safety Valve System
- A minimum of two safety valves from each boiler shall be piped into a common
manifold, vented to the exterior of the building and sited to ensure harmless
discharge at full boiler plant capacity. The manifold and vent shall be fabricated of
standard Schedule 40 pipe sized for 150% of combined boiler capacity.
 Fuel Storage
- Unless restricted by local code, a minimum storage of ten (10) days consumption
at peak load rate is required for fossil fuelled boilers. In areas where gas fuelled
boilers are used and gas supply may be subject to interruption, dual fuelled
boilers must be used and a minimum storage of alternative fuel equaling seven (7)
days consumption is also required.
- Fuel oil storage tanks must be constructed of double wall steel or double wall
fiberglass with all required openings, access manhole, electronic and visual
contents gauges with low-level alarm.
- All tanks shall be anchored with ballast not less than 125% of maximum flotation.
- All fuel storage facilities shall be below grade, remote from all structures and
street traffic. Provide adequately sized access routes for refueling.
- Provide fuel leak spill monitoring and containment of fuel leaks.
- Provide an automatic shut-off valve between the main diesel storage tank and day
tank interfaced to the fire alarm system to shut off the fuel line in the event of fire.
- Provide safety shut-off valves on the supply pipes of both main tank(s) and the
day tank(s).
 Chemical Treatment
- Minimum of two (2) chemical feed systems. One is for direct feeding of chemicals
into each boiler, and one for direct feeding of chemicals into the storage section of
the deaerator. Each system shall be provided with tank and pumps, dual pumps
for boiler feed, and simplex pump for deaerator feed. Provide a minimum of three
(3) months initial supply of all chemicals.
 Metering
- Provide at all boilers statistical, direct reading, non-resettable meters connected to
the BAS, for the measuring and recording of the combined steam and/or hot water
output on a 24-hour chart.
- Locate meters to record consumption at major users and areas within the hotel,
(i.e. space heating, domestic hot water heat exchangers).
- Provide fuel metering on the fuel line of each boiler; connect to BAS
- Provide make-up water metering at the common water make-up line; connect to
the BAS.

38
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Chimney
Chimneys for boilers (hot water and steam generating units) must be adequately sized to
handle the total simultaneous flue gas output of the boilers and other fuel fired
equipment at correct velocities.
Location
 Immediately adjacent to the boiler installation to minimize length of breaching.
 Must terminate away from and avoid cross contamination or short-circuiting with
outside air intakes, air-cooled chillers, cooling towers, and adjacent structures.
Construction
 To be minimally enclosed within a two-hour, fire resistive structure, when within the
building envelope.
 A naturally ventilated annular space, to prevent heat build-up or undue heat transfer
into interior spaces, shall be provided between the chimney and shaft walls. Openings
shall be provided at the annular space to promote natural, convective cooling.
 Chimney may also be pre-fabricated, double-wall stainless steel. Such chimney shall,
if imported, conform to all governing codes in the country of origin, as well as local
code. A naturally ventilated annular space shall be provided.
 Chimneys may also be constructed of heavy steel welded plate with a minimum 6 mm
wall thickness or greater if conditions warrant, insulated with 100 mm of hydrous
calcium silicate blocks supported by pins welded on the exterior of the chimney and
tied with stainless bands. Such a steel stack must also be self-supporting with a
naturally ventilated air space large enough for repairs. Pre-fabricated stacks of the
factory built jacketed refractory type are acceptable when installed with annular
space, and under strict assembly and installation methods of the manufacturer.
 When chimneys penetrate sleeping floors of a hotel situated in a seismic zone, a
seismic switch shall be provided and set to shut down all boilers at pre-set seismic
values. The seismic device shall be calibrated, sealed by the manufacturer, and
installed in strict accord with their instructions.
Flue Gas Analysis
 Electronic flue gas analysis and monitoring and control of the combustion process
shall be provided to ensure that efficient combustion occurs at all boiler firing rates.
 The system shall also monitor smoke emissions to conform to prevailing standards or
EPA requirements, whichever is the more stringent.
Solid Fuel Burning Oven and Fireplaces
 Solid fuel (e.g. wood, charcoal) burning ovens or grills in kitchens, and fireplaces in
public area or suites, minimally require a separate exhaust flue or chimney. No other
appliances shall be connected to an exhaust flue serving a solid fuel oven, grill or
fireplace. As practical and allowed by code, multiple fireplaces may be connected to a
common chimney.
 Refer to Fire and Life Safety and Kitchen Exhaust Systems sections for additional
requirements.

39
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Air Conditioning & Ventilation

Equipment and Component Selection

Air-conditioning systems and equipment components shall be selected to best serve the
needs for a particular climatic condition and in accordance with the following:
 In moderate climates, air handling units for public areas are to contain a provision for
humidification. Through dampers, air rates should be adjustable between 100%
outside and 100% return air capability. This arrangement, with the appropriate
sensors and controls, permits the air handler to meet the solar, ventilation and internal
loads of the space(s) it serves by utilizing up to 100% outside air, when climatic
conditions permit, for economizer (i.e. “free”) cooling. The 100% return capability shall
permit fast warm-up or cool down of space served. Instrumentations on these units
must be capable of enthalpy control, manual override, fast warm-up and fast cool
down.
 Preheat coils are required in climates with winter design temperature at 5°C or lower.
Air velocity through the preheat coils shall not exceed 2.8 m/sec.
 Heat recovery coils of run around type, when used in areas with winter design
temperature of 5°C or lower, shall be installed down stream of preheat coils.
 In tropical and subtropical areas, dehumidification is required in addition to required
controls and dampers to minimize outside air and maximize return air quantities
based on the occupant- load of an area and its actual ventilation requirements.

Guestroom Air-Conditioning
All Guestrooms shall be designed for individual temperature control.
 System design and equipment
- Guestroom air-conditioning units shall be fan coil type, horizontally mounted
above the false ceiling. Typical placement is above entry or bathroom areas.
- For energy savings, thermostats shall automatically reset to 26°C for cooling and
20°C for heating when guest leaves the room. Refer to Fan Coil Unit (FCU)
section for more preset schedules. Variable speed fans shall also be considered
for energy efficiency.
- The supply grille shall be double deflection type linear diffuser or bar grille with
outside bars elevated and adjusted to a 15° up angle above horizontal, and
vertical rear bars that are adjustable. Finish to be selected by the Interior
Designer.
- Return air grille to be located in the ceiling of the entry vestibule.
- Return air grille should be separate from the access panel to the FCU.
- In climates with winter design temperatures of –15°C or lower, an additional
radiant or convection type heat source shall be provided under the window with
interlock to the FCU through the room thermostat.
- In locations where the daily changeover from heating to cooling occurs in excess
of 10 days per year, a 4-pipe fan coil unit installation with dual coil /dual control
valves is minimally required.
- In locations where the daily changeover occurs less than 10 days per year, a
zoned 2-pipe installation is acceptable.

40
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Zoning shall allow simultaneous heating and cooling of different areas within the
building as needed.
- An electric reheat coil, of the low surface temperature type, shall be provided at
FCU’S for humidity control where primary air is not viable and the outdoor relative
humidity level is 60% or higher.
 In areas where absorption type refrigeration machines are selected, fan coil units
shall be connected to the emergency power plant.
 Primary Air Supply
- The fan coil unit systems must be combined with an independent primary air
system also known as a Dedicated Outdoor Air System (DOAS), to bring pre-
treated outdoor air into the guestroom at the minimum rate of 100 m³/hr. Suites
require higher fresh airflow rates and must be adjusted as a percentage of the
actual guestroom area (E.g. A “three-bay’ suite would receive three times the
3
amount of fresh air as a single-bay guestroom, i.e. 300 m / hr).
- The combined air-conditioning system shall provide conditioned air to the room in
accordance with the following:

Cool Dehumidify Heat Humidify

PAU/DOAS X X X X
FCU X X X

- Primary Air Unit (PAU) and Fan Coil Unit (FCU) system piping shall be
independent of each other to achieve maximum comfort conditions during all
seasons.
- All penetrations/openings through the corridor wall to the interior of the guestroom
shall be fire protected, smoke protected and acoustically treated in accordance to
T.S. Design Recommendation and Minimum Standards.
- Primary air shall feed all guestroom FCU’s through the service shaft. All primary
air supply to guestrooms shall be fully ducted to provide treated fresh air at a rate
in excess of the exhausted air volume to ensure positive pressure in the
guestroom. (E.g. At a supply air rate of 100 m³/hr the typical exhaust air rate
would be of 85 m³/hr). Primary air duct to terminate at FCU supply grille/register.
 Exhaust System
- Make – up air for bathroom exhaust system shall be transferred from the
guestroom by means of a 12 mm undercut of the bathroom door. Bathroom door
grilles are not accepted.
- Exhaust air grille shall be in accordance with interior design requirements and
there shall be at least two locations: one above the WC cubicle, the other above
the shower.

Presidential Suite Air Conditioning System

 The Air Conditioning System for the Presidential Suite is to be a separate, self-
contained system serving only that area. The fresh air intake for it is to be located in a
secure location isolated from public and unauthorized access. The outside air duct is
to be equipped with a 100% effective (zero percent leakage) motorized damper, with
spring closing, for sealing off all outside air in an emergency. Control for damper to be
provided within the suite at thermostat. System to be connected to emergency power.

41
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Computer Room/ PABX Room Air-Conditioning System

 System design shall be a close-control system to keep the room condition to a narrow
range. The air-conditioning shall be supplied to the room via perforated floor panels
via the under floor plenum of the raised floor. Place return air grilles in the ceiling.
 A second system separate direct expansion split A/C unit shall be provided and be
connected to normal and emergency power.

Chiller Plant
Central Plant
Central refrigeration plant for air-conditioning shall be of the chilled water type, supplying
the various air handling and fan coil units on a 24-hour per day basis, with months of
operation determined by local climate. Type selection, sizing, fuel selection and
examination of energy efficient systems and chillers must be provided by the consultant.
 Chiller machine types
- To be considered are: open or hermetic centrifugal, and screw type.
 Plant sizing
- Calculation of heating and cooling loads shall conform with the ASHRAE Cooling
and Heating Load Calculation Principles, latest edition.
 Calculation of space cooling loads shall be based on full occupancy, full
utilization of lights, and other heat generating equipment.
 In meeting rooms and ballrooms, in addition to the maximum demand lighting
load, consideration shall be given to temporary loads likely in the space such
as theatrical lighting, portable amplification equipment, etc.
- Quantity
 In moderate climate properties, three chillers, each sized at 35% of the
building block cooling load are minimally required.
 In tropical climate and resort properties, a minimum of three chillers shall be
required. Two shall be equally sized at 50% of the building block cooling load
and the third shall be sized at a capacity equal to 30% of the block cooling
load.
Efficiency: Equipment must meet or exceed the following at AHRI conditions:

Type Refrigerant Full Load IPVL

Centrifugal, water cooled R-134a 0.594-0.606 kW/ton .358-0.362 kW/ton

Screw, water cooled R-134a 0.670-0.727 kW/ton 0.509-0.545 kW/ton

Screw, air cooled R-407c 9.6 EER 12.1 EER

- Low load and part load considerations are required. Internal cooling loads in
public areas or unusual winter solar load on a small portion of the building may
indicate the need for a small jockey chiller. Alternately, two of the chillers may be
equipped with variable speed control.
- Selection of chiller machine types and refrigerants shall be in accordance with
prevailing international protocol, in addition to local code requirements.
Refrigerants to be free of CFCs.

42
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Additional Selection Considerations

- Chemical and physical properties of available water and its cost.
- Availability and cost of hotel produced steam.
- Availability and cost of district steam.
- The economics of combination of variable speed compressor and pre rotation
vane control on centrifugal refrigeration equipment shall all be investigated.
- Where electrically driven equipment is selected, the most energy efficient machine
over the full operating range with actual condenser water temperatures shall be
the basis for evaluation and design.
- Where conditions warrant, absorption machines shall be either double-effect
steam or directly-fired type.
- Where absorption machines are selected, due solely to lack of reliable electrical
service, (power outages exceed 250 hours annually), and when the number of
cooling degree-days (centigrade) are at 2,000 or more, 50% of the diversified
absorption capacity with all auxiliary equipment shall be connected to the
emergency power plant. (See other sections of the Mechanical and Electrical
Systems chapters for additional details.)
- In locations where water is extremely scarce and/or expensive, or where the
quality of water is adversely corrosive, air-cooled condensers should be used, as
long as they are economically justifiable. The location must be carefully studied to
ensure that T.S.’ Acoustical Performance requirements are met, sufficient
space for this equipment is available and that it does not affect the architectural or
landscape aesthetics.
- Steam turbine, diesel engine, double-effect, or directly-fired absorption types
when used, offer potential for high-grade heat recovery. This recovered heat
should be used to preheat domestic water, and reheat at air handling units for
temperature and humidity control. Reciprocating, screw type and centrifugal
machines offer low-grade heat recovery potential and the recovered heat may
also be used appropriately.
- In areas of low Wet Bulb temperatures, conditions could provide an opportunity to
divert cooling tower water directly, or through a heat exchanger, to do free
sensible cooling.
 Winter Operation
- For winter operation of air-cooled condensers, industrial grade (phosphate based)
ethylene glycol or propylene glycol with corrosion inhibitors without fouling shall be
used up to 50% glycol-to-water solution: in chillers and condenser water loops.
Glycol to have ZERO silicate content. Contractors shall confirm to hotel and
owners prior to THE OPERATOR’s take over of chillers.
 Pump Circuits
- Chilled water and condenser water pump circuits shall be arranged for maximum
flexibility such that any pump can operate with any refrigeration machine or
cooling tower cell.
 Chilled Water Circuit
- Variable Primary Flow should be considered before primary and secondary loop
system for capital operational cost advantage.
- In primary and secondary loop circuit configuration variable speed pumps in the
secondary loop and individual matching pumps for each chiller is recommended.
Alternatively, pressure differential bypass control valves shall be installed on
chilled water circuits where two-way valves are used.

43
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 “Thermal storage” technologies should be considered, depending on electricity rates,

as an operating cost conservation measure. This technology may also yield
investment cost advantages for short peak demand loads.
 Other means of cooling such as deep lake or sea water cooling, if available, should
be considered.
Cooling Towers
 Configuration
- Cooling towers shall be arranged in a multi-cell configuration, with one (1) cell for
each refrigeration machine, and piped so that each cell can be isolated and
operated independently.
- Cooling towers may either be induced-draft or forced-draft type, minimally
constructed of materials best suited for the ambient conditions and corrosiveness
of the condensing water.
- Shall be sized 30% more than the calculated maximum capacity.
- The design must, whenever possible, be based on complete and comprehensive
chemical analysis of samples taken from the actual water source at various times
of the year including wet and dry seasons.
- The design must provide easy cleaning of the entire condenser water drainage
system and all other components. To avoid biofilm and Legionella, piping and
other inaccessible warm areas must be minimized.
- Motors are to be positioned outside of the moisture laden paths.
 Location
- Prevailing wind conditions must be taken into account in selecting a suitable site.
- Minimally avoid objectionable noise levels and staining of all structures from
discharge air.
- At a safe distance away from chimneys, automobile exhaust, air intakes, dust,
sand and other adverse elements.
 Water Source and Quality
- If it is contemplated to obtain condensing water from wells on site, the
specifications of all equipment which will be affected, must be held in abeyance
until actual samples of the water can be tested and T.S. approval received. In
such cases, every effort shall be made to have these wells drilled before
completion of the engineering work. If this procedure proves impossible or
impractical, the specifying engineer shall make an assumption based on the best
information available, for bidding purposes only. Only at such time as water
samples have been obtained and evaluated with T.S. approval, can equipment
be released for manufacturing.
 Water Treatment
- Special provisions for treatment of cooling tower water must be made to minimize
concentrations of corrosive elements, scale and biological fouling. The water
treatment system shall be designed to control scale, slime and algae for optimal
system efficiency and shall also be designed to reduce bacteria levels.
 An automatic chemical dosing system for cooling tower water treatment shall
be provided. The system shall have adjustable dosing capacity with strip chart
recorder of maintained conductivity, and an alarm for suspended and
dissolved solids.
 Two types of chemical dosage are required, a biocide to fight bacteria such as
Legionella, and a scale and corrosion inhibitor. Dosing of biocide will be made

44
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

periodically once or twice per week based on time clock, and the dosing of
inhibitor will be based on a flow meter installed on the bleed line.
 Conductivity and a pH sensor must be installed on the condenser water, which
will trigger the bleeding of water through a solenoid valve when the measured
values of conductivity or pH rises above the pre set values.
 In areas with water hardness level higher than 200 PPM CaCO3, softening of
cooling tower makeup water is required.
 Where brackish water is in excess of 2000 PPM TDS, demineralization or use
of air-cooled condensers are to be considered.
 Water treatment chemical shall also be introduced to the closed chilled water
loop as recommended to ensure the longevity of the system. A means for
dosing for this system shall be provided.
 A water treatment program needs to be provided, include an initial three (3)
months supply of chemicals, with instructions for operating personnel, together
with periodic supervision.
 Use of non-chemical or hybrid (partial/limited chemical) water treatment
systems requires prior approval by T.S.. T.S. does not recommend the
use of non-chemical methods for control of bacteria, biofilms and Legionella.
 Winter Operation
- Where outside design conditions are below freezing, one (1) cell and all exposed
piping shall be heated and protected from freezing. Cooling tower cells where
used for winter operation must, in addition to the normal temperature control
thermostat, be equipped with a thermostat to interrupt the fan circuit when
entering air temperature is at 6°C or lower and to divert water to pan at 3°C.
 Precautions for use of surface and subsurface water
- High capacity sand filters and traps shall be provided in installations using cooling
water from lakes, streams, wells and the sea.
 Capacity
- Cooling tower capacity shall also include the load of any water-cooled kitchen
refrigeration system(s) or the like.
- Where water-cooled kitchen refrigeration units are connected to the cooling tower,
the tower and the refrigeration units and associated circulating pumps must
minimally be connected to the emergency generator.
Alternate Cooling / Heating Sources
- When a body of water such as a lake, ocean, river, etc. is close by, the designer
shall consider the possibility of utilizing these for condenser cooling instead of
cooling towers. All environmental regulations and permits must be complied with.

HVAC-Equipment-Components/Materials
The following lists features and minimum standards.
Fan Coil Units
 Horizontal Concealed Type
- To be provided with discharge collar and connected to discharge grille by means
of flexible, fire retardant, pressure tight collar, fiberglass transition duct, or
acoustically lined galvanized sheet metal duct with a flexible connection between
duct and fan coil housing. Acoustical lining and fiberglass duct shall conform to
NFPA 90A & 255.

45
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- To be installed on hanger rods anchored in the concrete slab with resilient rubber
at all contact points.
 Chassis
- Thermally and acoustically insulated, and constructed from minimum 0.8 mm
galvanized steel with flanged edges.
 Drain Pan
- Preferably stainless steel with self-extinguishing insulating material, extended
below valves with drain connectors.
 Fans
- Blow through, double width, double inlet centrifugal fans, with molded reinforced
glass fiber or aluminum fan wheels housed in formed corrosion resistant sheet
metal scrolls; mounted directly on the motor shaft.
- Double fan wheels to be statically and dynamically balanced and resiliently
mounted at all contact points with housing.
 Motor
- 3-speed (Off-Low-Medium-High) split capacitor type with thermal overload
protection as minimum.
- Variable speed drive motor and compatible controllers are recommended in lieu of
3-speed controllers.
- Permanently sealed, lubricated bearings.
- Quick disconnect motor leads.
 Coils
- Chilled and hot water coils to be ARI certified
- Seamless copper tubing expanded into vertical aluminum plate fins, maximum
spacing of 4 fins/cm, rated for working pressure of 20 bar, tested at 30 bar;
installed with flushing harness.
- Chilled water coils shall be: minimum 3-pass, maximum 4-pass; heating coils:
maximum 2-pass.
- Factory installed piping package shall include control valve(s), shut off valves with
16 mm O.D., threaded connections and automatic air vents on each coil.
- Coil headers must be fixed to the FCU casing so that the coil will not buckle while
fixing external fittings to the header.
 Controls
- Back of the House and other areas
 To be equipped with quiet operating, two-way electric valve(s)
 Digital room thermostat with LCD display and data transfer capability to the
BAS
 Temperature-set point adjustments of 1°C steps and a high and low range
limit control with at least ± 5°C
 3-speed (Off-Low-Medium-High) fan control button and a heat/cool selector
where required.
 Auto/Manual control button
 Balcony doors/windows to be equipped with micro switch to shut off the fan
coil unit when the door or window is opened.
- Guestroom
 To be equipped with quiet operating, two-way electric valves.
 Digital room thermostat with LCD display and data communication with the
room management system.
 Temperature-set point adjustments of 1°C steps and presets are as follows:

46
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Set Points Fan Speed

Room Condition
Cool Heat
Comfort: Checked-in, guest in room 24ºC 22ºC Medium
Set-back: Checked-in, guest not in 26ºC 20ºC Low
room
Stand-by: Reserved, not checked in 27ºC 18ºC Low
Economy: No reservation 29ºC 16ºC Low

 3-speed (Off-Low-Medium-High) fan control button and a heat/cool selector

where required and shall be preset to low speed.
 Auto/manual control button
 Balcony doors/windows to be equipped with micro switch to shut off the fan
coil unit when the door or window is opened.
 Dehumidification
- In tropical and sub tropical regions, the primary air system requires
dehumidification and dehumidified air is to be supplied to all guestrooms.
- FCUs within the guestrooms to further dehumidify the re-circulated air.
 Electric Reheat Units
- Factory installed magnetic contactor
- Airflow switch
- High temperature cut-out with automatic reset
- Coils shall be of low surface temperature type and interlock with fan blower.
 Filter
- Shall be rated MERV 10 based on ASHRAE Standard 52.2
 Noise Level Performance
- Noise criteria (Sound Power Level) at 1 meter forward of discharge grille, medium
soft room effect and fan at high-speed shall not exceed 35 NC in all octave bands.
- Alternatively, a higher capacity FCU may be selected for operation at medium fan
speed setting, to achieve the above criteria.
 Chilled Water and Condensate Drain Pipe Insulation
- Chilled water lines to be insulated according to Minimum Standards Piping
Insulation
- Stop valves, vent, temperature control valve and quick connection must be
covered with plasticized, non-hardening, moldable insulating material.
Air Handling Units
 Unit Design
Units to be packaged type, factory assembled from sectionalized components, e.g. fans,
coils, filters, steam humidifiers (water spray should not be used due to Legionella
potential) and dampers. The various sections and components shall consist of the
following:
- Casing
 Casing sections to be fabricated from a minimum 1.3 mm steel sheet
reinforced and braced with all welded steel angle framework phosphatised and
finished with baked enamel or twin pack epoxy. Casings to be lined with
25 mm thick neoprene faced NFPA Class 1 glass fiber insulation or equal,
meeting the requirements of NFPA 90 A.

47
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Drain Pan
 Drain pans in coil and fan sections require factory applied foamed in place
insulation, free of formaldehyde and other toxins.
- Inspection Ports
 Glazed inspection ports to be provided at cooling coil, steam humidifier and
filter sections.
 Each section to be provided with a vapor tight electrical fixture, operated by an
external switch.
- Fans
 Fans to be double width, double inlet, and non-overloading centrifugal type
with backward inclined blades connected to a common shaft.
 Bearings to be self-aligning, pre-lubricated, sealed type rated for 100,000
hours. Should bearings require periodic lubrication, lubrication fittings must be
extended to the cabinet’s exterior.
 Fan motor to be internally mounted in the fan section on an adjustable base.
Variable speed drives shall be used, as applicable.
 Drives to be multiple matched V-belt, adjustable ratio type rated at 1.5 times
the motor wattage.
 Drive pulley shall be adjustable and capable of providing required fan speed at
midpoint of the adjustment range.
 Drive to be capable of delivering rated capacity with one belt broken.
 Fan and motor to be mounted on a common base with a rubber in shear or
spring type vibration isolation.
 Provide flexible fire-retardant, pressure-tight connection on fan discharge.
 When fresh air intake connects directly to the outside, fixed louvers and bird
screens to precede the automatic/manual dampers.
- Dampers
 Damper rods shall be mounted in nylon or Teflon bearings and arranged for
automatic operation. Maximum permissible leakage in closed position is 5%.
- Filters
 Filter sections for panel filters or pre filters to be equipped with slide rails or lift
out 60 x 60 frames.
- External Drives
 Externally mounted drives to be equipped with expanded metal belt guard with
tachometer openings.
- Access Doors
 Doors shall be provided in each serviceable compartment.
 Pan type set in a raised frame, inner surface flush with the inside wall.
 Door and frame to be insulated.
 Door to be secured to the frame by hand grip latches and shall be provided
with lift handles or hinges.
 Shall be gasketed, double skin with hinges and two quick opening handles.
Water Coils
 Design
- Water coils for both heating and cooling to be of the continuous tube type
expanded into full collars of vertical plate type finned surfaces.
- Tubes shall be 16 mm O.D. seamless copper with aluminum fins. Fin spacing
shall be 2.5 mm maximum.
- Where air quality is corrosive, copper fins, solder coated and bonded, to be used.

48
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Coils to be designed for a maximum working pressure of 20 bar and 100°C, proof
tested at 35 bar and leak tested at 13 bar of air pressure underwater.
- Casings to be galvanized steel. Headers to be grey cast iron or copper.
- Coils to be selected for maximum air velocity of 2.5 m/sec. (cooling) and 4 m/sec.
(heating). Maximum fluid velocities are 2.75 m/sec. preheat and 3.5 m/sec. for
cooling.
 Capacities
- Coil capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures shall be in accordance
with ARI standard procedures or equal.
 Coil Depth
- Maximum chilled water coil depth shall not exceed 6 staggered rows. Where
deeper coils are required, they shall be selected in multiples of 4 rows with 60 cm
minimum space provided between coils, and installed in a primary and secondary
arrangement.
Ventilation Fans
 Centrifugal Fans
- Centrifugal type fan units to be complete with motors and drives mounted on
adjustable bases or slide rails.
- Units to be quiet operating, tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standards
or equal, and bear their Certified Rating Program Seal.
 Housing
- Housings are to be of airtight construction using lock seam or continuous welded
joint construction.
- Extended inlet collars to be provided for uninterrupted duct connection.
- Discharge collar to be equipped with removable angles and bolts for attaching
flexible connections.
 Fan Wheels
- Fan wheels to be of non-power overloading type with backward inclined blades.
- Continuously welded to inlet rim and hub plate.
- Wheels are to be statically and dynamically balanced, accurately aligned, and
keyed to the shaft.
 Fan Shafts
- Fan shafts to be solid, hot rolled steel accurately turned, ground and polished, and
designed to prevent deflections and oscillations.
 Bearings
- Shall be heavy duty and grease lubricated.
- Shall be selected for minimum average life in excess of 100,000 operating hours
at maximum catalogue operating conditions.
- If lubrication is required, lubrication fittings must be extended to the cabinet’s
exterior.
 Smoke Exhaust Fans
- Exhaust fans designed for smoke evacuation and cooking hoods shall be motor
and belt driven to have a single inlet, mounted on two ball bearings in pillow
blocks. Pillow blocks to be mounted outside of air stream.
- Each fan to have vibration collar of woven asbestos free fabric and a bird screen.

49
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Exhaust Fans for Hazardous Applications

- Exhaust fans designed for extraction of air laden with lint or volatile gases as from
laundry, battery roo m, paint shop, etc., to be constructed of non-sparking
materials, single inlet with outboard bearings, belt drive and bird screen.
Support
- Each fan a nd its outboard motor drive shall be supported and mou nted on a
common frame on a vibration absorbing base.
- Casing shall be mounted on a 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pad.
Kitchen Exhaust Hood Fans
- Kitchen exhaust hood fan inlet and discharge to be kept at 1 m above roof levels.
- Variable speed drives shall be considered with necessary controls.
- Motors must be resist ant to high t emperatures and be lo cated outside the air
stream.
Roof Discharge
- Exhaust discharging on roofs to have auto or g ravity louvers, rain protection and
bird screen s. Exceptions: smoke purge fans, kitchen ex haust fans, and fans
handling combustible matter to be without dampers of any sort.
Space Pressurization
- Life safety pressurization fans to be fitted with bird screen on inlets only.
- Relief devices from pressurized space to be constructed of 100% aluminum sheet
with fixed orifice and (if required) mounted above maximum snow accumulation.
Toilet Exhaust
- Toilet exhaust fans are to be furnished with bird screen o n outlets on ly and no
louver or dampers of any sort.
Protective Painting (Galvanized sheet metal)
- All sheet metal parts to be cleaned conditioned and painte d with rust inhibiting
enamel primer finish prior to final assembly.
- A final coat of enamel is to be applied to all exterior surfaces after assembly.
Axial Flow Fans
- Axial flow fans to be considered only after discussion with T.S.
Filters
Selection
- Filters for ventilation air cleaning co me in a wide variety of forms, mate rials and
efficiencies. The selection must consider required air quality, initial in vestment,
maintenance costs, space requirements and availability.
- The selectio n of filters for various t ypes of syst ems to include, in addition to the
above factors, an evaluation of at mospheric conditions as they relate to the
operating characteristics of air cleaners, namely efficie ncy, airflow resistance, life
or dust holding capacity.
- Preference shall be given to loca lly manufact ured quality filters prov ided they
meet the following requirements. Filter types to be consider ed for the various air
handling systems are:
 Central Air-Conditioning
- MERV 10 automatic roll type with renewable media.
- MERV 13 high efficiency dry, extended surface cartridge.
- MERV 10 viscous impingement glass fiber disposable type.
- MERV 10 viscous impingement, washable 25 mm thick.

50
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- MERV 10 dry fiberglass pleated disposable media.

 Utility Areas and Ventilating Systems Serving Utility (BOH) Areas
- MERV 10 Automatic roll type with renewable media.
- MERV 10 Viscous impingement, washable panel type.
- MERV 10 Viscous impingement, glass fiber media, disposable type.
 Guestroom Fan Coil Units
- Viscous impingement, washable or 25 mm aluminum mesh, or UL class 1
foam pad size to fit return air grille, if applicable, on the return air inlet of
the fan coil unit casing. MERV 10 Rating.
 Classification
- Filters to conform to Underwriters Laboratories Class 1 or Class 2,
- To be tested for weight arrestance, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.1 for
air cleaning devices.
 Spares
- All systems utilizing replaceable media filters to be provided with one (1) complete
spare set of filters, in addition to the new filters to be installed on acceptance of
each unit.
 Special Requirements
- In areas where industrial contaminants produce a discernible odor, activated
charcoal filters are required. Panel size of such filters shall assure contact time of
not less than 0.05 seconds. Filter construction shall be adequate to withstand at
least 100 high temperature reactivations.
 Laundry Lint Extraction
- The exhaust fan from the laundry to be fitted with a lint extraction system,
consisting of a re-circulating washer system, strainer, and fan to minimize the
quantity of lint laden air discharged from the building.
Heaters
Convectors
 Heating elements
- To be finned tube type, either with copper or aluminum fins, in public areas.
- Steel pipe with steel fins where concealed is acceptable in dry public spaces. In
service areas, steel tube and steel fin are acceptable.
 Enclosures
- To be designed to permit easy access for maintenance of valves, vents, controls,
etc., and to meet Architectural requirements.
- Panel type and finish to be coordinated with Interior Designer.
Unit Heaters
 Infrared Heater
- Open areas such as receiving docks require infrared heaters where outdoor
design temperature is -10° C or lower.
 Propeller Type Heater
- May be used in enclosed loading docks, receiving office and equipment rooms, if
infrared sources are impractical.

51
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Cabinet Heaters
- With centrifugal fans may be used for entrances in lieu of directly ducted supply
with terminal reheat. Selection of such units shall take freezing possibilities into
account.
Underground Glycol Snow/Ice Melting System
 If required by local code or practice, typically on driveways, particularly ramps at
entryways to the hotel.
 Preferably with glycol solution circulating through pipe work.
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
See Attachment: Minimum Material Standards – HVAC Piping
 Color Coding
- Color coding shall be employed to all piping, pumps, and vessels.
See Attachment: Minimum Requirements - Color Coding and Pipe identification
Valves
 Valves to be provided in accordance with Minimum Material Standards - Valves.
See Attachment: Minimum Material Standards - Valves
 Di-electrical isolation to be provided at connection points of ferrous and non-ferrous
pipes, and on non-ferrous materials contacting the structure.
 All valves for throttling service such as pump discharge, chilled and condenser
circuits, cooling tower, etc., to be globe valves, lubricated plug type, or butterfly type.
 Balancing valves are to be provided at water coils and main distribution returns, and
are to be equipped with adjustable memory stops.
 Provide chain wheel operators on all valves and cocks in equipment and fan rooms
with center lines located more than 2.5 m above the floor, which control major items
of equipment such as boilers, headers and pumps.
 Vent Valves
- Float type for automatic venting at high points of water mains, unit heaters and
elsewhere as required to be installed with tee handle petcock on inlet for the
required working pressure.
- Key operated manual type vent valves at all points necessary to prevent trapping
of air shall be tee head petcocks.
 Condensate Valves - Steam
- Condensate drip leg is to consist of inlet valve, strainer, trap, test valve, check
valve and outlet valve. All valves shall permit re-packing while in service.
Steam Pressure Reducing Valve Stations (PRV)
To be provided wherever high pressure steam must be reduced to a lower pressure
 Design
- Consisting of two (2) pilot operated PRVs in parallel, one to handle 1/3 of the
connected load, the other to handle 2/3.
- Together with inlet and outlet shut off valves on each PRV and globe valve and all
necessary piping, valves, fittings, reducers, inlet strainers, safety valves, gauges
with alarm contacts.
- Provide trapped condensate drip legs at inlet and outlet headers or manifolds.

52
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Pressure relief valves shall be piped to the atmosphere.

 Type
- PRV’s are to be normally closed, self-contained, single seated type, spring loaded
diaphragm operated suitable for dead end service, designed for highest steam
inlet pressure.
 Construction
- PRV’s shall be constructed with cast iron, semi-steel or high tensile iron body,
stainless steel trim and non-corrosive, replaceable disc and seat.
Steam Traps
 Provision
- Steam traps to be provided for venting and draining of condensation at ends of
mains, bottoms of risers, outlets of steam condensing equipment and other points
where condensation and air collect.
- Traps to pass condensation and air automatically, without passing steam.
 Types
- Low pressure (0-1 bar) - float and thermostatic.
- Medium and high pressure (1-9 bar) - Inverted bucket or thermodynamic.
Heat Exchangers
 Design
- To be ASME rated and constructed, steam-in-shell, water- in- tube or water-to-
water, designed for pressures and temperatures to which they are subjected.
Selection shall be based on a fouling factor of 0.0005.
- Plate Heat Exchangers shall be of stainless steel material spaced together by
nitrile butadiene rubber sealing gaskets.
 Storage Heaters
- Storage heaters are to be steam coil and water shell type, in accordance with
ASME. Unit shall be constructed with seamless copper tubes arranged in a
removable tube bundle, cast iron water chamber and steel shell, tube sheet and
supporting cradle.
 Condensate Heat Recovery
- Where no provision is made for condensate/flash steam heat recovery, heat
exchangers shall be designed for condensate sub cooling operation.
Note: Refer to Plumbing Systems chapter for pool and whirlpool heating requirements.
Circulating Pumps
 Design
- Circulating pumps to be motor driven directly coupled centrifugal type selected to
deliver rated capacity and discharge head at or near point of peak efficiency with
an impeller diameter no greater than 85% of maximum size, which can fit in
casing.
- Pumps having capacities over 25 l/sec, to be horizontal-split case, single stage,
double suction, complete with motor, cast iron casing, bronze impeller, ceramic
mechanical seals, cast iron or steel base, stainless steel shaft supported on ball or
roller bearings and direct connected through flexible couplings.
- Pumps having capacities under 25 l/sec may be vertically-split case, end suction,
bronze fitted, complete with motor, cast iron casing, bronze impeller, roller
bearings, ceramic mechanical seal, flexible coupling and steel base.

53
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Design Pressure
- Pump casings design pressure to be a minimum of 1.5 times working pressure.
 Motors
- To be non-overloading over the range of pump performance.
- Variable speed drives shall be used, as applicable.
 Accessories
- Suction side to be provided with shut off valve and strainer and vibration limiting
coupling.
- Discharge side shall be provided with balanced, non-shock check valve, throttling
valve, and vibration limiting coupling.
 Noise Levels
- Pumps to be selected for quiet operation and installed such that pump noise is not
transmitted to the building structure.
Strainers
 Design
- To ensure protection against ingress of debris, self-cleaning strainers are to be
provided at all inlet connections to each feeder, makeup connections and
automatic control valves.
 Material
- All strainers to be cast iron or bronze bodies of ample strength for the pressure to
which they shall be subjected, removable cover, and suitable flanges or tappings
to connect with the piping they serve.
- Strainer basket screens to be nickel, copper, brass, or stainless steel and be of
adequate strength to ensure operation under shock loading. Each basket shall
have a minimum free area 2-1/2 times the cross section of the pipe.
 Blow Off
- Valved blow off piped to closest floor drain shall be provided for each strainer
25 mm and larger.
Expansion Bends, Loops and Joints
 All piping mains, branches and run outs shall allow for free expansion and contraction
without developing leaks or undue stressing of pipe or equipment connected thereto.
Stresses shall be within allowable limits of ASME Code for pressure piping or equal.
 Pipe expansion is preferably absorbed in expansion bends, loops, swivel joints, and
offsets.
 Where space is limited, expansion joints may be used in lieu of expansion loops.
 Expansion joints may be either externally guided, pack less type with corrugated
stainless steel element, controlling rings, cast iron flanges, single or double
expansion, or flexible ball type.
 Where expansion joints are provided and located within guestroom tower or other
occupied public and service areas, and where in case of joint failure the escaping
medium poses a potential danger, such expansion joints shall be furnished with
oversized pipe sleeve (2 times pipe diameter) to deflect the leaking medium in event
of expansion joint failure.
 Expansion joint shall be guaranteed against failure for five years.
 Provide pipe alignment guides, of heavy gauge construction spider and guiding
cylinder, as required at expansion loops, expansion joints and, in horizontal and

54
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Provide pipe alignment guides, of heavy gauge construction spider and guiding
cylinder, as required at expansion loops, expansion joints and, in horizontal and
vertical pipe. The core of the spider shall clamp to the pipe, and the cylinder shall be
sized to allow for full thickness of insulation plus clearance.
 All expansion joints or loops must be accessible.
Hangers and Supports
 Design
- Adjustable hangers, inserts, brackets, rolls, clamps, supplementary steel, etc., as
required for proper support of all pipe lines, sheet metal work and equipment shall
be provided.
- Hangers shall be designed to allow for expansion and contraction of pipelines,
and shall be of adequate size to permit pipe covering to run continuously through
hangers.
- Piping at pumps, tanks, etc., to be supported independently so that no weight will
be supported by the equipment.
- A welded support at elbows in pump suction and discharge, either to pump
foundation or to steel bracket welded to pump base, shall be provided.
 Duct Support
- Sheet metal ducts shall be supported on galvanized angles in accordance with
standard practice.
- Piping shall not be supported from ductwork or duct supports or vice-versa.
- All necessary supplementary steel for proper support or attachment of hangers to
be painted with one coat of rust inhibiting primer.
 Pipe Support
- Pipe support spacing shall conform to ANSI.
 Spigots
- Caulked bell and spigot piping shall be provided with a hanger for each section of
pipe, located only at shoulder of bell.
 Service Interruption
- Piping shall be installed and hung in such manner as to preclude the interruption
of service to other systems and to provide access for all piping requiring
maintenance or repair.
 Seismic Installation
- Wall supported brackets are not approved in seismic zones.
Sleeves, Non-Fire Rated
 Floor and Roof Sleeves
- Floor and roof sleeves to be standard weight galvanized steel pipe with bottom
end flush with surface
- Top end extended 25 mm above finished floor, 200 mm above roof, caulked with
glass wool and sealed at top and bottom with butyl mastic, or intumescent putty.
 Wall Sleeves
- For foundation walls, to be cast iron fabricated sleeves, flush inside and outside,
with flashing flange at membrane, with annular space between surface of pipe
and interior of sleeve, caulked with molded rubber link seals with stainless steel
bolts and nuts.

55
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Sleeves, Fire Rated

 Floor and Roof Sleeves
- All floor and roof sleeves used at fire rated areas to be in accordance with NFPA
requirements.
 Wall Sleeves
- All wall sleeves used at fire rated areas to be in accordance with NFPA
requirements.
Penetrations
 For non-fire rated masonry and concrete walls, standard weight galvanized steel pipe,
flush with wall surface at both ends, caulked with glass wool and sealed at both faces
with butyl mastic or caulked with molded rubber link seals.
 For non-fire rated interior partitions and ceilings, 0.85 mm rolled sheet galvanized
steel with lock joints, caulked with glass wool and sealed at both faces with butyl
mastic or caulked with molded rubber link seals.
 For fire rated walls, heavy gauge galvanized sheet metal with square face plates,
adjustable to wall thickness, with 25 mm annular space packed at each end with
double neoprene coated fiberglass in accordance with NFPA requirements, with
positive fastening catch, similar to “Pipe Shields” or UL listed intumescent collars.
 For underground pipe or conduit sleeves, pipe or conduit section or fitting with anchor
flanges, and flashing flange and membrane waterproofing is required.
Trim Plates
 Split-type trim plates to be provided on all exposed pipes passing through floors, walls
and ceilings, at the visible sides of openings.
 In unfinished rooms, plates shall be prime coated; in finished rooms, plates shall be
chrome plated or anodized aluminum.
Sheet Metal and Accessories
 Ductwork Material
- Ductwork shall generally be constructed of galvanized sheet metal unless
otherwise noted.
- Galvanized sheets shall be of lock forming quality with 0.38 kg/m² galvanizing total
on both sides.
- Ducts shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA standards and ASHRAE
Standard 90.1 (latest edition) for gauge, reinforcing, support, insulation and air
tightness.
- Additional bracing for large ducts near equipment may be required to prevent
flexure.
- Guest bathroom exhaust ducts shall be acoustically treated sheet metal.
 Sealing
- All sheet metal joints and seams in supply ductwork shall be sealed with fire
resistant duct sealer.
- Sealer shall be UL listed and applied on joints and seams during fabrication and
erection.
 Fittings
- Standard radius elbows (preferred) shall have a throat radius equal to the width of
the elbow.

56
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Vaned elbows shall be constructed using double thickness airfoil vanes.

- All fittings shall be constructed for minimum pressure drop and noise generation at
the velocity selected.
 Hangers
- Hanger straps for ducts up to 1.00 m in width shall be 25 mm x 1.5 mm galvanized
iron fastened to angle bracing or vertical seams.
- Hangers for ducts over 1.00 m in width shall be angle iron or rods.
Kitchen Exhaust Systems
 Kitchen Exhaust Hoods
- All cooking equipment producing heat, steam, smoke or grease laden vapors shall
be equipped with an exhaust system designed in accordance with NFPA and UL
standards and requirements. At a minimum, the latest editions of the following
standards are to be referenced and followed in the design of kitchen exhaust
systems:
 NFPA-17A: Standard for West Chemical Extinguishing Systems;
 NFPA-80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protective;
 NFPA-96: Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations;
 NFPA 211: Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning
Appliances;
 UL 300: Standard for Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishing Systems for Protection
of Restaurant Cooking Areas;
 UL 710; Standard for Exhaust Hoods for Commercial Cooking Equipment;
 UL 1046: Standard for Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts;
 UL 1978: Standard for Safety for Grease Ducts;
 UL 2221: Standard for Test of Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure
Assemblies.
- Cooking equipment using solid fuel (wood, charcoal) shall be provided with an
independent exhaust system not connected to or serving any other equipment.
 When solid fuel is used, additional requirements and regulations regarding
storage of solid fuel, handling of solid fuel, and handling and disposal of ash
must be strictly followed.
 Installation of solid fuel cooking equipment is to be in strict accordance with
the manufacturers directions – no deviation shall be permitted.
- Each kitchen exhaust hood shall be equipped with an automatic fire suppression
system, which shall be interfaced with the main fire alarm system, the automatic
fuel supply shut off valve for gas equipment, and shunt-trip circuit breakers
providing power to electric equipment located below the exhaust hood.
 The recommended fire suppression system is Ansul Piranha® dual-agent, pre-
engineered, wet chemical and water system.
 Factory installation of the fire suppression system into the exhaust hood is
recommended.
 Both fusible fire detection links within the hood and a remote manual activation
(“pull”) station are required.
 Dry chemical fire suppressions systems are not permitted.
 Water-only systems are not recommended for use over fryers and other open,
deep-oil cooking appliances.
 The exhaust and make-up air fans associated with the kitchen exhaust hood
shall be interlocked with the fire suppression system. As required by the type

57
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

of fire suppression system installed, the exhaust fan shall either continue to
operate, or shall stop upon activation of the suppression system.
- If a fire damper has been installed in the exhaust hood at the collar
(connection point) where the exhaust duct connects to the hood, the
exhaust fan shall stop upon activation of the suppression system.
- If a fire damper has not been installed in the exhaust hood at the collar
(connection point) where the exhaust duct connects to the hood, the
exhaust fan shall continue to operate upon activation of the suppression
system.
 Make- up air fans shall stop upon activation of the fire suppression system.
 Solid fuel cooking equipment with a firebox greater than 0.14m3 shall be
provided with a fixed water pipe system and hose in the kitchen that is capable
of reaching the firebox.
- Kitchen exhaust hoods with internal (compensating) discharge of make-up air are
not permitted.
- Kitchen exhaust hoods with a vertical (air curtain) discharge of make-up air at their
perimeter are not permitted.
- Kitchen exhaust hoods using low-velocity, horizontal (face) discharge of make-up
air are permitted.
- Kitchen exhaust hoods using “Capture-Jet™” technology are permitted.
- Kitchen exhaust hoods for display cooking shall be equipped with lighting
coordinated with the Kitchen Consultant and Interior Designer.
- Kitchen exhaust hoods shall be equipped with grease removal devices (filters,
baffles, cartridges) that have been tested against either UL Standard 1046, or its
equivalent, and are recognized as “Listed”.
 Mesh filters shall not be used as grease removal devices.
 The grease removal devices shall be manufactured from stainless steel.
 The grease removal devices shall be easily accessible and removable for
cleaning.
 The use of Ultra Violet (UV) filters in conjunction with a primary grease
removal device in front of them is permitted; UV filters shall not be used
independent of other grease removal devices.
 The use of Electrostatic Precipitators (ESP) filters in conjunction with a
primary grease removal device in front of them is permitted; ESP filters shall
not be used independent of other grease removal devices.
 UV or ESP filters are recommended for installation on exhaust systems that
have any of the following characteristics:
- The exhaust duct will have a length of more than 30 m between the hood
and the fan.
- Access for cleaning the exhaust duct will be limited or difficult.
- Due to the type of food products being prepared, and/ or a large volume of
food being prepared, frequent cleaning (more than semi-annually) of the
exhaust system is anticipated.
- The discharge from the exhaust fan will be in close proximity to, or may be
noticeable at, exterior patio, terrace, pool deck or dining areas.
 The use of an automatic wash-down kitchen hood cleaning system is
permitted. Wash-down systems are to use automatically mixed and distributed
hot water and chemical degreaser. Wastewater from wash-down system must
be piped to flow through a grease interceptor.
 For solid fuel equipment, if airborne sparks and embers can be generated by
the cooking operation, spark arrester devices shall be used prior to the grease

58
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

removal device to prevent the entrance of these sparks and embers into the
grease removal device and into the hood and duct system.
 Total exhaust air quantity, and flow rate through each grease removal device,
shall be coordinated by the Kitchen/Laundry Consultant and Mechanical
Engineering Consultant. ASHRAE calculations reflecting the severity and
intensity of cooking shall be used in determining the amount of air to be
exhausted.
 As a method of reducing the amount of air exhausted when less-then-
maximum cooking is occurring, the application of a variable exhaust system,
controlled by smoke and temperature sensors located in the exhaust hood,
shall be considered.
- When a variable exhaust system is specified, it shall be interlocked with
the corresponding make-up air system that is similarly capable of varying
the quantity of replacement air provided. Controls for both exhaust and
make-up air system to be a unified integrated design, and calibrated to
maintain the specified air balance under all operating conditions.
 Kitchen Canopy Exhaust Size and Material
- Kitchen canopy exhaust hoods shall be sized to cover completely the equipment it
is designed to ventilate, plus a minimum overhang (projection) of at least 15 cm
beyond all sides of the cooking equipment under it.
 A minimum overhang of 30 cm is recommended for char-broilers and solid fuel
cooking equipment.
 Where possible, without affecting operation or décor aesthetics, the
installation of side-panels at the ends of the hood is recommended to increase
exhaust efficiency.
- Canopy exhaust hoods shall be manufactured entirely from AISI/ASTM 302 or 304
stainless steels. Minimum thickness of material is to be 1.30 mm.
- Coordinate canopy jacket material and design with Kitchen Consultant and Interior
Designer.
 Grease Ducts
- Grease ducts serving kitchen exhaust hoods shall be sized, constructed, installed
and supported in accordance with all applicable ASHRAE and NFPA Standards.
 The cross-sectional area of grease ducts shall be designed for a maximum air
velocity of 8- 9 m/sec.
- Grease ducts shall be constructed of carbon steel not less than 2.0 mm thick, with
all seams and joints having a continuous, liquid-tight weld, with the exception of
where the duct collar on the hood is connected to the duct. This connection shall
either be a continuous, liquid-tight external weld or an equivalent liquid-tight,
flanged, gasketed and bolted connection.
- Grease ducts shall not pass through firewalls or fire partitions and shall lead as
directly as possible to the exterior of the building. They are to be installed from
hood to point of termination without any intermediate low-point where grease
could collect. Grease ducts shall have a continuous pitch towards the kitchen
exhaust hood they are connected to. Grease ducts shall not be interconnected
with any other building ventilating or exhaust system.
- Grease ducts shall maintain a minimum separation (air space) of 460 mm to
combustible materials. Methods to reduce this minimum separation as describe
either by NFPA-96, or in the Minimum Standards- Duct Insulation section, may be
applied.

59
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- No damper or device to regulate the flow of air is to be installed in a grease duct

unless it has been specifically Listed by UL (or equivalent safety agency) for that
purpose. When a Listed damper is installed, provision (access) must be provided
in the grease duct for cleaning, servicing and adjustment, in accordance with
NFPA and UL Standards.
- Each grease duct shall constitute an individual system serving one kitchen
exhaust hood. However, as code and practicality permits, kitchen exhaust hoods
on the same floor, and within the same fire zone, may be connected to a single
exhaust system.
 A grease duct system serving solid fuel equipment shall not be connected to
any other grease duct exhaust system.
 Access Openings
- Openings large enough to permit cleaning of the entire interior of the grease duct
shall be provided at each change in direction, and also at a maximum separation
of 3.7m in horizontal runs. Openings shall only be located in the vertical side of
the grease duct. In horizontal sections, the lower edge of the access opening shall
be not less than 40 mm from the bottom of the duct. Access covers shall be
constructed of the same material and thickness of the duct, and shall form a
liquid-tight seal when secured in place. Installation of access openings and covers
shall conform to UL Standard 1978, or equivalent.
- Access panels shall be located so no barriers or obstructions to them exist, and
they are completely accessible.
 Moist Air Ducts
- Ductwork from moisture producing equipment (dishwashers, steamers) shall be
constructed of stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm. All seams and
joints shall have continuous, liquid-tight weld. The duct shall give continuous pitch
back toward the equipment or exhaust hood it is connected to. Where dissimilar
metals are to be connected, electrolytic isolation shall be provided.
 Make-up/Replacement Air for Kitchen Exhaust Systems
- A separate, dedicated make-up air system(s) is to be provided for replacement of
the air exhausted by the kitchen exhaust hood(s).
 The air supplied by the general air-conditioning and heating system is not to
be used as replacement air.
 The total quantity of air provided to the kitchen area shall be sufficient to
replace the combined amount of air consumed by combustion processes and
exhausted through the kitchen hoods.
- Make- up air velocities in the area around the hood shall not exceed 0.25 m/sec in
any direction towards the hood.
- Make-up air is to be conditioned to an appropriate temperature and humidity to
maintain a comfortable working environment within the space.
- The make-up air system is to be interlocked with the operation of the exhaust
fan(s) serving the exhaust hood(s) it is associated with. Provide variable
frequency drive and appropriate controls if exhaust fan(s) is similarly specified.
Dampers
 Balancing Dampers
- To be butterfly or multiple blade type (20 cm maximum blade width) equipped with
locking quadrant to be provided in every branch duct of conventional duct
systems.

60
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Motorized Dampers
- To be installed in outside air inlet ducts and at discharge ducts from exhaust fans.
 Exclusions
- Exhaust fans designed for cooking hoods, laundry dryers, laundry ironer and
smoke exhaust shall not have any discharge dampers. Rain and wind protection
shall be provided by alternate means.
Discharge Registers
 Supply Registers
- Sidewall supply registers shall be of the adjustable bar, double deflection type
with horizontal face bars, vertical rear bars and opposed blade damper (except
guestroom).
- Guestroom register outside horizontal vanes and vertical back blades must both
be adjustable.
 Return and Exhaust Registers
- To be fixed bar, single deflection type with horizontal bars matching supply
register, and opposed blade damper.
 Ceiling Diffuser Outlets
- To be linear or as specified by Architects and Interior Designer.
- To be adjustable pattern type.
- Equipped with equalizing devices.
- Opposed blade dampers key operated from the diffuser face.
- Blank off baffles where required.
 Finish
- Linear diffusers to be extruded aluminum.
- All registers and diffusers, with a factory applied finish (color selected by Interior
Designer) applied over rust inhibiting primer.
- Where field painting is to be used, a rust-inhibiting primer should be factory
provided.
Drip Gutters
 Where piping is unavoidably located at or near electrical equipment, drip gutters of
galvanized steel to meet local code shall be provided to protect electrical equipment.
 Drip gutters shall be watertight, pitched and piped to nearest floor drain.
Flexible Connections
 Listings
- Flexible fabric connections to prevent the transmission of vibration through ducts
shall be UL listed under “Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connector” or equal, and
to be installed on both inlet and discharge of all fans and ventilating units.
 Fitting
- Fabric connection to be airtight.
- Provide, at minimum, 10 mm space between connected items and with sufficient
slack in fabric to prevent tearing due to fan movement.
 Fabric
- Fabric for general usage to be 30 kg/m3 density glass fiber coated with neoprene
on both sides.

61
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Fabric for cooking equipment exhaust systems to be 39 kg/m3 density woven

encased asbestos-free fiber fabric.
 Flexible Duct
- Flexible duct to consist of cold rolled steel spiral covered with a chloroprene or
equal coated glass fabric.
- Insulated type to be covered with 25 mm thick layers of glass fiber insulation with
PVC vapor barrier with flame spread rating conforming to NFPA 255 and UL 728
- Where long radius bends are required these shall be secured at both ends with
duct strap clamps.
- Flexible duct to have a maximum length of 1500 mm.
Fan Coil Unit Access Doors
 Combination access door/return grilles design is not acceptable for overhead
Guestroom fan coil units.
 Access door shall be sized to permit removal of fan coil unit. Access doors shall be of
non-combustible materials, and shall be hinged to the frame integrated in the ceiling
to allow easy opening and placement of the door.
 Design of FCU access door to be coordinated with Interior Designer’s requirements
however the preferred size for each access is 600 mm x 600 mm.
Acoustical Lining
 Design Considerations
- To be provided in the discharge duct of each air handling unit for a distance of at
least 6.00 m from the fan.
- Each return and exhaust duct for a distance of 6.00 m from the intake plenum.
- In the discharge of each ceiling mounted fan coil unit.
- Acoustic lining shall be installed in ductwork, which services more than one
enclosed space to the extent required to prevent acoustic transfer from one space
to the other.
 Quality
- Acoustic lining to be neoprene coated glass fiber or closed cell elastomeric foam,
if applicable, 25 mm thick, 24 kg/m3 density installed with insulation adhesive and
metal clips with all joints adhesive coated and taped.
 Exceptions
- Cooking equipment exhaust systems, moist-air system, smoke purge, laundry
exhaust ductwork and extraction ducts bearing volatile gases shall not be lined.
Where applicable, duct silencers shall be provided.
Duct Silencers
 Prefabricated low loss type duct silencers shall be used where excessive noise
problems are anticipated.
Pipe and Duct Insulation
 The optimum insulation thickness is that which will result in the lowest total cost of
energy lost and the cost of insulation and installation provided it is equal or greater
than the following minimum standards.
See Attachment: Minimum Standards - Duct Insulation
See Attachment: Minimum Standards - Piping Insulation

62
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Fire and Testing Rating

- All components of the insulation for both piping and ductwork, including coverings,
mastics and adhesives, shall have a fire hazard NFPA Classification 1 or 2.
- Ratings shall be as established by tests conducted in accordance with UL 723 for
internal lining, UL 728 for external lining, ASTM E-84 or NFPA 255 or by
standards of other countries which provide for comparable quality, performance
characteristics and physical properties.
 Material
- In equipment rooms, and where exposed and subject to damage, pipe insulation
to be glass fiber 96 kg/m3 density, with factory applied all-service jacket consisting
of white craft paper outer surface bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with
glass fiber yarn.
- In concealed areas, or where not subject to damage, pipe insulation shall be glass
fiber 64 kg/m3 density with factory applied all-service jacket and thermal
conductivity as above and vapor barrier where required.
- Glass fiber may be replaced with a closed cell elastomeric foam material, where
applicable, depending upon thermal, fire and flame resistance and durability
characteristics.
 Protection
- Pipe and duct insulation in occupied areas, corridors or equipment rooms where
the insulated piping or ductwork is less than 2.5 m above the finished floor, shall
be protected by metal cladding.
 Calcium Silicate
- Calcium silicate pipe insulation shall consist of chemically reacted calcium silicate
combined with mineral fiber and 12 mm cement finish coat applied over a 12 x
12 mm galvanized screen mesh.
Piping Insulation Adhesives and Cements
 Listing
- Adhere jackets on insulation and at laps with piping jacket with UL listed or equal
adhesive.
 Coating
- Coating for exterior piping and fittings shall be weatherproof mastic, or metal clad
with weatherproof seams.
 Vapor Barrier
- Jackets or glass cloth covers at piping, valves, fittings, strainers, traps, etc.,
requiring vapor barrier shall be coated with vapor barrier coating. Insulating
cement shall be used for valves and fittings.
 Weatherproof Jackets
- Weatherproof jackets shall be 0.4 mm thick embossed aluminum, provided with
longitudinal Pittsburgh seams and butt joint strips with weatherproof mastic
adhesive, protected by weather resistant paper with metal cladding where subject
to damage.

63
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Installation of Piping Insulation

 Installation Method
- Stapling of vapor barrier jackets shall not be allowed. Jackets shall run
continuously through hangers and shall not be pierced for any reason. ASME
stamps, UL labels and similar stamps and labels shall not be covered over.
- When the use of segmental form is necessary, segments shall be of such
construction as to fit the curved surfaces to which they are applied.
- All forms of pipe covering shall be carefully pointed with cement at all joints, and
all segmental forms of covering shall be given a 6 mm finishing coat of cement
applied over a galvanized screen mesh of 12 x 12 mm.
 Protection
- Provide metal protection saddles at hanger points of insulated piping.
- In addition, provide hardwood blocks or one half section of calcium silicate at
hanger points of piping covered with glass fiber insulation to prevent compression
of insulation.
 Vapor Barrier
- Flame retardant vapor barrier is required throughout the hotel for chilled water
piping.
- Apply with approved adhesive at joints and laps.
- Joints of cold piping shall be sealed with 100 mm wide adhered strips of same
material as vapor barrier jacket.
 Exceptions
- In pipe chases, omit insulation of horizontal waste piping from plumbing fixtures
and domestic hot and cold supply branch piping to plumbing fixtures, except
where pipe shaft is naturally ventilated.
 Pipe Heating
- Insulation on piping systems with electric heating cable shall be large enough for
both water pipe and cable.
 Hot Pipe Insulation
- Hot piping fittings shall be insulated with pre molded glass fiber fitting insulation or
with field wrapped and tied glass fiber and insulating cement.
- Fitting insulation shall be of same thickness as adjacent insulation. Insulate
valves, strainers, traps and flanges with molded pipe insulation or block insulation
of same type and thickness as adjacent insulation, extended at least 50 mm over
the adjacent pipe insulation.
 Cold Pipe Insulation
- Cold water piping shall be insulated as specified above for hot piping except
provide a coat of vapor barrier sealer on insulation under the jacket, and paint the
jacket with one (1) coat of vapor barrier sealer.
- At strainers, provide a removable insulated cap.
- Glass fiber may be replaced with closed cell elastomeric foam materials, where
applicable.
 Color Schedule
- The Color Coding and Pipe Identification Schedule indicates T.S. Minimum
Standards for HVAC system color coding & pipe identification.
Ductwork Insulation
 All supply air ducts shall be insulated.

64
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Installation
- Blanket duct insulation shall have a minimum density of 16 kg/m3, and be
manufactured from glass fiber with factory applied flame retardant vapor barrier
facing in accordance with NFPA requirements.
- Insulation to be lapped and tied with glass fiber cord with butt joints sealed with
vapor barrier tape and suitable adhesive.
- Ducts over 1.00 m in width shall have insulation additionally secured with welded
pins and clips. The clips shall be covered with vapor barrier mastic or tape.
Material Specification
 Rigid Board
- Rigid board insulation shall have a minimum density of 48 kg/m3, and be
manufactured from glass fiber with resin binder; factory applied reinforced
aluminum foil and fire retardant vapor barrier facing in accordance with NFPA
requirements.
- Insulation on ductwork shall be fastened with metal clips 50 cm on centre in both
directions and with duct insulation adhesive in 15 cm bands on 30 cm centers and
sealed with vapor barrier sealer and tape of the same type as the facing.
 Block Insulation
- Block insulation shall have a minimum density of 200 kg/m3, and be manufactured
from rigid asbestos free hydrous calcium silicate with mineral fiber reinforcement
in accordance with NFPA requirements.
- Covering over access doors shall be removable. Metal cladding shall protect
ductwork less than 2.00 m above finished floor. Where applied to chimney walls,
welded pins shall be stainless steel.
 Acoustic Board
- Acoustic rigid board insulation shall have a minimum density of 96 kg/m3, and be
manufactured from glass fiber with resin binder, coated on one side with black
neoprene compound in accordance with NFPA requirements.
- Lining to be applied with 100% coverage of duct insulation adhesive and with
metal clips spaced as per manufacturer recommendation.
- All joints and seams shall be thoroughly sealed and pointed to eliminate possible
fiber entrainment into air stream.
- Internal insulation for ducts serving food areas shall have liquid neoprene sealer
applied at all duct insulation seams and at all exposed edges.
- External insulation for ducts in food service areas shall be protected with
aluminum scrim jacket overlapping not less than 100 mm per seam.
 Weatherproofing
- Insulated ductwork exposed to the weather shall be weatherproofed with a
covering of glass cloth embedded in weatherproofing mastic and finished with a
second coat of the same material.
 Duct Flanges
- Where flanges on ductwork and equipment are greater in size than the specified
thickness of the insulation, the insulation on the entire run shall be increased in
thickness to cover the flanges and to produce a smooth application.
 Closed Cell Elastomeric Foam Materials
- Closed cell elastomeric foam materials in accordance with NFPA requirements
are acceptable.

65
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Equipment Insulation
 Installation Requirements
- Insulation blocks or blankets shall be securely wired on. Fill interstices between
blocks with insulating cement.
- Insulation to be wrapped with copper coated wire mesh, secured tight and finished
smooth with 12 mm thick insulating cement toweled on in two (2) coats and
covered with pre-sized glass cloth jacket securely adhered. Exposed insulation
over food service areas shall be covered with aluminum scrim.
 Vapor Barrier
- On cold vessels, apply a 3 mm thick coat of vapor barrier sealer on surface of
insulating cement before covering with jacket.
- Vapor barriers shall be continuous throughout, applied over wire mesh and 12 mm
insulating fiber cement.
 Omission
- Insulation may be omitted on compression and expansion tanks unless operating
temperature is more than ±6°C of ambient.
 Refrigeration Systems
- Refrigeration machines: Insulate any portions of the unit surfaces or piping subject
to condensation, including the following:
- Chiller, water boxes and pass heads: Two layers of 35 mm thick 96 kg/m3 density,
glass fiber blanket with staggered joints; 12 mm insulating cement, pre sized glass
cloth jacket with 1.5 mm removable, replaceable sheet metal heads sealed with
mastic at the joints.
- Compressor discharge piping between compressor and noise filter: 35 mm thick
96 kg/m3 glass fiber, glass cloth jacket.
- Intercooler: Two layers 35 mm thick glass fiber blanket with staggered joints,
12 mm insulating cement, pre sized glass cloth jacket.
- Compressor suction piping: As noted for refrigerant piping.
- Small water piping: As noted for domestic cold water piping.
 Boilers
- Insulate the exposed surfaces of boilers with 75 mm thick hydrous calcium silicate
blocks installed with a hexagonal mesh galvanized wire netting stretched over and
securely fastened to the blocks. Finish with 25 mm glass cloth jacket.
- Insulating fiber cement applied in two (2) 6 mm coats (total of 12 mm), the last
coat containing not less than one third Portland cement, covered with sheet metal
jacket.
 Steam Piping
- Insulate the steam piping connection of each boiler feed water regulator with
25 mm lagging, finished with 12 mm insulating fiber cement toweled smooth and
covered with an adhered pre-sized glass cloth jacket.
- Insulate the steam gauge piping connection of each boiler as noted for steam
piping except final gauge pigtail.
 Flue Gas Outlets
- Insulate the exposed surfaces of the flue gas outlet transition from boilers with
50 mm thick hydrous calcium silicate blocks.
- Wire the insulating blocks securely and finish with 12 mm thick hard finish
insulating and toweled fiber cement, reinforced with 12 x 12 mm mesh galvanized

66
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

wire, applied in two (2) coats, the finishing covered with an adhered pre-sized
glass cloth jacket.
 Breachings
- Insulate the exposed surfaces of boiler and incinerator breachings with at least
50 mm thick hydrous calcium silicate blocks.
- Wire the insulating blocks securely with copper wire and finish with 12 mm thick
hard finish insulating fiber cement, reinforced with galvanized mesh, applied in two
(2) coats, the finishing coat covered with an adhered pre-sized glass cloth jacket.
 Smoke Stack
- Insulate the exposed surfaces of each stack, from the boiler plant floor level to a
distance of 1.0 m above roof penetration. Insulate interior of stack, with 100 mm
thick firebrick and extend insulation (lining) to within 1.20 m of the top.
- Insulation shall be suitable for temperature up to 1090°C and shall be toweled in
place over 1.9 kg/m2 stucco binder mesh.
- Exterior of stack to be insulated up to roof with 50 mm thick hydrous calcium
silicate on welded stainless steel pins, wired in place, covered with 19 mm thick
layer of wire mesh, finished with 12 mm thick hard finish insulating cement applied
in two (2) coats, covered with pre-sized glass cloth jacket.
- Provide weatherproof hood flashing and counter flashing over exterior insulation.
 Air-Conditioning Fans
- Except in internally lined air handling units, supply and return fans shall be
insulated with two (2) layers of 50 mm thick glass fiber blanket insulation in a
manner similar to air-conditioning machines.
 Chilled Water Pumps
- Chilled water and secondary water pumps shall be insulated with two (2) layers of
50 mm thick armaflex sheets or glass fiber blanket, with removable sheet metal
insulation boxes.
- Equipment having removable heads and/or access plates shall have insulation
applied in a manner to permit easy removal and replacement.
Foundations and Vibration Isolation
 General
- Quantity and loading of isolation units shall be designed to restrict the
transmission of noise and vibration to adjoining spaces in accordance with
industry accepted NC Rating levels, or as specified by T.S. Minimum
Standards – Indoor Noise Criteria for A/C Design.
- Quantity and loading of isolation units shall provide adequate deflection and not
less than 90% isolation efficiency in equipment areas and not less than 95%
isolation efficiency in guest areas.
- All floor mounted equipment and apparatus shall be erected on 100 mm high
concrete housing pads covering the entire projected floor area of the equipment,
and provided with appropriate steel reinforcement and necessary bolts and
anchors.
- Where concrete pad is set directly on concrete floor, provide dowels in floor to tie
base to slab.
 Rotating/Reciprocating Equipment
- All rotating or reciprocating equipment shall be mounted on, or suspended from,
vibration isolators.
- Mounting sizes and deflections shall be determined by equipment manufacturer.

67
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

 Vibration Isolators
- Floor mounted vibration isolators and/or inertia blocks shall be mounted on
100 mm high concrete housing pads.
 Spring Isolators
- To be designed and installed so that the ends of the springs are constructed to
remain parallel during deflection.
- To be provided with leveling bolts and minimally a 6 mm thick ribbed neoprene
pad adhered to underside of base.
- Housing or snubbing devices shall not be used to contain the isolation springs.
- The ratio of spring diameter to compressed height of each spring shall not be less
than 0.8, and springs shall have a minimum of 50% additional travel to solid
beyond rated deflection.
 Lateral Motion
- Insulation systems with lateral motion in excess of 6 mm under equipment start-up
or shut down conditions shall be restrained by spring type mountings.
 Corrosion Protection
- Insulation systems exposed to the weather or corrosive environment shall be
protected with a corrosion resistant finish of either cadmium plating or neoprene
coating.
Equipment Vibration Isolation Assemblies
 Refrigeration Machines
- Centrifugal and absorption refrigeration machines located on grade shall be
mounted directly on 25 mm thick double rib or waffle type pads with ribs at right
angles on top and bottom.
- Where units are installed adjacent to or above guest or public areas, an acoustical
consultant and the equipment manufacturer shall provide for special vibration and
acoustic control measures to ensure compliance with T.S. Engineering
Recommendations and Minimum Standards/Acoustical Performance.
 Cooling Towers
- Cooling towers shall be supported on a dunnage frame, which is mounted onto
vertically restrained spring isolators with a 75% pre loading, which are then set on
structural members.
 Pumps/Compressors
- Centrifugal pumps and small air compressors are to be bolted and grouted to a
spring supported inertia block.
- Inertia blocks shall consist of a structural steel channel or I-beam perimeter frame
with a backset for each isolation support adequately reinforced to prevent flexure
during equipment operation.
- Height of the frame to be a minimum of 15 mm but not less than 1/12 the length of
the frame and is required to provide the weight equal to 1½ times the pump
assembly, including water. Frames shall be shaped to include base elbow
supports.
 Floor Mounted Fans
- Floor mounted centrifugal fans and driving motors to be mounted on spring
supported integral steel fan and motor bases constructed of structural steel,
welded and reinforced to prevent flexure of the base.
- Height of the steel to be not less than 1/10 of the length of the base.
- Motor slide rails and jack screw to be included as part of the base.

68
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Where fans are located on grade, the bases may be supported on neoprene-in-
shear mounts consisting of molded double space deflection neoprene bonded to
steel base plate with leveling feature and holes for mounting screws.
 Suspended Fans
- Suspended centrifugal fans and driving motors mounted on integral steel and
motor base or on rigid structural platform shall be suspended from building
structure with steel rods and combination spring and neoprene-in-shear type
hangers.
- Hangers shall consist of spring isolator and double deflection neoprene-in-shear
isolator mounted in a common welded steel frame. Rod hole in frame shall be
provided with neoprene spacer.
 Floor Mounted Air Handling Units
- Factory assembled floor mounted air handling units with fan and driving motor
mounted integral with the casing to be mounted on individual spring supports.
- Where units are located on grade, they may be supported on neoprene-in-shear
mountings.
 Suspended Air Handling Units
- Factory assembled suspended air handling units to be mounted in a manner
similar to suspended centrifugal fans.
- A separate rigid structural platform, or suitable angles or channels, to be provided
should the equipment frame not have adequate structural frame or mounting lugs.
 Thrust Restraints
- Air handling unit thrust restraints (2) shall be installed on each side of the duct
across the flexible duct connection on the duct outlet of each fan or factory built
unit.
- Thrust restraints shall include spring type hangers and fastening rods with tension
adjusting nut and necessary anchor angles.
 Converters
- To be supported on saddles set on spring isolators set in turn on pipe or structural
steel support framework.
 Clearance
- All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases shall have a minimum
operating clearance of 50 mm between the inertia base or structural steel frame
and the concrete housekeeping pad beneath the equipment.
Pipe Mounts
Pipe supports located within 15 m of rotating equipment to be generally in accordance
with the following:
 Steam Piping
- Steam distribution piping shall be supported from the building structure or pipe
hangers with steel rods and neoprene-in-shear type hangers with 10 mm
deflection. (See special conditions in seismic zones.)
 Water Piping
- Suspended water circulating piping 250 mm and smaller to be supported from the
building structure on pipe hangers with steel rods and spring type hangers with
18 mm deflection.
- Suspended water piping 300 mm and larger to be supported from the building
structure and roof mounted pipes, on pipe hangers with steel rods and transfer

69
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

type spring hangers with 75% pre loading and 18 mm deflection bearing on
structural members.
- The use of combination spring and neoprene-in-shear type load transfer hangers
shall be used wherever necessary to avoid vibration.
- Condenser water pipe at cooling tower to be supported on adjustable pipe saddle
stands set on vertically restrained spring isolators, set on floor or structural steel
framework with 75% pre loading and 18 mm deflection.
- Floor mounted water pipes to be supported from a floor mounted steel support
framework, on pipe hangers with steel rods and Spring Type Hangers and 18 mm
deflection.
 Riser Pipes
- 150 mm or larger water risers to be supported at base by welded pipe stanchions
extending down to pad on floor with 3 layers of ribbed neoprene pads separated
by 3 mm galvanized steel plates between base of stanchion and concrete with
10 mm deflection.
- Piping in shafts to be anchored where required with vibration isolation pipe
anchors, and shall be guided as required with vibration isolation pipe guides.
 Couplings
- Vibration couplings to be provided in the suction and discharge of each pump of
the same size as the pipe in which they are installed. Couplings shall be armored
seamless flexible bronze, stainless steel, reinforced rubber, or Victaulic type rated
for the operating temperatures and pressures.
- Couplings to be located as close to the pumps as practicable and piping in which
they are located to be anchored to the building structure.
- Length of space in piping in which coupling is to be installed shall be 5% shorter
than the normal length of the coupling in order to provide compression of flexure
in the coupling.
Electric Motors, Starters and Controllers
Motors
 Specification
- Motors to be of the quiet operating type guaranteed to fulfill the specified
requirements without undue sound transmission outside of the mechanical space.
- Motors preferably to be from a single manufacturer.
 Bearings
- Bearings shall, wherever possible, be permanently lubricated, sealed, rated for
100,000 hours and guaranteed for 5 years.
 Selection
- Motors to be sized to provide maximum efficiency for the particular size and
application.
- Motors driving equipment with non-overloading characteristics shall be sized for
the limit of that load.
 Efficiency
- All motors shall be premium efficiency
- Capacitors shall be used with split phase motors
- Minimum efficiency for three-phase motors are:

70
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Horsepower Efficiency (%)

1 82.5
1 1/2 86.5
3 89.5
5 89.5
7 1/2 91.7
10 91.7
15 92.4
20 93.0
25 93.6
30 94.1
40 94.1
50 94.5

 Characteristics
- Motor current and voltage characteristics shall be determined by local conditions.
- Small motors (under 0.4 kW) shall be single-phase capacitor start; larger motors
shall be three-phase.
 Standards
- All motors and accessories to comply with NEMA or other recognized standards,
to be suitable for operation in the ambient condition of their application, and to
include a service factor of 1.25.
- Where climatic conditions warrant, motors shall be of a manufacturing standard
specifically rated for tropical applications.
 Two Speed Motors
- Two speed motors with special controllers for low speed operation shall be used
where required by load connections during the emergency power mode.
Starters and Controllers
 Motor controllers, except for those integrated into package units such as boilers,
pump sets, fire pumps, refrigeration machines, etc., shall be specified and furnished
in accordance with the Electrical Systems chapter of this document.
 Variable speed motor drives shall be considered where partial load conditions offer
payback potential of two years or less.
 Controllers for Large Motors to be of the reduced voltage closed transition type (size
depending on characteristics of electrical system and starting torque of driven
equipment).
Automatic Temperature Control
 Design
- The successful operation of the entire heating, ventilating and air-conditioning
system depends on the design and performance of the control system. The

71
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

design and selection of the Automatic Temperature Control System therefore

merits special attention.
 Fail Safe Protection
- In addition to all control devices necessary for the control of temperature and
humidity, the automatic temperature control system to include safety control
features to protect the air-conditioning systems against freeze up and to control
the spread of smoke and fire in accordance with NFPA requirements.
 Control Panels
- Local control panels to be installed adjacent to each mechanical system and must
be current technology DDC units.
- Panels to be enclosed cabinet including identification tags of all control devices.
 Scope of Installation
- Temperature control system to be extended to all plant temperature control
functions, including converters, domestic hot water, generator and storage
heaters, temperature boosters and similar type equipment.
- The mechanical consultant to coordinate with the plumbing consultant to avoid
redundancy, omissions or uneconomic choices.
- Refer to Building Automation Systems (BAS) section of the Low Voltage Systems.
 Flow Diagram
- Graphic flow diagrams showing direction of components, including data point
listings, etc., to be provided for each panel.
 Identification
- All field equipment shall be clearly identifiable with engraved plates.
MEP Instrumentation
 Scope of Supply
- Duct type thermometers to be in all air-conditioning systems ahead and after each
coil, in each outdoor air intake, in each fan discharge, in re-circulation air before
mixed air plenum, and at each duct thermostat. Thermometers to be of the dial
type with a uniform scale, 100 mm diameter.
- Mercury column or industrial red type thermometers are to be provided at the inlet
and outlet of each water chiller, condenser, heat exchanger, evaporator and oil
sump.
- Pressure gauges to be at the suction and discharge of each pump, at the inlet and
outlet of each pressure reducing station, at the inlet and outlet of each water coil,
condenser, evaporator and heat exchanger.
- Draft gauges across each filter’s bank and boiler stack.
- Flow meters on all discharge lines of water pumping system.
- Fuel oil totaling meters.
- Remote fuel level indicators.
- Oil temperature indicators.
- Totaling meters on the fuel oil to the boilers and water heaters.
- Totaling steam flow meter on the steam header.
- Stack thermometers.
- Totaling steam meter on absorption chiller.
- KWh meters on electric drive chillers.
- Gas meters on incoming supply lines.
- Smoke, draft and stack temperature indicators on boilers.
- Meters on boiler, deaerator and cooling tower makeup water lines.

72
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Thermometers in deaerator.
- KWh meters for larger concession areas, such as banquet areas, individual F & B
outlets, adjoining buildings, etc.
- Smoke shade recorders (omit if for analyzer fitted).
- CO2 and oxygen analyzers for boilers and direct-fired absorption chillers or water
heaters.
- CO (Carbon monoxide) detectors for enclosed garages.
- For larger concession areas, central temperature and flow recording instruments
are required, and in addition 2-pen recorder for supply and return chilled water
temperatures shall be provided.
- Provide meters at all incoming utility connections.
 Instrument Accuracy
- All instruments must have an accuracy of +/- 1% of full scale and be selected for a
range commensurate with the anticipated scope of reading.
- The span between maximum and minimum anticipated reading must cover at
least 40% of the scale.
Equipment Installation and Adjustments
 The following work to be accomplished by the manufacturer’s service representative
or a qualified millwright or machinist:
- Pumps and motors to be leveled and aligned on bases and foundation pads.
When all adjustments are completed, motor and pump shall be tightly bolted and
grouted.
- Centrifugal refrigeration units, motors, condensers and associated vibrator
eliminator pads to be leveled and aligned on bases and foundation. All tolerances
to be checked hot and cold.
- Fan and motor pulleys to be carefully aligned and belt tension to be properly
adjusted in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
- Pumps with mechanical seals must not be operated for testing purposes until
systems are flushed and filled with clean water.
- Seals damaged during setup and testing shall be replaced at no extra cost to the
Owner. All pump operating data to be recorded, bound and handed over to
operating personnel.
Note: The manufacturer and contractor shall follow THE OPERATOR and other
standard commissioning protocols during the testing and hand over of the systems.
 Pre-installation Protection
- All pipe and duct openings to be kept closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent
the entrance of foreign matter.
- All fixtures, equipment and apparatus to be covered as required to protect against
direct water or mechanical damage both before and after installation.
- Where ducts and pipes are subjected to foot traffic permanent protection ramps
shall be fitted.
- Fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the work
shall be restored to its original condition or replaced.
 Cleaning, Testing, and Balancing Air and Water Systems:
- Prior to start-up, all systems shall be adequately cleaned and flushed to remove
dirt, debris, and foreign materials from all hot water systems, chilled water
systems, condenser systems, condensate systems, steam generator systems,
any and all other piping, HVAC equipment, fans, ducts, air handlers, and blowers.

73
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

- Prior to initial operation, all systems and equipment installation shall be verified to
be in accordance with drawings and specifications.
- Temperature and humidity control systems, electrical interlocks, and fire
protection interlocks shall all be operational, adjusted and calibrated in
accordance with drawings and specifications.
HVAC Water Chemical Treatment
 A coordinated specification for chemical treatment of water used in all major plant and
equipment to be compiled to suit local water conditions after due analysis and
evaluation.
 The full specification to contain the following:
- Description of each chemical dosing system required for each major system.
- Outline specification and cut sheets for chemical dosing system.
- Chemical requirements for each system above.
- Outline description of chemical testing equipment required for each major system.
- Refer to Cooling Towers section of this chapter for detailed requirements on
cooling tower water treatment.
Compressed Air System
 Compressor Plant
- Central air compressor for laundry use to consist of at least two compressors, a
receiver, water cooler, moisture and oil eliminator, pressure reducing station and
safety valves.
- Discharge pressure shall be 7 bar or as required by laundry equipment. Carry
over of oil from the compressor to the discharge air shall be kept to a very
minimum.
 Sound Transmission
- The compressed air unit to be completely isolated from the building. Where
operating sound pressure levels measured at 1.0 m from the compressor exceeds
60 dB, a sound attenuating package shall be provided.
See Attachment: Mechanical Codes and Standards

74
 Attachments
Mechanical Systems
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Cooling Standards

Area Space Temp DB (°C) Rel.
Hum.

Cool/Temp* Tropical* % (**)

Guest Room Tower Guest Rooms / Suites 24.0 24.0 50

74.1
Regency Club 24.0 24.0 50

Guest Corridors / Stairways 25.0 25.0 50

Exit Staircases 27.0 28.0 NC

Food and Beverage Restaurants/Show Kitchens 24.0 24.0 50

Bars / Entertainment Centres 24.0 24.0 50

Dancing Areas 24.0 23.0 50

Public Areas Lobby / Corridors 24.0 25.0 50

Public Toilets 25.0 26.0 NC

Others 25.0 26.0 50

Offices Executive 24.0 24.0 50

Meeting Rooms 24.0 24.0 50

Back of House Offices 25.0 25.0 55

BOH Corridors 26.0 27.0 55

Function Rooms Ballrooms / Meeting Rooms 24.0 24.0 50

Business / 24.0 24.0 50

Communications Centre

Fitness Centre/Spa Exercise / Aerobics / Massage 24.0 25.0 50

Commissary Kitchen Meat Preparation 21.0 21.0 55

Fish Preparation 21.0 21.0 55

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Cooling Standards

Area Space Temp DB (°C) Rel.
* Hum.
* +/- 5%
* Cool/Temp* Tropical* % (**)
*
Commissary Kitchen Pastry, Chocolate & Ice 18.0 18.0 55
* Unless equipment manufacturer requires otherwise.
Cream Room
74.2
Garde Manger 21.0 21.0 55
Vegetable Prep 22.0 22.0 55
Beverage Store 23.0 23.0 55
Bakery 26.0 26.0 60
Satellite Kitchens Bread & Dessert 23.0 23.0 55

Service Bar 23.0 23.0 55

Garde Manger 23.0 23.0 55

Cooking Area 27.0 27.0 60

Pantries 24.0 24.0 55

Laundry / Valet 27.0 27.0 70
Employee Areas Lockers 26.0 27.0 55
Toilets 26.0 27.0 NC
Dining Room 25.0 26.0 55
Technical Areas Plant Room outside air ventilation only ***
Workshops 26.0 27.0 60
Control Room 25.0 26.0 55
PABX / Computer / MATV 20.0 20.0 50
Stores General 27.0 28.0 55
F&B Dry Goods 27.0 27.0 55

* +/- 1ºC
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Heating Standards

(For cool and temperate climates only)

Area Space Temp DB * (°C) Rel. Hum. % **

Guest Room Tower Guest Rooms / Suites 22.0 50

Guestroom Bathroom 24.0 50
Regency Club 22.0 50
Corridors 21.0 50
Exit Staircases 19.0 40
Food and Beverage Restaurants 21.0 50
Bars / Entertainment Centre 21.0 50
Dancing Areas 20.0 50
Public Areas Lobby / Corridors 21.0 50
Public Toilets 21.0 45
Others 21.0 50
Offices Executive 21.0 50
Meeting Rooms 22.0 50
Back of House Offices 21.0 45
BOH Corridors 20.0 40
Function Rooms Ballrooms / Meeting Rooms 22.0 50
Business / 22.0 50
Communications Centre
Fitness Centre/Spa Gym, Cardiovascular, Treatment 22.0 45
Commissary Kitchen Meat Preparation 18.0 50
Fish Preparation 18.0 50
Pastry Room 18.0 50
Garde Manger 21.0 45
Vegetable Prep 21.0 45
Beverage Store 18.0 45

74.3
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Heating Standards

(For cool and temperate climates only)

Area Space Temp DB * (°C) Rel. Hum. % **

Commissary Kitchen Chocolate / Ice Cream 18.0 50

Bakery 21.0 50
Satellite Kitchens Bread & Dessert 20.0 45
Service Bar 20.0 45
Garde Manger 20.0 45
Cooking Area 22.0 45
Pantries 21.0 45
Laundry / Valet Minimal or no
heating unless
required by local
code or practice
Employees’ Areas Lockers 21.0 45
Toilets 21.0 NC
Dining Room 21.0 45
Technical Areas Plant Room 15.0 40
Workshops 20.0 45
Control Room 21.0 45
Stores General 19.0 45
F&B Dry Goods 19.0 45

* +/- 1°C
** +/- 5%
74.4
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards - MEP Space Requirements

MEP Space Requirement

Equipment Each additional Notes

Up to 300 rooms (m²) 100 rooms (m²)

Central Chiller Plant 120 20

Pumps and Ancillaries 30 5
Cooling Towers 100 5
74.5
Air Handling units, fans 360 20
Boiler Plant * 60 20

Pumps and ancillaries 70 10

Calorifiers 30 5 1
Electricity *

 Transformers 60 5 2

 Main Switchgear rooms 100 2

 Emergency Generator 20 2
Domestic Water System *

 Water Treatment Systems 50 5

 Pumping systems 20 2
 Fire Protection Pumping systems 20 2
Engineering

 Offices 60 5

 Stores 60 5 3
 Workshops 120 20
 Control Centres 20 -
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards - MEP Space Requirements

MEP Space Requirement
*
Equipment Each additional Notes
Up to 300 rooms (m²) 100 rooms (m²)
D
oService Shafts Up to 300 rooms (m²) For and addition of
m up to 100 rooms
e
Service shafts for each 2 Guest 0.7 – 0.9 4
s
Rooms
t
i A) With primary air supply
c 1.0 m x 1.0 m 5
 Vertical distribution

B) Without primary air supply

w 0.6 m x 0.8 m 6
a  Horizontal distribution
t
eSwimming pool equipment 40 (including balancing
r tank)

storage tanks, fire protection tanks, fuel oil tanks and gas tanks are NOT
INCLUDED in the estimated space requirements noted above.
Notes:
1) Subject to equipment selection (instant vs. storage)
2) As per requirement of local power authority
3) Under consideration of spare stock requirements adjusted to local conditions
4) Service shafts between back-to-back bathrooms
5) An elongated shaft of 2m x 0.5m may be more convenient and should be considered
6) Requires provisions to accommodate ducts in corridor false ceiling
74.6
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Ventilation Requirements

Outdoor Air Requirements for Ventilation m³/ hr/ person or as noted

otherwise

Dining Rooms *** 35.0

Kitchens ** 20.0
Employee Café ** 35.0
Bar/lounge 70.0
Library 25.0
Bedrooms 100 m³/hr/bay
Living rooms 100 m³/hr/bay
Guest baths/Toilets (unit) ** 85.0
Lobbies 25.0
Conference Rooms 50.0
Ballrooms 50.0
Offices 35.0
Communication Centre 35.0
Barber/Beauty Shops 45.0
Spa/Treatment Rooms 50.0
Gym/Cardiovascular Areas 50.0
Squash Courts 120.0
Spectator area 35.0
Entertainment Centre 70.0
Casinos 80.0
Workrooms 25.0
3
Public Toilets
70.0 m /hr per stall or urinal
3 2
PABX/Computer/MATV Room 60 m /hr/m
3
Locker Rooms 50.0 m /hr per stall or urinal
3
Storage (Active) 5.0 m /hr/m²
3
Storage (Inactive) 1.0 m /hr/m²
2.0
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Ventilation Requirements

3
Outdoor Air Requirement for Ventilation m / hr/ person or as noted
otherwise
3 2
Corridors 0.8 m / hr/ m
3 2
Swimming Pool Decks 9.0 m / hr/ m
3 2
Butcher Shops 15.0 m / hr/ m
3 2
Bakery Shops* 10.0 m / hr/ m
Laundry and Valet** 10.0 - 30.0 changes / hr
Enclosed Parking Garage 6.0 changes / hr
Diesel Generator Room (Passive) 3.0 changes / hr
Diesel Generator Room (Active) 15.0 changes/ hr
* Shall be superseded by greater equipment requirements.

** Shall be designed for greater ventilation requirements to prevent accumulation of

heat build up, contaminants, odours, fumes, gases or other conditions, which pose a
health hazard to the occupants or may cause food spoilage.
*** Shall be designed for greater ventilation requirements when associated with an
“Open Kitchen” concept.
Note: In the absence of building occupant loads usually provided by the architect, the
Space Design Requirement table of the Fire and Life Safety chapter of the ER&MS
may be used for preliminary ventilation calculations.

74.8
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards for Room Pressurisation

Area Supply Exhaust Trans Pressure

Guest Rooms X X +
Suites X X +
Guest Baths ** X < –
Guest Corridors / Circulation Areas X X > +
Floor Pantries X X < –
Restaurants * X > +
Lounge / Bar X X < –
Entertainment Centre X X –
Ballroom / Meeting Room X X > +
Interpretation Room / Booth X < –
Projection Room X X < –
Lobby X X > +
Toilets X X < –
Administrative Offices X X > +
Other Offices X X > +
Retail Shops X X < –
Fitness Centre/Spa X X –
Indoor Pools X X –
Massage Room X X –
Kitchen * X X < –
Pastry / Bakery X X > +
Butcher Shop X X 0
Garde Manger X X 0
Laundry and Valet X X < –
Storage / Active X X < –
Storage / Inactive X < –
Boiler Room * X X < --
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards for Room Pressurisation

Area Supply Exhaust Trans Pressure

Refrigeration Plant X X < –

Fan Rooms X < –
Transformer Rooms X X –
Switch Gear Rooms X X < –
Emergency Generator Passive X < –
Emergency Generator Active X X < –
Elevator Machine Rooms X < –
Workshops X < –
Telephone Equipment Room X X > +
Computer Room X X > +
Locker Rooms X X < –
Enclosed Parking Garage X X –

X Required + Positive
< Transfer in - Negative
> Transfer out 0 Neutral
* Conditioned air could be transfer to/from this area from/to adjacent areas, as permitted
by code
** Guest baths, unless oversized, will transfer air from bedroom through 12mm door
undercut.
74.10
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards – Indoor Noise Criteria for A/C

Design
Type of Area Recommended NC
•
Criteria Range
General Manager’s Residence 30 to 35
Individual Guest Rooms or Suites 30 to 35
Meeting / Banquet Rooms Public Circulation 30 to 35
Conference Rooms and Boardrooms 30 to 35
Halls / Corridors, Lobbies (Front of House) 35 to 40
Corridors (Guest Floors) 35 to 40
Services / Support Areas (Back of House) 40 to 45
Public Areas 35 to 40
Apartments 30 to 35
Executive Offices 30 to 45
Private Offices 30 to 35
Computer Equipment Rooms 40 to 45
Public Circulation (Back of House) 40 to 45
Chapel / Prayer Room 30 to 35
Libraries 35 to 40
Movie Theatres 30 to 35
Car Park 50 to 65
Plant Rooms (except chillers plant & generator set) 65 to 73

Notes:
• Design goals may be increased by 5 dB when noise intrusion from other sources
represents a limiting condition.
• These are for unoccupied spaces, with all systems operating.
• This list is a recommended Noise Criteria related to Mechanical Systems.
- For particular room-to-room sound criteria refer to THE OPERATOR Technical
Services Design Recommendations and Minimum Standards.
74.11
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards – Steam Pressure Requirements

Equipment Pressure Bars

Laundry equipment 8.0 to 9.0

Valet equipment 2.0 to 3.0
Cooking & Dishwashing (stand alone or built-in units) 1.0 to 2.0
Steam Cleaning Hose Outlets 1.0 to 2.0
Hot Water Heaters 0.5 to 1.0
Preheat/Reheat* , Direct Heating*, Air Tempering* 0.5 to 1.0
Direct Heating ** 0.5 to 1.0
Air Tempering ** 0.5 to 1.0
Kitchen Hood Steam Smothering System (see qualifications below) * 2.0
Humidification As required

* Hot water is preferred for Direct Preheating and Reheat. Direct Tempering and heating by
steam should not be considered unless winter design temperature is -10°C or lower.

74.12
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Material Standards – HVAC Piping

Service Size Material Type Weight

Steam Low Pressure All Steel Black Sch. 40

Steam High Pressure All Steel Black Sch. 80
Condensate All Steel Black Sch. 40
Boiler Feed-Low Pressure All Steel Black Sch. 40
Boiler Feed-High Pressure All Steel Black Sch. 80
Blowdown All Steel Black Sch. 40
Hot Water-Low Temperature All Steel Black Sch. 40
Hot Water-High Temperature All Steel Black Sch. 40
All Copper Type L Hard

Chilled Water All Steel Black Sch. 40

Condenser Water All Steel Black Sch. 40
Secondary Water Mains/Risers All Steel Black Sch. 40
Secondary 30cm & smaller Copper Type L Soft
Fan Coil Drains All Plastic PVC Cell Class 1
NFPA
Drain Columns All Steel Galvanised Sch. 40
All Copper Type L Hard
All Plastic PVC Sch. 40
Vents and Reliefs All Steel Black Sch. 40
Make Up Water All Brass 85% Red Standard
All Copper Type L Hard
All Steel Galvanised Sch. 40
Refrigerant All Copper Type K Hard
Compressed Air All Copper Type K Hard
All Steel Galvanised Sch. 80
Fuel Oil (include fill / vent) All Steel Black Sch. 40
All Copper Type K Hard

74.13
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Material Standards HVAC Piping

Service Size Material Type Weight

Fuel Oil Gauge All Plastic PVC Type II Grade I

Notes:
• Underground fuel oil supply and return lines shall be protected from corrosion by
encasement or mill coating.
• Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B-88.
• Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A-53 or ASTM A-120.

74.14
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Requirements - Color Coding & Pipe

Identification
Color Schedules (Pantone Colors)

Bands Arrow/s

Fire Lines Red Black

Steam Blue White

Steam Condensate Green White

Domestic Cold Water Green White

Hot Water 60°C Green White

Hot Water 85°C Green White

Pool Water Green White

Chilled Water Supply Green White

Chilled Water Return Green White

Condenser Water Supply Green White

Condenser Water Return Green White

Grey Water Orange Black

Black Water Orange Black

Natural Gas or LPG Brown White

Compressed Air Blue White

Note:

Pipe Label Design

 Pipe labels shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 13.1 - 2007
 Pipe labels should indicate both contents of the pipe and it’s direction of flow
 Arrows at one or both ends indicate flow; the contents are indicated by text and by a
standard color scheme

74.15
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Requirements - Color Coding & Pipe

Identification
Pipe Label Placement
 Pipe markers should be positioned so that they can be easily seen from the normal
angle of approach. For instance, below the centerline of the pipe if the pipe is
overhead, and above the centerline if the pipe is below eye level. Labels are
required at the following locations:
- Adjacent to all values and flanges
- Adjacent to all changes of direction
- On both sides of wall or floor penetration
- At regular intervals on straight runs (maximum 15 m spacing)
Label Sizes
Pipe diameter determines the appropriate label and text size, as shown in the following:

Outside Pipe Diameter Minimum Length of Minimum Height

(including insulation)* Label Color Field
19 mm- 32mm 203 mm 13 mm

38 mm – 51 mm 203 mm 19 mm

64 mm – 152 mm 305 mm 32 mm

203 mm – 254 mm 610 mm 64 mm

> 254 mm 813 mm 89 mm

*Pipes too small to be directly labeled should be marked with a hanging tag
Valve Tabs
Mark valves and actuators to indicate their function, normal position, and other
information. Since few valves offer a flat surface for a label to adhere to, hanging tags
are frequently used. Valve Tabs can help improve efficiency and avoid accidents by
eliminating confusion in crowded environments.

74.16
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Material Standards - Valves

Service Size Ends Type

Vents and Relief Valves to 50 mm Wrought Screwed

63 mm & up Steel Seamless Welded
Make Up Water All Brass, Copper Screwed Soldered
Compressed Air All Wrought, Copper or Soldered
Forged Brass Compressed
Refrigerant All Wrought/Copper Soldered

Emergency Generator to 7.5 cm Steel Welded

Exhaust 10 cm & up Steel Welded

Boiler Feed Water Flow 10 50 mm Wrought Screwed

Press. 63 mm & up Steel Seamless Welded

Boiler Blow-Off All Wrought Screwed

Fuel Oil All Malleable, Wrought Screwed

or Copper

Fuel Oil Gauge All PVC Cement

Steam, Condensate & Drips to 50 mm Screwed Gate

(7 atmos & up) Globe

Check

63 mm & up Flanged Gate

Globe

Check

Steam, Condensate & Drips to 50 mm Screwed Gate

(medium & low pressure) Globe

Check
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Material Standards - Valves

Service Size Ends Type

Steam, Condensate & Drips 63 mm & up Flanged Gate

(medium & low pressure)
Globe
Check
Secondary Water Run-outs To 50 mm Screwed Gate
(8 atmos to 18 atmos)
Globe
Check
Secondary Water Run-outs To 50 mm Screwed Gate
(up to 8 atmos )
Globe
Check
Secondary Water Run-outs To 50 mm Soldered Check
(up to 8 atmos )
63 mm & up Flanged Gate
Globe
Check
Pump Discharge To 75 mm Wafer Body Balanced Check
10 cm & up Flanged Balanced Check
Fire Protection Flanged O.S. & Y

74.18
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards – Duct Insulation

Service Material Thickness Duty

Outside air intake, Duct intake Rigid, Coated fiberboard 35 mm Acoustic

plenums, Equipment Housing 74.19
50 mm Thermal
indoor
75 mm
Thermal
outdoor

Exhaust Plenums Rigid, Coated fibreboard 35 mm Acoustic

Duct Silencers Rigid, Coated fibreboard 35 mm Acoustic
Supply Ducts Fibreglass blanket w/vapour 50 mm Thermal
barrier
Fan Coil Unit Rigid w/vapor barrier 50 mm Thermal
Fan Coil Transition Rigid, neoprene coated 25 mm Acoustic
Laundry supply, conditioned air Blanket 50 mm Thermal
supply & return ducts

Laundry supply, conditioned air Rigid Board 25 mm Thermal

supply & return ducts (exposed)
Laundry Ironer Exhaust Rigid w/vapor barrier 40 mm Thermal
Laundry Dryers Exhaust Rigid w/vapor barrier 40 mm Thermal
Exhaust Sub Ducts Rigid fibreglass 12 mm Acoustic
Cooking Hood Exhaust a) Calcium silicate plus 50 mm Thermal
b) Fibreglass blanket w/vapour 25 mm Thermal/
barrier Sanitation
Exposed Ducts Normal insulation + 2 glass 50 mm Thermal /
coated w/weatherproof mastic 25 mm weatherizing

Boiler Calcium silicate E block & 2 coats 75 mm Thermal

of cement. Sheet metal clad 25 mm
Steam Piping Webbers Asbestos-free cement 25 mm Thermal
on glass cloth jacket 12 mm
Exhaust Sub Ducts Rigid fibreglass 12 mm Acoustic
Boiler Flue-Gas Outlets Calcium silicate & 2 coats of 50 mm Thermal
cement w/glass cloth jacket 25 mm
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards – Duct Insulation

Service Material Thickness Duty

Boiler and Incinerator Breaching Calcium silicate plus 2 coats of 50 mm Thermal

cement w/glass cloth jacket 25 mm
Stack Interior Insulation Plibrico plicast LWI-20 (bottom) 50 mm Thermal
Plibrico plicast Hydro-mix (top) 50 mm
Hydrous calcium 50 mm Thermal
Stack Exterior Insulation Silicate Wire mesh 25 mm & 2 20 mm Thermal
coats of cement w/glass cloth 25mm
jacket
Air Handling Units and Return 2 layers fibreglass 35 mm Insulation
Chilled Water and Secondary 2 layers fibreglass 35 mm Insulation
Converters De-aerators Fibreglass 35 mm Thermal
Hot Water Generators Fibreglass 35 mm Thermal
Flash Tanks Fibreglass 25 mm Thermal
Flash Legs Fibreglass 25 mm Thermal
Compression Tank Fibreglass 25 mm Thermal
Expansion Tank Fibreglass 25 mm Thermal
Surge Thank Fibreglass 25 mm Thermal
Hot Water Storage Tank Fibreglass 100 mm Thermal
Condensate Receivers Fibreglass 50 mm Thermal
Kitchen Range Hood Exhaust Calcium Silicate 50 mm Thermal
Fan
Emerg. Gen. Muffler & Exhaust Calcium Silicate 50 mm Acoustic
Pipe
Minimum Density:
Blanket–type flexible fibrous–glass insulation minimum density 16 Kg/m3
Rigid-type fibrous glass insulation, minimum density 48 Kg/m3 for thermal duct insulation
and 96 Kg/m3 for acoustic insulation
Glass fiber may be replaced with closed cell elastomeric foam materials, e.g. where
applicable.
74.20
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Standards - Piping Insulation

Service Size Material Thickness

Steam (over 2 bar) 12-50 mm Glass Fibre 25 mm

52-150 mm Glass Fibre 38 mm
200-360 mm Glass Fibre 50 mm

All other hot piping 12-200 mm Glass Fibre 25 mm

250 mm & up Glass Fibre 38 mm
Condenser water (heat traced) & tower 20-150 mm Glass Fibre 38 mm
makeup water on roof 200 mm & up w/aluminium jacket 50 mm
Chilled water & fan coil piping 12-25 mm Glass Fibre 38 mm
30-75 mm Glass Fibre 50 mm
90 mm & up Glass Fibre 63 mm

Fan coil unit drains, makeup water & All Glass Fibre 12 mm
cooling coil drains
Refrigerant suction All Glass Fibre 63 mm
Domestic Hot Water 12-25 mm Glass Fibre 12 mm
30-75 mm Glass Fibre 25 mm
 All piping in this section and the plumbing section shall be colour coded in accordance
with THE OPERATOR requirements.
 Glass fiber may be replaced with closed cell elastomeric foam materials, e.g. Armaflex,
Rubatex, where applicable.

74.21
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Mechanical Codes and Standards

Governing and Recommended Codes

 City and/or Country Building Code BC

 City and/or Country Electrical Code EC
 City and/or Country Fire Code FC

 National Fire Protection Association NFPA

Applicable Standards or Equivalent

 American National Standards Institute ANSI

 American Society for Testing & Materials ASTM
 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers ASHRAE
 Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors’ National Association SMACNA
 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ARI
 National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA
 National Fire Protection Association NFPA
 Underwriters Laboratories UL

 Factory Mutual FM
 National Electric Code NEC
 Building Officials and Code Administration International, Inc. BOCA
 International Standards Organisation ISO
 Environmental Protection Agency EPA
 Air Moving and Conditioning Association AMCA
 American Water Works Association AWWA
 World Health Organisation WHO

 British Standards BS

74.22
 Operational Concept
All multi-level hotels must be minimally equipped with correctly designed lift and
escalator systems as required in compliance with this minimum standard. The planning
of these systems should commence during the initial design phases and shall consist of
the following:
● Lift System
● Dumb Waiter
● Escalator System
● Guarantee, Servicing Contract, and Extended Maintenance Contract

Experience Record
The manufacturer and installer shall have no less than ten (10) years documented
experience in the manufacture or installation of works in this field and be able to provide
professional commissioning of the system. Manufacturers shall provide a list of five
comparable projects that have the features as specified for this project. These projects
must be on-line and operational.
Manufacturers shall employ specialists in the field including Programming, Engineering,
Field Supervision, and Installation. Specialists shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of
experience.

Lift System
General Standards
● Code (National)
- Minimally, Lift and Escalator equipment and installation to be in accordance with
ASME, IBC and NFPA requirements.
- ADAAG for disabled persons.
● Licenses and Permits.
- Minimally provide all licenses and permits required by authorities having
jurisdiction to operate the lift system.
● Temporary Use of Lifts
- Any service or freight lift required for use before final completion shall be provided
with temporary car enclosures, guards or other protection for lift hoistway opening
and trained lift operators together with any other special labor or equipment
required.

75
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

- Passenger lifts shall not be used as temporary lifts.

Submittals
Minimally, the following information shall be submitted to T.S. for review:
 Traffic analysis for buildings over 12 stories. Traffic analysis must be carried out for
both passenger lifts and service lifts.
 Product Data
- Capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes and similar
information.
 Shop Drawings
- Plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each
landing, machine room layout, co-ordination with building structure, relationships
with other construction.
- Locations of equipment and signals.
- Maximum and average power demands.
 Manufacturer Certificates
- For hoist way, pit, machine room layout and dimensions, and electrical service,
(including emergency power) as shown and specified.
 Maintenance Manuals
- Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources
indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and
similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to
manufacturer’s and Installer’s maintenance personnel.
Design Criteria and Performance Requirements
 Summary of Data for Passenger/Service/Freight Lifts

Low Rise and Resort Hotels

No. of No. of No. of Passenger No. of Service Freight

Rms Flrs Units Capacity/Speed Units Capacity/Speed Capacity/Speed

3-7 Floors
500+ 7 5-6 1,600 kg 1.6 m/sec 4-5 1,250 kg 1.6 m/sec
3000 kg 0.50 m/sec

400+ 6 5-6 1,600 kg 1.2 m/sec 4-5 1, 250 kg 1.2 m/sec

300 7 4-5 1,600 kg 1.6 m/sec 3-4 1, 250 kg 1.6 m/sec

300 Up to 5 4-5 1,600 kg 1.2m/sec 3-4 1,250 kg 1.2 m/sec

76
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

Medium Rise City-Business Type Hotels

Design Parameter Passenger Lifts Service Lifts Freight Lifts

Population Density 1.75 Persons/ Room Based on staffing -

Average Interval 40 sec. max 50 sec. max -
Waiting Time 30 sec. max 40 sec. max -
5 min. Group Handling 12% min. Based on staffing
Traffic Type Two-way, Late afternoon/ Early Early morning, 30-
evening Peak Traffic minute Peak Traffic
Capacity 1600 kg 1600 kg 3000 kg
Speed 0.75 - 1.0 m/s
Up to 10 floors 1.75 m/sec 1.6 m/sec
11 floors to 15 floors 2.0 m/sec 1.75 m/sec
16 floors to 20 floors 2.5 m/sec 2.0 m/sec
21 floor to higher 3.5 m/sec 3.0 m/sec
26 floor to higher Based on traffic analysis Based on traffic analysis

Number of lifts

Up to 10 floors and 200 2-3 units 2 units

rooms
11-15 floors and 300 rooms 3-4 units 2-3 units

16-20 floors and 400 rooms 4-5 units 3-4 units

21-25 floors and 500 rooms 5-6 units 4-5 units

26 floors and higher and Based on traffic analysis Based on traffic analysis
500 + room
Net inside Car sizes
2 2
Area 3.45 m 3.36 m

Dimensions 2.3 m wide x 1.5 m deep x 1.6 m wide x 2.1 m deep

3.0 m high x 2.7 m high
Car Doors Center Opening Center Opening Vertical Sliding
1100 mm wide x 2300 mm high 1100 mm wide x Upward Opening
2300 mm high 2500 mm wide x
2500 mm high

77
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

Notes:
- The above summaries are to be regarded as guidelines only, subject to
adjustment to local building configuration conditions, requirements, confirmation or
revision.
- Arrange elevators in a common lobby with no more than four in a line. Preferred
arrangement is two or more opposite each other to a maximum of four on a side.
Other arrangements may be dictated by aesthetics & building design.
- The bank of elevators should be highly visible for guests to locate.
- For hotels with 25 or more floors, consideration should be given to high-rise and
low-rise banks of elevators.
- Elevators and vending rooms that share a common wall with guest rooms or
within 300 mm of a wall assembly additional sound reinforcement shall be
provided. An Acoustical Consultant shall coordinate the detailing of the sound –
attenuated walls.
- Common hoist ways shall not exceed applicable building code restrictions.
- Where possible, isolate elevator hoist ways from guestrooms by surrounding with
lobbies, mechanical shaft space, or stairwells.
- Elevator mechanical rooms should be located as remotely as possible from guest
rooms, (i.e., hydraulic elevator pump rooms- low rise hotel).
- Double deck units, shuttle lifts for high – rise buildings 30 stories and higher, must
be analyzed by a lift specialist.
- Hotels having more than 300 rooms and/or more than 12 floors require an
individual traffic study to determine the number of lifts, capacities and speed.
- Where passenger lifts also serve banquet areas, additional elevators may be
required.
 For ballrooms located above or below the ground floor, provide sufficient
vertical transportation in order to achieve a discharge time of 30 minutes based
on full occupancy of the ballroom.
- Where finishing materials in cab exceed a dead weight of 100 kg, the next larger
size must be specified to compensate for the loss of carrying capacity.
- Passenger cabs shall have a clear height of 3.0 m to receive finishes, and be no
less than 2.8 m with finishes applied.
- Service cabs shall have a clear height of 2.7 m to receive finishes, and be no less
than 2.5 m with finishes applied.
 Lift system comprises the following:
- Hoistway and hoistway equipment
- Lift Car
- Fixtures and Indicators
 Definitions:
- Passenger Lift: for guest use serving public and guestroom areas
- Service Lift: located in back of house areas for hotel personnel use.
- Freight Lift: serves banquet services for transporting large, heavy items to the
ballroom and/or meeting areas of the hotel
Hoistway
Minimally complying with the following:
 Applicable building code
 Top of each hoistway to be passively vented to the outside.
 Brake

78
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

- Non-asbestos lining (spring loaded, closed and open electrically).

 Hoistway Entrances
- Architrave and doors to be fire rated for not less than 1.5 hours.
- Provide emergency key provision at all landings.
- Minimum clear opening of 1.20 m wide and 2.50 m high and shall include
extruded aluminum sill with anti-slip finish.
- Corrosion resistant coating to be applied, prior to completion of the installation.
- Provide an approved interlock hoistway entrance to:
 Prevent operation of the lift unless all doors for that lift are secured
 Maintain the doors in their closed position while the lift is away from the
landing.
- Provide emergency access to the hoist way as required by governing codes.
 Hoistway Materials
- Non-flammable.
- All electrical cables to be flame resistant and, other than the traveling cable, shall
be housed in metal conduit or other metal enclosures.
Lift Car
Minimally complying with the following:
 Top Station
- Comprised of key operated switch and constant pressure up/down buttons on
each lift. Hydraulic lifts do not require this feature.
- Car to respond to up/down command at inspection speed.
- Provide electrical fixture of 40 W enclosed fluorescent, switched from car top
station.
 Platform
- The entire platform to rest on rubber pads, so designed to form an isolating
cushion between the car and car frame.
- Platform deflection to maximum 3 mm under maximum load.
- Provide 600 x 400 mm, emergency hatch with electrical interlock and anchors for
handrails.
- To suppress noise and drumming effects, floor must be stiffened and lined with
fire retardant-treated plywood or other material, which will suit the proposed finish
- All finishing materials to be fire resistant.
- Sill to finished floor gap shall not exceed 25 mm.
- Gap between floor slab sill at hoist way entrance and car platform sill shall not
exceed 25 mm.
Car Doors
Minimally complying with the following:
 General
- Center opening for passenger and service elevators, automatic operated, variable
speed, torque and pressure mechanism.
- Must be hung plumb and even to within 1 mm.
- Floor gibes to be well fitted so as to prevent popping noise as a car passes
structural members or car in motion in a shared shaft.
 Rear Openings
- If rear opening is intended for passenger use, a third auxiliary operating panel to
be provided at rear opening.

79
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

- Other features to be similar to the front opening doors.

 Door Operation
- Provide latest manufacturers state of the art technology on door operation and
safety.
- Provide photoelectric monitor for each passenger and service lift. Monitors traffic
across the threshold of the door and shall initiate door closing 1-3 seconds after
last beam interruption or a predetermined and programmable time interval has
elapsed, thus overriding door open period.
- The momentary pressure of the “door open” button provided in the car shall
reverse the motion and reopen the doors and reset the time interval unless
overridden by the photoelectric monitoring.
- If the doors are prevented from closing fully for a fixed time period, the doors shall
open partly, a buzzer shall sound in the area, and the doors shall begin closing at
approximately half speed. Normal operation resumes at the next landing reached
by the car.
- Upon the car reaching landing speed a soft chime in the car shall sound.
- Door open period on all floors except lobby floor to be programmable so that door
closure will commence 1-3 seconds, following the photoelectric beam interruption
by the last boarding or disembarking passenger.
- Door closure to override door open period where car loading has reached bypass
limit, or when another car approaches the lobby floor.
- Doors to remain open for a time period sufficient to meet handicapped
requirements.
- Automatically reduce door open period when the photoelectric monitor does not
sense a passenger leaving or entering the car.
 Door Open Clearance
- Clear door opening on passenger or service lifts to be 1100 mm minimum.
- Door Height:
 Passenger serving guest floors: flushed to corridor finished ceiling.
 Express elevators: Flushed to cab finished ceiling.
 Service: 2.3 m minimum.
Operating Panels
Minimally complying with the following:
 Car-Operating Panel
- Provide a minimum of two in-car-operating panels for each passenger lift and a
minimum of one for service and freight lifts to contain the following:
 Digital information display unit for travel direction and floor level indication
 A series of push buttons or micro movement switches corresponding to the
floors served
 Passenger lift car-operating panel button:
- Square buttons for guestroom floor levels approximately 22 mm x 22 mm
in dimension.
- Rectangular buttons for public area floor levels. Dimensions shall be
based on the arrangements of the square buttons and area should
accommodate for inscription of names of all outlets in the particular level.
- Interior designer and Graphic & Signage consultants to design the panels,
buttons and finishes.
 Alarm button
 Intercom

80
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

 Door open/close
 Emergency alarm connected to the main control panel located in the security
command center, at the engineering office or communication centre.
 Key switch for manual or automatic operation
 Key switch for fire and seismic operation
 Key switch or card reader for secure access operation (as required to control
building access).
- Required on both sides for passenger elevator.
- Easily programmable by hotel.
- A locked compartment integral with operating panel shall contain:
 Light and fan switches
 Main Generator switch or rectifier supply switch
 Speaker in each elevator, synthesized voice announcements.
- On sounding of general fire alarm, lifts shall interface with the Fire Alarm System.
Please see further details at the Fire and Life Safety System of this document.
- Emergency phone connected to the PABX.
See Attachment: T.S. Recommended Guest Lift Control Panel Button Configuration
 Main Control Panel
- Location of the main control panel shall be at either the Security Command Centre
or as required by local authority. Alarms shall be repeated at the Engineering
Office and Communication Center.
- Key operated switches to shut down each lift or to bring the car to lobby.
- Provide emergency paging provisions selectable for individual or collective car
contact.
- Digital information display module integrated with, or separate from, the main
control panel.
- Position and Direction Indicators
- Panel display to indicate all lifts, dumb waiters and escalators position, direction of
travel, door status, and normal or independent service indicator.
- Automatic and manual switch to initiate retrieval through the fire alarm system.
Another key operated switch shall reset the system to normal service.
Fixtures and Indicators
Minimally comply with the following:
 Emergency Car Lighting
- Provide 12-volt trickle charged unit to illuminate the cab and provide power to the
emergency alarm bell for each car.
 Provision for Speakers (all cars)
- Provide emergency speakers.
- Speaker to have two voice coils and to be connected to the background music
system and emergency paging system.
 Car Position Indicator (Passenger and Service Cars)
- Digital information display unit located within or adjacent to each car operating
panel for travel direction and floor level indication.
 Lighting
- For passenger car, Lighting Designer to specify adequate in-car lighting to ensure
that in-car graphics buttons, controls, etc. can be easily identified. Integration of
emergency lighting is required.

81
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

 Hall Buttons
- A single micro movement push button provided at each terminal landing as
located by the Architect. For passenger car, design and finish as specified by
Interior Designer.
- A dual micro movement button on a single plate to be provided at each
intermediate floor as located by the Architect. For passenger car, design and
finish by Interior Designer.
- When a call is registered by momentary pressure on the push button, that button
shall become illuminated and remain illuminated until the call is answered.
 Hall Lanterns
- One for each lift with finish as specified by Interior Designer or Architect.
- To be equipped with up and down indications at all levels except for each terminal
landing.
- When a car is stopping at a landing, the lantern to indicate the direction in which
the car is travelling and shall become illuminated prior to arrival of the car.
- A soft chime to announce the impending arrival of the associated lift.
 Disabled Markings: Passenger Lifts
- Provide at car buttons and hall buttons in compliance with ADAAG disabled code
or as required by local code.
 Exhaust Fan
- Quiet operating heavy-duty 3 speed exhaust fan with keyed switch in the car-
operating panel.
 Video/TV Monitors
- Flat panel 10.4” diagonal screen minimum.
- One per lift.
- Server to be located at marketing department.
- Applicable to passenger lift only.
Communication
 Lift contractor shall allow for, and provide necessary cables and connection for
wireless communication providers to install wireless antennas within the elevator
shafts or on top of the elevator cars for Wi-Fi / cellular/ GSM type communications
equipment.
Hoisting Equipment
Minimally complying with the following:
 Hoisting equipment shall be from manufacturers’ latest “state of the art technology”
consisting of the following:
- Speed drive
 DC drive
 Motor generator
 AC drive
 AC variable speed drive
- Controller
- Power inverters
- Speed governor
- Gearless hoist machine
- Geared hoist machine
- Motion control

82
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

 Emergency Cranking
- Hoisting machines to be provided with a set of special tools, such as emergency
access tool to open cab outer doors, a hand crank or similar tool to release the
hoist brake and provide for manual movement of the car in case of emergency.
- Provide a tool board fitted to a wall in the lift machine room, with instructions for
their use clearly written on the board both in English and the local language.
- A switch to be provided at the hoist way machine room to interrupt power to the lift
mains.
 Machine Room-less Elevators
- Machine room-less elevators can be used if feasible and requested by the
architect, if location prohibits machine room.
 Energy Efficiency/Sustainable energy use
- Energy efficiency of the hoisting equipment machinery and controls must be a
major factor in the selection process.
Ropes
 Compensating Rope
- Minimally required for all systems with speed over 2.0 m/sec, or travel in excess of
30.0 m, to compensate for the shifting weight of the hoist ropes.
- Compensating chain where provided to be enclosed in a plastic flame resistant
jacket to minimize noise.
 Hoist Ropes
- Must be traction steel material.
- Governor ropes to be steel. All ropes to consist of minimally eight strands wound
about hemp core center.
- Wear indicator feature is required.
Passenger and Service Lifts / Special Features
 Hydraulic Lift
- Used for freight or passenger lift applications only where fewer than 3 levels are
served.
- Maximum waiting times and average interval times shall be precisely calculated
by state of the art traffic analysis software program.
- Generally geared drives are used for speeds up to 1.60 m/sec, gearless at
1.80 m/sec and above.
 In-Transit
- “In-transit time period” to be a maximum of 95 seconds.
- Acceleration/deceleration to be linear and smooth.
- Stops to be without cable oscillations.
 Noise Levels
- Noise from all stationary equipment to not intrude into adjoining public areas by
more than 15 dB.
- Noise from moving equipment including door operation, car motion, fan, wind,
etc., should not intrude into adjoining corridors by more than 20 dB and adjoining
sleeping rooms not by more than 10 dB. (All octave bands)
 Automatic Leveling
- Must be within ± 4 mm of landing threshold with load range of 0-100%.

83
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

Passenger Lifts Special Features

 Solid state door safety
- Safety edge (Janus Pana 40 plus 3D or equal)
 Passenger lifts located in unconditioned spaces in resort properties, shall have split
a/c units installed on top of the car.
 Special Elevator
- Car Type – maximized glass area for “sight seeing” to atrium or outside building.
- Use a clustered elevator arrangement to maximize view.
- Finishes shall match lobby and atrium. Cables, rails and other visible mechanical
equipment to be as unobtrusive as possible. Top and bottom car shrouds painted
in color to blend with hoist way aesthetics.
Service Lifts Special Features
Minimally complying with the following:
 Door Protective Device (Service and Freight)
- Solid State Door Safety Edge (Janus Pana 40 plus 3D or equal).
- Dead zone of door protective system shall be Photoelectric edge.
 Overload Feature
- Service lift to be fitted with the load-weighing feature to illuminate “overload”
fixture and defeat the car’s operating circuits when car load reaches 110% or
more of rated load.
- Overload fixture and/or circuit defeat to conform to governing code.
- Car platform may require stiffening to minimize margin of error resulting from
excessive deflection.
Freight Lift Special Features
Minimally complying with the following:
 Lift Car
- Enclose on three sides with sheet steel to a height of 2.5 m+. A solid sheet steel
top shall be provided over the car.
- Car entrance to be protected by an automatically operated vertical up-sliding car
gate of metal construction, with panels of wire mesh or expanded metal.
- Car gate to be provided with an electric contact to prevent the operation of the lift
if the gate and/or the hoist way door or escape hatch is not fully closed, except
within inching zone where low speed is called for.
 Car Platform
- Made up of structural steel profiles securely welded or bolted together.
- Finished flooring to be of “non-skid” type aluminum, diamond embossed and
welded liquid tight.
- Plates welded to the platform members to be of sufficient thickness to
accommodate the capacity of the lift and concentrated load without observable
deflection.
 Hoist Way Doors
- Bi-parting manually operated, vertical sliding, counter balanced freight lift hoist
way door of all metal construction.
- Suitable for a 2.5 m wide x 2.5 m high clear opening car door.

84
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

Elevator Management System (EMS)

A PC based system to be interfaced to the vendor's remote elevator monitoring system
(REM). The EMS views, analyses and controls the performance of the elevators and
automatically sends information to the REM for diagnostic analysis.
Minimally shall have the following features:
 Graphical representation of group of elevators.
 Remote monitoring.
 Detection of faults on screen.
 Registration storage and printing of traffic data.
 Automatic reporting and registration of calls to vendor's REM.
 Fault alarms to be highlighted visually and audibly.
 Help function for troubleshooting.
 Detection of “normal” or “independent” service.
 Ability to release car from “independent” service.
Operating System: Passenger, Service and Freight
Minimally complying with the following:
 All operating systems shall be of microprocessor- based controller, operations shall
be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons.
 Operating systems shall consist of:
- Simplex operation.
- Group operation.
 All operating system shall utilize the latest standard features provided by the
manufacturer but no less than the features listed below:
- Full collective operation.
- Anti-nuisance.
- Call parking recognition.
- Direction preference.
- Direction reversal.
- Fan and light protection.
- Hall button protection.
- Fading passing tone.
- Load weighting bypass- field adjusted for 80% of rated load.
- Platform load weighting.
- Independent/Express priority operation.
 Group operating features:
- Zoned car parking.
- Delayed car protection.
- Relative car response dispatching.
- Moderate incoming traffic.
- Rotational selection.
- Variable interval dispatching.
- Up peak clock operation.
- Moderate outgoing traffic.
- Down peak clock operation.
- Up hall call bypass.
- Channeling operation.
- Early car assignment.

85
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

- Secure access operation

 Secure access to be programmable for car calls and specific floor access.
 Under secure access operation a call or a floor selection will not register
unless a valid card is inserted into the adjacent card reader. This shall be
coordinated and interfaced with the appropriate key card system.
 Selection and changes of floors and codes to be done on each car – operating
panel.
 Security status and access codes to be protected from loss of power failure for
at least 24 hours.
 See also Elevator Security under the Security Systems chapter.
Inspection Operation System- All Lifts Except Hydraulic
 To comply with manufacturer’s standard requirement or as per local code requirement.

Elevator Retrieval System

 See Fire and Life Safety Systems chapter.

Lift Systems Information

Provide all relevant information concerning guest and service lifts for the project in a
format similar to below:

Lift No. P1 P2 P3 S4 S5

Machine Type (please √):

Gearless Type 2
Gearless Type Multiple
Gearless Type Single
Machine Room- less
Hydraulic
Capacity (kg)
Speed (m/sec)
2)
Platform Dimensions (m
Operation: (please √)
- Simplex
- Group
Fireman Phase 1 & 2
In-House Fire Brigade
Emergency Power
Seismic Operation
Landing Served
No. of Opening, Front

86
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

Lift No. P1 P2 P3 S4 S5

No. of Opening, Rear

Door Clear Open Dimension
Door Type
Door Operation
Lobby Button Type
Car Button Type
Power Supply- Normal
Power Supply - Emergency
3 Speed Fan
Independent Operation
Additional Remarks
Car Finishes
Indicate Lift No (from previous section) Covered by this Schedule and Describe Finishes ________
Description of Proposed Finishes
Ceilings:
Walls:
Base/Skirting:
Cab Door:
Door Header:
Handrails:
Threshold:
Flooring:
Main Operating Panels:
Auxiliary Operating Panels:
Cab Emergency Lighting:
Decorative Lobby Hoist Way:
Lantern/Finishes:
Car Position/Motion Indicator:
Video/TV monitor
Main Lobby Position/Motion Indicator
Emergency Monitoring Panel:

87
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

Provide similar finishing schedule for each type of Lift Cab.

Dumb Waiter
Minimally complying with the following:
 General Standards
- Shall conform to the general standards stipulated in the Lift System.
 Submittals
- Shall conform to the submittals stipulated in the Lift System.
Minimum Features and Specifications
 Car
- Capacity: 90 kg.
- Car inside dimensions: 760 mm x 760 mm x 910 mm height.
- Number of stops: 2.
- Automatic controls: from any floor of service.
- Number of openings: to accommodate up to 3 sides.
 Enclosure
- 16 gauge # 4 satin stainless steel.
- Provide one removable shelf.
- Ceiling recessed electrical light fixture.
- Floor landing to have reinforced floor.
 Car Door
- Horizontal centre opening type
- Manually operated with electronic control to prevent opening whilst car is in
motion
 Hoist Way Door
- Horizontal centre opening type.
- Door panels: 16 gauge stainless steel with satin polish and No. 4 finish.
- Welded unit wall frame.
- Trim and sill: 16 gauge stainless steel with satin polish and No. 4 finish.
- Manually operated with electronic control to prevent opening whilst car is in
motion.
- Provide door lock and control for each door.
 Machine Access Door
- Hinged access door
- Minimally 620 mm x 620 mm
 Counter Weight
- Equal in weight to that of the car plus 40% of rated capacity
Minimum Lift Performance
 Minimum speed: 0.4 m/sec
 Leveling Accuracy
- If car stops above floor level, cab floor to be no more than ± 12 mm from the level
of the hoist way doorsill.
- If car stops at floor level, car floor to be no more than ± 6 mm from the hoist way
doorsill level.
- Drive and control to be single speed AC if speed is less than 15 m per minute.

88
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

- Drive and control to be variable voltage, variable frequency AC if speed is more

than 15 meter per minute.
Fixtures and Indicators
Minimally complying with the following:
 Controller
- Wall-mounted with lockable door.
- Location on hoist way outer wall in sight of machine access door.
- Solid-state programmable.
- UL listed.
 Operational Control
- Automatic calling and sending to levels based on the order on which the calls are
received.
- Provide control station at each level with one button for each level served.
- Control station at each level can call the car and to send the car to any level.
- Push buttons to have stainless steel plates.
 Signal and Devices
- “Door open” call buzzer – sounds when a push button is pressed while a hoist
way door is open.
- “Car here” light and chime to be located in each push button station. Light will
illuminate when car is in transit and when push button is pressed and a hoist way
door gate is open.

Escalator Systems
Minimum Features and Specifications
 Minimally conform to ASME part VIII or locally prevailing codes, whichever is the
higher, including sprinkler installation and/or fire shutter designed to stop smoke and
fire transfer from floor to floor, per NFPA 101.
 Maximum 30° inclination.
 For cross arrangement, the ends of the handrail of the lower and upper escalators to
be at the same horizontal position so as to present uniform appearance.
 Safety Features
Minimally, the following safety devices shall be incorporated in the escalators:
- Step chain safety device shall form part of the tension carriage and will be
provided with safety switches, one for each chain.
- Safety switches shall be easily accessible. On sensing a break in the step chain or
drop of the chain tension below or above to a predetermined value, the safety
switches to cut off supply of power to the escalator, thus halting the escalator.
- Drive chain safety device to be similar in operation to step chain safety device.
- Handrail guard switch stops escalator automatically when handrail movement is
interrupted. Handrail guard and safety device need to be incorporated to prevent
objects from being caught in the exit or entry of the handrails.
- Skirt guard safety switch stops the escalator automatically when an object is
sensed between the step and skirt guard.
- Minimally handrails to be endless, rounded - rectangular in section rubber, with
reinforced linen core, synchronized with speed of steps.
- Comb plates are required at the lower and upper entrance and exit, installed in
sections, in high visibility yellow color.

89
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

- Each step section should have combs in high visibility yellow color.
 Emergency Stop Buttons
- Emergency stop buttons to be provided at upper and lower newel post.
- In areas of seismic activity, a seismic switch will be wired to the emergency stop
button. A key will be necessary to reset the emergency button and the seismic
shutdown.
- During fire operation, stationary escalators may be required to serve as egress
route. A signal from the fire alarm panel will stop the escalator. Restarting would
require restoration of fire alarm circuit and restarting switch.
 Key Operated Switch
- Key operated switch to be provided at the lower and the upper level of each
escalator. This key switch shall have 3 positions: UP-OFF-DOWN motion.
 Nominal Speed
- Escalator to be capable of operating in both directions at 0.5 m/sec with 2 persons
on each tread.
- Provide a programmable run down/start up energy saving system with
programmable range infrared sensors to detect usage and approaching persons
to automatically start and stop the escalator.
 Control Board
- The control board to have all necessary relays, contactors, push buttons, overload
devices, safety switches and circuit breakers for the safe operation of the system.
- Micro switches used for the monitoring of safety devices to be of a quick snap-on
type with non-sticking contacts. Relays used to be of continuous duty rated type.
- Sufficient auxiliary contacts or relays must be provided for signaling of escalator
stoppage. Sensing cables and visual monitoring panel to be provided and
installed.
Lighting
Minimally complying with the following:
 Light outlet fittings, switches and wiring together with general purpose power point
outlets to facilitate maintenance at machine compartment, pit and in the escalator
trusses.
 Comb illuminators with the following features:
- Connected to the control panel and wired so that the skirt guard strobe
illuminators shall operate only when the escalators are in motion.
- Low voltage comb lights shall illuminate the full tread width.
Finishes
Minimally complying with the following:
 Balustrades to be of the extended newel type presenting not less than two leveled
tread at upper and lower ends.
 Handrail decks, and deck boards to be minimally aluminum extrusions polished and
anodized or as specified by Interior Designer.
 Balustrades and paneling to be minimally tempered and toughened high quality glass
or as specified by Interior Designer.
 Skirt guard to be minimally of stainless steel hairline finish or as specified by Interior
Designer.

90
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

 Provide sufficient space for a sprinkler pipe concealed longitudinally under the truss
cover, with outlets for sprinkler heads.
 All joints to allow for the expansion and contraction of Interior Designer’s selected
finishes.

Guarantee, Servicing and Extended Maintenance Contract

Guarantee and Initial Maintenance of Lifts and Escalators
 Guarantee minimally complying with the following:
- The lift and escalator contractors to guarantee the respective installation for a
minimum initial period of 12 calendar months and maintain for this period effective
from the date of hand over to the hotel.
- For any work or item of equipment rectified or replaced during the first 12 months
of the maintenance and guarantee period, the liability and guarantee in relation to
this work and item of equipment will be extended for a further period of 12 months.
 Initial Maintenance Service
The lift and escalator contractors shall maintain the respective system and
installations in a first class and safe manner during this period minimally complying
with the following:
- The maintenance contract should include a clause stating the Company’s
responsibility in regard to emergency procedure training of hotel personnel.
- Maintenance to be carried out only on one lift or escalator at a time while the
others remain in regular service.
- The lift and escalator contractors shall coordinate all works in advance with the
hotel management.
- The lift and escalator contractors shall provide 24-hour a day breakdown service.
- During the day (08:00 to 17:00) the response to calls for rectification of breakdown
to be less than one hour and during the night (17:00 to 08:00) response to be less
than two hours.
- Schedule servicing personnel on site for periods as dictated by the performance
of the system.
- Should a problem linger, the contractor to call for an expert adjuster from the
factory where the faulty equipment was built.
- Maintenance service to include all replacement of parts due to manufacturer or
material defects and normal wear and tear.
- The annual inspection, load tests, license fees, and fees for the engagement of
professional engineer to take charge for testing, certification and application for
license from government bodies to be paid for by the lift and escalator contractors.
This lift initial maintenance service shall minimally include:
- Three (3) visits per week for the first 2 months
- Two (2) visits per month for the next ten months and shifted to coincide with the
hotel’s busiest period.
- Call back service shall be responded to on the same day.
- Call back service involving more than one stalled or erratic lift shall be provided
within one hour regardless of the time of day or night.
- Emergency call back service for stalled passengers shall be responded to within
30 minutes.
- There shall be no compensation for call back service.

91
LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

- Anticipated demand on supplies and parts and keep an inventory of a reasonable

number of spare parts, at his own cost, on site in a self-provided lockable metal
cabinet.
- Servicing contract containing the following procedures:
 Emergency service.
 Maintenance.
 Training of hotel personnel.
 Emergency Service
- The servicing company must respond to an emergency within one hour at any
hour of the day or night on any day, irrespective of weekends or holidays.
- For this purpose the servicing company shall provide the hotel with:
 The names, addresses, facsimile and e-mail, business and private telephone
numbers of all officers of the manufacturing company, servicing company, and
technical personnel assigned to the region.
- Servicing company shall obtain emergency telephone numbers of all agencies
equipped and trained in rescue operations, such as police and fire brigade.
Extended Maintenance Service - Lifts and Escalators
 The lift and escalator contractors shall submit at the time of tendering, a minimum
three year fixed term offer covering the cost of full service maintenance contract to
commence on the day following expiration of the 12 month guarantee period.
 Only where neither of these services is available shall an alternative arrangement be
allowed.
 All works to be performed during regular office hours except that of emergency 24-
hour call out service.
 All safety related features in lifts must be checked periodically for proper function.
These include, but are not limited to: car communication systems intercom or
telephone, alarm indicator devices such as alarm push buttons and fault indicators.
 When the manufacturer offers after sales service contracts, it shall be given priority
and preferential price adjustment because the manufacturer will, in the majority of
cases, offer higher priced quality service because its service people are better
trained, better paid, and will offer more complete and methodical service.
 The manufacturer or its agent also has the obligation to maintain reasonable shelf
stock.
 The extended maintenance service must cover all materials and parts and
consumables for all:
- Hoist way installations and equipment.
- Car equipment.
- Fixtures and Indicators.
- Escalator equipment.
- Control systems and panels.
- Life safety systems

92
 Attachment
Lift & Escalator Systems
 LIFT AND ESCALATOR SYSTEMS

T.S. RECOMMENDED GUEST LIFT

21 22
CONTROL PANEL BUTTON CONFIGURATION

19 20

17 18

15 16

13 14

Notes:
11 12
1. Always designate the ground floor or Lobby level with “L”
2. B1, B2, B3 designate basement levels
3. Guestroom floors shall have square buttons.
4. Public area floors to have rectangular shape buttons 9 10
5. Operational Names of outlets to be inscribed on the rectangular buttons
6. Finishes shall be specified by the Interior Designer.
7. Button arrangements shown here is purely for example and guidance in
designing lift buttons.
8. Final arrangements to be developed during design phase 7 8

5 6

SpaceforF&B/Public 3 4
2 Areanames

SpaceforF&B/Public SpaceforF&B/Public
L Areanames L Areanames

Sample buttons for

SpaceforF&B/Public Guestrooms and Podium
B1 Areanames
Areas

B2 SpaceforF&B/Public
Areanames

B3 SpaceforF&B/Public
Areanames

Sample buttons for

Podium Areas

THE OPERATOR TECHNICAL SERVICES INC.

71 S WACKER DRIVE, CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, 60606, USA

SAMPLE SCHEMATIC: RECOMMENDED GUEST LIFT CONTROL SCALE NTS ER&MS Version 4
PANEL BUTTON CONFIGURATION
NOTE THE OPERATOR DRAWINGS ARE NOT PRODUCED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES. THEY ARE TO BE USED ONLY TO INFORM THOSE CONCERNED AS TO THE OPERATOR
STANDARDS AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS. NO OTHER USE MAY BE MADE OF SUCH DRAWINGS WITHOUT THE PROPER CONSENT OF THE OPERATOR

92.1
 Operational Concept
The electrical supply is the prime mover of the hotel. A reliable power system is of
utmost importance, without which the hotel cannot function properly.
Safety is the prime concern. Various levels of fault discrimination on the protection
system shall be applied to achieve this, as well as minimizing power interruption.
The electrical systems shall minimally include the following:
● Incoming Utility Services
● Emergency Standby Power System
● Distribution Network
● Circuitry
● Power Receptacles and Outlets
● Lighting
● Switching
● Motors
● Grounding Systems and Lightning Protection
● Miscellaneous Equipment
● Electrical Safety Equipment

Design Criteria
● Designer shall explore sustainable design and alternate energy sources using
renewable energy and implement energy savings initiatives to help protect and
conserve the environment. Designer shall obtain a copy of T.S. Sustainable
Design Criteria prior to designing of the electrical system. Below are a list some of the
recommendations:
- On Site Renewable Energy: Some of the applicable on-site renewable energy
system include: photovoltaic systems, solar thermal system, bio-fuel based
electrical power, geothermal heating systems, geothermal electric systems, low-
impact hydro electric power systems, wave and tidal power systems. Calculations
for energy cost supplied by the renewable energy systems to be as per the
proposed building performance determined in accordance with Appendix G of
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1- 2004. Consultants to target 5-15% building
energy cost to be offset by the use of on-site renewable.
- Green Power: Use grid-source, renewable energy technologies on a net zero
pollution basis. Provide when applicable a minimum of 35% of the building’s
electric power from renewable sources or green power derived from solar, wind,
geothermal, biomass or low impact hydro sources.

93
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Green power may be purchased from a Green-e certified power marketer, from a
Green-e accredited utility program, through Green-e Tradable Renewable
Certificates, or from supply that meets Green-e-renewable power definition. This
definition may vary.
● Design to include analysis of economics, energy requirement and alternate equipment
and materials.
● Preliminary Load Schedule
- Refer to the preliminary load schedule for the various areas of the hotel for
compilation of preliminary load calculations.
See Attachment: Preliminary Load Schedule
● Power Factor Correction
- Minimum of .95 power factor correction is required to encourage energy savings
and as part of sustainable design initiative.
● Minimum Lighting Load Criteria
- Refer to the minimum Intensity and Recommended Light Sources Schedule for
compilation of preliminary load calculations.
See Attachment: Minimum Intensity and Recommended Light Sources

Safety Requirements
● Flood Precautions
- In areas prone to flooding, all electrical equipment shall minimally be held to a
minimum of 2 meters above historical flood stage. Where this is not possible, only
feeders and non-essential equipment shall be installed below the high water mark.
All feeders traversing or servicing equipment below this level shall be readily
isolatable. In addition, a diesel or gasoline powered sump pump shall be
permanently installed to protect all electrical installations.
● Life Safety Loads
- Minimally feeders supplying power and lighting to life safety systems shall have a
current capacity of 150% of non-diversified lighting loads, and 250% of non-
diversified rotating loads.
- Feeders shall be de-rated for voltage drops and ambient conditions.
- Motors of 0.40 kW and larger shall be for operation on 380/420 volts, 3 phase
service.
- Disconnect switches or breakers supplying power to life safety equipment shall
interface with the main and repeater panels for fire alarm and building automation
systems via a supervised circuit. The panels shall display their respective position,
and generate both a localized and a centralized fault alarm at any time the vital
power or control circuit is defeated. Alarm shall visually and audibly indicate the
fault.
● Computer, PABX, MATV Rooms
- In order to prevent interference from electromagnetic (EMI) or static fields, the
Computer/PABX room and cable risers must not be located near any major
electrical equipment such as large motors, elevator equipment rooms,
transformers, ballasts or the like.
- Computer/PABX room must be free from any radio frequency interference.
- The building data/telephone entrance facility room housing the Main Telephone
Terminal Board (MTB) and or MDF shall be separated from main electrical

94
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

equipment rooms by a minimum distance of 3.0 m. The rooms shall not have a
common wall.
● Wiring Color Code
- All incoming and distribution network cabling should minimally be color-coded in
accordance with local convention or with the attached schedule, if no local
standard exists.
● Thermal Imaging
- Thermal imaging/scan of electrical panels to be performed by electrical contract-
prior to handover to THE OPERATOR. Result to be provided to THE
OPERATOR as part of handover
documentation.
See Attachment: Recommended Electric Wiring Color Coding System

Incoming Utility Services

● Primary Supply
- All incoming utility services to minimally be underground primary lines as
established by the local power company.
- High voltage spaces to conform to all local code requirements (i.e., personnel
access, lighting, receptacles, and ventilation) for equipment Installation. All light
sources within high voltage spaces to be wall-mounted, and at a height not
exceeding 2.0 m.
- Where two power company feeders, each from an independent sub or main power
station are available, both shall be provided to enhance reliability of the power
supply system. Each feeder shall have its respective “state-of-the-art” high tension
switch gear, transformers, low tension, switches, tie breaker and isolation
switches.
● Metering Provisions
- Minimally provide main utility metering in accordance with local power company
requirements. All meters must be linked to the Building Automation System.
- Minimally, an amp meter and voltmeter are required for each section of the main
distribution board. Each to be fitted with selector switches to provide phase-to-
phase and phase-to-neutral readings.
● Transformers
- Minimally, two (2) factory-assembled and tested air-cooled, dry-type, epoxy
encapsulated transformers are required, each to be sized for 75 percent of peak
load. In areas where transformers must be imported, three (3) transformers are
required, each sized for 50 percent of peak load.
- Transformers shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed per applicable
ANSI, NEMA, NEC and IEEE Standards.
- Primary transformers shall either be outdoor pad mounted or located in an indoor
transformer vault.
- The use of PCB shall not be acceptable in a transformer under any
circumstances.
- Insulation materials for the primary and secondary coils shall be rated for
0
continuous 220 C operation.
- The sound level of transformers shall not exceed the standards per IEEE
C57.12.9 - Standard Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power
Transformers.
- The conductor material of all transformers shall be electrical grade copper.

95
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

- The core material of all transformers shall be cold-rolled, grain oriented, high
permeability silicon steel.
- Vibration isolation pads shall be provided to isolate the core and coil assembly
from the base structure.
- For transformers 30kVA-300kVA, provide two 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps
above and below nominal primary voltage. For transformers 15kVA and smaller as
well as 500kVA and larger, provide one 5 percent full capacity tap above and
below nominal primary voltage.
- Efficiency for transformers shall not be less than per NEMA TP2 - Standard Test
Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution Transformers and
NEMA TP 1 - Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution
Transformers.
- Provide fuel oil leak detection system and containment of oil spill for both day
tanks and the main storage tank.
- Provide automatic safety shut-off valves on the fuel oil supply lines from main tank
to day tank and from day tank to the generator.

Emergency / Standby Power Systems

● Minimum Configuration
- The emergency / standby system shall consist of engine-generator set(s),
automatic transfer switches, and all associated switchboards, panel boards, and
feeder distribution. Manufacture, Installation, Tests and
In-Service Operation shall comply with NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems, Level 1 (Essential Lighting and Power), Class 48
(minimum 48 hours of continuous operation), and IEEE 115 - Guide for Test
Procedures for Synchronous Machines.
- NFPA 110, Level 1 systems are defined as providing essential power when failure
of equipment to perform could result in loss of human life or serious injury.
- Engine-generator shall be factory-assembled and tested for verification of
intended operation and functionality of all provided controls.
- Engine-generator and provided controls shall be capable of both an Automatic
and Manual starting / stopping sequence of operation.
- Engine-generator start time shall comply with NFPA 110, Level 1, Type 10 (10
seconds) system requirements.
- Where the total connected emergency electrical load exceeds total generator
capacity, a load management computer is minimally required to continuously scan
and compare demand on the system against available power and to shed pre-
programmed low priority loads.
- Engine-generator shall feature a closed-loop, liquid cooling system, frame-
mounted radiator, and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
- Engine-generator shall feature a frame-mounted main fuel pump at engine.
- Electric starter system with battery units as required, integral automatic battery
charger, voltage regulator, and all additional controls as required to maintain
battery units in a fully-charged condition under all conditions.
- Battery units shall be sized in accordance with NFPA 110, Level 1 “Starting
Equipment Requirements”.
- If required by climate, provide a coolant jacket heater in compliance with NFPA
110, Level 1 requirements.

96
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

- Engine muffler / silencer to be sized as recommended by engine manufacturer,

and with required exhaust piping, shall not exceed manufacturer’s backpressure
limitations.
- Engine muffler / silencer shall provide a minimum sound attenuation of
25 dB at 500 Hz. Sound level measured at 3 m from exhaust discharge shall be a
maximum of 65 dBA, or less if required by local regulations.
- Steady-state voltage operational tolerance shall be no more than
3 percent of rated voltage output from no-loan to full-load.
- Steady-state frequency operational tolerance shall be no more than
0.5 percent of rated frequency from no-load to full-load.
- Steady-state frequency stability at any constant load within the rated capacity of
the generator shall not permit random speed variations in excess of the permitted
tolerance; no hunting or surging in speed is allowed.
- At no-load conditions, harmonic content measured “line-to-line” or “line-to-neutral”
shall not exceed 3 percent for single harmonics and 5 percent total.
- For a 3-phase short circuit at generator output terminals, system shall be capable
of supplying a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than
10 seconds, and then clear the fault automatically without damage to generator
system components.
- Foundation / mounting / vibration isolation shall be designed in accordance with
the requirements of the engine-generator manufacturer. Isolation shall be
provided to prevent transmission of vibration beyond the foundation / mounting.
- Service clearance shall be provided per manufacturer’s requirements on all sides
of the engine-generator to facilitate maintenance, repair and replacement of
components.
- Termination of exhaust vent shall be located to prevent a nuisance from flue
gases discharged during operation.
- Provide fuel oil storage tanks of double-wall steel or double-wall fiberglass in
accordance with UL requirements with all required openings, access manholes,
electronic and visual content gauges, and low-level alarm. Size tanks for a
minimum of two (2) days fuel consumption at peak engine-generator load.
- Provide an automatic shut off valve between the main fuel oil storage tank and the
daily tank interfaced to the Fire Alarm System to shut off the fuel line in the event
of fire inside the generator set room.
● Emergency Load
- Selection of the electrical load connected to the emergency generator is
dependent upon the reliability of power supplied by the public utility company.
Refer to the attached Index of Reliability for minimum requirements.
See Attachment: Index of Reliability for Power Loads
● Multiple Installation
- Where conditions warrant more than one engine-generator, an automatic
synchronization network, with load balance controller and programmable
Automatic and Manual starting /stopping sequence of operation, is minimally
required.

System Network Zoning and Sub Metering

As part of the sustainable design to monitor and save energy, zoning of distribution
networks for all utilities throughout the hotel shall be designed to provide sub metering
for each individual area: restaurant and associated kitchen, fitness centre and spa,

97
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

entertainment centre, banqueting areas, casino, retail shops, apartment units and
detached buildings. See Sub-Metering Matrix under the BAS chapter. Specified meters
to be compatible with Building Automation System to permit automatic recording,
storage, retrieval and analysis of data. In addition, specified meters to provide accurate
measurement (+ / -1%) over anticipated range of flows, pressures, temperatures, power
consumption, etc. to be measured.

Distribution Network
● Main Distribution Panels
- All main distribution panels and boards shall be readily identifiable, easily
accessible and provided with a master keyed cylinder lock. Panels and boards
shall be modular, with dead-front cover on a welded heavy angle iron frame,
factory assembled, anticorrosion treated, primed and painted, set on concrete pad
and bonded to grounding grid.
- In areas where voltage variation exceeds +/- 10%, voltage regulators are required.
- The main distribution bus shall be split into two services to which essential and
non-essential loads shall connect and wired in such a manner that failure of one
primary service shall cause the breaker to open and disconnect the power to the
non-essential bus.
- Selecting study must be done for all switches.
● Feeder Design
- Conductors must be 100% copper. No other material is acceptable.
- Feeder design shall be such that voltage drop does not exceed 3% at the furthest
outlet for power, heating, or lighting loads, or combinations of such loads.
- Maximum total voltage drop on branch circuits at the farthest outlet shall not
exceed 5%.
- Minimally, branch circuit to be designed at 125% capacity.
- Minimally, individual feeder distribution will be provided in each area listed below:
● Circuit Breakers
- Circuit breakers shall minimally be provided in main and sub distribution boards.
Bolt-on type is recommended on 800 amp and larger.
● Sub Distribution Panel
- Sub distribution panels are to minimally be provided with a master keyed cylinder
lock, floor mounted or wall-mounted in a heavy gauge metal box with metal door.
Internal components shall meet the following criteria:
 Panel internal bus components shall be copper buses and neutral block.
 Breakers shall mount securely by means of lug connection.
 Each panel and circuit breaker shall be numbered and a directory mounted on
the door shall indicate the area served by each breaker.
 Two and three pole breakers for polyphase use shall operate as one unit.
- Panels connected to the emergency plant shall be separate from other supply and
all keyed alike. These panels shall be clearly marked “Emergency Power”.
- Panels servicing computer equipment require an independent grounding bus and
dedicated circuits.
- Panels including those servicing kitchens shall be located only in service
circulation areas of the hotel and the selected position must ensure ready access
at all hours. Panels shall not be placed in wet, humid or similar hostile
environment.

98
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

● Conduits, Cable Trays and Wireways

- All distribution cables must minimally be carried in steel, PVC or fiberglass
conduits.
- PVC conduits may only be used when installed in space above the false ceiling
that is not used as a return air plenum, buried in concrete floor or walls.
- Conduit runs shall avoid hostile environments.
- Where PVC or Fiberglass conduit is used, a 5th bare conductor for ground is
required.
- All cable trays are to minimally be of galvanized steel.
- No life safety system cables shall be permitted in cable trays regardless of
shortness of run. Cables for Life Safety shall be provided in separate EMT metal
conduits.
- Cable insulation shall be halogen free and rated for a minimum rating of 3 times
system voltage or a minimum 600 volts whichever is larger. Insulation shall be
rated to withstand immersion in water, oil, gasoline and exposure to common
airborne contaminants, sunlight and other forms of radiation exposures.
- Cables in conduit risers shall be well supported to limit tension and compression
forces.
- Wireways shall be UL listed. Metal wireways shall not be used in the following:
 Where subject to severe physical damage.
 Where subject to severe corrosive environment.

Circuitry
Guestrooms
● Guestroom Circuit Breakers/Lighting Circuits
- Minimally each room to be connected to a dedicated circuit breaker panel.
- A programmable “Room Control Unit” shall be provided to allow integration with
3rd party products for energy management and control of lighting.
- Lighting circuits to minimally be in accordance with the Interior Designer’s lighting
design concept and as per THE OPERATOR’s operational requirements. See “Guestroom
Technology” chapter for details.
● Emergency Power/Lighting Circuits
- The following shall be connect to normal and emergency power:
 One light fixture in the entry area and one light fixture in the bathroom.
 Shaving outlets
 Minibar
 TV Set
 Cordless phone power outlets
 Guestroom desk universal power outlets
 Bedside universal power outlets.
- The whole Presidential and above suites shall be connected to normal and
emergency power.
Other Areas
● Public areas to conform with the Interior Design and Lighting Design requirements.

99
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Power Outlets
● Power outlets required in all areas shall minimally be in accordance with interior
design, architectural, electrical and T.S. drawings. In addition, please refer to
T.S. Telephone & Computer Schedules and Marked-Up drawings for power outlet
requirements associated with voice and data systems.
● All guestroom and public area outlets shall be in accordance with Interior Designer's
selected finish.
● Ground fault circuit interrupters or residual current devices/circuit breakers rated at 5
mA and 25 milliseconds or as required by local code, must minimally protect all
outlets in damp or wet environments.
● Minimally provide at 15.0 m intervals, at all banquet service corridors and room
service areas, outlets rated with a minimum capacity of 16 amps. Voltage determined
per project requirements and country standard.
See Attachment: Minimum Preliminary Power Connection Requirements

Specifications
● Pin Configuration
- Outlet pin configuration shall conform to country standard. In case there is not a
country standard, then the socket outlets are to conform to standard German
practice (DIN/VDE). All receptacles shall be grounded as per applicable code.
- In the guestroom provide duplex universal outlet, beside the desk, in addition to a
standard outlet and a universal outlet at each bedside for guest equipment.
Universal outlet cover should identify voltage.
● Power Supply to Computer System Equipment
- Each power outlet shall minimally be clean power fed by a dedicated circuit with
separate grounding conductor of the same gauge as the current carrying
conductors.
- Must be identified by a unique pin configuration or color.
● Emergency Power Outlets
- Power outlets connected to the emergency circuit to be furnished with a L.E.D
pilot light or a distinct label.
● Dimmable Outlets
- Power outlets connected to the lighting control or dimming system circuit shall be
of a unique pin configuration or color.
● Furniture Installations
- Connections for electrical or electronic devices built into a furniture item shall have
disconnection capability for each service via an insulated, polarized, locked
connector.
● Provision for Exhibitions
- Ballroom areas to have three-phase electrical outlets with neutral and ground
conductors minimally one outlet per 20 linear meter of perimeter wall with a
minimum capacity of 63 amps each.
● MEP Equipment Rooms
- Provide for three-phase, 32 amp outlets in main MEP rooms, technical workshops,
receiving dock and at 30 linear meter intervals around the perimeter of the hotel.

100
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

● Power Outlet Heights

- Customary power outlet height location is 300 mm AFFL (Above Finished Floor
Level), or 50 mm above desk height i.e. 780-850 mm AFFL. Final heights shall be
determined by Interior Designer, Architect or Kitchen Consultant.

Switching
● Guestroom
- See Guestroom Technology chapter
● Kitchen, Bar and Laundry areas
- Provide all Kitchen, Bar and Laundry equipment with vapor proof switches in
accordance with the Kitchen and Laundry Consultants’ requirements with
appropriate IP (Ingress Protection) ratings. All laundry and kitchen equipment
connections to minimally require flexible, armored, water resistant conduit to
permit movement of the equipment.
- Each equipment with a connected load of 2.0 kW or larger to have a disconnect
switch within sight of the apparatus or a polyphase lockout switch where practical.
● Other Areas
- Light switches to be provided for all fixtures unless the fixtures are required to be
controlled by other means.
- Each equipment with a connected load of 2.0 kW or larger to have a disconnect
switch within sight of the equipment or a polyphase lockout switch where practical.
- Light switches in all areas of the building to be conveniently located unless
required otherwise by code.
- Light switches to be mounted at a uniform height of 1100 mm AFFL or as
specified by Interior Designer and shall have a current rating of 150% of
connected load.
- Light switching for public areas to be located in service areas hidden from guest’s
view and grouped together at each service door leading to public spaces.
- For energy conservation purposes, minimally, motion and photo sensors to be
provided for, but not be limited to, meeting rooms, boardrooms, drawing rooms,
and all appropriate BOH areas.
- Two-way light switches shall be provided to spaces with two entries.
- Minimally, offices, workrooms, storerooms, equipment rooms, etc., shall each be
switched independently. Switches to be operated manually by the user/occupant
of each area and automatically by occupancy sensors.
- Service corridors to be controlled per zone/floor basis, via the BAS or timer.
- Guestroom floor corridors to have three or more circuits and controlled by either
the centralized dimming control system or BAS to allow for reduction of lighting
level during off hours from 11:00 pm to 6:00 am for energy savings.

Motors
● All motors must be properly sized.
● All motors need to have high power factor and be highly energy efficient.

Starters Automatic and Manual

● As part of the sustainable design initiative, Variable Frequency Drive systems (VFD)
shall be implemented to reduce energy use.
● Motor Starters/Two-stage Starters/Connections

101
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

- Minimally, large rotating equipment such as elevators, chillers, boilers, kitchen and
laundry equipment to be furnished with a starter supplied by the same
manufacturer.
- All apparatus, which is to be duty cycled by an energy management system, to be
furnished with a two-stage starter.
- All motors to have a final connection consisting of flexible, armored, water
resistant conduit.
- Where a motor is not within sight of its respective disconnect switch, a local
lockout switch shall be provided.
- When a disconnect switch is in the off position, the handle of the disconnect shall
be provided with a means of locking the handle in that position.
Control Centers
● Specific Features
- Minimally, Motor Control Centers (MCC) shall be provided in spaces where
several motor loads are concentrated. Each piece of apparatus shall have its own
dedicated circuit/MCC cubicle.
- Magnetic starters to be provided for loads greater than 0.4 kW using push button,
on/off reset on each starter. Neon lights or LED to indicate running status of each.
- Fuses and re-settable thermal overload protection must be provided for each unit.
- Provide phase loss protection for each 3-phase starter in the MCC.
 Resetting of phase loss protection to be manual
 Phase condition to be indicated by a series of LED lights.
 For motors with in-rush voltage drops of 10% or more, provide a selectable, 3-
phase amp and voltmeter and a multistage reduced voltage starter.
- Where air handling units are connected to the generator for purposes of
maintaining comfort conditions during an electrical outage, a two speed starter
and motor to be provided on each load. Motor to operate only on low speed when
fed by the emergency generator.
- All motors larger than 1.0 kW, which are necessary to operate life safety
equipment in a fire mode, shall have at least a two-stage reduced voltage starter
and separate ampere and voltage meters.
- Where MCC is serving both normal and emergency operated loads, it shall have a
split bus system with corresponding feeders.
- Complete electro thermal imaging scan of each MCC panel shall be performed at
full load by the electrical contractor prior to handover of the hotel. Result to ne
provided to THE OPERATOR as part of handover documentation.

Grounding System and Lightning Protection

● Grounding Systems
- Minimally designed in accordance with IEEE standards for commercial building
installations and NFPA 70 or in accordance with prevailing local codes, whichever
is the higher.
- Must effectively ground all switchboards, transformers, generators, distribution
equipment, raceways, all other associated electro-mechanical equipment, pool
and spa equipment i.e., hot tubs, spas, bathtubs.
- All kitchen and laundry metallic installations must minimally be grounded.
- Combined resistance value of earth electrodes must not exceed 5 ohms, during
any season of the year and before interconnection to other earthed systems.

102
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

● Lightning Protection
- Must be designed to fully protect all structures.
- Must conform to the certification requirements of Underwriter Laboratories and
NFPA, 780 “Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection System.”
- All metallic objects on the roof should be bonded to a looped conductor that joins
the air terminals.
 These air terminals shall be placed at both roof edges, and looped to assure
that a single wiring break will not fault the system.
 Intermediate floor ground loops with connections to building mechanical
equipment and piping to protect against side effect flash to people or
equipment.
 Counterpoise conductors shall cross connect ground electrodes with ground
conductors located below minimum ground water level to assure adequate
and uniform dissipation of the charge.
- All conductors to be made of copper and to be concealed to blend with finishes of
the building architecture.
- Combined resistance to ground of whole network is not to exceed 10 ohms.

Miscellaneous Equipment
● Electrical Test Panel
- Provide a test panel in the electrical repair shop.
- Panel to have disconnect switch, three-phase disconnect outlets, ballasts, fuse
terminals, lamp sockets, low voltage continuity circuit tester, and multiple (120/240
V) for utility voltages.
● Heat Tracing
- Provide electric heat tracing on piping and mechanical equipment exposed to
freezing conditions.
- Electric heat tracing to be self-limiting system complete with electric cable,
conduit, outlets, thermostats, fittings, automatic controls, low temperature alarms,
and all other required material.
- Temperature alarms to be provided where heat trace failure could be damaging to
the mechanical installation
- Where required, provide electric/hydronic ice melting for parking ramps, porte
cochere, driveways based on economic analysis.
● Individual Area Metering
- Electric statistical kWh meters to be provided in each profit center and retail shops
with a connected load in excess of 2.0 kW.
- Larger facilities such as Casinos, Apartments, Offices, Commercial Shops and
Tenant Spaces intended for an outside operator shall each receive both kWh
(consumption) and kW (demand) statistical meters connected to the Building
Automation System.
- Where the hotel supplies electricity to adjoining building elements or tenants, or
when the hotel is supplied from a nearby plant, demand and consumption meters
to be provided on the consumer’s side.
- Where such shared services extend to emergency power generation, a set of
meters shall be provided for each.
● Window Cleaning Gantry
- Minimally required for all multi-level properties.

103
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

- Minimally an all metal basket suspended by two steel cables each with its own
cable drum and to be operated from the roof and at the gantry.
- Must be electrically powered and shall connect to normal and emergency power to
lower or raise the gantry. A second motor will be provided for reversible lateral
movement.
- Safeguards are required to prevent operation from the roof when the gantry has
been deployed off the roof.
- Minimally provide securely attached safety belts for certified number of occupants
and cleaning equipment.
- The manufacturer shall confirm certification to fabricate, install, and service such
product.
- The manufacturer and installer shall have no less than 5 years documented
experience in the manufacturing or installation of works in this field and be able to
provide professional commissioning of the system. Manufacturers shall provide a
list of five comparable projects that have the features as specified for this project.
These projects must be operational.
- Manufacturers shall employ specialists in the field including Programming,
Engineering, Field Supervision, and Installation. Specialists shall have a minimum
of five years of experience.

Electrical Safety Equipment

See Fire and Life Safety chapter for additional requirements
● Emergency Cut Off Switches
- Boiler room and air conditioning and refrigeration compressor rooms shall each be
provided with a break glass switch located on the outside of each exit door.
- Breaking the glass will interrupt the power circuit to all equipment in the space.
● Shatter Proof Electrical Devices
- Light fixtures and switches installed at LPG sites and any Compressed Natural
Gas (CNG) sites, spray booth, battery room, dish washing areas and all food and
beverage preparation areas are to be certified shatter proof by a recognized
authority.
- No ordinary, unprotected receptacle, switch, fixture, or other potentially spark
emitting device to be installed, for whatever purpose, within 8.0 m of a LPG or
CNG installation.
● Aircraft Obstruction Lights
- Obstruction lights where required by code, by proximity to flight path or
extraordinary height, shall be provided at the highest point of the structure. Such
light shall conform to FAA rules or aviation codes.
- In all instances, the lights must remain lit day and night and shall connect to the
emergency supply and other sources as may be required by governing codes.
● Seismic Switch
- Seismic switch is required for all Hotels located in seismic areas.
- Minimally interfaced with Fire Alarm System and Building Automation System.
● Illuminated Exit Signs
- Exit signs to be internally illuminated and installed minimally in accordance with
NFPA codes or the locally prevailing codes whichever is the greater.
- Minimally two exit signs or a combination of exit and exit directional signs shall be
readily visible from all areas.

104
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

- Signs to be constantly illuminated with dual, energy efficient LED lamps. One (1)
lamp running from mains and emergency power supply and one (1) lamp from
integrated constantly re-charging battery power supply.
- 2-Hour trickle charged battery back up shall additionally be provided where the
change over from normal power shall be instantaneous or indiscernible.
● Emergency Lighting
- As a minimum requirement, an emergency lighting system that shall respond
automatically to a loss or interruption of normal power shall be provided to all hotel
areas.
- The system shall change from normal power to emergency power within a period
not to exceed 10 seconds. The level of illumination provided shall be a minimum
of 10 lux and shall be available for a period not less than 90 minutes or as
required by the authorities having jurisdiction over the project.
See Attachment: Electrical Codes and Standards

105
 Attachments
Electrical Systems
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Preliminary Load Schedule

Hotel Area Lighting W/m² Receptacle Power W/m²

Main Entrance and Lobby 40 10

Atriums 30 10
Elevator Lobbies 40 20
Meeting Rooms 60 10
Pre-function 60 80
Ballrooms 60 -100 100
Stage Lighting 90 100
Exhibit Spaces * 60 120
Bar 30 10-20
Restaurant 30 20-30
Auditorium 35 50
Front Desk Area * 40 25
Office Areas * 40 10
Guest Rooms 25 25
Guest Corridors 15-20 15
Service Corridors 10 5
Kitchens * 40 5
Laundry/Housekeeping * 25 15
Employee Lockers/Toilets-BOH Areas 15-20 10
Plant Room Areas *** 15 10
Workshops *** 20 20
Retail 40 75
Projection Room 20 220
Linen Closets 15 25
Vending/Ice Machine Areas * 30 20
Parking – Interior 5 5

105.1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Hotel Area Lighting W/m² Receptacle Power W/m²

Parking – Exterior 10 5
Paths – Exterior 10 5

Swimming Pools (Interior) 30 5

Swimming Pool Decks 20 10

Tennis Courts 75 5

Spa/Reception 40 10

Treatment Room 15 10

Exercise Areas 50 80

Fountain Water Feature ** 50-70 80

 105.2

Preliminary Load Schedule

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Intensity and Recommended Light Sources

LV Metal Task
Hotel Area Lux Incandescent HID LED Fluorescent Remarks
Halogen Halide Orient

Main entrance 380 C A

Balcony entrance 50 B A A

Lobbies 100- C A A
200
Atriums * B A X

Elevator Lobbies 200 B A X

Meeting Rooms 400 C B A D X D - Concealed

Pre-function 200 C B D D - Concealed

Ballroom 400 C D A B

Exhibit Spaces 600 C D A B

Front desk 400 C B A X

Offices 400 C A X

Retail 600 C A Displays

Newsstand 300 B A X Displays

Entertainment 300 C B A A
Centre
Bar lounge 250 C A A A X

Restaurants 500 C A A A X Indirect

Public corridor 200 B A A A D X Concealed

Public toilets 350 C A D X Concealed

Cloak Room 150 C B D X Concealed

Night/Desk
Guest Rooms 300 B A B B C X Reading

Guest Bathroom 500 B A C X Vanity

Business Centre 400 C A A C

Executive Offices 400 C B D X

Stairways 100 A

Loading 200 B A
Platforms

105.3
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Intensity and Recommended Light Sources

LV Metal Task
Hotel Area Lux Incandescent HID LED Fluorescent Remarks
Halogen Halide Orient

Building exists
(docked) 10 B A

Admin. Conf. 400 C A D X

Room
Kitchens 600 A X W / Diffusers

Pantries 200 A X Public Areas

Laundry 600 A X W / Diffusers

Linen/ 450 A X W / Diffusers

Housekeeping
Main Mech. 400 A X
Rooms
Mechanical 200 A X
Rooms
Back- of- house
400 A X W / Diffusers
Offices
Training Room 400 C A D X

Service Corridors 150 A W / Diffusers

Workshops 400 A X At work

Parking (interior) 50 A X

Parking (exterior) 320 C A B X

Walks, Paths, 15-50 A B C

Roadway
Landscaped 5 A B C X

Pool Deck 100 A B

Tennis Courts 800 A B Green Courts

Squash Courts 800 A B Blue Courts

Exercise Room 400 C A B D B - Concealed

Spa 400 C A B X B - Concealed

Fluor. /1200 mm Deluxe Warm White only

A – Most Preferred B- Second Choice C- Third Choice D- Least Desirable
Note: * Requirements to be provided by Interior Designer and/or Lighting Consultant
105.4
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Recommended Electric Wiring Color Coding System

Colour System

RED Fire Detection

BLUE Building Automation System and Guest Room Energy Controls
GREEN Audio System
YELLOW Visual System
BROWN Telephone
PINK Emergency Lighting
ORANGE Power Outlet for Dedicated Audio/Visual System
PURPLE Emergency Paging
GREY Security
BLACK Computer LAN
If Local Code dictates color coding, notification must be made on tender documents.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Index of Reliability for Power Loads

See
Equipment a b c
Footnotes

Fire Pumps 100% 100% 100% 1

Fire Alarm System 100% 100% 100% 1
Extinguishing Systems (C02, Inert Gas, FM200) 100% 100% 100%
Supervisory Exit Alarm 100% 100% 100% 1
Emergency Paging/Public Address System 100% 100% 100% 1
Hold up Alarm 100% 100% 100%
Security Communications 100% 100% 100%
Unsupervised Door Alarm 100% 100% 100%
Security Surveillance 100% 100% 100%
Closed Circuit TV System 100% 100% 100%
Radio Paging and/or Wireless Telephone 100% 100% 100%
PABX/Telephony 100% 100% 100%
Seismic Functions 100% 100% 100%
Stair Pressurisation System 100% 100% 100% 1
Smoke Purge Fans 100% 100% 100% 1
Smoke Relief Panels 100% 100% 100% 1
Computers Equipment and Ancillary equipment 100% 100% 100% 1
Ejectors, Sump Pumps 100% 100% 100%
Energy Management System 100% 100% 100% 1
Engineer’s Central Control Station 100% 100% 100%
Liquid Level, Temperature and Pressure Alarms 100% 100% 100%
Room Management System 100% 100% 100%
Swimming Pool Alarms 100% 100% 100%
Swimming Pool Re-circulators -- 50% 50%
Personnel Access Control 100% 100% 100%

Garage Access Control 100% 100% 100%

105.6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Index of Reliability for Power Loads

See
Equipment a b c
Footnotes

Elevators – Passenger 33% 33% 33%

Elevators – Service One 33% 33% 1
Elevators – Freight -- -- One
Public Toilet Exhaust 100% 100% 100%
Guest Room Toilet Exhaust Supply 100% 100% 100%
Domestic Pumps 100% 100% 100% 1
Sewage Treatment Plant 100% 100% 100%
Heat Tracing (antifreeze) 100% 100% 100% 2
Primary Fresh Air Supply Fans 100% 100% 100%
(Ballroom, Meeting rooms)
Guest Room Fan Coil Units -- 100% 100%
AHU -- 50% 50%
Building Automation System 50% 50% 100%
Heating Plant 100% 100% 100% 2
Chillers and Ancillary Equipment -- 50% 50% 2
Kitchen Refrigeration, Walk- in Coolers and 100% 100% 100%
Laundry Equipment -- -- 50%
Laundry/Valet Uniform Conveyor Unit 50% 50% 100%
Audio Visual Equipment 100% 100% 100%
Translation Facilities 100% 100% 100%
Teleconference System 100% 100% 100%
Ballroom, Meeting Rooms, Function Rooms
selected outlets for A/V equipment 100% 100% 100%
Guest Room Shaving Outlets 100% 100% 100%
Guest Room (Automated Mini-Bar Refrigerator) 100% 100% 100%
Guestroom Desk Outlet 100% 100% 100%
Cordless Phone Outlets 100% 100% 100%
TV Sets 100% 100% 100%

105.7
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Index of Reliability for Power Loads

See
Equipment a b c
Footnotes

Garage Ventilation 50% 50% 100% 1

Ice Makers 100% 100% 100%
Presidential Suites 100% 100% 100%
Security Lighting 100% 100% 100% 1
Egress Lighting 100% 100% 100% 1
Exit Signs 100% 100% 100% 1
Step Lights 100% 100% 100%
Elevator Lighting 100% 100% 100% 1
Aviation Obstruction Lights 100% 100% 100% 1
Helicopter Beacon 100% 100% 100% 1
Helicopter Landing Lights 100% 100% 100% 1
Guest Room Corridor Lighting 15% 50% 50% 1
Guest Room Lighting (Receptacles/Fixtures) 15% 15% 100%
Guest Room Bath Lighting 15% 15% 100%
Public Area Lighting 15% 25% 50% 1
Service Area Lighting 15% 15% 15% 1
Swimming Pool Lighting 25% 25% 100% 1

Index of Reliability:
a. Standby electrical service and/or standby generator for recorded accrued outages of
0-50 hours annually, and individual outages not exceeding 15 minutes.
b. Standby generator connected loads for recorded accrued outages of 51-250 hours
annually, or individual outages exceeding 15 minutes.
c. Continuous duty emergency generator connected loads for accrued outages of
251-500 hours annually.
Note: For outages in excess of 500 hours annually a design strategy must be developed
in consultation with HITS.
Footnotes:
1. Life safety loads and special provision.
2. Where outside design conditions are:
105.8
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Index of Reliability for Power Loads

Summer
 Dry - bulb of 35°C
 Wet - bulb of 28°C or higher

Winter

 Dry-bulb of 8°C or lower

General:
 Subject to revisions by current codes and or unusual conditions.

105.9
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Preliminary Power Connection Requirements

Typical Guestrooms

Purpose/Location Qty Capacity Special Features

Down Light at Entrance 2 2 x 0.20 kW Recessed

Bedside Convenience 2 2 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted

Universal Type as per I.D.

requirement

Cordless Phone 2 2 x 0.10 kW Flush Mounted

MP3 Docking Station 1 1 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted
Bed Side Lamps 2 2 x 0.10 kW Flush Mounted
(loose fixture)
Ceiling Reading Lights 2 2 x 0.10 kW Recessed
Floor Lamp 1 1 x 0.15 kW Flush Mounted
Desk Lamp 1 1 x 0.15 kW Flush Mounted
Desk Light above desk 1 1 x 0.20 kW Recessed
Desk General Purpose Outlet 1 1 x 0.20 kW Clean Power for PC/GSM
cellular phone Charger
2 2 x 0.20 kW
2 – Universal Type

Art Light 2 2 x 0.10 kW Recessed

Automated Mini Bar 1 1 x 0.25 kW Flush Mounted
Utility/Iron Outlet 1 1 x 1.50 kW Flush Mounted
Tea/Coffee Maker 1 1 x 0.75 kW Flush Mounted
TV 1 1 x .50 kW Flush Mounted
DVD, if any 1 1 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted
TV Accessory * 1 1 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted
Down Light at WC 1 1 x 0.10 kW Recessed
Down Light at Bath Tub 1 1 x 0.20 kW Recessed Water Proof
Down Lights at Bathroom 3 3 x 0.20 kW Recessed
Vanity Lights 2 2 x 0.20 kW Recessed

105.10
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Preliminary Power Connection Requirements

Typical Guestrooms (continued)

Purpose/Location Qty Capacity Special Features

Down Light at Shower 1 1 x 0.20 kW Recessed Water Proof

Closet Light 2 2 x 0.10 kW Recessed
Door Bell Chime 1 1 x 0.10 kW Recessed

Balcony Light 1 1 x 0.20 kW Recessed

Balcony General Purpose Outlet
(GFCI) 1 1 0.20 kW Flush Mounted

Razor (dual voltage) outlet 1 1 x 0.20 kW Isolated Current Limiting

Transformer
Ceiling Fan Outlet * 1 1 x 1.0 kW Flush Mounted
Electric Drapery/Curtains 1 See Mfg. Spec. For RC Rooms/Suites
Hair Dryer (GFCI outlet) 1 1 x 1.50 kW For All Guest Rooms
Power Outlet (GFCI) by Vanity 1 1 x 0.15 kW Flush mounted
Makeup/Shaving Mirror 1 1 x 0.10 kW Recessed tool fastened
FCU Outlet 1 1 x 1.50 kW Concealed – Hardwired

TV Set in Bathroom* 1 1 x 0.15 kW Concealed

Anti-Fog Mirror 1 1 x 0.15 kW
Electric Bathroom floor Heating 1 1 x 0.50 kW Under Floor
Nightlight * 1 1 x 0.10 kW Concealed
General Purpose 1 1 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted

105.11
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Preliminary Power Connection Requirements

Junior Suites shall be provided with the following electrical outlets in addition to those
shown for typical Guest Room

Purpose/Location Qty Capacity Special Features

DVD Player 1 1 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted

TV/Bath (GFCI) 1 1 x 0.15 kW Recessed, tool fastened
Audio Components 1 1 x 0.40 kW Flush Mounted
Curtain/drape 1 See Mfg. Spec. Elect. / Drive
(see mfg. Specifications)

Powder Room 1 1 x 1.50 kW Flush Mounted

(General Purpose)

Living Room (General Purpose) 2 2 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted

Executive and Presidential Suites shall be provided with the following electrical
outlets in addition to those shown for the Standard Suite Room:

Purpose/Location Qty Capacity Special Features

TV 1 0.50 kW Flush Mounted

Electric Bathroom Floor Heating 3 3 x 0.15 kW Under Floor

Powder Room 1 1 x 1.50 kW Flush Mounted

(General Purpose)

Living Room (General Purpose) 2 2 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted

Dining Room (General Purpose) 2 2 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted

1 1 x 1.50 kW Flush Mounted

Sauna 1 4.5 kW Flush Mounted

Whirlpool 1 0.75 kW Flush Mounted

Steam Room 1 3.00 kW Presidential Suites

Independent A/C Unit - As required Presidential Suites

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Preliminary Power Connection Requirements

Suite Pantries in either the Executive and Presidential Suites shall be provided with the
following electrical outlets:

Purpose/Location Qty Capacity Special Features

Dishwasher/Dryer 1 1X 1.50 kW
Toaster 1 1 x 1.50 kW Flush Mounted
Drink Mixer 1 1 x 0.20 kW Flush Mounted
Room Service Cart Warmer 1 1 x 1.50 kW Flush Mounted
Refrigerator 1 1 x 0.50 kW Flush Mounted
Convenience 2 2 X 1.00 kW Flush Mounted
Microwave 1 1 X 1.0 kW Flush Mounted
Exhaust Hood 1 1 X 0.50 kW Flush Mounted
Sink Disposal 1 1 X 0.50 kW Recessed
Light Fixtures 3 3 x 0.20 kW Recessed

105.13
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Preliminary Power Connection Requirements

Estimation Guide for Power Outlet Quantities

Number of Power Outlets Approx. Special

Capacity

Hotel Type

Hotel Area Resort Business Convention Per Outlet Features

Ballroom (See notes) 1/20 m2 1/15 m2 1/10 m2 3.5 kW or per layout

Exhibit Hall (See notes) 1/10 m2 1/20 m2 1/7.5 m2 3.5kW or per layout
Meeting Room
(See notes) 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 3.5 kW or per layout

Drawing Rooms 1/15 m2 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 3.5kW or per layout

Board Rooms 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 3.5kW or per layout
Pre-function Areas 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 3.5kW or per layout
Lobby 1/15 m2 1/15 m2 1/15 m2 0.50kW or per layout
Circulation Corridor 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 0.50kW or per layout
Guest Room Corridors 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 0.50 kW or per layout
Service Corridors 1/15 m2 1/15 m2 1/15 m2 0.50 kW or per layout
Food Service 1/15 m2 1/15 m2 1/15 m2 1.5 kW or per layout
Terrace Food Service 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 1/10 m2 1.5 kW or per layout
Office 1/30 m2 1/30 m2 1/30 m2 0.50 kW or per layout
Workshops 1/30 m2 1/30 m2 1/20 m2 3.5 kW or per layout
Store Rooms 1/20 m2 1/20 m2 1/20 m2 0.20 kW or per layout
Restaurants 1/20 m2 1/20 m2 1/20 m2 0.20 kW or per layout
* As required by the Design Concept / Direction

Notes:
• Unless otherwise directed, all outlet covers shall be non-conductive, high impact resistant.
• Ballroom, Exhibit Hall, Function Rooms special power supply receptacles.
105.14
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

- Audio/Visual systems should be supplied with dedicated single-phase supply with

separate earth connection to avoid noise in the system. No dimmers, light fixtures, or
motors should be connected into this circuit.
- At least four receptacles with three-phase voltage and 63 Amp rating must be provided
at each corner of the Ballroom and Exhibition Hall for spot lighting, special equipment,
etc.
- At least four receptacles with single-phase voltage and 25 Amp rating must be provided
at each corner of the Ballroom and Exhibition Hall for flood lighting, special equipment,
etc.
- At least one receptacle with single-phase voltage and 25 Amp rating must be provided in
each meeting room.
- All outlets and receptacles shall be in a gang arrangement and must be concealed.
Interior designer to design concealment.

105.15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Electrical Codes and Standards

Governing and Recommended Codes

City and/or Country Building Code BC

City and/or Country Electrical Code EC

City and/or Country Fire Code FC

National Fire Protection Association NFPA

International Building Code IBC

Applicable Standards or Equivalent

American National Standards Institute ANSI

American Society for Testing & Materials ASTM

Illuminating Engineering Society IES

Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers IEEE

Insulated Power Cable Engineers Assn. IPCEA

National Electrical Manufacturers Assn. NEMA

National Fire Protection Assn. NFPA

Underwriters Laboratories UL

Factory Mutual FM

National Electric Code NEC

Electrical Testing Laboratories ETL

Building Officials and Code Administration International, Inc. BOCA

International Standards Organisation ISO

105.16
 Operational Concept
Lighting is a major electricity user in the hotel. Besides using electricity, lighting also
generates heat, contributing to cooling loads that are generally met by using more
electricity for air conditioning. The functions of light are separated into distinct elements:
● General Lighting
- Maintaining a modest overall level of light in a total area to assure ease and safety
of movement.
● Task Lighting
- Allowing proper vision for tasks within the direct circumference of the individual or
people involved.
● Accent Lighting
- Creating focal points, emphasizing objects and giving drama to spaces.
● Security Lighting
- Lighting shall be provided in an apparent manner as per security consultant. It
may alternatively be more closely integrated with the perimeter conditions and
landscaping. All lighting must provide a level of intensity that is higher than the
surrounding conditions when required and shall be activated permanently or
switched via manual or system interfaces. Security lighting must not be utilized
during daylight hours for energy saving.
● Emergency Lighting
- As a minimum requirement, an emergency lighting system that responds
automatically to a loss or interruption of normal power shall be provided to all hotel
areas.
- The system shall change from normal power to emergency power within a period
not to exceed 10 seconds, or less if required by local code. The average level of
illumination provided shall be a minimum of 10 lux and shall be available for a
period not less than 90 minutes or longer if required by the authorities having
jurisdiction over the project.
- 2-hour trickle charge battery backup shall additionally be provided where the
changeover from normal power shall be instantaneous or indiscernible.
In nature, general, task and accent lighting co-exist at all times of the day or night.
Minimally, the lighting of every man-made space should also involve all three of these
elements, again with proportions varied according to particular area usage.

The following is a list of minimum requirements, which must be tailored to each project.
The Architect, Interior Designer, Signage Consultant, Art Consultant, Landscaping
Designer, Lighting Consultant, Electrical Consultant, Security Consultant and

106
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Sustainability Consultant must all liaise and co-ordinate closely to achieve a

complementary design solution to blend the lighting with the surrounding environmental
components:
● Interior Lighting
- Public Areas
- Guestrooms and Suites
- Back of House Areas
● Exterior Lighting
● Fixture Selection
● Lighting Control Systems
● Dimming Control Systems

Design Criteria
The design shall consider energy efficiency and implement green building initiatives and
reduction of greenhouse gas emissions but at the same time provide high quality lighting
for hotel.
 Sustainable Design
The lighting designer is required to work with the Sustainability Consultant in order to
implement the sustainable initiatives stipulated in Building Sites and Site components
and Indoor Environmental Systems sections of the Sustainable Design chapter of
ER&MS.
 For lighting level criteria, see Electrical Systems chapter.

Interior Lighting – Public Area

 Maximum use of daylight shall be explored within the overall design concepts.
 All lighting and fixtures must support and enhance the texture of the interiors finishes
and surrounding lighting intensities and colors. Light sources with warm color
rendering must be used throughout all public areas – fluorescent lamps may be
considered in short strips provided they are dimmable, concealed in coves and color
temperature matches the interior rendering. Transition and visually adjacent areas
from back of house to public areas should use compatible light sources and
transitional light levels. Light sources must be concealed, with the exception of
decorative fixtures. Close co-ordination with signage and art placement is required.
 LED lighting may be considered in lieu of other lighting sources for task and accent
lighting. General public area lighting with LED type fixtures may be explored as the
LED technology evolves.
The following describes minimum conceptual requirements of various areas.

Main Lobby and Lobby Lounge

 Lighting should create a “body” of illumination that fills the space from all sides, while
maintaining featured accents to draw the eye. Contrasting light intensities can provide
a sense of movement in the space, and supply directional information for users of the
hotel.
 The atmosphere should be warm, inviting, and complement the general color scheme
throughout the lobby and front desk area.

107
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

 Highlighting to be provided for special art objects, flower arrangements, paintings, and
rockery. Consideration should be given to evening lighting of any surrounding
landscape to facilitate the view.

Reception Area
 The front desk area is physically integrated with lobby decor and overall atmosphere;
the prominence is to be downplayed so as to avoid being featured as a major
element. The lighting should be soft.
 The front desks should also be provided with task lighting incorporated into the
design.

Seating Areas
 The lighting to be coordinated with the adjoining lobby areas.
 The lighting control systems to provide for separate control of this area so a change of
mood can be facilitated at different times.
 Atmosphere to be comfortable and inviting and the lighting levels should accentuate
the warm, friendly mood of the space.

Pre-function Areas, Meeting Rooms, Boardrooms, Drawing Rooms,

Ballrooms
 Control groups shall be arranged so that accent lighting on focal arrangements can be
dimmed separately from the ambient lighting, allowing for balancing of the two levels.
 Lighting controls to be conveniently placed to allow for visual contact when setting
light levels.
 Lighting to be sufficiently flexible to allow for variation in accents and ambiance for all
the different functions these rooms can perform. The lighting control system to
provide for easily accessible pre-sets for all the normal functions of the room. General
lighting could be in the form of down lighting and decorative wall sconces.
 Track spot lighting shall be provided for display accents and at pre-function rooms
where buffet or other display materials may be set-up.
 Lighting control circuits to be grouped to allow for flexibility between all the lighting
elements, (e.g. chandeliers, coffer up lighting, and accent). All circuits to be further
sub divided to accommodate the alteration and permutations of any sub divided areas
via sliding partitions.
 Ambient down lighting to be grouped to accommodate different room configurations,
(e.g. classroom, presentation, and banqueting).
 Remotely and individually controlled and programmed (via hand held) unit fixtures
shall be provided to ensure full coverage to all Ballrooms and large Meeting Rooms.
 Track spot lighting along the ballroom perimeter utilizing uni-strut system.
 Drop down struts similar to sky hook system properly distributed in the ceiling of
ballroom for spot lights, hanging speakers, flags, etc.
 Occupancy sensors required for energy saving purposes.
 Provide unobtrusive “work lights” for setup and “tear down” removal of larger
ballrooms. Circuit separately and utilize high- efficiency, high-output, long life lamps.

Theatrical Lighting and Stage Lighting

 Theatrical lighting and Stage lighting shall be provided at ballrooms.

108
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

 The support system shall be suitably supported by the building’s structure and shall
facilitate the mounting of all such lighting as may be required.
 The system shall be concealed or integrated within the ceiling design in accordance
with the interior design.
 The system is required to have sections that can be electrically lowered to the floor to
allow all light fittings to be changed or adjusted without the need for ladders,
scaffolds, or mobile lifts.
 The system is required to provide adequate supports for lighting that are to be
concentrated around, above, behind, and in front of principal areas designated for
stage locations.
 Provisions for the support of supplementary stage lighting to cover the remainder of
the ballroom are also required.

Food and Beverage Outlets

 Lighting to be used to reinforce the elegant atmosphere by careful placement of the
lighting fixtures. Except for decorative fixtures, lighting sources to be concealed as
much as possible.
 All cashier, hostess and service stations shall also be provided with task lighting
incorporated into the millwork design.
 Where exterior views are an important feature, care should be taken when possible,
to avoid light sources being reflected in the window glazing.
 The questions of scale are to be considered both for the aperture of recessed fixtures,
and for the size and location of decorative fixtures.
 “Show Kitchen” lighting should focus on the activities and dynamics of the cooking
processes. Each “station” should be highlighted. Theatrical lighting should be used.
Light fixtures installed in the cooking hood should be selected to withstand the
environment conditions of a show kitchen including steam, grease and other products
of cooking process.

Public Toilets
 Provide ambient lighting throughout with additional accent/task lighting at the vanity
area.

Guest Lifts
 Provide ambient lighting incorporated within the car design.

Guestroom Corridors
 Provide direct and indirect lighting. Variation in the direction of the lighting should be
used to alleviate the monotony of long corridors.
 Provide additional focal type fixtures at each guestroom door entry.
 Provide accent lights on artwork and plants.
 Provide multiple circuitries to reduce lighting level to 50% for energy savings during
off hours (e.g. from 11:00 pm to 6:00 am), by connecting to the centralized dimming
control system or the BAS.
 Provide dimming and on/off controls via an extension of the centralized dimming
control system for public areas.

109
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Guestrooms/Suites
 Individual lighting of objects and art pieces throughout the room should be used to
establish a residential ambiance. Innovative and energy efficient lighting fixtures with
excellent design qualities along with dimming controls are to be provided. Refer to
Guestroom Technology section for lighting control functions.
 Fluorescent lamps may be considered in guestrooms for limited use.
 LED lamps shall be used as applicable.
Living/Dining Areas
 Integration of lighting into any architectural element is desirable. Living area lighting to
be controlled by a two-way master switch at the entry area and the bedside.
 Accent lighting to be provided for any feature artwork.
 All loose lighting fixtures to have built-in dimming switches at base.
 Localized electronic programmable dimming system is required for the suites.
Bathrooms/Closets/Dressing Areas
 The focal point for lighting should be the vanity and mirror area.
 Lighting levels in all bathrooms and dressing areas shall avoid shadows.
 The color rendering properties of the lighting should be neutral or “CRI” of 100.
 Bathrooms preferably shall have a combination of down lights and wall sconces.
Sconces should be provided at the vanity.
 Illuminated make-up mirrors are required.
 All fixtures in the bathroom wet areas to be water and vapor proof.
 Bathroom to be provided with at least with two circuits. Down lights in the center
shower and tub areas shall be dimmed.
 Localized electronic programmable dimming system is required for the suites.
 Concealed fluorescent lamps may be acceptable in the bathrooms (i.e. cove lighting),
except for vanity areas.

Kitchen/Pantry in Suites
 A combination of fluorescent and non-fluorescent lighting may be used for down
lights, cabinet lighting and counter lighting.

Suite Powder Rooms/Bathrooms

 Suite bathrooms may include spa/whirlpool baths, steam rooms, and double vanities
that require special lighting designs.
 Powder room lighting can be more glamorous, or even capricious, than that provided
for typical guestroom bathrooms.
 Artwork should be focally illuminated.
 A decorative fixture(s) can be used for the mirror light.

Spa and Fitness Center

 Workout and relaxing areas to use low-brightness, non-glaring fixtures.
 Lighting should be indirect and concealed wherever possible and provide an energetic
yet open, airy and cool feeling.

110
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

 Where necessary, lighting fixtures to be adequately shielded against impact,

moisture, and heat.
 Localized dimming to be provided in all relaxation areas.
 Transitional areas may have a more residential and relaxed ambiance.
 Pool deck areas to be provided with soft evening accent lighting, including low-level
indirect lighting and accents on landscaping.

Communication Center, Executive Offices and Business Center

 Lighting for this area should provide a variation in light levels, and quiet accents on art
works or feature elements.
 Work areas to be provided with task lights to avoid an overall high light level.
 The provision of natural daylight throughout the communication center is
recommended by T.S. wherever possible and shall be deemed to be a minimum
standard where required by local codes. Provide shading against direct sunlight and
solar heat.

Entertainment Center
 Lighting for this area should include general lighting in the form of down lights and
wall sconces, as well as table lamps.
 The lighting should be flexible to reflect the multi-function of the room.
 Special stage lighting is required for live entertainment and to be designed together
with an entertainment lighting specialist in coordination with an Audio Visual
specialist.
 Highlighting to be provided for any artwork.

Commercial Areas
 All retail and supporting shop areas to use light sources and colors that are
compatible with the adjacent hotel areas. Care should be taken to blend the ambiance
of adjoining spaces, while maintaining proper light levels necessary for the retail
establishments.

Interior Lighting – Back of House Areas

To reduce energy cost and enhance sustainability:
 All back of the house areas shall be provided with adequate general and task lighting
levels. The use of high efficienecy fluorescent (T-5, T-8 or PL type lamps) with CRI of
80 or above must be considered to achieve energy efficiency. Transition and visually
adjacent areas from back of house to public areas should use compatible light
sources and transitional light levels.
 The provision of natural daylight throughout all back of house areas is recommended
by T.S. wherever possible and shall be deemed to be a minimum standard where
required by local codes. Provide shading against direct sunlight and solar heat.
 Hybrid solar lighting may also be considered.

111
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Operational and Administrative Offices

 Lighting for these areas should be varied with the use of accent lighting to art works
or architectural elements. Individual offices and workstations should minimally be
provided with adequate task lighting.
 T-5 or T-8 type of fluorescent tubes and PL lamps (compact fluorescent) with CRI of
80 or above shall be used.

Training Room
 Lighting control to be grouped to allow for flexibility between general, task, and accent
lighting.
 Position and selection of fixtures to allow for flexibility of room usage and furniture
configuration
 Local dimming shall be provided.

Kitchens, Laundry and Valet

 Provide waterproof or heat resistant lighting fixtures as required providing minimum
lighting levels throughout all areas and at each individual workstation. Fixtures should
be provided within the kitchen exhaust hood to ensure that shadows do not occur at
cooking surfaces.

Exterior Lighting
 Exterior lighting is essential to enhance the aesthetics of the hotel exterior areas and
façade, together with all landscaped areas, and to provide building identification and
security around the property. Lighting shall also serve to reinforce the feeling of
quality and exclusivity of the property during the hours of darkness.
 Security of the building and guests should also be considered when designing exterior
lighting. See Security section for additional information.
- Exterior Security Lighting Requirements
 Lighting must provide a level of illumination that is higher than the surrounding
conditions, when required, and shall be activated permanently or switched via
manual or system interfaces.
 Lighting levels must be suficient to allow security personnel to detect security
incidents either directly or while viewing CCTV monitors.
 Lighting levels at entryways must be sufficient for security personel to perform
access control and visual inspections.
 Exterior lighting design must be integrated with landscaping features to avoid
creating dark or shadowy areas.
 Exterior lights must be protected against tampering or vandalism with
protective lenses and secured switch boxes; cabling must be housed in a
metal conduit.
 All local codes (that exceed requirements described herein) must be met.
 Security lighting must be connected to normal and emergency power system
and switch boxes must be secured.
 Any exterior door intended for employee or visitor use shall maintain a
minimum level of 50 lux.
 Building surroundings shall maintain a minimum level of 10 lux at ground level.

112
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

 Exterior lighting shall be adequate for the proper use of the CCTV system.
CCTV cameras require a minimum of 10 lux.
 Exterior areas at all resorts shall be minimally divided into two zones; a “quiet zone”
where all guestrooms are located, and an “active zone” where all other activities and
functions occur. The lighting in the “quiet zone” shall be soft, without unnecessary
contrast. The “active zone” shall be the center of excitement, with higher light
intensities and emphasis on accents. Design and configuration may minimally
include:
- Entry and parking areas
- Landscape areas
- Sports and recreational areas
- Building facades
 Required sustainability design solutions for exterior lighting are listed below:
- Uplighting of building, flag poles and landscaping elements must not be used.
- Exterior lighting shall meet illuminating Engineering Society of North America
(IESNA) RP-33 light tresspass.
- Low cut-off light fixtures shall be used for all exterior site and building lighting.
- All exterior lighting fixtures shall minimally be photocell-controlled or controlled via
the centralized lighting control system or Building Automation System.
- Light pollution reduction measures must be taken while designing exterior lighting.

Entry and Parking

The design of lighting and fixture selection in these areas shall also harmonize with the
landscape. The lighting at all entry areas should provide clear identification of roads and
paths together with all signage requirements. Car parks should utilize glare-free lighting
with an emphasis given to security.

Landscape Areas
 Lighting and fixture selection shall minimally support and enhance the texture and
color of the landscaping. Ornamental and pole-mounted light fixtures are to be
appropriately scaled for each landscape situation. Alternates to pole lighting shall be
considered to provide ambient and pathway lighting.
 Accent lighting must be located to avoid viewing bright sources from hotel rooms and
public areas.
 System to be designed and installed to allow the growth and development of the
landscaping.
 Fixtures to be of an appropriate scale to the task involved.
 Pavement lights to be selected and spaced to provide even illumination.
 Intersections, crossings, steps and ramps to be adequately illuminated for safety.
 Provide adequate lighting and fixture selection for all directional, location and safety
signage.
Minimally provide junction boxes and circuit capacity for future expansion and flexibility
of all landscape lighting installations.

Sports and Recreational Areas

 Minimally provide at all sports and recreational areas:

113
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

- General, task and accent lighting, to ensure safe usage and security of the related
area during the hours of darkness whilst still allowing low-level indirect lighting and
accents to surrounding landscaping.
- All pools and water features to be minimally provided with underwater accent
lighting and safety lighting at steps, ladders and entry ramps.
- Please refer to the Minimum Intensity and Recommended Light Source
requirements included in Electrical Systems chapter.

Building Facades
Lighting of building facades must minimally be coordinated with the landscape, roadway
and pedestrian lighting. Minimally provide light sources with good to excellent color
rendering at the following locations:
 External signage
 Canopy or porte-cochere
 At each individual building or structure façade
 Exterior terraces

Uplighting shall be avoided to reduce light pollution.

Fixture Selection

Classes of Lighting
Lighting consultant should analyze the initial investment/material cost in ratio to the
operating cost and sustainability by looking at latest lighting technology such as: LED
lamps, new high efficiency fluorescent lamp technology and addressable controlled
fixtures. In addition fixture selection should take into consideration a reduced inventory
of shared replacement bulbs rather than an extensive inventory of dissimilar bulbs.
Longevity of light bulbs that provide consistent performance should also take priority
over short term inconsistent performers. Provide all fixtures in accordance with the
following minimum standards:
Decorative Lighting
 The selection of decorative lighting fixtures including, chandeliers, wall sconces,
illuminated ceiling panels, picture-lamps and torchieres shall be undertaken by the
Interior Designer and or Lighting Consultant. These two consultants must jointly
coordinate the selection of light bulbs fitted in the decorative fixtures.
 The locations of decorative lighting must not interfere with the operational
requirements or installations of the area.
Indirect Lighting
 Indirect lighting shall be used to provide reflective, shaded or pattern light from
ceilings, architraves, walls, and other architectural surfaces.
Down Lighting
 Down lighting shall be used to provide cones of light illuminating the focal areas.
Down lights may utilize multi-focal lenses, angle of coverage, and various colored and
shaped reflectors to achieve the desired effect.

114
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

 Differing fixture types may be used within areas to achieve the desired effects,
however care should be taken to avoid extensive use of differing fixtures and lamp
types.
 Down lighting shall be used to effectively highlight individual tables or the table
groupings in all food and beverage outlets and banqueting areas.

Lighting Control Systems

Centralized lighting control systems shall be provided as follows:
● One centralized, computer based dimming control system covering all public areas
and circulations, food and beverage outlets, spa fitness center and meeting rooms.
Each area/zone shall be provided with scene control wall stations and shall be
capable of acting collectively or independently.
● One separate computer based dimming control system for the ballroom where each
division will be provided with scene control wall station and control unit, and shall be
capable of acting collectively or independently.
● Back of House circulation and common areas shall be controlled via central
programmable, time controlled lighting. Private offices, storerooms and other areas
shall be controlled with local room switching and motion detectors for energy savings.
● External, building and landscaping lighting shall be zoned and controllable via
electronic timers or photoelectric sensors tied into Building Automation System.
● External and internal security lighting shall be fully interfaced with the security
systems.

Dimmer Override
A manual and automatic fire and seismic alarm override shall be provided for all dimmer
control systems installed in the hotel (lighting to return to full brightness upon alarm
mode).

Local/RoomSwitching
Switching shall be arranged for safety, convenience and economic operation in the
following areas:
● Guestrooms
● Public toilets* (Sensors to be carefully placed and some fixtures should remain lit at
all time).
● Storerooms*.
● Retail stores.
● Elevator cabs (key operated).
● Elevator motor rooms*.
● Workshops*.
● Individual offices and workstations*.
● Storage and service areas*.
● MEP plant rooms*.
● Staircases press button with off timer or motion detector.
● Motion detector at enclosed parking*.
* Provide dual occupancy sensors in addition to local switching to enhance sustainability.

115
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Dimming Control Systems

● Dimming is important to improve ambiance but also enhance sustainability
● Two types of dimming system are minimally required.
- A centralized computer based system shall minimally be provided for public
circulation areas, food and beverage outlets, Ballroom and banqueting areas and
guestroom corridors.
- An electronic wall box shall minimally be provided for guestrooms, suites and spa
treatment rooms.
● The features of each system shall be minimally in accordance with the following
criteria:

Centralized Dimming
● The major components of a centralized, computer based dimming system shall
include the dimmer racks, a control unit and associated software, and several control
panels. The dimmer racks shall be contained within cabinets located next to the sub-
distribution panels for each particular area. Individual lighting circuits are connected
into these. The planning of the electrical distribution for the public areas shall allow
sufficient space for these items in the electrical rooms or closets.
● Racks shall have control modules mounted close to the dimmer racks. The control
module shall be connected to several control panels located in the public areas (or
adjacent spaces).
● Control panels allowing access to pre-set lighting "scenes" over channels or circuits
controlled via that panel and manually adjustable lighting intensity controls. Control
module shall manage several control panels, which are networked together.
● The dimming system set-up and adjustments shall be achieved via PC interface to the
dimming system control module. Provide data outlets to allow placement of the
control computer in discreet locations within the room to enable viewing of the set-up,
and adjustment of the system.
● Provide the capability for remote maintenance, testing and routine changes by the
system vendor via remote computer connection.
System Design Parameters
 The system shall be able to fade up and down at a rate that shall be infinitely
adjustable by means of setting with the computer.
 The system shall be equipped with an electronic astronomical clock linked to all
channels and capable of selecting the lighting for the entire area during a day, week,
and throughout the year.
 Third party equipment (e.g. window blinds, video screens) shall be controlled by the
dimming system, thereby unifying the controls.
 Provide interface to theatrical and stage lighting controls to allow special effects to be
programmed using the software.
 Provide override to each dimmer module that will bring it up to full brightness on
receiving a signal from an emergency alarm input.
 Scenes should be designed and take into account the time of day and daylight
variations within the areas (i.e. morning, mid-day, late afternoon, early evening, mid-
evening, and late evening).

116
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Dimmer Modules
 Modules shall be low noise, heat dissipating, and shielded electronic solid-state
devices providing step-less intensity adjustments from 0 to 100 percent. The dimming
modules must be specified to correspond to the light source requirements to be
provided by the Lighting Consultant.
Mobile Control Connections
 Provide a fully networked system to allow connection of control panels mounted on
mobile equipment trolleys. This must allow full lighting control from several locations
at the same time and the possibility of relocating the master lighting control panel
within the related area.

Electronic Wall Box Dimmers

 Electronic wall box dimmers, rated for the connected fixture type and connected load
shall fit into standard light switch receptacles and perform according to the following
outline specifications:
- Silent operation.
- Provide adequate and harmless heat dissipation.
- Finish to be selected by the Interior Designer.
Scene Selections
 Minimum scene selections shall be provided in the following areas:
- Public areas - 4 scenes and off, with manual override
- Ballroom - 8 scenes and off, with manual override
- Pre function - 4 scenes and off, with manual override
- Restaurants, bars and entertainment centers - 4 scenes and off, with manual
override
- Meeting rooms - 4 scenes and off, with manual override
- Fitness center and spa - 4 scenes and off, with manual override
- Selected exterior landscape – 4 scenes and off, with manual override

Ballroom Lighting Control Requirements

The dimming control system design requirements for ballrooms should provide adequate
flexibility for the following uses:
 Banquets and receptions
 Multimedia presentations and lectures
 Audio Visual entertainment
 Live music presentations
 Trade shows
 Fashion shows
 Conventions
 Rapid clean up, set up, and break down in periods between scheduled events.
To meet these requirements the dimming control system shall be modular in type. It
must accommodate ease of operation, interface with multimedia control systems and the
moveable partition configuration.

117
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

 All stage and theatrical lighting fixtures are required to be switched and dimmed using
a specifically designed and constructed PC based theatrical and special effect lighting
control system. Operating consoles shall be mobile and will be connected to mobile
control connection located inside the ballroom. Provide all appropriate hardware and
software.
 The system shall allow a minimum 8 controllable channels per symmetrical sub
division of each ballroom with different light level settings provided for each class of
lighting, even if within the same zone.
 A control switch shall be provided in order to monitor the moveable partition locations
and configure the control panels accordingly.
 Provide a touch screen controller and a handheld remote controller for dimming
system.
 Pin spots remotely and individually controlled and programmed (via hand held unit)
fixtures shall be provided to ensure full coverage to all Ballrooms and large Meeting
Rooms.

118
Operational Concept
THE OPERATOR minimally requires that all water system designs allow for the
conservation, management and recycling of water.

Design Criteria
● Potable water intended for human consumption must be in compliance with the
current minimum standards provided by the World Health Organization (WHO). Any
characteristic where WHO has no guidelines, the EPA latest drinking water standards
requirement under the National Secondary Drinking Water Regulation (NSDWR) shall
be used.
● Sustainable Design – Designer shall explore Sustainable Design initiatives in addition
to the THE OPERATOR’s Sustainable Design and technical criteria for water efficiency and water
conservation such as:
- Energy Conservation Recommendations.
 Adequate examination and cost studies for water and heat recovery systems
must minimally be provided for the following:
- Use of co-generation plant.
- Heat recovery from continuously and/or seasonally operating equipment
such as water chillers and refrigeration equipment.
- Heat pump system as primary source of hot water.
- Solar powered water heaters or temperature boosters/maintainers
- Boiler flue economizers to pre-heat feed water.
- Laundry rinse water reclaim.
- Laundry hot water recovery.
- Water Conservation Opportunities
 Rain water harvesting.
 Recycled gray water system.
 Use of low flow sanitary fixtures.
 Use of automatic sensors with sanitary fixtures.
 Non-chemical cooling tower water treatment.
 See also attachment for Standard Water Conservation for Water Fixtures.

119
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

Water System

Design Parameters
● To establish peak flow rates the fixture count method together with the maximum
instantaneous/consecutive demands should be used assuming minimum guestroom
occupancy of 100%.
● All water systems and components must minimally comply with T.S. Acoustical
Performance described in the Mechanical System chapter.
● Water supply to the building shall be from public mains, however, the following
sources may also be used depending on the specific project site conditions, as
applicable:
- Continuous or uninterrupted potable supply from municipal mains
- Well potable water supply.
- Continuous non-potable water.
- Lake, river or ocean.
- Desalination plants.
● Where non-potable water sources such as well, river, or brackish water must be used,
careful analysis by the Environmental Consultant and full treatment procedures are to
be provided as required for the intended use.
● Non-potable water systems must be completely and separately piped with no
interconnections to the potable supply and all piping must minimally be color coded to
differentiate between two systems.
● Pipe size should be determined in accordance with ASPE Data Book.
● Where gravity feed is used, a supplementary hydro-pneumatic system for the upper
floor levels designed to maintain the minimum pressure is required.
● Minimum pressure of 2.0 bar at furthest and/or highest fixture.
● Maximum pressure of 5.0 bar at any fixture.
● Minimally provide two (2) separate fully balanced systems free of pressure and
temperature fluctuation. To avoid pressure fluctuations due to instantaneous
demands in the kitchen and laundry areas, i.e., System A should supply only
guestroom levels, with System B supplying all back of house areas and public areas.
● All piping must be installed in such a way to avoid areas, which are susceptible to
water damage including, but not limited to PABX, Computer and Electrical equipment
rooms.
See Attachment: Minimum Standard Water Pressure/Velocities
System Network Zoning and Sub Metering
● Zoning of distribution networks for all utilities throughout the hotel shall be designed to
provide metering for each individual area: restaurant and associated kitchen, fitness
center and spa, entertainment center, banqueting areas, casino, retail shops,
apartment units and detached buildings.
● See Minimum Recommended Sub Metering Matrix under Building Automation System
chapter.

Water Storage
● A minimum on site storage equivalent to two (2) days consumption.

120
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

● Stored water must be contained in at least two separate, fully enclosed and
individually controlled compartments, each equipped with high and low-level sensors
reporting to localized and centralized alarms.
● Each compartment must have an overflow system with a suitably connected outfall.
● Minimally provide inspection windows and access ladders around the tank perimeter.
● Minimallyprovide lockable access panels for the cleaning/maintenance of compartments.

Water Treatment System

● Objectionable Matter Removal
- Minimally provide a water filtering system to eliminate odor, turbidity, suspended
matter, algae, and other filterable elements that render the water unappealing.
● Sanitation
- The system must be minimally equipped with an Ultraviolet (UV) light treatment
and a fully automatic chlorinating system to maintain a minimum chlorine residual
of 0.20 PPM. This system must be connected and monitored by the building
automation system.
- Supplementary methods such as ozone injection, active carbon filtration and
chemical and electrolytic disinfection may be utilized as deemed necessary
depending on the local water quality.
● Water Softening
- When required, minimally provide a centralized ion exchange water softening
plant consisting of a duplex system with automated regeneration process, each
system capable of continuous production of soft water.
- When required, minimally equip each system with a suitable low maintenance salt
handling system, storage tanks, microprocessor controls, monitoring equipment,
sampling facilities and other auxiliary equipment as required for correct operation.
- Maximum 120ppm (Ca CO3) water hardness must be provided for domestic cold
and hot water systems for all hotel areas and all MEP plant equipment with the
exception of all kitchens and laundry equipment and their related systems, where
approximately 80 ppm (Ca CO3) must be provided. Specific water hardness
levels may also be specified by the Kitchen and Laundry equipment consultant
and /or equipment manufacturers.
● Additional Treatment
- Potable water feeds to all kitchen equipment, including ice makers, beverage
equipment, tea and coffee makers require specialized filtration and
demineralization systems to achieve a lower-level of water softness and to
remove all objectionable taste and odor. Ultraviolet (UV) light treatment and/or
carbon filtration in accordance with the Kitchen Consultant requirements must be
minimally provided.
● Grey water treatment standard
- Grey water treatment shall meet the potable water standard required by the local
authorities.

Water Distribution
● Cold Water Distribution System
- Potable water shall be supplied throughout all hotel areas.

121
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

- The use of non-potable, recycled or treated wastewater should be considered for

WC’s, urinals and shall minimally be provided for all irrigation systems in
accordance with local regulations.
● Hot Water Distribution System
- Minimally provide a central storage tank type hot water boiler assembly, with
circulating pumps and automated controls.
- The main hot water storage system must maintain a minimum temperature of
65°C at all times to prevent the possibility of Legionella Bacteria growth.
- Additionally, a chemical or electrolytic disinfection system dedicated to the
domestic hot water network shall be provided.
- Hot water shall be automatically mixed with cold water to achieve a temperature of
55°C for feeding to building areas except all kitchen and laundry areas and those
identified by the Kitchen Consultant, where a minimum temperature of 65°C is
required.
● Hot Water Re-circulation
- Each hot water system to be provided with its respective re-circulation system
minimally consisting of a closed piping loop, and isolation valves for each zone.
Also include balancing valve or circuit-setter.
- Two electrically driven pumps, each having sufficient capacity to maintain a
minimum return temperature of 51°C are required.
- Pump impeller and housing to be machined bronze clad cast steel.
- No water fixture shall be more than 15 meters from the hot water recirculation
riser.
 Piping, Valves, and Strainers
- All exposed water and drain piping in public areas and guestrooms to be chrome
plated, or finished to match taps or other hardware as instructed by the Architect
or Interior Designer.
- Minimally provide individual stop valves for each guestroom, public area and back
of house plumbing fixture, mounted so as to be as unobtrusive as possible.
- Each individual bathroom shall be isolated readily in the plumbing shafts or the
suspended ceiling.
 Risers
- Each cold water supply riser shall minimally have one isolation gate valve/ball
valve as applicable.
- Each hot water riser shall have one isolation gate valve on the supply and one
gate/ball valve on the return piping along with a balancing valve.
- Riser heels to be provided with dirt pocket and threaded hose valve.
- Run outs to each fixture shall be of soft copper “Type L” tubing up to the threaded
or compression fittings on the fixtures.
 Pressurization
- Minimally provide constant pressure booster pumps with a hydro-pneumatic tank
system.
- Pumps shall be minimally sized to satisfy the maximum instantaneous demand of
all connected hot and cold water consumers with one (1) pump on standby.
Pump configuration should consider low nighttime demand.
 Water Hammer Arresters
- Provide at the upper terminals of all up feed risers.

122
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

- Provide on all water piping branches that are equipped with quick-acting valves
including spring-loaded valves and single-handle-ball type valves that can close
quickly.
- High volume water usage equipment such as dishwashers, laundry equipment,
etc. shall be provided with water hammer arrestor at the hot and cold water supply
line just ahead of the final connecting points at the equipment quick closing
valves.
- Large group of WC, vanity urinals or shower that has more than six fixtures with
quick closing valves, two arrestors may be needed (one at midpoint of the branch
line serving the fixtures and another at the end of the branch main serving the
final fixture on the branch line). For a complete reference on proper locations of
arresters, the manufacturer/vendor shall be consulted.
- Air chambers are not recommended.
 Cleaning and Flushing of the Systems
- Prior to start-up all systems shall be adequately cleaned and flushed to remove
dirt, debris and foreign materials from all domestic hot and cold water systems.
 Disinfecting required at commissioning (to avoid potential bacterial outbreak or
Legionella)
- The entire system must minimally be filled with a solution containing fifty (50) ppm
of chlorine, and allowed to stand for six (6) hours before flushing.
- Where water scarcity or high cost makes disinfecting of the water storage tank
impractical, the interior of the tank must minimally be swabbed with a solution of
100 ppm chlorine.
 Water Quality Tests
- Perform sufficient testing and analysis of domestic water system prior to use of
the system by hotel staff or guests to verify water safety and quality is in
accordance with all World Health Organization and T.S. requirements for
absence of all harmful biological, viral, organic and inorganic contaminants.
- Water for domestic use is also to be evaluated for: Total Suspended Solids (TSS),
heavy, metals pathogens and parasites.
 Hydrostatic Test
- All water networks to be minimally tested for 150% of working pressure. Pressure
test must be maintained for 30 minutes without any loss of pressure.
- Combined potable and fire protection system to hold (highest pressure) for 60
minutes without any loss in pressure.

Sanitary Waste System Design

Design Parameters
 A complete sanitary waste water system for all plumbing fixtures, kitchens, laundry,
mechanical equipment and floor drains to be provided wherever possible via gravity
flow to a point of connection with the municipal sewer or a sewage treatment plant.
 Maximum velocity of 0.6 m/sec to insure scouring action and a minimum velocity of
1.2 m/sec from all Kitchen areas to convey greasy water.

123
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

Interceptors and Strainers

 Minimally locate kitchen grease interceptors away from all food preparation and
service areas or as required by the Kitchen Consultant. Minimally provide airtight
seals to interceptor housings. All grease interceptors shall be powered, heated and
fully automatic skimming type. Adequate ventilation shall be provided.
 Minimally provide accessible lint collectors/interceptors at Laundry areas or as
required by the Laundry Consultant. Collector should be manufactured from stainless
steel wire basket or similar device to prevent the passage of all materials, 5 mm or
larger.
 Minimally provide hair traps in fitness centers and spas. Sand traps are required for
sand filter drains.
 Minimally provide at all guestrooms, public area and back of house bathtubs, shower
pans, and floor drains a stainless steel fine mesh 3 mm removable strainer. Finish to
be determined by Interior Designer or Architect.

Sewage Ejector
 Minimally required at all areas located below gravity connections to the municipal
sewer or sewage treatment plant.
 Minimally comprising a fully enclosed and airtight sump or pit equipped with duplex
ejector pumps discharging to the gravity sewer system or directly to the municipal
sewer or sewage treatment plant. All pump motors to be located external to the pit
and sized for full demand loads and connected to the emergency generator.
 Submersible pumps are not acceptable.
 All necessary automated controls/alarms to be provided.
 All ejectors to be connected to emergency generator and Building Automation
System.

Floor Drain and Trap

 All floor drains throughout all hotel areas shall be equipped with flush mounted
removable grills with frames recessed and sealed into a suitably prepared floor. Finish
to be approved by the Interior Designer or Architect.
 All floor drains subjected to infrequent flow are to be provided with a trap primer to
maintain a water seal against odors and gases.
 Locate traps below the slab with access available from below. If required by code,
access to the trap for cleaning purposes may alternatively be achieved from above
slab provided the location is not within the direct view of guests.
 Stainless steel perimeter located floor drains are minimally required in the following
locations:
- Guestroom shower and suite saunas and steam rooms.
- Locker rooms, pools, treatment and spa shower areas.
- Each public toilet area.
 Floor drains are minimally required in the following locations:
- Maid’s service area on each guest floor.
- Ice machine location on each guest floor.
- Receiving dock and garbage handling.
- All kitchen, bar and laundry areas.
- All walk in cold rooms and storage rooms.
- Back of house corridors.

124
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

- Garage and car wash station.

- MEP plant rooms.
- Other areas with water fixtures, hose bibs and taps.

Venting System
 The system shall be designed to facilitate escape of gases and odors and release
pressure from all parts of the sanitary and waste system to the atmosphere at a point
above the building so that siphonage, aspiration, or back pressures will not cause loss
of trap seal.
 The system shall minimally limit air pressure variation in all fixture drains to a
minimum differential not exceeding 2.5 mm of water column above or below
atmosphere pressure.
 Vents on unoccupied roofs may terminate a minimum of 0.30 m above roof. If roof is
occupied with air handling units, the vent to extend to a minimum of 2.20 m above
roof to prevent short circuiting any fresh air intake.

Sewage Treatment Plant

Design Parameters
 Minimally design the plant to meet the requirements of WHO standards.
 Location must be at a minimum distance from all hotel areas that will prevent any
gases or odor reaching any hotel area. All systems, underground or surface must
additionally be screened from all hotel areas by adequate landscaping.

Plant Configuration
 Two systems must be provided to facilitate a batch sequencing operation where both
systems are to be active and in compliance with the following criteria:
- One operating and one standby, minimally each of the system requires:
 A holding tank.
 Aeration chamber.
 Clarifier plus water tank.
 Preliminary dosing pumps.
 Pressure sand filter plant.
 UV filters.
 Hypochlorite dosing system.
 Treated water tank.
 Sludge holding tank.
 Redundancy may be limited to the equipment only, depending on local
practice and site conditions.
 Sizing
- Each system must be minimally sized to process 100% of the total effluent loads
of the hotel and associated facilities.
 Sludge Disposal System
- Separate pumping station to transport the sludge from the sludge holding tank to
the tank station.

125
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

 Ventilation System
- A complete system with supply and exhaust fans, suitable filtration and an air
washing station.
 Chemical and Biological Testing
- Provide a testing facility to ascertain the concentration of pollutants, such as
suspended solids, BOD, COD, color pH, oil and grease, metals, ammonia, and
phenol.
 Chemical Dosing Systems (Automatic)
- Maintain optimum conditions within the treatment plant and provide sufficient
chemicals for each system for the first three months of operation.
 Control and Instrumentation shall be connected to the BAS.

Rain and Storm Water Drainage System

Design Parameters
 The system must be designed to minimally collect and remove water from all hotel
buildings with an independent system covering all exterior areas and structures.
 Minimally design for gravity flow to a point of connection with the municipal storm
sewer, lake, and ocean or as required by code.
 The system shall minimally be independent from the building sanitary sewer system.
If combined, any connections into the sanitary sewer system must be external to the
building.
- The building sanitary sewer must be trapped before leaving the building.
Surface Water Collection
 An independent system must be provided to minimally collect and remove water from
all external hardscaped and landscaped hotel areas.
 Gasoline and oil traps shall be provided with full width troughs.

Guttering System
 Provide to all building roof areas and structures.
 All gutters should connect directly to rain or storm water drainage system.

Ejector
 Minimally required at all areas located below gravity connections to the municipal
storm water sewer or below grade connections.
 Minimally comprising a fully enclosed and airtight sump or pit equipped with duplex
ejector pumps discharging to the gravity rain or storm water system or directly to the
municipal storm sewer, lake, ocean or as required by code. All pump motors to be
located externally to the pit and sized for full demand loads and connected to the
emergency generator.
 Submerged pumps are not acceptable.
 Minimally provide automated controls reporting to localized and centralized alarms,
and minimally provide all ejectors to be connected to emergency generator and
Building Automation System.

126
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

Underground Site Drainage

 All aesthetic aspects of the design must be in accordance with the landscape
architect’s and the building architect’s requirements.
 Drainage requirements for the site must be coordinated with all parties.

Pool Deck Drainage

 Minimally provide a continuous drain trough located above surrounding external pool
areas to prevent storm water to flow from surroundings into the pool.

Rain and Storm Water Harvesting

 Adequate examination and cost studies for collection and recycling of rain and storm
water for usage in external irrigation, flushing, cooling tower or alternative use must
minimally be provided. Recommend minimum 20% of all roof and or parking area run
off shall be stored.

Water Feature & Pool Water Conditioning Plants

See also Security System chapter for Medical Alert Alarms Requirements
Provide filtration and chemical treatment plants for each water system to achieve the
desired water quality and effects specified by the consultants. The types of pools and
water features can be classified as follows:
 Swimming pools (indoor and outdoor).
 Aerated and therapeutic spas.
 Water features.
 Specialist systems.
 Decorative pools.

Pool and Spa Safety

 Swimming Pools and Aerated and Therapeutic Spas shall meet the requirement of
the Virginia Graeme Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act and ASME/ANSI A112.19.8 to
enhance the safety of the pools, create a safer environment around the pool, reduce
child drowning and reduce the number of suction entrapment incidents. Below
identifies the requirement related to hotel application.
- All pool drains, circulation pump, jet nozzles and suction outlets must be fitted with
anti-vortex cover or other means to prevent entrapment. The entire circulating
system design should conform to applicable codes and avoid entrapment hazards
in pool.
- All pool/spa drain covers must meet ASME/ANSI standard A112.19.8
- All pools/spas must be equipped with anti-entrapment type drain covers
- Pools/spas must be equipped with one or more additional entrapment devices of
the system listed below:
 Safety Vacuum Release System- which ceases operation of the pump,
reverses the circulation flow, or otherwise reverses the circulation flow, or
otherwise provides a vacuum release at the suction outlet when blockages
such as body, limb, hair, mechanical or evisceration is detected.
 Suction-Limiting Vent System with a tamper resistant atmospheric opening.

127
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

 Gravity Drainage System- utilizes a collector tank

 Automatic Pump Shut-off System, connected to the Medical Alert Alarm
System.
 Drain Disablement- A devise to disable the drain
 Other Systems- Any other systems determined to be equally as effective as or
better than the systems described above.
- In addition to the above requirement, a Pool Alarm System connected to the Spa
attendant and Security Center Command provides a rapid detection of an entry
into the water of a swimming pool or spa during off hours or when the facilities are
unattended.

Swimming Pool Equipment

 All swimming pool plant equipment components shall minimally have a back-up
component to ensure an uninterrupted operation of the pool in the event of failure of
one unit.
- Minimally provide heat exchangers where seasonally appropriate to maintain a
temperature of 28°C in outdoor/indoor pools. Outdoor pools minimally require
heating when lowest operating seasonal temperature is 12°C or less.
- Minimally provide balancing tanks to which skim gutters and pool deck drains are
connected with low and high level alarms, overflow, and drain valves.
- All back-washing pumps for sand filters shall develop a cross sectional velocity of
not less than 6 litre/sec/m² and a minimum of 6 changes per day.
- Skim gutters and all inlets and outlets are to be in accordance with T.S. Design
Recommendations and Minimum Standards.
- Swimming pool water to minimally be of potable quality.
- Chlorination shall utilize the electro chlorination (salt chlorination) method.
 Salt chlorination shall not be used for swimming pools with stainless steel
liners.
- Filtration systems shall be provided to achieve an excellent level of clarity with
automatic flocculation to improve the effectiveness of filtration system.
- All treatment systems shall be fully automatic in all features including: testing for
hardness, pH, free-chlorine and combined chlorine and shall be provided with
monitoring logs to record operational parameters and to generate localized and
centralize alarms and shall be fully interfaced with the Building Automation
System.
- Indoor pool area HVAC system and ductwork to be designed as per the latest
version of ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.

Aerated & Therapeutic Spas

 The plant and equipment for pools such as whirlpools, spas, cold plunge pools,
flotation chambers, etc., are similar to those required for swimming pools. Minimally
provide the following:
- A fully automated chemical dosing system appropriate with the pool’s use and
water temperature with sufficient chemicals for the first three months of operation.
Water should minimally be of potable quality.
- Operational and feature details to be in accordance with T.S. Design
Recommendations and Minimum Standards.
- Cold plunge pool temperature to be 23ºC and “hot tub” hot water temperature to
be maintained at 40ºC.

128
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

 Controls
- Shall be programmable, state of the art type with the following features:
 Fault display –Shall have digital read out with diagnostic feature to diagnose
problems and displaying the problems on down time and costly service calls.
 Panel locking – To prevent unwanted guest from using the spa. This feature
shall deactivate the control panel while still maintaining the heat and filtering
but nothing else will operate.
 To save energy and enhance sustainability:
- Automatic shut off- Turn off the spa’s pumps, blowers and light within a set
period of time; usually twenty minutes for pumps and blowers and two
hours for lighting. Automatic shut off features shall also be connected to
the Medical Alert Alarm System for safety reasons.
- Temperature locking – Keeps water temperature at a constant level but
allows programming of setting by authorized staff.
- Remote operation – Secondary remote control panel allows control of
outdoor hot tub from a remote location.

Water Features
 Provide all water features with adequate and appropriately sized operating
components, potable quality water and fully automated chemical dosing system
appropriate with the location and scale of the feature
Water Treatment Systems
 The water condition of water features shall be the same as the pool system they are
associated with. Therefore water sport features such as slides, water flows, wave
machines, etc., shall be designed in conjunction with the swimming pool or spa
system. Similarly, waterfalls or fountains in decorative ponds shall be an integral part
of that pond system.
 In addition to the requirements laid down in general equipment and system
description the following requirements shall be provided:
- The pumping systems shall be capable of producing the effect desired by the
Architect or Interior Designer.
- The pumping systems to have a manual bypass from the water feature nozzles to
allow full adjustment of the water feature.
- Exterior water features to be fitted with an automatic control system that restricts
flow through nozzles to avoid overspill due to excessive winds.
 All other system requirements apply to the pool or holding tank that the water feature
drains into.

Specialist Systems and Decorative Pools

 Provide ecological and biological water conditioning for fresh or salt water pools,
lagoons, waterways, canals, etc., which are required to support marine plant or
animal life, as well as swimming and water activities or as advised by the consultant.
 Minimally, systems to be designed to re-circulate two volume changes of the water
body during a 24-hour period or in each case as required by local code.
 The equipment to be designed and installed to minimize corrosion and utilize latest
state of the art, easily controlled flow process components, such as multi-port valves
and automatic backwash sequencing.

129
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

 All automatic water treatment systems, preferably non-chemical, should be equipped

to maintain water quality at prescribed levels using a continual injection system and
capable of recording dosage levels and providing an alarm condition when doses are
not to acceptable level.
 Non-Life Supporting System
- Not required to support animal or plant life.
- Only requires basic plant general equipment system or as required by the
consultant or local code.
 Life Supporting
- Animal & Plant Life Supporting System required to support life such as: External
water features used to contain fish and or aquatic animal life must be suitably
equipped with a fully automated ecological and biological treatment system to
maintain optimum conditions for the inhabitants of the system as required by the
consultant.

Equipment & Accessories

Minimally provide for all pools:
 Chemical testing kit for water quality.
 Minimally provide sufficient chemical, if applicable, for the first 3 months of operation.
 Vacuum/suction connections at convenient locations around the pool edge to facilitate
plug in vacuum/suction hoses for pool cleaning.
 Set of cleaning equipment with hoses and handle extensions compatible with the
above connections for each pool type.
 A full set of specification of all other pool cleaning equipment.
 Surface skimming devices, built into the pool.
 Automatic make up system for each pool.
 An overflow and multiple drains with anti-entrapment covers.
 Suitably placed and sized inlets and outlets to provide good water circulation within
the pool to assist cleaning.
 Locate hose bibs to facilitate hose down of pool and surrounding areas and provide
floor drains as necessary.
 Appropriate underwater lighting as outlined by Landscape Designer.
 Appropriate underwater speakers as outlined by AV consultant.
 Safety vacuum release system.
 Suction limiting vent system.
 Automatic pump shut-off.
 Drain disablement.
 Remote alarm.
 Emergency stop button.

Irrigation System

Design Parameters
Adequate examination and cost studies for the collection and recycling of rain and storm
water for use in external irrigation or alternative use must minimally be provided.
Wherever possible to enhance sustainability, external irrigation systems should utilize a

130
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

recycled water source i.e. gray water system, condensate recovery, laundries and non-
potable water recovery where allowed by regulatory authorities.
 Landscape
- Landscape hose bibs minimally provided at all building perimeters at 30 m
intervals.
 Landscaping Sprinklers and Watering devices
- Minimally provide a programmable timing system for both manual and fully
automatic control of independent and linked zones. Provide surface mounted,
below ground or other sprinkler or device suitable for the conditions required by
the plant life and climatic conditions. Control system and associated sprinklers,
devices, electronic valves and network of underground supply pipes are to be
permanently installed within landscaped areas.
- Minimally provide adequate rain, humidity and solar sensors as an integral part of
the irrigation control system.
- Provide tensiometer to monitor moisture content of the soil at the depth of the
plant’s root zone.
- Provide drip irrigation where applicable.
- Minimally sprinklers shall have 13 mm of water per hour per 0.10 m² of lawn, or
1.1 liter/hour per 0.10 m² capacity.
 Golf courses and specialist recreational irrigation systems must be designed
in full accordance with the recommendations of the Course Designer or
specialist.

Sanitary Fixtures and Fittings

Guestroom Bathroom Fixture and Fitting Selections

To conserve water and enhance sustainability, please refer to the Standards for Water
Conservation for Water Fixture attachment.
All fixture selections are to meet T.S. Design Recommendations and Minimum
Standards and the subsequent design selection by the Interior Designer and T.S.
Minimum fixture requirements are as follows:
Tub
 Cast iron or cold pressed steel baked porcelain finish with non-slip base. Minimum
interior dimension (1600 mm length x 650 mm width x 420 mm depth).
 Integrated overflow and pop-up drain shall penetrate the floor slab, trap and connect
within the suspended ceiling space of the floor below to provide a maximum installed
tub height of 420 mm above finished floor level.
 Floor sleeve must be packed tightly with NFPA class one fiberglass.
 Maximum allowable fill time shall be less than 8 minutes.
Japanese Style Tubs
 1500 mm long, 700 mm high and 760 mm wide with an external overflow to trough
drain.
 In a “wet room concept” (tub with a side continuous overflow and adjacent Shower in
one “enclosure”), the surrounding shower floor slope shall be 2 to 3 % towards the
floor drain.

131
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

Oversized Tubs
 Minimally required in Presidential/Executive/Diplomatic Suites.
 Cast iron or cold pressed steel baked porcelain finish with non-slip base. Minimum
interior dimensions (1820 mm length x 1060 mm width x 600 mm depth)
 Filling time shall not exceed 15 minutes.
 Integrated pop-up drain and overflow penetrates the slab, trap and connect in ceiling
void below.
 If air and water jet system is provided all pumps and controls must be made by the
tub manufacturer to ensure compatibility and entire assembly must meet T.S.
Acoustical Performance.
Therapeutic Style Tubs
 Where installed, all are to be fitted with self-draining piping and nozzles, filtration and
sterilizing system.
Vanity
 Vitrified porcelain, tempered glass or metal wash hand basin, with minimum internal
dimensions 450 mm depth x 450 mm width (or circular 450 minimum internal
dimensions) under slung mounting or free standing with pop-up drain and integrated
overflow.
Faucets
 Either separate valves for both hot and cold indicators or single lever as specified by
the Interior designer.
Water Closet
 Low-flow WCs need to be selected.
 Vitrified porcelain, flush mounted on wall, concealed cistern and back connection, rim
wash and siphon action.
 WC must be rated for 5 liter per flush
 Maximum performance rating (MaP) should not be less then 400 grams of solid waste
per flush.
 Integrated seat and cover to be provided by the WC manufacturer.
Washlet
 Washlets may be used to save space where bidets are culturally required.
 Electrical Consultant to provide a power outlet for water closet and bidet combination
with electrically controlled features.
Bidet
 Provide bidets with matching color and style to WCs, where culturally required.

Cistern
 Concealed in wall cavity. Overflow from cistern to be below access openings and
drained into the water closet.
 Refill in 20-30 seconds with all operations in compliance with T.S. Acoustical
Performance.
 Flow rate to be 5 liters per flush.

132
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

 Dual flush cisterns with half and full flush buttons are preferred.
Fixture Fittings
 Minimally of ceramic cartridge, mixer/volume controller type for all fixtures, or as
recommended by Interior Designer.
 A diverter is required where the shower/ hand shower is incorporated in the tub.
Hand Shower Heads and Valves
 Adjustable and selectable for multi-flow patterns, self-draining head rated for
maximum 9.5 liter/min. with tight stream (20-30 cm) cone base at 1.20 m distance.
Provide with normal, pulsating or massage stream features.
 All shower valves to minimally have a single valve for temperature setting or digital
mixer with thermostatic balancing device equipped with anti-scald feature.
 A second valve must be provided for water flow adjustment.
Rain Shower Head
 Single fixed spray pattern, self-draining head with a faceplate diameter of 125 mm to
250 mm.
 Maximum water flow of 10.0 liter/min.
 A diverter shall be provided to divert water form hand shower to rain shower.
Master Shower Tower
 Minimally with 3-way hand shower with sheet flow spout, two oscillating/pulsating
adjustable body sprays.
 Adjustable and selectable multi-flow pattern body spray at 6 liter/min, sheet flow spout
at 10 liter/min, hand shower at 10 liter/min and shower head at 10 liter/min.
Shower Heated Mirror
 Wall flush mounted, hot water or low voltage electric heated with recommended
dimensions of 300 mm x 300 mm square or 300 mm diameter if round.

Public Area Fixture and Fittings Selections

 All public areas hand basin faucets, WCs and urinals shall utilize programmable
electronic solid-state infrared sensors to sense a user's presence and operate
automatic flushing.
 All WCs shall have a MaP (Maximum Performance) rating of 400 grams of solid waste
per flush or higher.
 Provide ground fault protected outlet for accessories at each WC.
 Where culturally or locally required, bidet or its equivalent (i.e. washlet, trigger
operated hoses) shall be provided.

Back of House Bathroom Fixture and Fitting Selections

Final fixture selections are to meet T.S. Design Recommendations and Minimum
Standards (DRMS). Minimum requirements are as follows:
Employees Toilets
 Water closet type shall conform to cultural practice.

133
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

 Vitrified porcelain WC’s and urinals.

 A bidet or its equivalent shall be provided where called for by code or cultural
customs.
 Low flow models at 4.8 liter/flush and 400 grams of solid waste per flush or above
MaP rating shall be chosen.
Hand Basins
 As per T.S. DRMS

Janitor’s Sinks
 Sinks to be cast iron or white porcelain enamel with “S” trap above finished floor.

Ablution Areas
 Where culturally and locally required, ablution area shall be provided with necessary
taps and drainage system.
Water Taps/Hose Bibs
 Water taps are required in several locations in the hotel and outside.
 Provide a minimum of hot and/or cold water hose bibs or tap sets at the following
areas.
- Pool decks and related toilets.
- Mechanical plant rooms.
- Change rooms.
- Receiving dock.
- Garbage area.
- Trash rooms.
- Planters, indoor and outdoor.
- Sidewalks.
- Terraces.
- Parking garages bibs should be 25 m apart.
- Roof area
 Garage car wash areas require a minimum of two sets.
 Hose bibs in butcher shop, food commissary and kitchens require connection to both
hot and cold water. Kitchen consultant to specify temperature of hot water.
Color Coding
 Minimally provide piping and vessels color coding per local code requirements.
 Refer to the Mechanical Systems chapter.

Fitness Center and Spa Bathroom

In addition, the following are minimally required in accordance with the planning:
Deluge Showers
 Required on pool decks at entrance to locker/changing areas and at exit from pool
deck to beach, if applicable.
 Multi-headed shower arrangements may also be required to maximum of 1.5 liter/min
per showerhead operating at 4.0 to 5.5 bars.

134
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

Foot Baths
 To be provided for all outdoor swimming pools in accordance with T.S. Design
Recommendations and Minimum Standards.
Saunas
 All saunas to be provided in accordance with T.S. Design Recommendations and
Minimum Standards.
Steam Rooms
 All steam rooms to be provided in accordance with T.S. Design Recommendations
and Minimum Standards.
Massage Rooms
 All massage rooms are to be provided with MEP connections for hot and cold water
for vanity and shower stalls and in accordance with T.S. Design
Recommendations and Minimum Standards.
Treatment Rooms
 Provided in accordance with T.S. Design Recommendations and Minimum
Standards.
 Where applicable, provide mud traps with recycle reservoirs.
See Attachment: Piping Materials Schedule for Plumbing
See Attachment: Standards for Water Conservation for Water Fixtures

LPG or City Gas System

Design Parameters
 See Fire and Life Safety Systems chapter for safety requirements.
 On site LPG installation consisting of two or more large stationary tanks fitted to
accept metered bulk delivery.
 Where bulk delivery of LPG is not available, the installation shall be comprised of a
pre calculated quantity of cylinders connected to a split manifold. The quantity
required shall allow uninterrupted consumption throughout the regular redelivery
period with a minimum reserve of seven (7) days full consumption. The entire system
shall be in compliance with NFPA requirements.
 LPG installation to be above grade, with secure and lockable access. A storage
facility connected to, or remote from, the LPG installation to be subject to the same
requirements.
 Enhanced security system shall be provided for protection against terrorism.
 Stationary LPG receiving tanks must bear approval label from the authorities. Where
such authorities have no labeling requirements, the tanks must be A.P.I. -ASME
pressure vessels or approved equivalent. The LPG installation comprised of at least
two parallel, isolatable systems, except for single distribution systems.
 LPG piping system to be designed to convey vaporized LPG only within the building.
Any required evaporative process must take place outside the building.

135
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

 Where cylinders are exposed to direct sunlight and/or where maximum ambient
temperature is 40ºC or higher, a fresh water sprinkler adjusted to provide a fine mist
over the tanks is recommended. The sprinkler shall be operated by an automatic
ambient temperature sensor, cylinder shell temperature sensor or tank pressure
switch.
 In cold climates, heating may be required to boost up the pressure in the tanks and in
the cylinders. Local codes and practices to be followed.

See Attachment: LPG and Gas Piping Materials

Manifold and Fittings

 Connection from small cylinders to manifold to be made by flexible hose reinforced
with stainless steel mesh or equal.
 Primary pressure reducing valves, shut off valves, safety relief valves, gauges and
similar devices to be located outside of the building.

Recommended Pipe Work and Routing

 Minimally, installation to be as per NFPA guidelines.
 LPG piping shall be sized larger for possibility of natural gas in the future.
 Distribution piping for LPG and town gas to be designed and tested a minimum 2.5
times working pressure, and not less than 5 bar and deemed adequate when air
pressure test is maintained without observable pressure loss for a period of one hour.
 Piping must avoid hazardous areas such as electrical rooms, locked storerooms,
PABX, computer room, communications centre or areas subject to mechanical
vibration or atmosphere detrimental to the piping material, and areas with potential
open flame from sources other than gas, such as food service areas using candles,
solid fuel food warmers, oil fired boilers and high temperature electrical resistance
elements.
 Gas piping run must avoid penetration into any sleeping area and areas of public
assembly. Where piping has to be routed through these areas, the following minimum
conditions are to be observed:
- Vertical risers must be run in a dedicated, unbroken, two-hour fire rated shaft,
naturally ventilated at top and bottom. Alternately, the pipe may be run outside the
building. Gas leak detectors should be located within this shaft.
- Gas pressure to not exceed 12 mm Hg.
- Pipe to be welded for entire run through such areas.
- Gas lines are not allowed to run through areas which connect to plumbing,
electrical or ventilation shafts serving the guestroom tower, even where such
shafts are sealed.
 City gas to be metered by the supplier, preferably outside the building.
 Gas piping within the building shall not be run in concealed or suspended ceilings or
plenums. Distribution manifolds must be held to a minimum height of 150 mm above
floor, however gas pipe networks shall be run in an inconspicuous manner.

Condensation, Connections, Pressure Fluctuations

 All horizontal runs must be pitched slightly towards a condensation pocket equipped
with a small petcock.

136
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

 Gas cooking appliances requiring moving for cleaning purposes to connect to the gas
line by means of a stainless steel reinforced flexible hose, limited to a maximum
length of 0.90 m.
 Each gas appliance connection to be provided with a lubricated stopcock and an
independent pressure reducing regulator.
 Where gas supply pressure drops are recorded or anticipated to reach 15% of the
normal operating pressure, an approved central pressurizing compressor is required.

Metering
 Primary Meters
- Preferably be located outside the building. If indoor, area must be naturally
ventilated.
 Secondary Meters
- Each profit center, e.g. apartments, casino, retail shops, kitchens, laundries etc.
that requires gas need a separate meter.
- To be located in the same area as primary meters.
- See Minimum Recommended Sub Metering Matrix under BAS chapter

Dirt Pockets
 In areas where gas cylinders are subject to water or air introduction, all dirt lines to be
provided with a drain cock.

Pressure Vessels
 Design Parameters
- Pressure vessels shall be designed for a working pressure of 1.0 kPa or higher,
are recommended to be ASME labeled or other equally recognized authority.
 Safety Relief Valve
- All closed, non-vented vessels to be provided with a safety relief valve on the
vessel or the discharge piping before the shut off valve.
- Safety relief valve is to be the same size as the discharge connection on the
vessel or larger. Discharge from safety relief valves shall be piped to the nearest
floor drain or sump, or to atmosphere outside the building as applicable for
gaseous fluids.
- Vessels designed for working pressure of 5.0 bar or higher are to be equipped
with two safety relief valves.
 Construction
- Cold water vessels may be copper or cement lined.
- Piping connections on all vessels shall have welded flanges and/or welded half
couplings.
- Welded male pipe connections are not acceptable.
 Vessel Mounting
- Pressure vessels to rest on formed steel saddles if horizontally mounted or on
adjustable legs if installed vertically.
 Thermometers, Pressure Gauges
- Provided on each vessel and pump where the temperature and/or pressure
change is a consequence of operation or malfunction.

137
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

- Instruments shall have an accuracy of ± 1% of full scale, with the actual

measuring range covering a minimum of 40% of scale range.
 Insulation
- All vessels and piping in which the temperature is 6°C above or below ambient
require insulating with 25 mm molded fiberglass jackets and molded fittings.
- Cold water lines traversing humid areas to be insulated in a manner described
above except that a vapor barrier jacket must be added.
- All exposed insulated pipe work to be clad with aluminum sheet at least 1 mm
thick.

138
 Attachments
Plumbing Systems
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

Minimum Standard Water Pressure / Velocities

Fixture Bars Maximum

Min. Max. Velocities m/sec

Highest Plumbing Fixture 2.0 -- Mains 3.0

Lowest Plumbing Fixture -- 5.0 Risers (general) 2.4
Laundry 4.0 6.0 Risers (guest room) 1.8
Kitchens 2.0 4.0 Branch (general) 2.0
Mechanical Equipment 2.0 4.0 Branch (guest room) 1.5
Outside Hose Bibbs 3.0 5.0
Hose Standpipe * 4.5 6.5
Sprinklers * 2.0 8.0
Irrigation Sprinklers 2.0 4.0

* Or as required by hydraulic design, equipment manufacturer or governing codes.

138.1
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

Piping Materials Schedule for Plumbing

Use Piping
138.2
Hot or Cold Domestic Water

 Riser and Return Hard drawn copper, Type “K”

 Run Outs to Bathroom and Soft copper, Type “L” or Polypropylene or PEX
Fixtures

Fire Protection System Schedule 40 welded or grooved for Victaulic fitting

Black Steel

Pools/Water Features Schedule 80 PVC, Cement welded and rated up to 40°C

Soil Pipes Cast Iron

Vent Pipes Cast Iron

Galvanized

UPVC

Soil Pipes for Marine Equivalent Heavy duty, high silicon cast iron or as warranted for the
Application service

Rain Water and Storm Drains Indoor - galvanized or cast iron

Outdoor or Buried - cast iron or cement material

Buried Water Pre-insulated polyethylene

Piping materials shall also comply with requirement by local codes and standards.
 PLUMBING SYSTEMS

Standards for Water Conservation for Water Fixtures

Areas Maximum Preferred Restrictors Control
Flow Rate Flow Rate

Public Areas
Single Valve Mixer w/Thermostatic Valve and
Shower Heads 9.5 L /min 6.5 L /min Aerators, etc.
Diverter
Single Valve Mixer w/Thermostatic Valve and
Rain Shower 12.0-17.0 L 10.0 L /min Aerators, etc.
Diverter
/min
Wash Basin- 6.0 L /min 5.0 L /min Aerators, etc. Automatic Electronic Sensor

Urinal 2.0 L /flush 0.5 L /flush -- Automatic Electronic Sensor

WC 6.0 L /flush 5.0 L /flush -- Flush Valve

BOH Areas

Shower Heads 9.5 L /min 6.5 L /min Aerators, etc. Single Valve Mixer w/Thermostatic Valve

Wash Basin - 7.5 L /min 5.0 L /min Aerators, etc. Automatic Electronic Sensor
Non food Areas
Wash Basin – 8.3 L /min 8.3 L /min Aerators, etc. Single or Two valve mixer
Food Areas
Urinal 2.0 L/ flush 0.5 L /flush -- Silent Flush Valve or Automatic Electronic Sensor

WC 6.0 L/flush 5.0 L /flush -- Flush Valve

Guest Rooms/Suites

Shower Heads 9.5 L /min 6.5 L/min Aerators, etc. Single Valve Mixer w/Thermostatic Valve
Single or Two Valve Mixer w/Thermostatic Valve
Rain Shower 12.0-17.0 L 10 L /min Aerators, etc.
/min and Diverter

Wash Basin 7.5 L /min 5.0 L /min Aerators, etc. Two Valve Mixer w/Washer less Ceramic Valves

WC 6.0 L /flush 5.0 L /min -- Cistern or Silent Flush Valve

Bath Tub -- -- -- Two Valve Mixer and Hand Shower Head

Note: Health Spa showers may require higher flow rates for body massage.
138.3
PLUMBING SYSTEMS

- Instruments shall have an accuracy of ± 1% of full scale, with the actual

measuring range covering a minimum of 40% of scale range.
 Insulation
- All vessels and piping in which the temperature is 6°C above or below ambient
require insulating with 25 mm molded fiberglass jackets and molded fittings.
- Cold water lines traversing humid areas to be insulated in a manner described
above except that a vapor barrier jacket must be added.
- All exposed insulated pipe work to be clad with aluminum sheet at least 1 mm
thick.

138.4
 Operational Concept
Communications systems in the hotel are critical in providing an uninterruptable
communication media that ensure the safety for the guests and staff. The
Communications system also provides reliable interfacing of various systems to enhance
performance of the staff and efficient operations for the hotel.

Critical components to the Communications Systems in the hotel include but not limited
to:
 State of the Art Voice Communications through a PABX System
 Reliable incoming services from the local telephone company for both voice and data.
 Voice messaging/voice mail system for both guest and staff
 Guest services such as Wake Up and Guest Request systems
 Good quality cabling that is flexible and allows the hotel to grow in the future offering
industry standard technology
 High performing data networks for the Back Of House Operations
 Data networks for the Guest to Access including wireless throughout the entire hotel
 IP based Video On Demand and Free to Guest TV Services
 Latest technology Wireless Voice Communications for staff members
 Easy to manage guest information systems such as electronic signage
 Full cellular coverage throughout entire hotel

Wiring Infrastructure
This document provides the recommendation and minimum standards for a Structured
Cabling System. The cabling system shall be flexible to allow for moves and changes to
take place without the need to install additional cables or to re-route cables.

Scope of Work
The cabling system is part of the Base Building Scope. Please refer to the Definition of
FF & E found within the T.S. Design Recommendations and Minimum Standards
documentation for details.
 Structured cabling systems must have:
- Life span of at least 15 years
- Provisions to support future growth
- Support 10 Gb bandwidth capacity on fiber
 Cabling system must be certified by:
- The original Network Designer(s)

139
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- Manufacturer(s), and/or authorized local distributor(s).

- Installer(s).
The cable shall meet or exceed the performance requirements for Category 6 as
specified in ANSI/EIA/TIA 568 C.
During installation of all cables, the installer must not violate the minimum bend radius
for fiber optic and UTP cables.
See Attachment: Reference Codes & Standards for Voice and Data

Public Area and BOH Horizontal Wiring Requirements

Voice
 The horizontal cable for voice shall be certified to meet or exceed Category 6
certification.
 A minimum of 1 X 4 pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 6 certified cable will
be installed at all locations for voice.
 An RJ45 outlet will be provided for voice at each of the following locations in
accordance to the height specifications identified in the "Other Wiring Requirements"
section:
- Desktop.
- Office.
- Front desk.
- Point of sale locations.
- Pre check locations.
- Printer locations.
- Guest house phones.
- Meeting rooms.
- Ballrooms.
 Each horizontal cable will be pulled in a star configuration from the nearest
Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) to each outlet at the destination.
 Each cable run between two termination points shall be continuous, without any joints
or splices. Splicing is only allowed at the end of the cables for connection purposes.
Splicing is not allowed to extend the cables.
 Commercial building wiring standards (ANSI/EIA/TIA 568 C) will be followed.
 Optional 4 strands multimode fiber optic cable can be pulled to each location in
addition to the 4 pair Category 6 cable.
 Horizontal cable runs from IDF to outlet shall not exceed 100 m (total distance
including patch cables).
Data
 The horizontal cable for data shall be certified to meet or exceed Category 6
certification.
 A minimum of 1 X 4 pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 6 certified cable will
be installed at all locations.
 An RJ45 outlet will be provided for data at each of the following locations in
accordance to the height specifications identified in the "Other Wiring Requirements"
section:
- Desktop
- Office

140
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- Front desk
- Point of sale locations
- Pre check locations
- Printer locations
- Meeting rooms
- Ballrooms
 Each horizontal cable will be pulled in a star configuration from the nearest
Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) to each outlet at the destination.
 Each cable run between two termination points shall be continuous, without any joints
or splices. Splicing is only allowed at the end of the cables for connection purposes.
Splicing is not allowed to extend the cables.
 Commercial building wiring standards (ANSI/EIA/TIA 568 C) will be followed.
 Optional 4 strands multimode fiber optic cable can be pulled to each location in
addition to the 4 pair Category 6 cable.
 Additional cables may be required will be identified on the project’s specific
telephone/computer schedule.
 Horizontal cable runs from the active component in the IDF room to the active
component at the workstation shall not exceed 100 Meters (total distance including
patch cables).

Guestroom Horizontal Wiring Requirements

Voice
 The horizontal cable for voice shall be certified to meet or exceed Category 6
certification.
 A minimum of 1 X 4 pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 6 certified cable will
be installed from each outlet within the guestroom to a sub IDF concealed somewhere
within the guestroom (star configuration).
 An RJ45 outlet will be provided for voice at each of the following locations in
accordance to the height specifications identified in the "Other Wiring Requirements"
section:
- Both sides of the bed
- Bathroom
- Behind the Mini Bar
 The RJ45 outlets will meet the same specification as identified in the proceeding
sections.
 A minimum of 1 x 4 pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 6 cable will be run
from each floor IDF closet to the sub IDF location within the guestroom.
 At the sub IDF, individual pairs from each 4 pair cable will be bridged on to pairs of
the multiple 4 pair cable from the floor IDF.
 The number of pairs requiring to be bridged will be defined based on the type of
telephone instruments at each location (analogue or digital) as well and the number of
line appearances on each phone (line 1 or line 2).
Data
 The horizontal cable for data shall be certified to meet or exceed Category 6
certification.
 An RJ45 outlet will be provided for data at the following locations in accordance with
the height specifications identified in the "Other Wiring Requirements" section:

141
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- Above the desk or possibly integrated into the desk for high speed Internet
- Behind the Television
- Below the Desk (Desk Telephone)
 A minimum 1 X 4 pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 6 cable will be run from
each of the outlets identified above, passing through the Sub IDF area (but not
terminating) and continue to run directly back to the IDF closet.
 The RJ45 outlets will meet the same specifications as identified in the proceeding
sections.
See Attachment: Sample Schematic: Guestroom Communications Wiring Diagram

Vertical Wiring Requirements

Voice
 The vertical cable for non IP voice shall be UTP Category 3 certified.
 The vertical cable will run in a star configuration directly from the MDF to each IDF
 The number of pairs in the vertical cable run will be project dependent and based on
the number of active extensions supported by the IDF closet. At a minimum, 1 pair
per active extension plus 10% spare to support expansion and cable failures.
 A 20 pair (5x4 pair) category 6 cable will run between each floor’s IDF.

IDF Fl 4
I
I
IDF Fl 3
I
I
IDF Fl 2
I
I
IDF Fl 1
Data (Back Bone)
 The vertical cable for data shall be multimode fiber optic consisting of at minimum 12
core of 50 or 62.5/125 multimode optical fibers to each IDF closet. Single mode fiber
is acceptable.
 The number of optical fiber runs between the MDF and each IDF shall be as outlined
in the project specific schedule. As a minimum standard:
- For every 48 data ports, 2 optical fiber cores will be required.
- For each cellular service provider, 2 optical cables fiber cables will be required
- For IP telephone application, 2 optical fiber cables will be required for every 48 IP
phones.
 10% sparing of optical fiber cores are required with a minimum of 2 spare fibers
between each MDF and IDF room. When calculating spare fiber cores all increments
must be made in pairs.
 Each cable run between two termination points shall be continuous, without any joints
or splices. Splicing is only allowed at the end of the cables for connection to the
active components only. Splicing is not allowed to extend the cables.
 Each fiber optic cable shall be clad with a color coded PVC jacket for easy
identification.

142
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 Commercial building wiring standards (ANSI/EIA/TIA 568 C or latest) will be followed.

 All backbone fiber optic runs must be housed in a protective armored conduit.
See Attachment: Sample Schematic: Network Wiring Diagram

Patch Cords and Cross Connect Requirements

UTP Patch Cords/Cross Connect Cables (Voice)
 Cross-connect cables for non IP must be 2 pair Category 3 certified.
 Patch cords for voice can be used in the MDF and IDF rooms in place of cross
connect cables provided cross connect jacks were used in place of punch blocks.
 Alternatively patch cords may be used in the MDF/IDF room provided they meet the
same standards outlined below for UTP patch cords.
UTP Patch Cords (Data)
 Patch cords shall not exceed 5 m.
 All RJ45 patch cords and connectors must support 100 MBPs Fast Ethernet and
Gigabit Ethernet.
 Connectors shall meet the transmission characteristics as defined in ANSI/EIA/TIA
TSB-40.
 T568B jack pin pair assignment standard (ANSI EIA/TIA 568 C for all RJ45
connectors) shall be used unless local expertise and standards is to use T568B.
Entire Facility must be wired one way or the other.
 Patch cords shall consist of an 8 position modular connector referred to as an RJ45
connector.
 All patch cords shall be terminated using the same connectors from the same
manufacturer as the connectors used in the telecommunications outlets.
 The mating cycle for the RJ45 plug and socket shall exceed 1000 times in
accordance with IEC 603.7 Class A or latest.
 All patch cords must be neatly organized and labeled.
Fiber Optic Patch Cords
 Patch cords must meet the minimum requirements for fiber optic cables.
 All patch cords must terminate in pairs using a LC fiber optic connector.
 All patch cords must be neatly organized and labeled.

Outlet, Punch Block, and Patch Panel Requirements

UTP Outlets - Voice & Data
 The UTP Outlets for both voice and data at the workstation area will be an 8 position
modular connectors referred to as RJ45 connectors.
 All RJ45 connectors shall be 8 position/8 conductor standard type and shall be
capable of receiving conventional 4, 6, and 8 pin plugs of 24 AWG solid wire.
 All RJ45 outlets shall be certified and meet Category 6 standards.
 All RJ45 connectors shall be either surface or flush mounted, dual sockets. Those
locations identified in the telephone/computer schedule as requiring a single 4 pair
Category 6 cable can be terminated in a single socket RJ45 outlet.

143
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 All RJ45 connectors shall apply the crossover lead concept using cross talk
cancellation techniques to provide superior near end cross talk (NEXT) performance
without the need for printed wiring boards or other additional components.
 All male and female RJ45 connectors shall be from the same manufacturer.
 The mating cycles of the RJ45 sockets to RJ45 plugs shall exceed 1000 times, in
accordance with IEC603.7 Class A.
UTP Punch Blocks - Voice, Data
 All non-IP voice connections will terminate in the IDF and MDF rooms on to 110 or 66
style punch blocks.
 All cabling and blocks must be neatly organized and labeled.
 All cross connections between punch blocks will utilize a category 3 x 2 pair cross
connect cable.
 Data cannot use punch blocks.
UTP Patch Panel - Voice & Data
 Voice connections in the IDF and MDF rooms can terminate on a UTP patch panel
instead of a punch style block provided it could support bridging of Voice Points when
required. All IP-voice points must terminate on a patch panel.
 All spare outlets identified in the telephone and computer schedule will terminate on a
UTP patch panel instead of a punch block. These outlets can be used for either voice
or data on a per demand basis and must be easily reconfigured on demand via a
patch cord.
 The UTP patch panel must be certified as meeting Category 6 standards.
 Modular UTP patch panels will be installed in the computer room, MDF, and IDF
rooms for data.
 Modular printed circuit patch panels are required to accommodate Category 6
termination. The modular terminal patch panels shall have punch down blocks for
incoming cables directly linked to the back and RJ45 connectors for patching to
communication devices or other patch panels in the front.
 All Category 6 UTP cables must be terminated on both ends. The termination shall
be consistent with ANSI/EIA/TIA 568B-2 using T568B wiring assignment.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels - Data
 Fiber optic modular patch panels with LC fiber optic connectors will be installed in the
computer room as well as in the MDF and IDF rooms.
 The modular patch panels shall have provisions for incoming cables to be directly
linked to the back of the patch panels and duplex LC fiber optic connectors for
patching onto communication devices in the front.
Main Distribution Frame
 An industry standard main distribution frame is required within the building to cross
connect incoming lines from the local telephone company to the internal lines within
the hotel complex via the PABX switch. The MDF room will also terminate the riser
cables for both voice and data. The MDF room shall be located in or adjacent to the
PABX system and network equipment/computer room.

144
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Intermediate Distribution Frame

 An industry standard intermediate distribution frame is required on each floor at
minimum. These distribution frames will provide cross connection between the
horizontal cabling and the riser cabling. At minimum a 20 pair Cat 6 cable will provide
connection between each intermediate distribution frame.

Other Wiring Requirements

Cable Containment
 All cables shall be run in vertical or horizontal conduits, or cable trays suitably
prepared for data wiring distribution and separated from other electrical wiring in
accordance with ANSI EIA/TIA 568B-2.
 All cable distribution shall be concealed above suspended ceilings or wiring shafts.
 Where cable trays are not readily accessible because of decorative finishes or other
MEP services, all voice and data runs shall be pulled in appropriately sized conduit.
Outlet Locations
 All outlet locations must be coordinated with the related design documents.
 Outlet heights will be confirmed in the project specific mock up room and architectural
documents with ongoing coordination provided by T.S./FF&E Project Manager and
other related consultants.
 The final quantity of data and telephone outlets will be identified in the Project Specific
Schedule, which will be released by T.S. as part of the design development
package.

Estimated Data/ Voice Points Requirements

Location Description

Ball Room (per section) 1 Telephone, 9 Spares for data/voice, 1 Wireless AP, 1 for
electronic signage, 1 in room controls
Bars 2 POS, 2 Telephones, 2 KP
Bell Station Telephone, Spare
Business Center Receptionist PC, Telephone, Fax, LP, Credit Card
Business Center Work Station PC, Telephone
Commissary Kitchen 4 Telephones, 1 POS
Communication Center PC, Operator Telephone, Pre Check, 3 Spares

Computer Room 10 Servers, Printer, Telephone, PABX system, Network

Ethernet switches
Dish wash Telephone
Elevator lobby Telephone

Front Desk Regency Receptionist PC, Telephone, Laser Printer, Credit Card Verifier, Key
Encoder, Spare
Guestrooms:
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Location Description

 Standard (1 Br) 4 Telephones, 4 data 

 Junior Suites (1 Br) 5 Telephones, 4 data

 Executive Suite (1 Br) 6 Telephones, 6 data

 Presidential Suite (1Br) 7 Telephones, 6 data 
1 Kitchen printer for each (cold, dessert, beverage, hot), 1 
Kitchen
Telephone 
Laundry Work Area 1 Telephone, 1 Spare 

Locker rooms Phone, Pay phone

MEP rooms 1 Telephone, 1 Spare data 
Meeting Rooms Telephone, 3 Spares for data/voice, 1 Wireless AP, 1 for 
electronic signage, 1 in room controls 
Pantries Fax, Telephone, Laser Printer 
3 Telephones, 3 Spares data/voice, 1 Wireless AP’s required 
Pre - Function Area
for full coverage, 1 in room controls 
Receptionist (banquet and spa per station) PC, Telephone, Laser Printer Credit card 

Restaurants 1 Pre Check and 1 POS for every 50 seats

SPA Cardio 1 square per cardio vascular equipment 
SPA Treatment Room 2 Spares 
Staff Wireless Hand devices 50 Wireless devices for staff for voice and data 

Storage Rooms 1 Telephone, 1 Spare data

Trade Shops 1 Telephone, 1 Spare 
Uniform Issue 1 Telephone, 1 Spare 
Work Station/ Offices PC, Telephone 
Note: 

 The items identified above need to be multiplied by the number of users/ stations/
 This is for estimate purposes and when detailed architecture and I.D. drawings are
available we will provide specific detailed counts.
 Wireless Access points need to be available and provide coverage throughout the
entire building.
Testing
Cable Testing
 All cabling and terminations shall be tested to ensure performance meets all
standards as identified in the previous section of the latest ANSI/EIA/TIA standards.
All pairs of each installed cable shall be verified prior to acceptance and any defects
in the cabling system or installation will be repaired or replaced to ensure 100%
functional cabling. End-to-end testing (jack to jack) will be performed to ensure that
146
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

the end-to-end performance of the cabling solution meets performance specifications

as stated in the previous section of the latest ANSI/EIA/TIA standards.
 All Horizontal cabling (voice & data) will be tested to ensure that end-to-end (jack to
jack) distances are within the Ethernet standards of 100 M (including patch cables).
 Any Vertical cable used for data and IP voice will be tested to ensure distances are
within the Ethernet standards of 100 M (including patch cables).
 All Vertical fiber cable will be tested to ensure distances are within the Ethernet
standards for fiber cabling.
Cable Test Results
 Test documentation shall be provided in electronic format within three weeks after
completion of the cabling system. Test documentation shall be organized and labeled
in a manner that allows easy retrieval of the information and should be organized by
floor. This documentation should contain the performance detail of each cable and
should not indicate only pass-fail status but must include test performance details.
 This document shall also include the date the cable was tested along with the name
of the test equipment used when this equipment was last calibrated.

Local Area Network System

Local Area Network Concept

This document provides the recommendation and minimum standards for the LAN
system. This system shall support a minimum of 100 Gbps bandwidth. Backbone
switch with remote edge switches will be connected in a star configuration.
A qualified voice (VOIP) and data network design consultant must be obtained early in
the project. All network designs must adhere to Payment Card Industry (PCI and SOX)
Requirements and Standards.
A dedicated BOH Network separate from the Guest Network is required with no
exceptions. Only hotel office operations and PMS/POS System can operate on the BOH
network. All other application must run on the guest network.
Note: All VoIP telephone handset must connect to a dedicated network that only
supports the PABX and IP handset. No other IP device is to share this network.

Backbone Switch
 The backbone switches will be the central node in the LAN. As such they must
provide:
- A high level of fault tolerance.
- Reliability.
- Redundancy.
 Specifications and features:
- Chassis based and rack mountable into a standard 19” wide rack.
- Minimum of a 100 Gbps passive back-plane design.
- Support redundancy switching process, power supplies, and cooling fans.
- Hot swappable support on the processors, power supplies, modules, and cooling
fans.
- Support IP and IPX/SPX Protocols.

147
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- Support link aggregation to increase available bandwidth of up-links.

- Layer 2 and 3 switching.
 Management specifications:
- Operation indicator light(s) for each port.
- Remote software download.
- Back up of switch configuration through TFTP, FTP and Telnet or via console.
- Back up configuration file must be sufficient to restore replacement switch.
- Port mirroring on all ports (Ethernet, Fast Ethernet or Gigabit) without interruption
to the normal operations of any other port on the switch.
- Provide dual direct connectivity to all servers at Gigabit switched speed (Servers
must connect directly into core switch and not through an edge switch).
- Provide connectivity to all routers, modem pools, and all other wide area network
connections at 100 Mpbs switched speeds.
- Provide direct connectivity to users' workstations within 100 meters distance with
100 Mb switch speed utilizing UTP cable.
- The number of ports per segment shall not exceed 48.
- Modular in design and support the following connections:

Technology and Speeds Switched Connection Type(s) Applications

Gigabit Ethernet Switched Category 6 UTP RJ45 Servers

100 Base T (100 Mb) Switched Category 6 UTP RJ45 Clients

Multimode Fiber Optic Uplinks to

Gigabit Ethernet and 10 Gb Switched SC or UTP Cat 6 Edge Switch
 Support the following standards

Standards Number Description

EEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet 100 BaseT

IEEE 802.3ae 10 Gigabit Ethernet

IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit Ethernet

IEEE802.1d Spanning Tree

IEEE802.1q VLAN Trunking /Tagging

SNMP 1 & II Simple Network Management Protocol

RMON I Remote Monitoring

Edge Switch
 The edge switch will be located in the IDF rooms and provide connectivity to the
outlets.
 Specifications and features:
- Standalone or rack mountable into a standard 19” wide rack.

148
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- Support Gigabit or 10 Gb up-links to the backbone switch.

- Each Edge Switch and up-link shall support a maximum of 48 ports.
- Provide direct connectivity to user’s workstations within 100 meters distance with
100 base T switched connections utilizing UTP cables.
- Support link aggregation to increase available bandwidth of up-links.
- Support IP and IPX/SPX protocols.
- Support Layer 2 switch with option for layer 3.
 Management specifications:
- Operation indicator light(s) for each port.
- Remote software download.
- Back up of switch configuration through TFTP, FTP, and Telnet or via console.
- Back-up configuration file must be sufficient to restore replacement switch.
- Port mirroring on all ports (Ethernet, Fast Ethernet or Gigabit) without interruption
to the normal operations of any other port on the switch.

Wireless LAN Requirements – For Hotel Administration and Guest

using Network
 Wireless Access Points shall be provided throughout the entire hotel for hotel staff to
gain access to select hotel BOH applications.
 Areas that will require wireless access coverage shall include but not limited to:
- Public Areas.
- Food and Beverage outlets.
- Business Centre.
- Receiving Dock.
- Maid's Pantries.
- Guestrooms.
- BOH area
- MEP room
- I.E. entire hotel
 Wireless Access Points will support 802.11A, B, G & N.
 Location of the Access Points shall provide entire coverage in all areas with no dead
zones.
 Wireless must support VLAN and include the use of radius server authentication, and
wireless access/ management controllers for security and full mobility.
 Use of wireless BOH Systems requires specific authorization from T.S.
 A wireless survey of signal strength must be performed by a certified specialist who
can sign off on full coverage for both voice and data.

Guest Broadband Internet Access (Guest Network)

Scope of Work
The Guest Broadband Internet Access and Wireless LAN network system is not part of
the FF&E budget. Below are the technical specifications for this network.
 A completely separate Guest Network will be required to provide guest with High-
Speed Internet Access within the hotel.
 Separate backbone and edge switches will be required to maintain isolation from the
hotel's BOH Network.

149
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 Not a single system on the hotel's BOH Network will have connectivity to the Guest
Broadband network without prior approval from T.S. The hotel BOH network will
have Internet access through the hotel's BOH Network and WAN connection.
 The following locations will have wired and wireless guest high speed internet access
points:
- Guestrooms.
- Meeting Rooms.
- Ball Rooms.
- Lobby & Club Lounges.
- Business Centre.
- All other public spaces.
 The system will need to interface into the Hotel's PMS interface for providing guest
billing of the services.

Other LAN Requirements

 The design of the network will be based upon a centralized, two tier solution.
 The first tier consists of the backbone switch located in the computer room. All
servers and WAN connections must be within 100 meters. Servers will connect at
Gigabit speeds with redundant connectivity. WAN will connect at 100 Mb.
 The second tier must consist of the edge switches located in the appropriate IDF
closets.
 If a single point of failure exists, replacement and repair of the failed point must be
accomplished without shutting down or affecting other areas of the entire network.
 Redundant links and switch processors can be implemented whenever possible to
increase network reliability. Note that redundant processors, power supplies, and
cooling fans are required in the backbone switch.
 All backbone and edge switches will be required to be protected with a UPS power
source.
 Network Management Requirements include:
- Network management software, management agents, and other necessary
components that are required to manage the proposed switches and UPS systems.
- Management solution should include the ability to detect and isolate rogue wireless
user or the addition of wireless access points.
- All network management software shall run on a Windows operating system.

Computer Equipment Hardware & Software Requirements

PC/File Server Hardware and Software Concept

As part of the project specific Telephone/Computer Schedules that will be developed
after the interior and BOH layouts have been completed, the specific number of PC's,
servers, printers and software will be identified along with detailed specifications.

Scope of Work
The Computer Equipment hardware (i.e. PC’s servers, printers and network switches
etc.) and software systems, listed in project specific Telephone/Computer Schedules,
are part of the Furniture, Fixture and Equipment (FF&E) Scope. Please refer to the

150
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

FF&E and Base Building Definitions in the Design Recommendations and Minimum
Standards documentation for details.

Application Hardware/Software Summary

 Quantities of all hardware and software will be identified in the Project Specific
Schedule.
 Detailed Specifications of all hardware and software will be identified in the Project
Specification Schedule.
 Final co-ordination and confirmation of quantities will be carried out by the T.S.
FF&E Project Manager during procurement process.

Primary Interface Requirements

 Interface provides an interconnection between two vendors' applications, which
allows required data to flow between the applications, e.g. Information regarding calls
made from the PABX system need to be supplied to the PMS system for customer
billing. This information is sent from the PABX to the PMS system via an interface.
 Interface solutions should be provided by the vendor.
 The application vendor is responsible for the implementation and the correct
operations of their interface software. They are responsible for coordinating with all
other vendors involved in the application to ensure proper operations.

Voice Communication Systems

PABX, Voice Mail, Call Accounting, Wake up Service, Mini

Bar and Room Status Concept
This document provides the recommendations and minimum standards for the PABX
and associated system. These will be developed by the relevant consultant in
accordance with T.S. progress review and as reflected in the Project Specific
Schedule.

Scope of Work
The Voice Communication Systems are part of the Furniture, Fixture, and Equipment
(FF&E) Scope. Please refer to the Definition of FF&E found within the T.S. Design
Recommendations and Minimum Standards.

General Equipment Requirements

 The PABX system is required to support conventional TDM and VOIP switching while
interfacing to the public telephone network through TDM, ISDN, or POTS protocols.
 All VoIP telephone handset must connect to a dedicated network that only supports
the PABX and IP handset. No other IP device is to share this network.
 The system and products offered must be sold and supported by an internationally
recognized manufacturer with an established local representation.
 All systems and products offered must be the latest generation of hardware and
software available from the manufacturer.

151
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 All components, including, maintenance and support, must be available for at least 10
years from the date of commissioning.
 The PABX solution including all trunk cards, telephone instruments, voice mail and
other components must comply with local communication authority requirements, as
well as internationally recognized codes.
 The PABX system must be flexible in regards to cost effective growth from the initial
configuration of approximately 1100 ports up to 5000 ports.
 The system must be capable of interfacing with all required peripheral application
systems.
 The PABX system must be capable of supporting remote PABX modules connected
either by fiber optic backbone or by a high-speed public network connection.

PABX Hardware Overview

 The PABX hardware must minimally include:
- Both non-blocking time division and VOIP switching.
- Modular design allowing for the addition of carriers, shelves, and cabinets for
expansion.
 The PABX system must minimally support:
- Internal on line automated self-diagnostic maintenance.
- Redundant control processors with memory modules floated on line to ensure
against interruption.
- Redundant power supplies with UPS protection for a minimum of 2 hours.
- A Grade of Service (GOS) of P.01 or better.
- Deliver an average of 30 CCS (hundred call seconds) for trunk ports, 12 CCS for
analogue and digital stations, and 30 CCS for voice mail ports.
- The busy hour call completion rating (BHCC) shall be 35,000 or greater.
- Other signaling, electrical specifications such as tone frequencies, line
impedance, etc., shall conform to the ITU-T standards, unless specified otherwise
by the local telecom authorities.
- Remote maintenance, testing, and routine changes by the maintenance vendor,
including the transmission of failures and alarms to the vendor via a dial up
modem or other connection.
- Fall back condition providing emergency handset with a direct analogue extension
to an outside line (bypass line).
- The PABX shall be designed for continuous operation with a design life span
greater than 15 years.
- Ability to trace and track and record malice calls.
- The PABX system must support having all emergency calls routed to the hotel’s
PABX operator. Emergency incoming calls to the operator must have a unique
distinctive ring to them that differentiates them from a typical incoming call. In the
event the operator is currently handling an emergency call and a second
emergency call is received, this call must immediately be sent to the security
office or another pre-determined office that is staffed continually. All emergency
calls must immediately be recorded from the beginning without any human
intervention in the recording process.
Conference Bridge
The following conference bridge features are minimum requirements:

152
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 A telecommunications conference bridge shall support up to 24 callers for high quality

audio teleconferences
 The unit shall be programmable for various size conferences. Full duplex
teleconference speakerphone units shall be utilized in large conference rooms.
Call Centre
The call centre features of the system support departments such as reservations, sales
and banqueting, and the communication centre. These are areas that have a large
number of similar incoming and/or outgoing calls. These features provide balanced call
distribution to a large group of voice terminals. THE OPERATOR 's call centre solution
is a PC based application (refer to communication centre specifications for further
details). The call center application must, at minimum, be capable of supporting the
following ACD and reporting functions.
 Abandoned Call Search.
 Agent Call Handling
- Stroke Counts.
- Call Work Codes.
- Forced Entry of Stroke Counts and Call Work Codes.
 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD).
 Basic Call Management System.
 Call Prompting.
 Intelligent Call Routing.
 Intra flow and Inter flow.
 Look Ahead Inter flow.
 Inbound Call Management.
 Move Agent from CMS.
 Queue Status Indications.
 Service Observing.
 Skill Based Routing.

PABX System Capacity and Sizing Guidelines

The number of incoming and outgoing trunks, as well as the number of internal
extensions will be specified in the final approved project specific telephone and
computer schedule. The PABX system tender document must be based on the following
methods of approximating the system capacity.

Preliminary Estimation of the Number of Internal & External Lines

The final configuration of Internal and External Lines will depend on operational
requirements and will be adjusted accordingly at the time the project specific schedule is
issued.

Description 0 - 149 150 - 249 >250 Guestrooms

Guestrooms Guestrooms
External Lines 50 50 - 75 75 - 120
Internal Lines for
Number of Number of Guestrooms Number of Guestrooms
Guestrooms
Guestrooms x2 x2 x2
Line Appearances

153
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Description 0 - 149 150 - 249 >250 Guestrooms

Guestrooms Guestrooms
Number of Ports in Number of Number of Guestrooms Number of Guestrooms
PABX for Guestrooms Guestrooms x 3 x3 x3
Internal Lines BOH 200 300 350-450
Direct Inward Dial 50 75 100
Operator Consoles 1 per hundred rooms + 1

Note: These are estimates only and specifics will follow as part of the
Telephone/Computer Schedule
 High-Speed T1, E1 and or ISDN Incoming Line Minimum Requirements:
- High-speed access lines shall be required to support the Reservations Systems,
Wide Area Network, Routed Applications, Credit Handling Facilities, and Broad
Band Internet Access to the guestrooms. The PABX system and local telephone
company must be able to support such services including performing billing for
such services on a per usage/duration basis. Quantities shall be developed in
conjunction with T.S.
- A minimum of 6 ISDN BRI’s are required for connecting on request to ballrooms,
multiple rooms, etc.
PABX Supporting Systems and Attendant Console
Administration Terminal
The PABX system must include and support an administration terminal and software for
onsite configuration changes and Moves, Adds, and Changes (MACS). In addition to a
dedicated terminal, a Windows based Graphical User Interface (GUI) application
package must be provided to enhance the commands and simplify the process of
implementing MAC’s.
Attendant Console Overview
The attendant console must support all of the following industry standard functions and
features. The attendant console must be Windows XP based and allow other BOH
application to run on the server system such as the PMS and POS System.
Guestroom Telephone Operations
All incoming calls should ring all phones and be able to be answered from any phone.
Answering incoming calls is to be accomplished in the following manner:
Bathroom: Handset is to be removed from the cradle.
Bedside: Handset is to be removed from the cradle.
Desk: Handset can be removed from the cradle or by selecting the ringing line
button the call should automatically be answered in hands free mode.
A second call into the guestroom will ring the second line on all phones and can be
answered from any phone with the exception of the bathroom phone since it is a single
line phone. The preferred manner for answering the second line is to depress the
second line button. This automatically places the active call on hold and picks up the

154
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

second line. An alternative acceptable method is for the main line button to be
depressed. This toggles the call placing the first call on hold and answering the second
call.
The line light on all phones should indicate which line is ringing as well as an audible
tone from the phone should be heard.
To move an active call from one phone to another in the guestroom the system should
allow this transferring of the call by depressing a single button. If the call is originally
answered at the desk, the guest should be able to depress a button on desk phone that
automatically transfers the call to the bedside phone. Once the button is depressed on
the desk phone the guest hangs up the handset and the bedside phone rings. The
guest answers the ringing bedside phone and now has the transferred call.
Any phone through which a call was placed on hold in the process of moving from one
phone to another should automatically release the hold from that phone once the caller
has hung up the call.
The line light on all the phones should indicate which line is active as well when a line
has been placed on hold.
Access to Hotel Services such as Room Service is to be accomplished either by using
single digit dial features as identified above or through the use of programmed speed
dial buttons on the phone.
In addition to Hotel Services being programmed on the guest phone, functions identified
in the Telephone Type chart that follows are to be included.

Telephone Handsets and Telephone Types Minimum Requirements

 Phones in public areas and guestrooms shall have coil cords with a minimum length
of 90 cm. Back of house phones shall have coil cords with a minimum length of 60
cm.
 All wall-mounted phones shall be connected to the outlet directly behind the phone
with no visible wiring, faceplate or junction box.
 Color of the telephone, coil cord, and station cord must be coordinated with the
Interior Designer and FF&E Project Manager.
 All handsets must have adjustable volume control for ringer.
 All handsets must have minimally 12 key dialing pad.
 Each telephone type must have an area on its surface for graphics to be displayed.
This information is to be produced by the Graphic Consultant and will include:
- Name of Hotel and its address
- Hotel Main Telephone Number
- Extension or Room Number
- Fax Number for Hotel
 Each telephone type must have an area on its surface for graphics to be displayed.
This information is to be produced by the Graphic Consultant and will include the
following dialing instructions:
- Room to room
- Outside line
- Local calls
- National calls
- International calls
 Telephone set requires touch-tone dialing.

155
 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 Telephone set to comply with the local telecommunications authority’s requirements.

 Standard business function must be available on the BOH phones while hospitality
features need to be on the guestroom phones.
Portable Handset for BOH Staff
 Ability to receive all calls.
 Ability to make local calls and internal calls to the hotel.
 Ability to have their office phone ring and the portable handset ring at the same time
and support all features on their desk phone.
 Support earpiece and lapel microphone.
 Interface with guest request and engineering software to receive work order request
details via the display on the phone.
 Interface with emergency services such as fire alarm to receive a call directly during
such emergencies.
 Optional: Ability to directly close work ticket from menu options on the phone.
 A select number of the phone should support push to talk.
 Examples include DECT, PDA, Blackberry, Wireless IP Phones and Cellular.
Telephone Types
All telephone types shall be in accordance with the following schedule:
Telephone Type Minimum Features
Minimum BOH FOH F&B Guestroom Guestro Executive Res. Com. Mobile
Features Kitchen, Public & Bedside, om & Centre Centre Phone
Storage Areas Bars Living Desk & Secretary
Rooms & room & BOH Offices,
Guest Dining Offices Guest
Bathroom Area Services
/ Pantries
Single Line x x
2 Line x x x x
4 Line x
6 Line x x
Analogue x x x x
IP x x x x x x x x
Line Lights x x x x
Desk Top Style x x x x
Wall Mount x
Style
Cordless Style x x x
2 Line Display x x x
4 Line Display x x
Speaker & x x x x x
Hands Free

156
 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Minimum BOH FOH F&B Guestroom Guestro Executive Res. Com. Mobile
Features Kitchen, Public & Bedside, om & Centre Centre Phone
Storage Areas Bars Living Desk & Secretary
Rooms & room & BOH Offices,
Guest Dining Offices Guest
Bathroom Area Services
/ Pantries
Speaker
Volume x x x x x
Control
Caller ID x x x x x
Message x x x x x x x
Waiting Light
Hold x x x x x x x x
Release x x x x x x x x
Speed Dial to
Frequent x x x x x
Accessed
Department
Mute x x x x x x x
Call Transfer x x x x x x
Call Forward x x x x x x
Do Not Disturb x x x x x x
Last Number x x x x x x
Redial
Call Pick-up x x x x
Clock and Call x x x x x
Timer Display
Conference x x x x x
Call
Headset x x x
Supported
Line Powered x x x x x x
Intercom
Between Base x x x
& Handset
Beep to Locate x x x
Handset
Lithium or x x x
Nimh Batteries
Minimum 5 x
Programmable/ x x
Fixed Buttons

157
 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Minimum BOH FOH F&B Guestroom Guestro Executive Res. Com. Mobile
Features Kitchen, Public & Bedside, om & Centre Centre Phone
Storage Areas Bars Living Desk & Secretary
Rooms & room & BOH Offices,
Guest Dining Offices Guest
Bathroom Area Services
/ Pantries
or Menu
Minimum 12
Programmable/ x x x
Fixed Buttons
or Menu
Feature Button x x x x x
Lights
Programmed x
Speed dial for x x x x x
Guest Services
Staff/Guest x x x x
Directory
ACD Supported x x
PC Based x x
Solution
Support IT
Interface to x x x x x
other
applications
Feature
Enriched Hotel x
Console
Ring / Vibrate x
Option

 Type 9 Pay phone

- Locally available coin or card operated pay phone supplied by local.
- Telecom authority.
- To be confirmed/selected by T.S. FF&E Project Manager.
- All business arrangements to be coordinated by THE OPERATOR FF&E Coordinator.
 Type M (Modem)
- Hayes smart modem 56 Kbps Data/Fax Speeds.
- V.39 bis compatible, V.42 and or V.90 error correction.
- Remote maintenance requires modems to be provided as part of the PABX.

158
 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Telephone Types and Restrictions

User Type Phone Type Example of User Quantity Dialing Graphic Design
of Phones Restrictions

BOH Phone 1 Kitchen, MEP, Staff, 1 In house Plain

Maid restrictions

Guest Bathroom 1 Guest 1 Full Dialing Extension

Features
Main Lobby, Pre Operator Assisted. Hotel Number,
FOH Phone 1 Function, Elevator 1
Main Number
Lobby
Hotel Name
None Address
Guest Bedside Phone 10 Guest 1
Billed to Room Main Number
Room Number
Executive & Presidential Hotel Name
2 VIP Guest 1 None Address
Suites
Direct number
Operator Assistant Hotel Name
F&B Outlets 3 Guest 1 Address
Internal Calling Main number

Manager None
Administrative Offices 4 1 Main Number
Hotel General Office Phones must have Extension
Staff message waiting
Hotel Name
None Address
Guestroom Desk Phone 4 Guest 1
Full Features Main Number
Room Number
EXEC Managers None Main Number
Admin EAM’s Secretaries 5 Secretaries, Front 1
Full Features Extension
Desk
Admin Sales and Marketing 6 Sales & Marketing 1 None Main Number
Full Features Extension
Admin Communication Communication None Main Number
7 Centre & PABX 1
Centre Full Features Extension
Operator
DECT/IP Cordless 8 BOH Staff 1 In-House Main Number
Restrictions Extension
Note: These restrictions are preliminary guidelines customization can be made during
the pre opening of the Hotel by the T.S. Project Manager.
Dialing Plan
 Main Incoming Telephone Number.
- The hotel’s principal telephone number must terminate in 1 2 3 4. The
owner/developer or contractor is responsible for securing this number. (E.g. 750
1234).

159
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- A block of 200 consecutive DID numbers is to be reserved for the hotel as a

minimum. These DID numbers are reserved only but not activated.
- These numbers will be assigned as part of the external dialing plan and integrated
with the internal dialing plan using DID features.
 Example

City Code Prefix Block of Numbers

312 565 1001 to 1200

312 566 1001 to 1200

Standardized Single Digit Dialing Plan (Guestrooms)

 PABX and telephone instruments must support both a Single Digit Dial Plan as well
as a Fixed Button Plan. A single Digit Dial plan is where a single digit (1-9) on the
telephone instrument can be depressed and after a pre-determined period of time a
pre specified department is contacted based on the digit depressed. A Fixed Button
Dial Plan is where a single pre programmed button is depressed and the pre specified
department is contacted based on which button was depressed. This button may be
identified with the icon or label. Programming of these single digits and fixed buttons
must be coordinated with other THE OPERATOR hotels in the region for consistency.
 PABX must support Single Digit Dialing in accordance with the table below. A graphic
template is required for the identification of this feature.

Digit Department Digit Department

1 Concierge 6 Spa

2 Guest Services 7 Voice Mail

3 Room Service 8 Inter room Dialing

4 Restaurant Reservation 9 Outside Line

5 Emergency 0 Operator

Note: Example only

 Concierge shall be routed to the main lobby concierge when dialing from a typical
room and to the Regency/Grand Club concierge when dialing from a Regency/Grand
Club room.
 Fixed Button Dial Plan
- Frequently used services such as Voice Mail, Emergency, Wake Up Services,
Guest Services, Concierge, Room Services, Restaurant Reservation, Spa, and
outside line should also be available via a speed dial programmable button.
- The following programmable/fixed buttons must appear on the guest desk phone
and easy to use menu functions for the bedside telephone:
 Release or Hang Up Button: If the telephone has a mechanical switch for hang
up in the handset cradle this will be sufficient. If the telephone uses a

160
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

magnetic method for hanging up the call then a programmable button for
release or Hang up must be available.
 Line 1 Button: When depressed provides access to line 1. If the handset is
removed from the cradle, line 1 to become automatically activated.
 Line 2 Button: When depressed provides access to line 2. If line 1 is on hold
and the handset is removed from the cradle, line 2 to become automatically
activated.
 Hold Button: When depressed places the active call on hold.
 Speaker / Hands Free Button: Places the active call on speaker. The guest
can then return the handset to the cradle and use the speaker and
microphone. If a guest decides to answer the telephone using the speaker
they may keep the hand set in the cradle and depress the line 1 or line 2
button depending on which line is ringing.
 Message Button: Performs a speed dial to voice mail system. This button is
used to send and retrieve voice messages.
 Hotel Services: Performs a speed dial to room services; a speed dial to the
Concierge/Bell Desk; a speed dial to Housekeeping/Laundry.
 Wake Up Button: When this button is depressed it performs a speed dial to the
wake up system.
 The remaining programmable buttons are available for unique customization
based on the hotel’s requirements and the number of available programmable
buttons.
 Volume Up and Down Button: This button is used to raise and lower the
volume of the speakerphone.
 Outside Line to be programmed on one of the telephones programmable
speed dial buttons. See Guestroom Programmable/Fixed Button Functions.
 Numbering Plan
- The vendor must work with the T.S. FF&E Project Manager to develop a
convenient dialing plan, including restrictions, for each telephone extension.
- The vendor must submit the proposed dialing plan for each telephone extension
to T.S. FF&E Project Manager for review prior to commencement of
programming.

Testing and Commissioning of PABX

 The vendor must submit a plan for testing of the PABX system for review by the
T.S. FF&E Project Manager.
 Every telephone instrument will be tested to ensure its operations.
 Every trunk will be tested to ensure its operations.
 Every function and feature of the PABX system will be tested to ensure its operations
from at least 20% of the telephone instruments.
 All connections to the network shall be made and tested to ensure its operations.
 External applications such as voice mail, wake up services, call accounting, room
status, etc., will be tested to ensure their operations (each port that connects between
the application and the PABX will be tested).

Spare Parts
Spare parts for the system shall minimally follow manufactures spare part
recommendations. Spare telephone instruments shall be maintained at the minimum of
1% for each telephone type.

161
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

System Documentation
Prior to commissioning and hand over of the system, all drawings and documentation of
the system as installed shall be handed over from the vendor to the T.S. FF&E
Project Manager.

Interface Requirements
The PABX system shall minimally interface with the following systems:
 The PMS system.
 Communication Centre software.
 Voice Mail system.
 Wake Up system.
 Guest Request and Engineering (CMMS) System.
 Fire Alarm System: The PABX should accept emergency notification from fire and
other alarm systems and automatically call selected individuals in the hotel with
recorded message stating the nature of the emergency.
 Mini bar / Room status.
 Call accounting.

PMS Interface
The PMS interface is to include interfacing with PABX, voicemail, call accounting, wake
up service, room and mini bar status, and call monitoring. The following PMS features
are minimum requirements:
 The data that passes between the systems identified above and the PMS system
includes:
- Room Status.
- Mini Bar Charges.
- Name Registration.
- Message Waiting.
- Class of Service.
- Guest Name/Language Display.
- Calling Number Display.
- Guest Information Input.
- Guest Call Billing.
- Call Accounting Interface Features.
 Interface Functions
- Capture all outgoing calls (raw data from the PABX).
- Calculate all outgoing calls (International, Domestic, Local) based on local
telephone rates.
- Support multiple rate tables
- All rate tables must be maintainable by the system administrator and or by the
vendor as an optional service.
- Support posting of all calls to the Property Management System including mini bar
and room status.
 Telephone Interface Features
- Support Logging Printer to report all non-posted calls.
- All non-posted calls are logged to printer with an indicator “**” on the printout.

162
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- All successfully posted calls are not indicated on logging printer.

- Buffering of charges by user intervention.
- Logical and physical extensions must be shown on vouchers that print all
International and Domestic calls.
- On-line logging printer for International and Domestic calls.
- Create Month to Date database for report printing.
- Automatic Daily Night Audit report for guest calls (International and Domestic) to
be printed on printer.
- All reports must include extension number, telephone number called, duration,
and time of day call was made.
- Month to Date report for International, Domestic, and Local calls.
- Provide ability to retrieve call details (including historical data) for individual
extension/room.
- Barring of room phone upon guest check out.
- Unbarring of room phone upon guest check in.
- Room Data Image Exchanged (Database swap).
- Guest Name Display update to PABX upon check in.
- Guest Name Display update to VACANT on the PABX upon check out.
- Guest Name Change at Telephone Interface system.
 Mini Bar Interface
- Reported by room phone; default room number.
- Can also be carried out by administration phone; prompted for room number.
- All successfully posted charges are not indicated on logging printer.
- All non-posted calls are logged to printer with an indicator “**” on the printout.
- Maximum of 6 item codes per transaction if posting by item codes.
- If item codes are allowed then a Store Requisition report must be available.
 By summary of item codes, description, and quantity.
 By floor, room number, item codes, description, and quantity.
 By highest quantity consumed in descending order inclusive of zero.
 Voicemail Interface Features
- Allow room change facility.
- Turn on message light when there is a voice message.
- Turn off message light after all messages have been read.
- Allocate voice mailbox with password upon check in.
- De-allocate voice mailbox upon check out.
- Automatic voice mailbox transfer when there is a room change.
- Recover voice mailbox for accidental check out.
- Test messages prompting through voicemail.
- Update the number of voice message count to PMS.

Voicemail
A voicemail system is required for use by the staff and guest as a convenient way of
message taking and information exchange without the necessity of attendant
intervention. The voicemail system will have the following minimum requirements:
 PMS Interface to automatically:
- Assign Voice Mail Boxes at or prior to check in and notify guest of waiting
messages at check in.
- Delete Voice Mail Boxes at check out.
- Notify guest at check out of any messages not retrieved.

163
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- Set guest Language Preference for PABX and Voice Mail.

 Multi-language Support:
- Minimally 5 languages must be supported including the local language and
English.
- Set at check in by PMS Interface
- Allow guest to set language choice via the telephone in their guestroom.
 Voicemail requirements
- Single button access from the guestroom.
- Access number and password when retrieving messages from outside the hotel.
- Guest shall be offered option in which to allow messages to be taken manually.
- The system shall facilitate the set up of a voice mail box prior to check in and
maintained after check out for a fixed period of time at the request of the guest.
- The system shall provide an archive facility to maintain messages for a fixed
period of time.
- The system shall support full DTMF cut off.
- The system shall support ACD Queuing.
- A minimum of 8 ports (channels) connecting the voice mail and the PABX system
are required in order that a minimum of 8 concurrent voice messages can be
created or retrieved.
- If one or both service (Wake up Service, Mini bar Service/Room Status) are
integrated with voicemail the minimum ports (channels) required is 16.
- The minimum total message storage time required is 30 hours.
- All Hardware and Software must be included.
 General Voicemail Options
- The system can be Windows PC based.
- The system can provide an E-mail integration interface
- The system if PC based must connect to an Ethernet Local Area Network for
management and support functions.
- The system can provide as an option, an in room fax solution.

Wake Up Services
A wake up service is required for the guest as a convenient way of providing wake up
calls without the necessity of attendant intervention. The wake up service system will
have the following minimum requirements:
 General Wake Up
- System shall support Queuing.
- A minimum of 8 ports (channels) connecting the wake up service and the PABX
system are required. This means that at minimum 8 concurrent wake up
messages can be sent at one time.
- If an additional service such as Voicemail or Mini Bar/room status is integrated
into the same solution as wake up service, the minimum ports (channels) required
shall be doubled to 16.
 Automatic PMS Interface
- Assign wake up times from the PMS system
- Assign group wake up times
- Disable wake up times at check out.
- Set guest Language Preference for Wake Up Services.

164
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 Multi-language Support
- Minimally provide 5 languages including local and English languages.
- Set at check in by PMS Interface.
- Allow guest to set language choice via the telephone in their guestroom.
 Wake Up Message Commands
- Single button access from the guestroom.
- Verbal confirmation of time set.
- Ability to set more than one wake time per room.
 Wake Up Call
- Verbal message sent to guest indicating “wake up call”.
- Ability to have attendant provide a personalized wake up call for a priority guest.
- Option to provide guest to acknowledge wake up call by depressing a key on the
telephone. If not and the phone is hung up a pre set snooze time is set and a
follow up call will be placed at the end of the snooze time.
- Support both 24-hour and AM/PM operations
 Reporting
- Report sent to system printer indicating all successful wake up calls placed.
- Report sent to dedicated printer indicating all unsuccessful wake up calls.
- System programmable number of wake up calls placed and time between calls
before the wake-up call is classified as unsuccessful.
- Advisory notification to the operator or pre determined location of unsuccessful
wake up calls.
 General Wake up System Requirements
- The system should be a Windows based solution.
- The system should connect to an Ethernet Local Area Network.
- All Hardware and Software must be included.

Mini Bar/Room Status

A room status/mini bar reporting system is required as a convenient way of providing
updated room status and mini bar usage by the hotel staff via the telephone system.
The room status/mini bar status system will have the following minimum requirements:
 Interface to the PMS system to automatically update mini bar charges on the guest
folio as well as room status when reported by the house keeping staff via the
telephone.
- Network compatible.
- Multi-lingual.
- Comprehensive reports.
- Support up to 99 different product codes.
- Password Accessible.
- Provides Stock Control.
- Recordable Prompts.
- Automatic repeat of all entered information for conformation.
- All Hardware and Software must be included.
 Optional Features
- Voice Response Unit. Instead of using number pad on telephone to enter data
the hotel staff simply speaks the options. A conformation response is repeated
back.

165
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Call Accounting
This system records the duration and location of telephone calls and posts these
charges to the hotel's PMS system. This system must have the following minimum
requirements:
 Call Accounting.
 Cost by Algorithm/ Meter Pulse.
 Check in/out, bar/unbar, and Guest Name Display.
 Budget Control and Guest Credit Limit.
 Alarm for call from Unoccupied Rooms.
 Multiple Extension Billing.
 Multiple Carrier Costing.
 Charging of Collect Calls.
 Dynamic Allocation of DID numbers.
 Reporting Facility
- Audit Report.
- Technical Report.
- Duration of Stay.
- Exchange Line Report.
- Long Term Report.
- Internal Call Reporting.
- Customer Reporting.
 All Hardware and Software must be included.

Integrated Alarm Management System

This system provides an interface between major alarm monitoring systems in the hotel
and the PABX system, providing for an automated method of notifying selected key
individuals during the event of an alarm condition.
 The system should interface between the PABX and the following system alarm:
- Fire alarm and evacuation alarm system
- Fire suppression systems
- Smoke control system
- Gas detection system
- Seismic Detection
- Critical BMS alarm conditions (high / low temperature, pressure, water level, etc.)
- Elevator control systems
- Medical aid alarm systems (such as panic buttons at Spa)
- Other critical alarms as defined in the specific project.
 Based on the specific alarm condition received the system should distinguish from
which system it received the notification from and automatically notify a pre-
determined list of contacts (users) based on the type of alarm received.
 Based on the specific alarm condition received the system should play a pre-recorded
audio or text message to the recipients detailing the type of alarm condition.
 In case of system’s failure to contact an individual the system should make multiple
attempts to notify difficult to contact personnel until such time the individual has been
contacted or the alarm condition has been cleared.
 An audit trail of successful and unsuccessful notifications should be maintained in the
system for a minimum of 30 days with time stamping of each transaction the system
attempted.

166
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 The system should be flexible in the types of messaging it can produce including
SMS, Text, and Voice and be flexible in the types of devices it can send these
message to including pagers, DECT phones, VoIP phones, or GMS / Cellular phones.
 System to have the ability for the recipient to confirm receipt of the message and take
action (either through voice or text messaging).

Cellular Service
Cellular service coverage must be provided throughout the entire hotel. This service
must provide coverage for at minimum the top 4 Cellular Companies providing Services
in the country. This solution should be based around a capital purchased solution and
must include the contracts with each of the cellular carriers.

Optional PMS Interface Requirements

The following PMS features are optional:
 Audit Trail Printer for Room Status Update.
 Audit Trail Printer for Mini Bar posting.
 Voice response during Room Status/Mini Bar Update.
 Month to Date Report for International, Domestic, and Local Calls sort by department.
 Separate printer for International and Domestic calls voucher.

Area and Environmental Requirements

Below is a description of the area and environmental requirements for the PABX, Voice
Mail, Call Accounting, Wake Up Services, MATV, ITV, File Servers, Network Hardware
and Main Distribution Wiring Room.
 All components selected including servers, PABX system, Ethernet switches, AV
equipment, security systems, etc. should be highly energy efficient and environmental
friendly.
 This room is to be protected against fire with a clean, non-corrosive, odorless,
colorless, environmentally friendly, fire extinguishing system such as a non-halogen
inert gas.
 This room is to be provided with an open access non-static floor. See DR&MS for
details.
 Air conditioning must provide capability of handling the additional heat produced by
the equipment, personnel, lighting, and heat input from external walls, windows,
floors, and ceiling.
 A split A/C unit connected to normal and emergency power shall be provided in
addition to the standard air-conditioning.
 Provide a programmable electronic lock for secure access.
 A stable 20ºC must be maintained with relative humidity (recommended) minimum
45% to a maximum 55%, non-condensing.
 Air conditioning requirements can be estimated at a rate of heat generated by the
equipment plus 3.5 kW for each 50 m² of floor space.
- Specific requirements must be determined by the HVAC consultant.
- BTU/hr on equipment can be calculated as BTU/hr (thermal load)= Total Power
Dissipation in Watts X 3.41.
- Operational Environment for this equipment shall be based on the manufacturers
recommendations.

167
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 UPS Power Source is required for the PABX, Voice Mail, Wake Up, Call Accounting,
ITV/MATV, File Servers, Interface PC’s, Network Back Bone Switch, and WAN
equipment.
- These UPS systems can be individual solutions or one system to control all the
above components in the room.
- Other items requiring UPS protections within the hotel include but not limited to:
 Front desk, work stations
 All POS and pre check locations.
 Edge switches in each of the wiring rooms.
 Communication center.
 Business center.
 Key management and staff offices.
 Fire Alarm System.
 Security System.
 Other low voltage systems as defined by the project.

Computer Room Details

Equipment
 The computer room will house several systems including:
- PABX System.
- All Files Servers.
- MATV/ITV Head End.
- Core Ethernet Switches and Routers.
- High speed Internet Head End and Server.
- Termination of all Vertical Riser Cabling including punch and patch panels.
- Work Desk (this is not the IS manager office but a work area for system
configuration and system management).
- UPS and Electrical Distribution for this room.
 The computer room may in addition house such items as:
- CCTV, Access Control and Alarm monitoring, Head End System (although this
typically is housed in Security Command Center).
- Car Parking System head end.
- BMS system (although this is typically housed in the Engineering Area).

Security
The computer room is to be secured with an on line door locking solution that
implements a personalized card solution in order for each person to access the room.
The system should provide an audit trail of all access request and should include time
and date stamping.

Electrical Power
 A qualified electrical consultant must design electrical power requirements with
experience in providing electrical power to computer rooms. This should be designed
in conjunction with the Low Voltage network design consultant.
 Power to the computer room must be from an isolated power panel.
 UPS protected with over and under voltage surge protection.

168
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 The computer room must also be on generator fed through the UPS system for
continuous reliable power.
 Convenience electrical outlets are to be provided for general requirements.
 Appropriate bonding of all electrical, equipment and cabling should be adhered to.

Environment
 All components selected including servers, PABX system, Ethernet switches, AV
equipment, security systems, etc. should be highly energy efficient and environmental
friendly.
 For a 300-room hotel this room should measure approximately 8 meters X 7 meters.
 An automatic gaseous fire suppression system, similar to FM200 or Inergen, should
be provided for the computer room. Details are outlined in the ER&MS document
under Fire and Life Safety Systems chapter.
 A Fire Alarm system should be provided. Details are outlined in the ER&MS Fire and
Life Safety System.
 No overhead piping of any source is to locate in the computer room.
 Please reference Area and Environmental Requirements in the Communications
Systems section of the ER&MS for details on temperature and Humidity controls for
the computer room.
 In order to prevent interference from electromagnetic (EMI) or static fields, the
Computer/PABX room and cable risers must not be located near any major electrical
equipment such as large motors, elevator equipment rooms, transformers, ballasts or
the like.
 Computer/PABX room must be free from any radio frequency interference.
 Computer room floor must be anti static material.

Floor Wiring Closets

Equipment
 The wiring closet will house:
- Floor Edge Switches
- Termination of all horizontal and vertical cabling for that floor.
- Punch blocks and patch panels.
Security
 The floor wiring closet is to be secured with an on line door locking solution that
implements a personalized card solution in order for each person to access the room.
The system should provide an audit trail of all access request and should include time
and date stamping.
Electrical Power
 All floor wiring closets on floors servicing BOH operations must be protected with a
UPS system.
 All floor wiring closets on floors that are servicing guestrooms should be provisioned
for UPS; however, the actual UPS circuits do not need to be added at this time unless
the guestrooms are supporting VoIP or IP TV at, which point then the circuits must be
UPS protected in this room.

169
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

 At minimum 1 quad convenience electrical outlet is to be provided for general

requirements.
Environment
 All components selected including servers, PABX system, Ethernet switches, AV
equipment, security systems, etc. should be highly energy efficient and environmental
friendly.
 At minimum the wiring closets should measure 2 meters X 2 meters.
 Unless found necessary during project design, no special air conditioning is required
for these rooms. However they should be provided adequate ventilation providing for
ambient cool air to enter the room while exhausting the heated air out of the room.
 No overhead piping of any source is to be located in the Floor Wiring Closet.
 These areas should be protected with the standard fire alarming and suppression
solutions offered on this floor. No special suppression system is required in these
wiring closets, unless deemed necessary during project design.
 The building data/telephone entrance facility room housing the Main Telephone
Terminal Board (MTTB) and or MDF shall be separated from main electrical
equipment rooms by a minimum distance of 3.0 meters. The rooms shall not have a
common wall.

Communication Center Details

Operational Concept
The communication centre receives, on a 24-hour basis, all external and internal calls
related to all guest services minimally including the following applications:
 Telephone operator with full call centre facilities.
 Room service.
 Housekeeping.
 Concierge.
 Laundry / Valet.
 Rooms and restaurant reservations.
 Bell desk.
 Elevators.
 Security.
 Life safety.
 Room Management / Building Automation.
The centralization of these calls to a group of correctly trained personnel, each of whom
have access to all hotel telephone and computer systems, results in improved service
levels through shorter response times, effective comprehension, answering of queries or
dispatching of appropriate services.
Additional benefits include multi-skilled employees who can focus their interaction with
guests as appropriate with the guest’s demands and provide the flexibility demanded by
successful hotel operations.
The location of the communication centre must allow visual interaction with related front
desk operations and guest access.

170
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Coordination and Interfacing of Equipment

All systems associated with telephone and computer equipment, e.g. Lift, Fire Alarm,
Emergency Evacuation and Security Panels shall be coordinated by the responsible
consultant for interfacing and integration of these systems into a cohesive solution. This
co ordination shall also include architectural space planning and positioning of all items
of equipment.

Minimum Technical Requirements

 All stations to be minimally equipped with a Single PC based solution, which
combines access to the following applications:
- Telephone Operator with full call centre facilities (see Call Center section for
details).
- Voice Mail.
- Room Service.
- Concierge.
- Rooms and Restaurant Reservations.
- Bell Desk.
- Housekeeping.
- Laundry / Valet.
- Building Systems.
- Guest Service Management.
- PMS Application.
- Office Automation.
- Point of Sale system (optionally a Second PC based solution to support the POS
function.
 Each station to minimally provide display from all internal calls of the following
information:
- Guestroom or internal extension number.
- Guest Name.
- Preferred Language.
 Each station must have the option to be dedicated to an application through the call
centre software. Call centre and management software must be a window based.
- For further information please refer: Low voltage systems/voice communication
systems/call centre overview and low voltage systems/voice communications
systems/PABX supporting systems/attendant console section.
 The system platform must be compatible with the various applications and operating
systems and provide fast and reliable switching between each application.
 Commercially available Windows PC Solution.
 Compatible with the PABX Systems, as approved by THE OPERATOR .
 The system is to be designed to run on a 100 Base T Ethernet environment.
 Minimally provide a PC Based repeater solution if applicable for visual and audible
monitoring of the following systems:
- Fire Alarm Systems.
- MATV ITV System.
- Security Systems.
- Building Automation Systems.
- Lifts and Escalators.
- First Aid Alarms.

171
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

- Room Management System.

- Emergency Paging System.

Supervisory Software Requirements

The communication centre solution is minimally required to provide a window based
supervisory and diagnostic software to manage the call enter load effectively. This
supervisory solution must support the following:
 Graphical Display of Incoming Call Loads defined by Types of Call (User Definable).
 Redirecting calls to different operators based on call type or as required.
 Establishing Automatic Call Distribution Patterns based on Call Volume, Skill Levels,
with Manual Overrides.
 Statistical Information regarding Calls on Hold in each Category.

Application and Screen Launching

 The communication centre attendant will minimally require access to the appropriate
application and screen from the required application while the call is in progress. This
is to be achieved using hot keys to bring up the appropriate application.
 For internal calls, recognition of the Single Digit Dialing Number generated by the
guest (e.g. 3 for room service) must minimally be displayed alongside the guest's
name, and room number is required to automatically launch the appropriate screen
before the Attendant responds to the guest.
 Other recommended software applications include:
- CD ROM or Internet Based Yellow Pages.
- Automatically populating application with pertinent information based on CLID
information such as guest name and room number.
- Access into the Interactive TV (ITV) System Administration Functions.
- Access into the Building Automation and Security System for monitoring and
command/control functions.

172
 Attachments
Communications Systems
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Reference Codes & Standards for Voice and Data

Standards As Updated Description
or Revised

ANSI/TIE/EIA-568-C.0 2009 Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standards – Generic cabling

ANSI/TIA/ EIA-568-C.1 2009 Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standards
ANSI/TIA/ EIA-568-C.3 2009 Optical Fibre Cabling Components Standard

ANSI/TIA/ EIA-569-B 2001 Commercial Building Standard for

Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

ANSI/TIA/ EIA-606-A 2002 Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure

ANSI-J-STD-607-A 2002 Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.
172.1
ISO/IEC 11801 ED. 2 2002 Information technology – Generic cabling for
customer premises
IEEE Standard for Information Technology

Telecommunications and information exchange

between systems

Local and metropolitan area networks

IEEE 802.3-2002 2002
Specific requirements

Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with

collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method
and physical layer specifications
 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

SAMPLE SCHEMATIC GUESTROOM COMMUNICATIONS

WIRING DIAGRAM

*Above Desk *Below Desk *Behind Minibar *Bathroom *Bedside 1 *Bedside 2

High Speed Internet Telephone Behind Televison Telephone Telephone Jack Only

4PairCategory6

4PairCategory6
4PairCategory6

4PairCategory6

4PairCategory6

4PairCategory6

4PairCategory6
Punch Block or Patch Pannel

SUB IDF Concealed Inside

Entrance to Guestroom

1X4PairCategory6
4PairCategory6
4PairCategory6

4PairCategory6

Legend
RJ45 Jack

Coax Jack

NOTES

All horizontal cable Category 6

Feeds to other guestrooms All telephone & data jacks are RJ45
All cable distances not to exceed 90 M (jack to
jack)
Mini bar is connected in this manner only if
using Serial on line mini bar solution. If using
IP solution cable must run directly to Patch
Feeds to other guestrooms
Panel in IDF similar to how the Desk phone is
shown in this diagram
Punch Block or Patch Pannel
If other phones in the room are to be VoIP or
Patch Pannel other items such as the mini bar then they
must cable in a similar manner as the desk
Ethernet Switch phone back to the IDF on each guestroom
floor.
UPS Electrical service needs to be available in
Multi pair Category 3 Riser the IDF
Multimode Multi Core Fiber Optic Riser

IDF on Each Guestroom Floor

THE OPERATOR TECHNICAL SERVICES INC.

71 SOUTH WACKER DRIVE, CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, 60606, USA
SAMPLE SCHEMATIC: GUESTROOM COMMUNICATIONS
WIRING DIAGRAM SCALE NTS ER&MS Version 4

NOTE THE OPERATOR DRAWINGS ARE NOT PRODUCED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES. THEY ARE TO BE USED ONLY TO INFORM THOSE CONCERNED AS TO THE OPERATOR
STANDARDS AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS. NO OTHER USE MAY BE MADE OF SUCH DRAWINGS WITHOUT THE PROPER CONSENT OF THE OPERATOR

172.2
 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
IDF For Both Voice & Data

Patch Panel
Telephone Extensions BOH Applications
GuestHighSpeed

UTPPunchBlock
InternetNetwork

FiberPatch
OrPatchPanel
Ethernet Switch

Patch Panel

BOHNetwork

allows for any data

requirements between floors Guest Applications

IDF For Both Voice & Data Patch Panel

Telephone Extensions BOH Applications
GuestHighSpeed
InternetNetwork

FiberPatch
Ethernet Switch
UTPPunchBlock
OrPatchPanel

Patch Panel

BOHNetwork

allows for any data Guest Applications

requirements between floors

IDF For Both Voice & Data

Patch Panel
BOH Applications
Telephone Extensions GuestHighSpeed
InternetNetwork
UTPPunchBlock

Ethernet Switch
FiberPatch
OrPatchPanel

Patch Panel
allows for any data
requirements between floors BOHNetwork

Guest Applications

MDF For Both Voice & Data

Telephone Extensions Patch Panel

Applications
POS
UTPPatchPannel

GuestHighSpeed
InternetNetwork
PC
Laser Printers
MDF UTP CABLE F BER PATCH
UTPPunchBlock
OrPatchPanel

Patch Panel
Applications
BOHNetwork
Guest High
Speed Internet
Connections

PABX
Key:
CAT 6 4 Pair Cable BOH Ethernet Switch
CAT 3 Multi Pair Cable
Cat 6 20 Pair Cable
LCC/RCC
Multi Mode Fiber Optic Cable
BOH Operations
Multi Mode Fiber Optic Cable BOH Operations
Guest Operations

THE OPERATOR INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL SERVICES INC.

71 SOUTH WACKER DRIVE, CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, 60606, USA

SAMPLE SCHEMATIC: NETWORK WIRING DIAGRAM SCALE NTS ER&MS Version 4

NOTE THE OPERATOR DRAWINGS ARE NOT PRODUCED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES. THEY ARE TO BE USED ONLY TO INFORM THOSE CONCERNED AS TO THE OPERATOR
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS. NO OTHER USE MAY BE MADE OF SUCH DRAWINGS WITHOUT THE PROPER CONSENT OF THE OPERATOR

172.3
Operational Concept
Although the Audio Visual requirements for each area within a hotel differ, the system
types can be summarized in their own concept statement below. As a minimum, all
Audio Visual systems must interface with the Fire Alarm and Emergency Paging
Systems as detailed within that section of the Engineering Requirements and Minimum
Standards.

Scope of Work
The Audio Visual system is part of the FF&E Scope. Please refer to the Definitions of
FF&E found within the T.S. Design Recommendations and Minimum Standards.

Food / Beverage Outlet and Public Areas

Concept
Food and Beverage and Public Areas shall be supported with a high quality background
music from a centralized server based solution. The music in these areas shall be in
general, low level, relaxing or easy listening style music. Each area shall have the ability
to control their play list and volume level using a touch screen, or external sources such
as MP3 or CD player to be located in a concealed location within the each area.
Included are public areas and circulation, public toilets, ballrooms, meeting rooms, pre-
function rooms etc. Guestroom corridors shall not be provided with background music
system.
VIP rooms in restaurants shall, in addition to the standard Background Music, be able to
support portable high quality stand-alone system, MP3 player, CD player and Karaoke
facility.
Equipment
 Touch screen play list and volume control.
 Local amplification with ability to accept external sources such as MP3 player and CD
player.
 Wireless Internet Access.
 High quality sound, designer wall speakers are preferred in lieu of ceiling speakers in
food and beverage areas.

173
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

 Ceiling speakers to meet minimum overall system performance criteria, with locations
and quantities to be coordinated with all relevant consultants including the interior
designer.
 VIP rooms in the restaurant:
- High quality HD Flat screen TV
- High quality sound, designer wall speakers
- Portable high quality stand-alone music system
- MP3 (either from hotel or from guest)
- Portable CD player
- Karaoke facility
- Wireless Internet Access
Connections
 Wired inputs for Live Band equipment (If a stage or live performance area is designed
in the restaurant).
 Wired microphone outlet for piano performer if required.
 Wired connection to the centralized music server.
 Data Outlet.
 Wired MATV outlet at the Bar Area. Although no TV is provided at the bar area, this
does allow for the flexibility to provide one in the future or on special occasions.
 VIP Rooms in Restaurant:
- Wired MATV for Flat screen TV
- Power for Portable High Quality stand-alone music system and Karaoke
- I/O for MP3 and CD players connected to the High quality sound, designer wall
speakers

Entertainment Center
Concept
Entertainment Center shall consist of two zones where in one zone shall have a high
quality upbeat music locally sourced from a central control room within the area, with the
ability to integrate with the local or the hotel MATV audio-visual system, stage lighting
system and live performance music system. Another zone shall be designed to be able
to cater for both low and high level music.
Equipment
 Touch screen play list and volume control.
 Touch screen panel for lighting, MATV and music control/integrator.
 Local Amplification with inputs to support musical instruments and microphones
 High quality HD flat screen TV.
 High quality ceiling and support/reinforcement speakers.
 MP3 player.
 CD player with repeat random function.
 High Definition Blu-Ray DVD player.
 Multi-channel wired and wireless microphone
 Digital audio processing.
 Karaoke system (as appropriate to concept).

174
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

 LCD/ DLP projector with lift.

 Motorized projection screen.
 Stage lighting.
 Follow spot lights.
Connections
 MATV.
 Wired connection to the centralized music server.
 Data outlets for high speed internet.
 Wired and wireless microphone connections.
 Tie lines (Power outlets and I/O’s) at selected locations for AV equipment including
stage area.

Meeting Rooms / Conference Rooms

Concept
Meeting rooms shall be able to support multiple types of meeting functions utilizing fixed
or mobile type Audio Visual equipment. Controls must be capable of interfacing with the
lighting and blackout drapery systems.
Equipment
 Touch screen play list and volume control.
 Amplifier with multi input and interface to in room wired lighting and sound control
system.
 Ceiling speakers.
 LCD/DLP Projector on a motorized lift.
 Recessed motorized ceiling projector screen.
 Mobile Cart (to be shared among several meeting rooms, see mobile cart for
equipment details).
 Wired and Wireless Internet Access.
 8.5” to 10.4” LCD/TFT color electronic signage display outside each meeting room.
Connections
 Wired connection to the centralized music server.
 Tie line to Ballroom AV Control Room for VGA (UTP) and AV interconnections.
 Smart board connection.
 Strategically located 2 AV panels (1 in the wall and 1 build into the fixed desk/table. If
no fixed desk/table is provided then these jacks need to be concealed in the floor via
a floor panel). The panels provide connections for:
- Wired Microphones
- Wireless Microphone system (which is part of the mobile card)
- MATV connections
- Data/Telephone/ISDN connections
- Component and S Video Connections
- VGA and HDMI connections
- Electrical power (minimum duplex outlet)
- For large meeting rooms/ conference rooms, additional wall/floor panels are
required

175
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

Boardrooms
Concept
Boardrooms shall provide meeting functions to cater to the corporate executives and up
market organizations requiring the latest technology. These rooms should easily adapt
to a wide range of presentation needs. Audio Visual equipment in these rooms shall be
fixed and controlled by a wireless remote control touch panel similar to AMX control
panel capable of interfacing with the lighting and drapery systems. Concealed
connections for AV, computer and power shall be incorporated on the table.
Equipment
 Touch screen play list and volume control.
 Wall mounted speakers.
 Minimum 52” high quality HD flat screen TV.
 Amplifier with multiple inputs
 High Definition Blu- ray DVD/VCR/MP3 player.
 IPod docking station
 LCD/DLP Projector on a motorized lift
 Wireless remote control touch panel similar to AMX control panel.
 Motorized recessed ceiling projector screen.
 Wired and Wireless Internet Access
 8.5” to 10.4” LCD/TFT color electronic signage display outside each Board room.
Connections
 Wired connection to the centralized music server
 Tie line to the Ballroom AV Control Room for VGA( UTP ) and AV interconnection
 Strategically located AV jack panels (1 in the wall and 1 built into the fixed desk/table.
The panels provide connections for:
- Wired Microphones
- MATV connections
- Data/Telephone/ISDN connections
- Component and S Video Connections
- VGA and HDMI connections
- Electrical power (minimum duplex outlet)
- Connections for a Video Conference System

The Residential Concept

Concept
The Residential concept serves the up-market and business meetings targeted groups who avoid
meeting event settings and provide that of a home setting, conducive to entertaining in
an intimate ambiance. It has key components of a home: Courtyard and foyer, show
kitchen, bar, library, living room, dining room and board rooms. The AV system in each
boardroom shall follow the same equipment and functions as that of the normal
Boardroom, in addition, other components of the Residence shall be provided with audio
visual system as described below.

176
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

Equipment
 Living room
- Touch screen play list and volume control
- Wall mounted speakers
- Minimum 52” high quality HD flat screen TV
- Amplifier with multiple inputs
- High Definition Blu-ray DVD/ MP3 player
- MP3 docking station
- High quality stand-alone music system
- Wired and Wireless Internet Access
- 8.5” to 10.4” LCD/TFT color electronic signage display outside each Board room.
 Courtyard, foyer, Kitchen, Bar and dining room
- Wall mounted speakers
- Music to share with the living room
Connections
 Living Room
- Wired connection to the centralized music server
- Strategically located AV jack panels (1 in the wall and 1 build into the fixed
desk/table). The panels provide connections for:
 MATV connections
 Data/Telephone/ISDN connections
 Component and S Video Connections
 VGA and HDMI connections
 Electrical power (two universal and the rest as required for above equipment).

Ballroom
Concept
The Ballroom is a multi-function facility to be able to handle small to a very large and low
to very high end functions such as conferences, presentations, weddings, trade shows,
theatrical, etc. with broadcast quality. To achieve this, the ballroom can be divisible into
multiple combinations wherein the AV system and other systems can be easily
configured to adapt to such combinations.
In large ballrooms and as appropriate with concept, all main audiovisual equipment will
be housed in a control booth to be located at a mezzanine floor central to the ballroom to
allow the AV operator a proper view of the functions, follow spot lighting and monitor the
sound for live mixing with connections from the ballroom terminating in this room. In
addition termination points need to be strategically located within the ballroom based on
where third party sound and lighting production organizations will set up their
sound/lighting panels and mixers. These locations need to be defined early so that
appropriate jacks and outlets can be located in these areas so as to minimize or
eliminate as much as possible the need for cables to run across the floor, by allowing
equipment to be connected into these jacks and outlets.
In addition to normal ballroom functions, the Ballroom must be able to provide:
 Simultaneous Interpretations IR or radio controlled preferable.
 Video Teleconferencing

177
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

 Outside Broadcast Features

 Third Party Sound and Lighting Interface
The Audio Visual System must be capable of interfacing with the lighting and blackout
drapery systems through a wireless touch panel control system.
 Audio system shall support ambient noise level sensing where the ambient noise
analyzed and sent to the DSP to automatically adjust the volume in various zones
accordingly.
Equipment
 Touch screen play list and volume control
 Ceiling loudspeakers and wall mounted high-powered main event loudspeakers
 Amplifier with multiple inputs
 Wired and Wireless multi channel microphone solution with necessary hardware
 Microphone with ambient noise level sensing
 High Definition Blu-ray DVD/VCR/MP3 player
 Digital Audio Signal Processing
 IPod docking station
 LCD/DLP Projector on a motorized lift Brightness in Lumens, approx. 500*screen
area in sq. m. Multi-input capacity source including wireless multiple PC, VCR and
High Definition Blu-ray DVD.
 Wireless remote control touch panel similar to AMX control panel.
 Wired and Wireless in room lighting and sound control panel.
 Motorized recessed in ceiling projector screens at central side, main end and right or
left side position.
 Wired and Wireless Internet Access
 Document Camera (available upon request)
 Overhead Projector or visualiser (available upon request)
 Video Camera (available upon request)
 Stage lighting and follow spot lights and controller.
 Moveable partition control panel to interface with AV, HVAC and lighting control for
separate or collective room control.
 8.5” to 10.4” LCD/TFT color electronic signage display outside each ballroom section.
Connections
 Strategically located AV jack panels. These need to be strategically placed
throughout the ballroom so as to minimize and eliminate as much as possible the
need for running cables across the floor. These locations need to be based on
where third party sound and lighting production organizations will set up their
sound/lighting panels and mixers. These locations need to be defined early so that
appropriate jacks and outlets can be located in these areas so as to minimize or
eliminate as much as possible the need for cables to run across the floor, by allowing
equipment to be connected into these jacks and outlets.
 Wired connection to the centralized music server
 Tie lines to Ballroom AV Control room for VGA (UTP) and AV interconnections
 The panels provide connections for:
- Wired Microphones
- MATV connections
- Data/Telephone/ISDN connections

178
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

- Component and S Video Connections

- VGA and HDMI connections
- Electrical power (minimum duplex outlet)
- Connections for a Video Conference System (system available upon request)

AV Control Room
For better monitor and control of the ballroom AV conditions and needs, AV control room
is required for ballrooms more than 500 sq meters.
AV control should work as a central location, where operators could manage most of the
AV equipment through tieline system to each functional area, like meeting room and
multi- function rooms, enable the information to be redistributed and processed within
control room.
Physical Requirement
 Typically, the AV control room should be located at mezzanine, with direct visual
access to all ballroom sections and proposed stage.
 Approximately 2800 mm (H) x 2000 mm (W) x minimum 3000 mm (W) for a single
section ballroom.
 Size of AV control room for ballroom with multiple sections to be determined with the
AV consultant.
 AV control room should be designed with window or appropriate opening for easily
looking into ballroom and hear what’s exactly going on within the ballroom to allow AV
technician make instant tuning and other adjustments.
 Besides, the opening allows lighting technician to use follow spot when there’s an
event. A dedicated room for follow spot is required, which is located adjacent to the
center of the control room.
 Allow room for equipment storage, housing primary AV equipments for ease of control
and management, including most of the signal processor, amplifier, patch bay,
amplifier, and control console for ballroom.
Technical Requirements
 Audiovisual equipment should be rack-mounted and physically separated from
lighting dimmer system rack to avoid EMI interference.
 Provide ample rack and shelving storage for equipment as per AV consultant
requirement.
 Acoustic treatment needed if the control room is adjacent to plant room (to be
coordinated with Acoustic consultant).
 Provide clean dedicated power supply for AV equipment as per AV consultant.
 Audiovisual equipment should NOT share the same power supply with dimmer
system to avoid EMI interference; Electrostatic floor should be provided.
 Total power consumption and cooling data should be submitted to MEP consultant for
coordination by the AV consultant.
 Data point should be provided for software update, setting up etc… (to be coordinated
with IT consultant).
 Work bench should be approx. 600 mm (D) x 1800 mm (W) for placing LCD monitor,
mixing console, control panel and other facilities.
 Appropriate air conditioning and ventilation for AV control room.
 2 nos. monitor speakers with selectable input should be provided.

179
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

 Down light should be provided for each selection of these lighting to avoid the
interference problems between HF electronic ballast operating fluorescent
lamps/incandescent lighting and IR remote control equipment.

Spa and Fitness Center

Concept
The Spa and fitness center shall have a variety of music level comprising of high quality
background music in the Spa entry, Cardio Vascular area, relaxation area and treatment
rooms to higher level, up-beat music in the Gym and Pool area.
Equipment
 Spa Entry, relaxation, bar and general circulation
- Touch screen play list and volume control
- Ceiling Loudspeakers
- Public Announcement (PA)
 Pool Area
- Touch screen play list and volume control to share with Spa Entry
- Outdoor loud speakers
- Pool speakers
- Mobile music system (as required)
- MP3 (as required)
 Gym Area and Cardio Vascular Area
- High quality HD Flat Screen TV’s
- Ceiling Loud speakers
- Cardio TV’s and stereo head set
- Mobile AV Cart for exercise area (see mobile cart for exercise room)
- Wired and Wireless microphone system.
- Wired in-room lighting and sound control panel
- Amplifier with multiple inputs
 Treatment room
- Touch screen play list and volume control
- MP3 docking station
- MP3 player loaded with MP3 files
- High quality wall mounted loudspeakers
Connections
 Spa Entry, relaxation, bar and general circulation
- Wired connection to the centralized music server
- PA Connections
- Wired and Wireless Internet Access
 Pool Area
- Power for Mobile music system
- MP3 connection
- Under water speaker connection
 Gym Area and Cardio Vascular Area
- Wired connection to the centralized music server

180
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

- AM/FM connectivity
- Wired and Wireless Internet access
- Data/CATV cables for each Cardiovascular equipment
Note: CAT6 cable is required.
- MATV
- Wired Microphones connections in Gym area
 Treatment room
- Wired connection to the centralized music server

Training Room
Concept
The training room is used to provide on-going employee training. The following AV
systems are the minimum requirements.
Equipment
 Mobile AV Cart (see mobile cart for training room).
 Wired in room lighting and sound control panel.
 Wired and Wireless Internet Access.
 Ceiling mounted projector screen.
Connections
 Wired Microphones connections.
 MATV connections.
 Data points throughout the room.
 Wired and wireless internet connection.

Typical Guestroom
Concept
The term “Typical Guestroom” applies to a single bay room irrespective of its bed
configuration. Please see also the Guestroom Technology chapter for more details. The
following Audio Visual systems are minimally required in the Typical Guestroom:
Connections
 MATV System to provide a selection of local and international channels.
 Active multi-media jack-pack (hub) solution at desk area: s-video, MP3, VGA,
component video, HDMI, Bluetooth, etc. connected to TV via HDMI cable.
 TV monitor connectivity via laptop PC through VGA laptop plug-in located at desk
area and an Interactive TV (ITV) solution will be provided allowing on demand rental
of first release movies.
 Each guestroom requires a Broadband Internet Connection (high-speed) via a UTP
Category 6 or better cable connected to a Broadband Service Provider (wired and
wireless).
 Connection for High Definition Blu-ray DVD to TV

181
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

Equipment
 42" screen size Digital 16:9, 200 Hz wide screen Stereo LCD/Plasma/LED High
Definition TV.
 TV must support Smart Card inputs for ITV connections utilizing the IR receiver of the
Television. Set Top Boxes are not preferred but can be an alternate solution.
 User-friendly Remote Control.
 Provide connection to ceiling or under vanity mounted speaker with volume control in
the bathroom area for relaying TV audio source. Volume control is not required when
there is TV in the bathroom.
 MP3 docking station at beside.
 Minimum 15” LCD or LED High Definition TV at bathroom (as per project specific
requirement).
 High Definition Blu-ray DVD

Mini / Junior Suites

Mini Suites and Junior Suites usually are larger than typical guestroom and they consist
of 1.5 to 2 bays. In addition to the bedroom and the bathroom areas they include a living
area.
The following audio visual systems are required in addition to those required for a typical
guestroom:
Audio Visual Source
 High Definition Blu-ray DVD/CD player shall be provided in living areas with
connection to the TVs in living room, bedroom and bathroom (minimum 15”).
 High end speakers in each separate bedroom living areas and bathroom.
Audio Visual End-Point Devices
 Digital 16:9 Plasma, LCD or LED High Definition TV for each separate bedroom, living
areas and bathroom.

Club Guestrooms
The terms ‘Club’ Guestroom applies to a single bay room
irrespective of its bed configuration.
The audio visual systems for the Club Guestrooms are identical to
those of the Typical Guestroom.

Executive and Presidential Suites

The term ‘Executive and Presidential Suite’ applies to a multi-bay room (3 - bays and
above). The following audio visual systems are required in addition to those required for
a typical guestroom:
Equipment
 High Definition Blu-ray DVD Player shall be provided.

182
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

 Surround Sound Stereo System connected to the TV for Home theatre effects.
 Digital 16:9, Plasma, LCD or LED High Definition TV for each of the bedroom, living
areas and bathroom.
 High end Hi-Fi system in each separate bedroom and living area.

Teleconferencing System
For those locations requiring a Teleconferencing System, the following minimum
requirements shall be provided:
Equipment
 PC Connection for Data sharing during conference.
 2 external wireless microphones.
 Conference call equipment.
 32” or larger screen size TV Set 16:9, 200 HZ or 4:3, 100 HZ for pre-viewing signal
transmitting.
Connections
 ISDN connections.
 Microwave (as appropriate with concept).
 Satellite (as appropriate with concept).
 Provision in ballrooms and boardrooms should be made to support video
conferencing systems brought in via a service provider.

Simultaneous Translation System

As appropriate with concept a Translation System with the following minimum
requirements shall be provided.
Equipment
 Microphone shall be highly directional with a push to talk button. Loop configuration or
infrared transmitter shall be zoned to correspond with Ballroom’s subdivision.
 The equipment shall be comprised of, but not limited to:
- Monitoring Speaker
- Headphones
- Infrared Emitters
- Microphones
- Transmitters IR or radio controlled
- Receivers
- Control desk and booths
- Amplifier
Connections
 Variable attenuator connected to the main amplifier.
 All inputs and outputs must be balanced and matched for impedance and voltages.
 Cabling provision should be made in ballroom to support a portable translation
system.

183
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

 Minimum number of carts: one for every two meeting rooms.

Mobile Carts for Meeting Rooms

Equipment
 High Definition Blu-ray DVD/VCR/MP3 player.
 LCD/DLP Projector.
 Wireless remote control touch panel similar to AMX control panel.
 Wireless Microphone system.
 Document Camera (available upon request).
 Slide Projector (available upon request).
 Video Camera (available upon request).
 Loudspeakers.
 Flat Screen TV.
 Smart Board.

Mobile Carts for Spa Gym

Equipment
 High Definition Blu-ray DVD/VCR/MP3 player.
 Wireless in room lighting and sound control panel.
 Wireless Microphone system.
 Video Camera (available upon request).

Mobile Cart for Training Room

Equipment
 High Definition Blu-ray DVD/VCR/MP3 player.
 LCD/DLP Projector.
 32” Flat screen LCD/Plasma/ LED High Definition TV.
 Document Camera (available upon request).
 Slide Projector (available upon request).
 Video Camera (available upon request).

Electronic Information System

The system provides information to guests within the hotel regarding current meetings
and upcoming events such as meeting names, locations, start times, etc. via electronic
signal on LCD displays located within the lobby of the hotel and at entrances of each
meeting rooms, ballrooms, board rooms and The Resident concept.

184
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

Minimum Overall System Performance Criteria

 Loud Speaker Level Wiring
- All loudspeaker line wiring shall be # 16 AWG minimum or equivalent twisted pair
stranded.
- Circuits for line or voice coils shall be sized to realize no more than 10 % power
loss.
 Overall Sound System
- In accordance with the following minimum standards:
 BGM signal shall be capable of producing a frequency response of 40 -
16,000 HZ + 3 dB.
 Speaker system for Back of house BGM may allow for 60 - 12,000 Hz.
 Other areas shall maintain 40 - 16,000 Hz +3 dB at 1300 mm above FFL.
 Ambient Sound and Sound Reinforcement Systems shall be capable of
producing a frequency response of 40 - 16,000 Hz +2 dB at 1300 mm above
FFL. This is to include specification for BGM when it is integrated with one of
the above hotel area facility AV Systems.
 Maximum total Harmonic Distortion shall be as follows for the full range of
frequencies:
- Electronically 0.05% maximum when measured electronically at the final
stage of the amplifier.
- Acoustically 2% maximum when measured acoustically at the loudspeaker
in the manner described above.
 All audio visual systems must be fully inter compatible.
 Location of loudspeakers shall be coordinated with the Interior Designer, FF&E
Project Manager, and all associated consultants.
 Loudspeakers shall be specified in enclosures appropriate for installation in their
intended locations.

185
Operational Concept
A centralized PC based operating station, controlling, monitoring, and data processing of
major systems and equipment. The centralized station is connected via data network to
decentralized stand-alone programmable controllers. The network shall allow “Peer to
Peer” communication. The BAS must have the ability to control and interconnect
Components from different manufacturers.It must provide bi-directional data
communication and coordinated control via real-time data exchange through a common
communications data exchange protocol. Integration shall extend to the operator’s
workstation software, which shall support user interaction with all control system
components. This integration should include equipment of proprietary controls. To
achieve a fully integrated system, it is necessary to source components from
manufacturers committed to working in an open protocol environment (BACnet or LON
Mark/LON Talk/LAN/EIB).
 Sustainable Design-Integration to different systems shall be in a way to meet THE OPERATOR’s
Sustainable Design Criteria and attain energy performance optimization through
measurements, verification and full automation.

Experience Record
The manufacturer and installer shall have no less than 5 years documented experience
in the manufacture or installation of works in this field and be able to provide
professional commissioning of the system. The BAS manufacturer shall provide a list of
five comparable projects that have BAS with a similar extent of specification as outlined
above. These projects must be on-line and functional.
The BAS manufacturer shall employ specialists in the field including Programming,
Engineering, Field Supervision, and Installation. Specialists shall have a minimum of
five years of experience with BAS.

Scope of Work
The extent of automation, monitoring, and control may vary from project to project but
shall minimally include the scope of coverage detailed in the following attachment.
See Attachment: Sample BAS Point Schedule

The consultant should present a detailed report of the intended scope of coverage for
the BAS and liaise with contracted suppliers and manufacturers to ensure the system is
fully functional in accordance with T.S. minimum standards.

186
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Guestroom - Minimally provide digital room temperature controllers/thermostats

connected to the BAS network or the Room Control Unit (RCU) that interfaces with the
Property Management System.
 Guestroom control units shall minimally be multi-functional with sensors and switches
(e.g. Door controls, window controls, Do Not Disturb).
Please also refer to Guestroom Technology chapter for details and schematics

Design Criteria
At minimum, a central host computer and control console shall be located in the
engineering office area with repeater workstations at communication centre and security
command center. The equipment must be located in a fully air conditioned room with a
direct power feed from UPS connection or a two hour, battery back-up system. The
repeater workstations can be realized via Microsoft Windows based pop-up menus at a
PC workstation in those areas. In this case, the BAS host computer must be connected
to the hotel Local Area Network via Ethernet based on TCP/IP protocol. If the Hotel is
part of a larger complex, e.g. one that contains residential, office and/or commercial
components, an independent hotel BAS workstation is required and may be linked to the
master control console for the entire complex only for monitoring and alarm functions.
The system must have the following features:
 Color graphic floor plan and schematics display for mechanical systems as specified
in the approved data reporting point schedule.
 Monitor indoor air quality in accordance with T.S. HVAC minimum standards
 Alarm management to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices
and memory files. Each decentralized controller panel shall perform distributed,
independent alarm analysis, prioritizing and filtering.
 Auto-dial alarm shall be included (critical alarms shall initiate a call to a remote
operator device).
 Fail Safe Protection to protect the HVAC system against freezing and to control the
spread of smoke and fire minimally in accordance with NFPA Standards 90A and 101.
 Password-protected levels of access to the system.
 Web Based Operator Interface to allow access to BAS data via the Internet or
Intranet. This interface shall use HTML-based pages to send and receive data from
the BAS system to a web browser. The interface shall provide several levels of user
access, from read only access to modify data.
 An interface system including comprehensive control for various building systems.
 Compatible with other systems, which may require interfaces, or become part of the
BAS include:
- Security Systems
- Fire Alarm Systems to the extent permitted by code
- Lighting Control System
- Lift Status Indication
- Property Management System
- Kitchen Refrigeration Systems
- Sustainable Systems
- Lighting Control Systems
 Interface to the Property Management System (e.g. Micros/Fidelio) to manage and
control MEP systems and energy consumption in guestrooms at the front desk.

187
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

 Provide standard communication protocol for transfer of meter reading data from the
Building Automation System into the hotel's Web-based Energy Reporting system.
 Energy Management feature to provide efficient control of all MEP systems minimally
including:
- Non-essential load shedding
- Time setting of lighting and fans
- Set - point set - back for all hotel areas
- Taking advantage of free cooling
- Graphical and enhanced tabular reporting
- Individual area sub-metering
See Attachment: Minimum Recommended Sub Metering Matrix
 Provide interface to the hotel supplied Computerized Maintenance Management
System (CMMS) that provides a more extensive scheduling, control and escalation of
periodical preventative maintenance, inventory control, tracking, escalation of
unresolved problems, etc.

Future Expansion
All BAS installations shall be designed to minimally allow future expansion utilizing open
protocol system programming. All elements of the system should be modular in design
with provision for increased capacity.

Installation, Commissioning & Training

The BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for formulating a project specific Installation,
Commissioning and Training program for approval by T.S.

Spare Parts, Maintenance and Emergency Service

An extended maintenance agreement and spare parts list shall be submitted for review,
together with a schedule of costs for a 5 year period after the standard warranty period
has expired. These costs shall be guaranteed, but not included within the package.
Emergency service shall be available on a 24-hour, 7-day-a-week basis.

188
 Attachments
Building Automation Systems
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Sample BAS Point Schedule

Ref. THE Analogue Digital

No. OPERATOR System “XYZ” Sample BAS Schedule Qty

RegencyDescription In Out In Out

1. HOT WATER SYSTEM

1.1. Steam Boilers 2
Command On/Off 2 2
Status On/Off 2 2
Status (low/high) 2 2
Burner Lockout 2 2
Burner Status 2 2
Burner Trip 2 2
Gas Meter 2 2
Water Flow Meter 2 2
Pressure 2 2
Feed Water Pump Status 2 2
Feed Water Pump Status 2 2
Condensate Tank Temperature 1 1
Condensate Tank High Level 1 1
Condensate Tank Low Level 1 1
1.2. Boiler – Common
Common Flow Pressure 1 1
Common Flow Meter 1 1
Common Supply Temperature 1 1
Common Return Temperature 1 1
Common Return Temperature Set Point 1 1
Gas Solenoid Valve: Status 1 1
Gas Leakage Detector 1 1
Panic Button: Status3 1 1
1.3. Pumps (Primary & Secondary) 6

188.1
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Sample BAS Point Schedule

Ref. THE Analogue Digital
Qty
No. OPERATOR System “XYZ” Sample BAS Schedule
RegencyDescription In Out In Out

Command On/Off 6
Pump Status 6
Pump Trip 6
1.4. Water Softening Plant
Pump Status 1 1
Pump Trip 1 1
1.5. Heat Exchanger 5
Supply Temperature 5
Supply Temperature Set Point 5
2-Way Control Valve 5
2-Way Control Valve Monitoring 5
TOTAL 17 11 37 8

2. FANS
2.1. Supply Fans 6
Fan Status 6
Fan Trip 6

Fan On/Off 6
2.2. Exhaust Fans 6
Fan Status 6

Fan Trip 6
Fan On/Off 6
TOTAL 0 0 24 12

3. WATER TANKS & FIRE STORAGE

Incoming Meter 1 1
Tank High Level 2 2
Tank Low Level 1 2 2

188.2
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Sample BAS Point Schedule

Ref. THE Analogue Digital

No. OPERATOR System “XYZ” Sample BAS Schedule Qty

RegencyDescription In Out In Out

Tank Low Level 2 2 2

Disinfection System (UV + chlorination) 2 2
TOTAL 1 0 8 0
4. MAIN PRESSURIZATION / BOOSTER PUMP 1
Main Pressurization Set Status 1 1
Trip 1 1
Pump Status 3 3
TOTAL 0 0 5
5. FIRE WATER PUMPING UNIT
Diesel Pump Status 1
Electric Pump Status 1
Jockey Pump Status 1
Main System Pressure 1
TOTAL 1 0 3 0
6. LIFTS 12
Control Panel General Alarm 12
Lift Room Temperature 12
TOTAL 12 0 12 0
7. SWIMMING POOL / SPA/ JACUZZI
Pumps 20
Pump Status 20
Pump Trip 20
MCC 11
Power Consumption 11
Water Treatment Status 1
Water Consumption 11

188.3
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Sample BAS Point Schedule

Ref. THE Analogue Digital

No. OPERATOR System “XYZ” Sample BAS Schedule Qty

RegencyDescription In Out In Out

Hot Water Temperature Sensor 1 1

Cold Water Temperature Sensor 1 1
TOTAL 13 0 52 0

8. CHILLED WATER SYSTEM & CHILLERS 6

Chiller Status 6
Chiller Tripping 6
Chiller On/Off 6
Chiller General Alarm 6
Chiller Reset Temperature 6
Compressor per Each Chiller 4
Compressor Status On/Off 24
Compressor Run/Trip 24
Supply Temperature for Each Chiller 6
Main Supply Temperature 1
Main Return Temperature 1
Main Return Set Point 6
Flow Switch Status 6
Primary Pumps On/Off 6
Primary Pumps Status On/Off 6
Primary Pumps Run/Trip 6
Secondary Pumps 8
Secondary Pumps On/Off 8
Secondary Pumps Status On/Off 8
Secondary Pumps Run/Trip 8
Butterfly Valves 6

188.4
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Sample BAS Point Schedule

Ref. THE Analogue Digital

No. OPERATOR System “XYZ” Sample BAS Schedule Qty

RegencyDescription In Out In Out

Butterfly Valves On/Off 6

Butterfly Valves Status On/Off 6
Outside Air Temperature Sensor 1
Outside Air Humidity Sensor 1
TOTAL 10 12 106 26

9. FUEL, STORAGE & TRANSFER SYSTEM

Oil Storage Tank High Level Alarm 1 1
Oil Storage Tank Low Level Alarm 1 1
Oil Storage Tank Low Level Control 1 1
Oil Transfer Pump On/Off 2 2
Daily Oil Storage Tank High Level Alarm 3 3
Daily Oil Storage Tank Low Level Alarm 3 3
Daily Oil Transfer Pump On/Off 2 2
Flow Switch 1 1
TOTAL 0 0 12 2

10. SUMP PUMP SET 3

Sump Pump Set Trip 6
Sump Pump Set Status 6
TOTAL 0 0 12 0

11. GAS SUPPLY

Gas Supply Meter 5 5
TOTAL 5 0 0 0

12. AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH RETURN FAN & 20

ECONOMIZER
Supply Fan On/Off 20
Supply Fan On/Off Status 20

188.5
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Sample BAS Point Schedule

Ref. THE Analogue Digital

No. OPERATOR System “XYZ” Sample BAS Schedule Qty

RegencyDescription In Out In Out

Supply Fan DPS 20

Return Fan On/Off 20
Return Fan On/Off Status 20
Return Fan DPS 20
Filter DPS 20
Chilled Water VM 20
Hot Water VM 20
Return Air Duct Smoke Detector 20
Fresh Air DM 20
Return Air DM 20
Exhaust Air DM 20
Mixed Air Temperature 20
Return Air Temperature 20
Supply Air Humidity 20
Fresh Air Temperature 1
Fresh Air Humidity 1
Water Humidifier 20
TOTAL 62 100 120 60

13. AIR HANDLING UNITS TOTAL FRESH AIR 5

Supply Fan On/Off 5
Supply Fan On/Off Status 5
Supply Fan DPS 5
Filter DPS 5
Chilled Water VM 5
Hot Water VM 5

188.6
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Sample BAS Point Schedule

Ref. THE Analogue Digital

No. OPERATOR System “XYZ” Sample BAS Schedule Qty

RegencyDescription In Out In Out

Supply Air Duct Smoke Detector 5

Fresh Air DM 5
Supply Air Temperature 5
Supply Air Humidity 5
CO2 Sensors Status 5
TOTAL 10 10 25 10
14. MAIN SUB-STATION
14.1 Feeder 2
Consumption (KWH) & Demand (KW) Meters 2
Power Factor Transducer 2
3-phase Voltage Transducer 2
14.2 Switch Gear 1
Switch Gear Status 1
Switch Gear Trip 1
14.3 Main Circuit Breaker 1
Status 1
Trip 1
Consumption (KWH) & Demand (KW) Meter 1
Power Factor Transducer 1
14.4 Transformer 1
Oil Low Level Alarm 1
High Limit Temperature Alarm 1
TOTAL 8 0 6 0
15. SUB STATIONS 5
15.1 Switch Gear 15

188.7
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Sample BAS Point Schedule

Ref. THE Analogue Digital

No. OPERATOR System “XYZ” Sample BAS ScheduleQty

RegencyDescription In Out In Out

Switch Gear Status 15

Switch Gear Trip 15
15.2 Main Circuit Breaker 5
Status 5
Trip 5
Consumption (KWH) & Demand (KW) Meters 5
Power Factor Transducer 5
15.3 Transformer 5
Oil Low Level Alarm 5
High Limit Temperature Alarm 5
15.4 Emergency Generator Set
Status 5
Consumption (KwH) 5
Consumption (fuel) 5
TOTAL 10 0 65 0

GRAND TOTAL 149 133 487 118

188.8
 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Minimum Recommended Sub Metering Matrix

Diesel Hot Cold Calorie BTU
Area Gas Steam Electricity
Oil Water Water Meter
Entry Building X X X X

Laundry and Valet X X X X X X

Generator Set X X X*

Fire Tank Make Up X

Swimming Pool Heating X** X** X** X**

Swimming Pool Make Up X

Swimming Pool Pumps X

Hot Water Boiler X X X*

Steam Boiler X X X* X X

Steam Boiler Soft Water X

Make Up
Cooling Tower Make Up X X

Cooling Tower Blown X

Down
Chiller X** X X

Regency / Grand Club X X X X X

Staff Cafeteria X X** X X X

Restaurant and Kitchen X X** X X X X

Health Club X X X X

Commissary Kitchen X X** X X X X

Bakery X X X X

Irrigation X

Banquet Areas and X X X X

Circulation
Banquet Kitchen X X** X X X X

Retail/Tenant Spaces X** X X X X

188.9
 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Minimum Recommended Sub Metering Matrix

Area Gas Diesel Steam Hot Cold Electricity Calorie BTU
Oil Water Water Meter
Serviced Apartments X X X X

STP X* X

Grey Water X* X

Water Feature pools X X

Sustainable Systems As required

Legend: * On main line location only
* As applicable
Note: Above specified meter to be compatible with Building Automation System to permit automatic
recording, storage, retrieval and analysis of data. In addition, specified meters to provide accurate
measurement (+ / - 1%) over anticipated range of flows, pressures, temperatures, power consumption
etc. to be measured.

188.10
Operational Concept
It is the policy of THE OPERATOR Hotels to safeguard the lives and safety of all
employees, visitors and guests and reduce property damage due to fire, smoke and
other emergencies.
All facilities of the hotel shall minimally comply with local building codes and regulations,
NFPA-101-Life Safety Code, International Building Code and T.S. Life Safety
Statement. Where conflict occurs, the most restrictive requirement shall apply.
The main control panels shall be located at the Security Command Centre or another
location as required by the local authority, and shall be repeated in the Engineering
office via repeater panels and the Communication Center via an integrated PC based
system. The Fire and Life Safety Systems consist of the systems below and each shall
be fully interfaced:
● Fire Protection and Extinguishing Systems.
● Fire Alarm and Evacuation System.
● Smoke Control System.
● Gas Detection System.
● Elevator Retrieval System.
● Automatic Exit Door Control (See Security System chapter).
● Building Automation System (See Building Automation System chapter).
● Security System (See Security System section).
● Medical Aid Alarms at Spa's and Fitness Center (See Security Systems chapter).
Other systems as part of the Fire and Life Safety Systems are:
● Electrical Life Safety Requirement (see also Electrical Systems chapter).
● Space Design Requirement.
See Attachment: Electrical Systems Life Safety Requirement
See Attachment: Locations of Life Safety Control Panels/ Workstations

Fire Protection and Extinguishing System

The Fire Protection and Extinguishing System shall consist of the following:
● Automatic Sprinkler System.
● Standpipe System.
● Special Automatic Extinguishers.
● Portable Extinguishers.

189
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Automatic Sprinkler System

● Hazard Rating
- Area Occupancy Hazard Classification, sprinkler spacing, and intensity must
minimally comply with relevant and current NFPA 13 and 13R code or local
prevailing code, whichever is demonstrably higher.
 Light Hazard Areas: guestroom floors, including rooms, corridors and suites;
boardroom; lobbies; office; restaurants and bars (seating areas).
 Ordinary Hazard – Group 1: Restaurants and bars (service areas);
automobile parking garages, kitchens, and laundries (exception: garages,
which double as exhibition halls shall be designed as Ordinary Hazard –
Group 2).
 Ordinary Hazard – Group 2: Retails spaces; MEP rooms; storage areas
including those on guestroom floors; services areas; housekeeping;
maintenance and engineering; meeting rooms, banquet rooms, ballrooms,
ballroom pre-function areas and exhibition halls.
See Attachment: Space Design Requirement
● Water Supply
- Minimally, to be supplied from dedicated fire protection reserve equal to a
minimum of two hours at full pumping capacity.
- In location where this is not a common practice or code requirement, fire water
supply and fire brigade service must be guaranteed in writing by local authorities.
● Sprinkler System
- A fully zoned system covering all internal areas.
- Minimally, sprinkler pump configuration consists of one duty and one standby fire
pumps and a "jockey" pump to maintain system pressure.
- System must be pressurized at all times.
- Pumps shall start automatically when system pressure falls to predetermined
setting as sensed by pressure switches.
- Each fire zone to be provided with a zone shut off valve, valve monitor switch, and
an indicating water flow switch.
- Each shut off valve must be provided with chain and master keyed padlock.
- Location of Siamese connection to be coordinated with local fire brigade.
- All sprinkler heads utilized in guestroom and public areas shall minimally be of the
quick response and concealed type with appropriate cover plates. The finish and
color of sprinkler heads and their cover plates shall be selected in accordance
with the Interior Designer's requirements.
- Sprinkler heads utilised in restricted headroom and MEP plant rooms shall be
equipped with metal cage guards.

Standpipe System
● Water Supply
- Minimally, to be supplied from dedicated fire protection reserve equal to a
minimum of two hours at full operating capacity.
- In location where this is not a common practice or code requirement, fire water
supply and fire brigade service must be guaranteed in writing by local authorities.
● Hose Reel
- Minimally, to be in accordance with current NFPA 14 guidelines.

190
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

- Hose reels must be located throughout all internal and external covered areas to
provide effective protection for the entire interior and exterior covered areas and
all roofs.
- Distance between hose reel stations must not exceed 30 m, or less as required by
local prevailing codes. Hose reels required within a lockable space, such as
storerooms, to be provided with a second hose reel in the circulation area near
entrance to lockable space. Provide control valve and hose with an attached
adjustable nozzle for both jet and fog streams.
● Outlet Connections
- The hose reel outlet connections must conform with the local fire brigade’s
requirements.
● Dry Risers
- Where required by local prevailing code, a dry riser may be provided in addition to
the localised standpipe system. Minimally, risers to be provided at each fire
stairway in the guestroom tower. Each outlet to be in the stairway, or within two
meters of the enclosed stairway.
- Distance between dry risers on the same floor shall not exceed 50 meters,
allowing for a 10 meter overlap with a hose length of 30 m. Provide control valve
and hose with an attached adjustable nozzle for both jet and fog streams.
● Pump Stations
- Pumping stations to be either independent of, or combined with, the municipal
system in accordance with local prevailing code.
- At sites lacking back-up services of an effective fire brigade, water hydrants
having a tool operated globe valve and 63 mm (2½”) hose connection to be
provided for the protection of the exterior of the main structure and other auxiliary
buildings.
- System to be designed to deliver a minimum of 375 liter/min at each 63 mm (2½”)
connection. Spacing of hydrants to be as dictated by the structure’s geometry,
and to provide overlapping water stream coverage for each section or area.

Special Automatic Extinguishers

● Low voltage equipment
- Minimally provide each Computer, PABX and MATV Rooms with a specialized,
automatic extinguishing systems utilising lnergen, FM 200 or equivalent. Systems
need to be integrated with the fire alarm system and submitted to T.S. for
approval.
● Electrical Equipment
- Minimally provide for each High and Medium Voltage Electrical main distribution
panel rooms with specialized automatic extinguishing system utilizing Inergen, FM
200 or equivalent.
● Kitchen Hoods
- Minimally provide each kitchen exhaust hood and stone hearth oven with a wet
chemical automatic extinguishing system equivalent to Ansul Piranha and submit
to T.S. for approval. Minimally integrated with the hotel fire alarm system.
- The system shall meet UL Standard 300 criteria, be UL listed and Factory Mutual
approved.
- Minimally when the automatic extinguishing system at a stone hearth oven is
activated, the fuel supply will be cut off via a solenoid valve and the exhaust fan
shall be automatically shut down.

191
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

- Each kitchen exhaust hood automatic fire suppression system shall be interfaced
with the main fire alarm system, the automatic fuel supply shut off valve for gas
equipment, and shunt-trip circuit breakers providing power to electric equipment
located below the exhaust hood.

Portable Extinguishers
● Portable extinguishers must minimally meet NFPA Standard 10 “Portable Fire
Extinguishers” be provided at each fire hose reel cabinet and in recessed cabinets
throughout all guestroom, public and back of house areas.
● Provide portable extinguishers to suit the class of fire risk in the areas they protect.
● Where portable extinguishers are proposed as the primary fire fighting devices for an
area, provide a fully detailed plan identifying the area and adjoining spaces including
areas below and above, exiting, class and density of extinguishers.
● Cabinets and locations for extinguishers in public areas to be provided in accordance
with Interior Designer requirements.

Fire Alarm and Evacuation System

The fire alarm and evacuation system shall in its entirety be composed of the following
sub-systems:
● Fire Detection and Alarm System.
● Alarm Notification.
● Evacuation.
Each sub- system shall be fully interfaced with each other and the entire system shall be
designed so that a fault in any system module, component or assembly shall not render
the entire system disabled. The architecture of the system shall be multiplex system
using distributed memory, processing and control configured in a regenerative network
ensuring survivability in all emergency situations.
In addition to meeting the following minimum standards the entire system shall be
designed following the consultants review and understanding of the hotel property
configuration i.e. hazard classification, number of floors, fire compartments, exiting
routes etc. A "cause and effect" schedule shall be prepared by the consultant for review
by T.S. and for submittal to the authorities having jurisdiction over the project and,
following their approval, shall be implemented accordingly. The schedule shall also
identify all zones individually.
See Attachment: Sample Fire & Life Safety Cause and Effect Matrix

Fire Detection and Alarm System

Design Parameter
● A fully zoned, addressable, digital, self-diagnostic, interactive and automatic reporting
fire detection and alarm system shall be provided for all internal and external covered
areas.
● The fire detection and alarm system shall be designed in accordance with the latest
edition of NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm Code.

192
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

● The system must minimally provide the following features:

- Each individual alarm is required to be annunciated at all panels, audibly and
visually, by an LCD display, with indication of the evacuation zone, location and
the triggered detection device on which the fault or alarm has occurred. A printer
shall be located at the main control panel to automatically record and provide a
hard copy of all faults and alarm conditions
- For projects comprising multiple buildings, multiple control panels shall be
networked together under the supervision of a PC based graphic control center
- The main control panel shall constantly supervise, scan and interrogate all system
devices to ascertain their status and conditions
- The power supply to the entire system shall be provided by normal, emergency
power and system integrated UPS back-up battery connections
- CPU status indicator and fault alarm
- Input circuit control/supervisory modules, collective or addressable.
- Output circuit control/supervisory modules, for sounders and loudspeakers
- Event controller to provide control-by-event of evacuation, and smoke control
functions
- Visual and audible alarm at the panel, together with LCD monitor and display in
local and in English language. Individual status from the following minimally
required devices and features:
 Sprinkler flow switch.
 Sprinkler valve position monitor.
 Addressable and collectively zoned smoke and heat detectors.
 Identification of detection device, manual station, sprinkler flow switch and zone
in which the triggered device is located.
 Live voice instruction override of pre set time limit during second level alarm.
 Position of smoke dampers in each area.
 Digital switching amplifiers.
 Tone generators.
 Sound with voiceover.
 Equipment located in satellite control units must utilize multiplexing techniques
with communication over a CLASS “A” line. Single line fault must not prevent
any satellite control unit from operating.
 Detection, enunciator and signaling zone wiring for open shorts and ground
faults.
 Fire alarm sub panel/s.
 Alarm horns, gongs, and speaker alarm sounding units.
 Central and remote annunciator panels.
 Override of background music system during any message transmittal.
 Confirmation of recorded message delivery in its entirety.
 Electromagnetic fire door release devices.
 Fire pump status indication and fault alarm.
 Standpipe and sprinkler valve position monitoring and flow alarm indication.
 Inert gas and/or kitchen hood extinguishing system flow switch position
monitoring and flow alarm indication.
 Low-level alarm indicating zone in which a detection device, flow switch or
break-glass has been triggered.
 Automatic elevator retrieval during second level alarm.
 Automatic escalator shut down during second level alarm.
 Ventilation equipment in fire mode during second level alarm.

193
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

 Automatic switch-on of helicopter landing lights and beacon during second

level alarm.
 Automatic override of all dimmed electrical circuits throughout all dimmed areas
during second level alarm.
- Notification:
 Digital switching amplifiers.
 Tone generators.
 Sound with voiceover.
 Override of background music system during any message transmittal.
 Confirmation of recorded message delivery in its entirety.
● Fire alarm system to minimally incorporate provisions for a dedicated two-way voice
communication system between all control panel locations and all of the following
sites:
- Fire Command Center
- Stairwell landings
- Fire/Sprinkler pumping station
- Emergency generator
- Emergency/Fireman's elevator and each related lobby or place of refuge
- Each level of each emergency exit staircase
- Helicopter pad
● Live voice instruction override of pre set time limit during second level alarm.

Equipment Requirements
● Cabling
- All cabling used shall be zero halogen, low smoke, fire rated and shall be "listed"
for fire alarm use or as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Smoke and Heat Detectors
- All internal and external covered areas shall be equipped with smoke detectors to
ensure broad spectrum, full hazard coverage. Smoke detectors shall be capable
of performing independent fire detection algorithms by continuously monitoring the
environment for particles of combustion, measured over time and compared with
known signatures of differing fire types.
- Smoke detectors may be substituted with heat detectors of suitable temperature
rating in applicable areas.
- Smoke detector shall not be located in steamy areas such as bathrooms or part of
kitchens where steam is present to prevent false alarms.
- Smoke detectors shall minimally feature the following characteristics:
 Compliance with Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB)/EN/NFPA
requirements, analogue addressable, self-diagnostic, system line powered,
intelligent synergistic decision process, ionization, photoelectric and thermal
technology, LED status indicator for normal operation, alarmed status and fault
indication.
- Smoke detectors in guestrooms shall be provided with sounder base.
● Carbon Monoxide Alarms
- Carbon monoxide detectors shall be provided in areas with fuel-fired appliances
only if required by local or state ordinance.
- Carbon monoxide detectors shall only be monitored by the building fire alarm
system if required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). If monitoring is
required, activation shall report as a supervisory signal.

194
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

● Manual Pull Stations

- It is recommended that manual pull stations have the ability to store up to 24
diagnostic codes for retrieval at troubleshooting assistance.
- Manual pull stations shall be provided in all emergency exit routes. Additional
stations shall be so located that, from any part of the building not more than 60
meters horizontal distance shall be traversed in order to reach a manual pull
station.
● Alarm Sounders with Integrated Visual Warning Devices
- Accessible guestrooms shall be provided with smoke detector equipped with 177
candela strobes connected to the fire alarm system.
- Accessible guest bathroom shall be provided with 110 candela strobes connected
to the fire alarm system and 177 candela strobes connected to the smoke alarm
system.
- Alarm sounding devices with integrated visual warning shall be electronic type
capable of high or low dBA, steady or temporal outputs and reversible. The
strobe component shall be equipped with a choice of field-selectable candela
values: 15/75, 30/75, 75 and 110, and operate via a Xenon flashtube protected by
a clear polycarbonate dome lens. Speaker shall be multi-tap with minimum of 1/4-
4 watts and shall produce a minimum sound level of 77dB. These devices shall
be installed throughout all interior and exterior areas except typical guestrooms
where an emergency evacuation speaker shall be provided, or as required by the
authorities having jurisdiction over the project, or as minimally required below:
 Internal and external areas minimally 15 to 25 dB above the ambient noise
level.
 MEP plant rooms minimally 40 dB above normal background noise levels. A
minimum of two visual warning devices within each line of sight.
 Each guestroom, sleeping area and bathroom, minimally 60 dB at the remotest
area with all intervening doors closed. Minimum of 75 dBA measured at the
bed pillow.

Alarm Notification
The fire alarm notification shall operate on the basis of a two level escalation procedure.
The initiation and sequencing of alarm conditions if permitted by the authority having
jurisdiction shall be as follows:
Level One
● Any alarm condition must initiate an automatic call to the municipal fire station(s)
serving the hotel location and the hotel fire brigade. A trouble signal should not be
programmed to sound evacuation.
● Any alarm condition shall be transmitted to and interface with the hotel PABX to
automatically dial up a pre determined group of extensions and transmit information
concerning the alarm condition and zone concerned.
● The level one status shall be the triggering of a single device such as any detector, a
manual pull station or any sprinkler or extinguishing system flow switch. If permitted
by the authority having jurisdiction, any one of these actions will activate a local alarm
at each panel triggering the evacuation level one alert message in BOH areas, at
executive offices and control rooms.
● Subject to approval from the authorities having jurisdiction over the project, this first
level alarm sounding at each control panel may be "muted" by fire brigade in

195
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

attendance or by a trained hotel employee at any control panel within a period not
exceeding 60 seconds. In this event the alarm and evacuation system shall
immediately stand down for a period not to exceed 180 second except in BOH areas,
where an alert tone shall continue to be broadcast at a low volume level.
● In addition, and subject to further approval from the authorities having jurisdiction over
the project, this period of 180 seconds will be allowed to elapse during which the
source of the level one alarm can be investigated. If the source of the alarm is found
to be false, a trouble alarm or eliminated during the investigation period then, this
level one status can be re-set either by the fire brigade in attendance, or by a trained
hotel employee inputting a password and individual pin identification. In this situation
the system would not re-sound either the alarm or evacuation message. If the 180
seconds investigation period is exceeded, the system would immediately escalate to
a level two status.
Level Two
● The level two status shall also be automatically initiated by the failure to “mute” the
system within 60 seconds or the triggering of any second device in an already
alarmed area or the triggering of any device in an immediately area adjacent to an
alarmed area before the 180 seconds expire. Any one of these actions will
automatically set the fire alarm sounders at a higher volume level and cause the
evacuation system to transmit the “evacuation message” in all zones within the
building or transmit a staged intelligently analyzed and prioritized evacuation as
deemed appropriate.
- The level two status cannot be "silenced" but can, with prior approval by the
authorities having jurisdiction over the project, be interrupted, delayed or
discontinued by live voice instruction, only by the fire brigade in attendance or by
a trained hotel employee inputting a password and individual pin identification
whilst awaiting the arrival of the fire brigade.
- A level two activation of the system may however only be re-set by attendance of
the fire brigade.
- The re-setting of the level two status shall be accompanied by transmittal of a live
voice or pre recorded "all clear" message to all zones alarmed and/or other
selected zones consisting of an introductory pulse tone for not less than five
seconds or more than ten seconds, followed by the "all clear" message. The "all
clear" message shall advice that the alarm has been investigated and that it is
now safe and to remain inside the building.

Evacuation System
Design Parameters
● The emergency evacuation system must minimally provide the following
requirements:
- Automatic, two level, zoned evacuation system synchronized with the fire alarm
system operating parameters, with automatic reporting.
- One way voice communication system using speakers.
- The emergency evacuation system shall be autonomous from all other systems
requiring a dedicated amplifier, dual circuit line and speaker network. Alternatively,
and with prior approval by the authorities having jurisdiction over the project, the
emergency evacuation system may be integrated with a background music

196
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

system provided the minimum standards, contained herein, of both individual

systems are maintained.
- Speaker system shall be equipped with testing facilities to ensure that the
evacuation system shall prevail over background music or other non-essential
transmissions.
- Automatic broadcast of pre recorded alert and evacuation messages minimally in
local and English languages with microphone input for live voice manual override.
All speakers in any zone or any group of zones shall be selectable by manual
control switches.
- All audio sources in an affected zone to be overridden by the alert and/or
evacuation message.
 The system shall allow simultaneous transmission of an alert message to one zone, a
voice message to another zone and an evacuation message to another.
 The system shall have as many channels as there are zones. A minimum of three (3)
channels must be supplied: an ALERT channel, an EVAC channel and a PAGE
channel.
 Each zone must be divided into two circuits. Circuit A and circuit B speakers must be
connected in an alternate format so that upon a circuit failure, 50% of the speakers
are still audible.
 The emergency evacuation and voice alarm system amplification equipment to be
sized to accommodate the total quantity of speakers for each channel plus 25% spare
reserve capacity in each channel.
 Hotels with externally occupied areas require speakers throughout all external areas.
● The system shall provide addressable conditions for each zone and for each device
within each zone. Minimally provide a zone for:
- Each guestroom.
- Each room within a suite.
- Each zone of each guestroom level corridor.
- Each guest floor pantry
- Each section of each MEP plant room.
- Each food and beverage outlet.
- Each room/area of each kitchen.
- Each back of house room.
- Each zone of each back of house level corridor.
- Each Public area room and zone within the room.
- Each Public area level corridor.
- Each level of each staircase.
● The following explains the sequencing of Level 1 and Level 2 evacuation activities:

Level One
● At this level the evacuation "Alert" message shall be automatically transmitted to the
back of house areas provided the triggering of the fire detection and alarm system did
not take place in the back of house.
● The "Alert" message will be preceded by and consist of an introductory pulse tone for
not less than five seconds or more than ten seconds followed by a pre recorded
"Alert" message. The message shall advise that an alarm has been received in a
stated area and that the occupants should prepare to evacuate the building if the
evacuation message is given. At the end of each message loop the alarm tone will
continue for five seconds followed again by the pre recorded alert message. This
sequence will continue until the fire alarm system has been muted or reset.

197
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Level Two
● An introductory pulse tone for not less than five seconds or more than ten seconds
followed by a pre recorded "evacuation" message. The message shall advice all
building occupants to leave the building immediately in a calm and orderly manner.
At the end of each message loop the alarm tone will continue for five seconds
followed again by the pre recorded evacuation message. This sequence will continue
until the fire alarm system has been reset.
● The second level "evacuation" message shall be transmitted to all internal and
external covered areas. The order of transmissions shall, with prior approval from the
authorities having jurisdiction, follow a sequential order to address the alarmed zone,
adjacent areas, exiting routes, priority occupancy levels and all remaining areas. A
staged intelligently analyzed and prioritized evacuation must be provided.
● Both alert and evacuation messages are to be distinct, authoritative without inflection
and may be repeated in several languages.
● The re-setting of the level two status shall be accompanied by transmittal of a live
voice or pre recorded "all clear" message to all zones alarmed and/or other selected
zones consisting of an introductory pulse tone for not less than five seconds or more
than ten seconds, followed by the "all clear" message. The "all clear" message shall
advice that the alarm has been investigated and that it is now safe and to remain
inside the building.
See Attachment: Sample Schematic: Fire Alarm & Evacuation System Flow Diagram
See Attachment: Sample: Free Alarm Message

Smoke Control and Pressurization Systems

A smoke control and pressurization system comprising of supply fans and ductwork
system with over-pressure relief, shall be provided to service all escape staircases and
lift shafts in compliance with BS5588, NFPA, ASHRAE, IBC guidelines or prevailing
code requirements, whichever is demonstrably greater.
Additionally, for each smoke zone as defined by NFPA, a ventilation system designed for
smoke removal shall be provided.
Minimally, provide a centralized monitoring and control system including interfacing with
related system.
All AHU's must be equipped to allow individual, automatic or normal control of the fire
mode.
 Smoke Control and Interior Finish for Atrium Buildings
- Atrium spaces that communicate three or more floors shall be provided with a
smoke control system. The design of the system shall be coordinated between the
mechanical engineer and fire protection engineer for the individual project.
- Interior finish within the atrium space, including areas beyond the floor opening
which are not segregated from the atrium by fixed partitions and doors shall be, at
minimum, Class B interior finish as follows:
 ASTM E84 Flame Spread: 75 maximum.
 ASTM E84 Smoke Developed: 450 maximum.

198
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Fire and Smoke Dampers

● Code Conformity
- Fire and/or smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with current editions
of NFPA 90A.
- NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
- Local codes may be used if more stringent than above.
● Damper Types
- Shall be curtain, single blade or multi blade, with external position indicating
device, and shall bear the label of the Underwriters Laboratory (UL) or equivalent
agency and shall be installed in a sheet metal sleeve in accordance with NFPA
90A.
- Access doors of adequate sixe for resetting dampers shall be provided.
● Guestroom Fresh Air Supply and Bathroom Exhaust
- Guestroom fresh air supply and bathroom exhaust branch-offs from their
respective risers shall be provided with smoke dampers in accordance with NFPA
or local code which ever is more stringent to prevent the spread of smoke to other
guestrooms or spaces.
● Air Handling and Primary Air Units
- Shall be provided with duct type smoke detectors located upstream of the cooling
coil or as required by code.
- Smoke detectors to be wired to interrupt fans operation unless the AHU is
designed for secondary fire mode duty.

Gas and Seismic Detection Systems

Gas Detection System

A gas detection system shall be provided to monitor the possibility of unnoticed gas
leaks and provide timely alarms, automatic closing of gas valves and starting exhaust
and ventilation fans. Any alarms shall automatically be shown at the Security Command
Center.
Minimum Requirements
● Gas detectors.
● Automatic shut off valves.
● Local audible and visual alarm devices.
● Automatic venting provisions.
● Central status monitoring.
● Automatic notification to local fire authorities and interface with the fire alarm system.
● Power supplies, steel conduit and conductors.
● Warning signs, "DANGER, GAS INSTALLATION INSIDE," shall be posted on doors
of enclosed spaces containing gas systems.
Gas Detectors
Gas detectors to be installed in a pattern that traces out the internal gas piping route and
the following additional minimum requirements:

199
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

● Cooking areas: one detector minimum with one additional detector for each additional
50 m².
● Non-cooking kitchen related spaces contiguous with cooking area: one detector per
75 m².
● Enclosed areas, irrespective of how small, including the gas pipe shaft, each separate
area to receive a minimum of one detector. Larger areas, such as storerooms and
shops, to receive an additional detector per 100 m² of floor area.
● Area of consumers with gas pilot ignition.
● Corridors: One detector every 20.0 m.
● Near possible gas leak places.
● Recommended height location:
- Light gas like Methane, natural gas or town gas ~300 mm from the ceiling.
- Heavy gas like LPG, propane, etc. ~300 mm from the floor.
Gas Ventilation
● Automatic ventilation to be provided for each enclosed space. It is preferable that
ventilation be natural.
● Where mechanical ventilation is required, it will consist of exhaust only. Exhaust fan
shall be provided with explosion proof motor and all aluminum construction.
● Each kitchen to be provided with an automatic shut off valve adjacent to the isolation
valve, which automatically closes the gas supply when the exhaust fans are not
operating.

Seismic Detection
Automatic Seismic Detection/Shut off valve
Consist of a seismic detector with an automatic shut off valve located at the main gas
line. Triggered by a seismic activity or fire, the valves will automatically close thus
shutting off the flow of natural gas in the main gas line and sub branches.
Minimum Requirement
● Shall be interfaced to the Fire Alarm System and Gas Detection System.
● Tested to ANSI Z21.70 - 1981 standard for seismic shut off gas valves.
● One located at the main gas line point of entry to the building
- Motorized on/off valve to connect electrically to the seismic detection device and
calibrated to interrupt flow of gas at the start of a seismic activity.
- Motorized on/off valve to shut off at second level fire alarm.
● One on each point of entry of kitchen area.
- Motorized on/off valve to connect electrically to the seismic detection device and
calibrated to interrupt flow of gas and trips-off the shunt-trip circuit breaker at the
start of a seismic activity.
- Integrate with each automatic extinguishing system of kitchen hoods
- A quick (1/4 turn) manually shut off valve is required ahead of the automatic valve.
 Triggers the automatic lift seismic operation.
 Triggering of the seismic detection system shall automatically shut down the chillers,
boilers, cooling towers and associated equipment.

200
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

UPS Back-up Battery Power Supply

● Reserve battery supply to be provided for entire Fire and Life Safety systems to allow
a 2-hour period in a passive state, and for the entire system in general alarm mode for
not less than 30 minutes.

Elevator Retrieval System

The Fire and Emergency Operation System for passenger, service and freight elevators
shall minimally comply with the following:
- Automatic Lift Retrieval System
- Seismic Operation
- Emergency Power Operation: Automatic Selection

Automatic Lift Retrieval System

All lifts must be equipped with automatic elevator retrieval with Fire Alarm System
selected alternate landing floor. Please also refer to Fire Alarm Systems in this
document.
Emergency Phase I
● Upon signal from the Hotel’s fire alarm level two notification system or the smoke
detectors in the lift lobby, machine room, hoist way or manually operated key switch,
all lifts shall be dispatched automatically to the ground floor, or other approved floor,
as selected by the fire alarm system. Except for the lift at ground Lobby level, all lifts
shall, after discharging passengers, close their doors and remain at the selected floor
level. All floor and car buttons shall be rendered ineffective until the system is
manually reset or is placed into Fireman Phase II mode.
● Provide a smoke detector in close proximity to each lift bank on the ground floor. If
this device senses smoke, automatically puts lift into fire mode. A key operated switch
shall be provided at the ground floor to activate and reset the retrieval system
manually.
● On initiation from the fire alarm system:
- All lifts traveling away from the lobby floors to stop and without opening their
doors, ignore all calls and express to the fire alarm system selected landing floor.
- Cars traveling toward lobby to express to fire alarm system selected landing floor
lobby ignoring all calls.
- Cars on independent service to express to fire alarm system selected landing floor
lobby ignoring all calls.
- Cars parked on intermediate floors to close their doors and express to fire alarm
system selected landing floor lobby ignoring all calls.
- Cars parked at lobby to open their doors ignoring all calls.
- Express cars for sky lobby operation shall travel toward the ground floor lobby and
open their doors ignoring all calls.
- All hall and car buttons shall extinguish and accept no further hall or car
registration.
● Minimally two service lifts to be provided with a key operated switch where designated
by the Architect, for emergency use. Further, a key operated switch in each car to
provide operation similar to that of Fireman Phase I and II.

201
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

● Alternate Landing Floor

- Provide smoke detectors at selected alternate landing floor.
- Lift supplier/installer to co-ordinate and liaise with fire alarm and seismic sensor
supplier/ installer to provide full interfacing of all systems.
Fireman/Emergency Phase II
Minimally operation must conform to ASME A17.1a, Section 211.3., and NFPA
requirements.
● Fireman’s Switch. Inserting key in switch will place all car functions as follows:
- Close door. When car is static in shaft, applying constant pressure to door close
button will cause the doors to close.
- Applying constant pressure to the up or down would cause the car to travel in
selected direction at inspection speed. Release of button causes lift to stop.
- Applying constant pressure to the door open button switch would cause door to
open. Releasing the button before door is fully open to cause the door to close.
After door has opened fully, doors will remain open until the door close button is
pressed.
- Hall button riser to be rendered inoperative, however, a hall button pressed after
the system went into Phase 1 shall cause corresponding floor button in the car to
flash.
- Car position indicator to indicate floor when car approaches door operating range,
and if in motion it shall indicate nearest floor by flashing. When car is within
operating zone, the position indicator shall light uninterrupted.
- All electrical door safety locks to be rendered ineffective.
- Car position, direction of travel and floor conditions to be displayed on main panel
at communication center and security office.
- After returning the car to the designated landing floor, withdrawing the key from
the car switch and deactivating the architrave switch will render the car to original
pre fire mode condition.
- Resetting the Fire Alarm contacts in the car-monitoring panel will restore the
system to normal condition.
● In-house Fire Brigade Service
- Where allowable by prevailing local code, an in-house fire brigade keyed switch to
be provided at convenient locations. The operation shall respond to fireman
Phase I and Phase II commands.

Seismic Operation
● Lift installations in seismic zones to be provided with a seismic detection device, the
activation of which shall cause the following events:
- Cars at ground floor with their doors open to remain stationary and inoperative.
- Cars at ground with doors closed to open doors and remain stationary and
inoperative.
- Cars at sky lobby with doors closed to open doors and remain stationary and
inoperative.
- Cars traveling in the up or down direction to come to a stop at nearest landing,
open their doors and remain in that position.
- Cars at intermediate landings to open their door and remain open in that position
until manually re-set.
- All cars to remain inoperative until system is manually reset.

202
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Emergency Power Operation: Automatic Selection

- Lift to automatically return to a pre designated floor at full rated speed, on
emergency power.
- Only one car at a time will be provided with emergency power by means of an
automatic selector switch in the lift motor room, which contains a contact position
for each lift.
- Any car that is unable to move on command within a preset time interval to be
passed up in order to select another car in its place.
- After all cars capable of running have been returned to the pre designated
landing, an additional attempt to be made to automatically return any cars, which
were initially bypassed. Such cars should again be passed up after a preset time
interval, if they are still unable to move on command.
- Upon completion of the second recovery attempt (or initial recovery if all cars have
been successfully returned to the pre designated landing), configuration
depending on the lift group, a minimum of two passenger and one service lift to
remain on emergency power to provide normal service to the building.

Exits
● Exit facilities shall be designed in accordance with the legally adopted codes. If no
legally adopted codes exist, exit facilities shall be designed in accordance with the
latest edition of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
● Exit capacity shall be designed to accommodate the code calculated occupant
population, but in no case shall exit capacity be less than that needed for the number
of people anticipated by the hotel operation (e.g. if a meeting room is required by
code to have exit capacity for 100 persons, but the hotel will accommodate 130
persons in the room, then the exit capacity must be sized for 130 persons).
● Emergency lighting for exit facilities shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 101
or locally adopted standards, which ever is more stringent.
● All Generator sites, boiler rooms and electrical distribution rooms shall each have a
minimum of two egress.

Protection of Hazards
 The following areas shall be enclosed by one-hour fire resistive construction with ¾
hour fire doors with closers on openings, and provided with automatic sprinklers- or
greater if required by applicable codes:
- Maintenance/Repair Shops.
- Bulk Laundry Rooms.
- Boiler Rooms.
- Storage Rooms over 10 sq. meters.
 The following areas shall be enclosed by 2- hour fire resistive construction with 1-1/2
hour fire doors or dampers in openings, and provided with automatic sprinklers – or
greater if required by applicable codes:
- Enclosed Parking Garages
- Trash Collection Rooms
- Soiled Linen Rooms
- Refrigeration System Rooms
- Paint Shops.

203
 Attachments
Fire and Life Safety Systems
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Electrical Systems Life Safety Requirement

Emergency Cut Off Switches
 Boiler room and air conditioning and refrigeration compressor rooms shall each be
provided with a break glass switch located on the outside of each exit door.
 Breaking the glass will interrupt the power circuit to all equipment in the space.

Shatter Proof Electrical Devices

 Light fixtures and switches installed at LPG sites and any Compressed Natural Gas
(CNG) sites, spray booth, battery room, dish washing areas and all food and
beverage preparation areas are to be certified shatter proof by a recognized authority.
 No ordinary, unprotected receptacle, switch, fixture, or other potentially spark emitting
device to be installed, for whatever purpose, within 8.0 m of the LPG installation.

Aircraft Obstruction Lights

 Obstruction lights where required by code, by proximity to flight path or extraordinary
height, shall be provided at the highest point of the structure. Such light shall conform
to FAA rules or local aviation codes.
 In all instances, the lights must remain lit day and night and shall connect to the
emergency supply and other sources as may be required by governing codes.

Seismic Switch
 Seismic switch is required for all Hotels located in seismic areas.
 This switch will be interlocked with main gas valve, elevators, chillers, and cooling
tower fans.
 Minimally interfaced with Fire Alarm System

Illuminated Exit Signs

 Exit signs to be installed minimally in accordance with NFPA codes or the locally
prevailing codes whichever is the greater.
 Minimally two exit signs or a combination of exit and exit directional signs shall be
readily visible from all areas.
 Signs to be permanently illuminated with dual LED lamps. 1 lamp running from mains
and emergency power supply and 1 lamp from integrated constantly re-charging
battery power supply.
 2-Hour trickle charged battery back-up shall additionally be provided where the
change over from normal power shall be instantaneous or indiscernible.

Emergency Lighting
 As a minimum requirement an emergency lighting system that shall respond
automatically to a loss or interruption of normal power shall be provided to all hotel
areas.
 The system shall change from normal power to emergency power within a period not
to exceed 10 seconds. The level of average illumination provided shall be a minimum
of 10 lux and shall be available for a period not less than 90 minutes or as required by
the authorities having jurisdiction over the project.

203.1
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Electrical Systems Life Safety Requirement

 Trickle charged battery back up shall additionally be provided at all emergency
lighting and evacuation signage fixtures where the changeover shall be instantaneous
or indiscernible.

Guestrooms
 One light fixture in the entry area and one light fixture in the bathroom remains lit
when the main electrical supply goes into emergency or standby mode.

203.2
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Location of Life Safety Control Panels / Workstations

Engineering Main Security Fire Command Communication Spa and Fitness
Office Center & Control Center Center
Center Reception Area
Building Master Workstation Repeater Not Required Repeater Not Required
Automation Workstation Workstation
System (BAS) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Security Repeater Master Workstation Not Required Repeater Not Required
System Workstation Workstation
(Note 1) (Note 1)
Lift and Repeater Master Control Not Required Repeater Not Required
Escalator Workstation Panel with Intercom Optional: Workstation
System (Note 1) (Note 2) Repeater (Note 1)
Workstation
(Note 1)
Fire Detection Repeater Control Repeater Control Master Control Repeater Control Not Required
Alarm System Panel Panel Panel Panel
(Note 3) (Notes 3 & 4) (Notes 3 & 4) (Note 3)
Medical Alert Not Required Repeater Alarm Not Required Repeater Alarm Local Alarm
Alarm System Indication Panel Indication Panel Indication Panel
for Spa and
Fitness Center

Note:
1. The repeater workstation can also be realized via the pop-
up menus at a PC workstation which is already in use in those areas.
2. Master control panel with intercom facility for lift and escalator system should be located in the Main Security Center which is
manned continuously. The master control panel must have display to indicate the position, direction of travel and door status of
all lifts, dumb waiters and escalators.
3. The Master/repeater control panels cannot be PC based, but should be the standard panels manufactured by the fire alarm
system Manufacturer, that typically include an LCD display with various indicators and buttons.
4. If the local code allows the Main Security Center and Fire Command & Control Center combining into one room, only a Master Fire
Services Control panel is required.
203.3
 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Space Design Requirement

Occupancy Load Factors:

Ballrooms, Meeting Rooms and Banquet Rooms 1-person/ 0.65 square meter net
Pre-function Areas 1-person/ 0.50 square meter net
Stages and Platforms 1-person/ 1.40 square meter net
Restaurant & Bar Seating 1-person/ 1.40 square meter net
Restaurant & Bar Waiting 1-person/ 0.65 square meter net
Entertainment Lounges/Discotheques Seating 1-person/ 0.65 square meter net
Entertainment Lounges/Discotheques Waiting 1-person/ 0.50 square meter net
Casino Areas 1-person/1 square meter gross
Atrium Lobbies 1-person/2.80 square meter gross
Registration Lobbies 1-person/1.40 square meter net
Hotel (residential) Area 1-person/18.60 square meter gross
Retail Areas (basement and grade floors) 1-person/ 2.80 square meter gross
Retail Area (all other floors) 1-person/ 18.60 square meter gross
Kitchens, Food Preparation Area 1-person/ 18.60 square meter gross
Office Areas 1-person/ 9.30 square meter gross
Mechanical, Storage Area 1-person/ 27.90 square meter gross
Lighting and Access Catwalks 1-person/ 9.30 square meter net
Parking Garages 1-person/ 18.60 square meter gross
Exercise Rooms with equipment 1-person/ 4.60 square meter gross
Exercise Rooms without equipment 1-person/ 1.40 square meter gross
Locker Rooms 1-person/square meter gross net
Swimming Pool 1-person/ 4.60 square meter of gross pool area
Pool Deck Area 1-person/ 1.40 square meter of net deck area

203.4
 in the kitchen

operated switch
CAUSE

Notification within 60 seconds

Activation of Duct Smoke Detector
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

detector, manual pull station, sprinkler

Activation of any single Gas or Carbon

Failure to mute Level One Status Alarm

Activation of Any single alarm at the Lift
Activation of Automatic Seismic Detection

Lobby,machine room, hoistway or manually

the 180-second investigation period expires

Activation of a second device in an already
Activation of Special Automatic Extinguisher

alarmed or immediate adjascent area before

Activation of any single device: ie, smoke/fire
(PABX, Computer, MATV, Electrical rooms,etc)
Monoxide detector or fusible fire detection link

with the hotel DOE and Authority having jurisdiction.

ActivationofFireAlarmsystematMainControl

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Center

NOTE: 1. Final Cause and Effect Matrix shall be coordinated

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
InitiatesAutomaticcalltoMunicipalFireStation

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
InitiatesAutomaticcalltoHotelFireBrigade

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PABXtoautomaticallydialpredeterminedgroupof
hotelpersonnel

InitiatesAlarmSignalatrepeaterpanellocations

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
suchasCommunicationCenter,Engineering
Center,Securityoffice,etc

X
X
X
X
X

X
InitiatesLevelOnealertmessageatBOH,
ExecutiveOffices,Controlrooms

ActivatesCentralizedExitDoorSystemandunlock

X
X
exitdoors

X
X
InitiatesLevelTwoAlarmNotification

203.5
X
X
InitiatesLevelTwoEvacuationMessage

Activatespressurizationandsmokeextraction

X
X

system

X
X

Forallinternalandcoveredarea
ActivateSmokeControl/extractionSystem
EFFECT

SmokeZonedoorholderreleasesandclosesdoor
X
X

ataffectedareas
X
X
X

InitiatesAHUatFireMode
X
X
X

ShutsoffbuildingmainGasandFuelSupplyLine
X
X
X

ShutsoffAreaGasBranchValveandtripsoff
electriccookingequipmentshunt-tripdevice
SAMPLE FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY CAUSE AND EFFECT MATRIX

X
X

TurnsOffExhaustFans

ActivatesElevatorRetrievalSystem(Emergency
X
X
X

PhaseI)
X

InitiatesElevatorSeismicOperation

Chillers,CoolingTowerandancilliaryequipment
X

shutsoff

Steam/WaterBoilerandancillaryequipmentShuts
X

Off

AudioVisualandMATVSystemOverrideat
X
X
X
X
X
X

affectedarea

InitiatesDimmingsystemFireModeataffected
X
X

area
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Manual Call Smoke Heat Sprinkler

Button Detector Detector Flow Switch

FIRE ALARM & EVACUATION SYSTEM

S H FLOW DIAGRAM

Notify Fire
Triggering of one of Brigade and
the above or any Municipal Fire
other fire related Station/ PABX
devices Notifies Pre-
determined Staff

Clearing of
Minor Fire
Alert Message in Situation

BOH

60 Yes
Seconds
LEVEL 1
180 Serious
Investigate Affected All Clear
Seconds Fire or 2nd
Yes Zone & Initiate Low Minor Fire message in
Acknowledge Device Triggered Reset Panel
Level Alert Sounder Situation the entire building
before end of No No
In the BOH 180 sec.
No Yes

Evacuation
Message in the All Clear
Building Concerned Safe to Yes & Return to Hotel
Return to Message in the
Buidling Building &
LEVEL 2 Assembly Point

No

Evacuate the Fighting Fire

Building by Fire Brigade Await Instructions
from
Fire Brigade

THE OPERATOR TECHNICAL SERVICES INC.

71 SOUTH WACKER DRIVE, CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, 60606, USA
TITLE: FIRE ALARM & EVACUATION SYSTEMS File: Firprot.vsd SCALE: NTS ER&MS Version 4
FLOW DIAGRAM
NOTE: THE OPERATOR DRAWINGS ARE NOT PRODUCED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES. THEY ARE TO BE USED ONLY TO INFORM THOSE CONCERNED AS TO THE OPERATOR
STANDARDS AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS. NO OTHER USE MAY BE MADE OF SUCH DRAWINGS WITHOUT THE PROPER CONSENT OF THE OPERATOR

203.6
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS

Sample Fire Alarm Messaging

To be customized in accordance with local codes and/or requirements

LEVEL 1
● INTRODUCTORY LOW LEVEL ALERT TONE in BOH AREAS:
- Minimum 5 maximum of 10 seconds
● ALERT MESSAGE in BOH AREAS:
- In English:
“Attention… your attention please!
A fire detection device has been activated in the building,
Please stand by while we investigate!”
- Followed by the same message in local language.
● LOW LEVEL ALERT TONE in BOH AREAS:
- Maximum of 180 seconds; a tone selected from the system will sound incessant.

LEVEL 2
● INTRODUCTORY HIGH LEVEL ALERT TONE in BOH, ALL OTHER or
EVACUATED AREAS:
- Minimum 5 maximum of 10 seconds
● EVACUATION MESSAGE in BOH, ALL OTHER or EVACUATED AREAS:
- In English:
“Attention… your attention please!
An emergency has been reported in the building,
Please leave the building by the nearest emergency exit!
Do not use the elevators!”
- Followed by the same message in local language.

ALL CLEAR
● INTRODUCTORY ALERT TONE in BOH, ALL OTHER or EVACUATED AREAS:
- Minimum 5 maximum of 10 seconds
● ALL CLEAR MESSAGE:
- In English:
“Attention… your attention please!
The building emergency condition has been cleared,
You may return to your normal activities!”
- Followed by the same message in local language

203.7
Typical Guestroom

Operational Concept
The objective is to consistently satisfy guest needs and expectations in guestrooms by
providing functional and simple usage of Access Control Lighting, Climate Control,
Telephones, Wired and Wireless Internet Access, and Audio/Visual solutions. A
centralized and integrated room management solution using programmable room control
unit (RCU) and motion / IR sensor based occupancy control shall be provided to enhance
the lighting control and effect, energy savings, and guest comfort. A wireless real-time
online networked guestroom electronic lock system supporting RFID technology
providing real-time status monitoring and added guest security shall be provided.
The typical guestroom can be divided into the following four components to further
explain the guestroom technology requirements and solutions:
● Entrance Area.
● Sleeping, Living, and Study.
● Bathroom Wet Area.
● Bathroom Dry/Closet/Dressing Area.
Note: All outlets, switches and faceplates shall be in accordance with Interior Designer's
selected finishes.

Entrance Area (corridor side)

The following are minimum requirements for this area:
● “Do Not Disturb” indicator
- May be integrated with door chime and room number as per Interior Designer
- Control switch at entry vestibule area or alternative location (i.e. bedside) with LED
indication
- Override (i.e. disable) connection with door chime
- Interface with room management system and consequently with PMS
- Circuit independent from occupancy sensor operated energizer control
- If system is part of BAS, interface with PMS is required
- Requirement to be revisited for Park THE OPERATOR hotels
● Electronic Door Locking System supporting RFID technology. Refer to Security
System chapter of ER&MS.
● Door chime.

204
GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

Entry Vestibule
The following are minimum requirements for this area:
● Occupancy Sensor operated “Energizer” control providing energy to the room.
- Initial reading of the key card at the entry door lock, or the contact switch at the
door frame shall activate the room energy control system and enable a ‘courtesy’
down light inside guestroom entrance area
- An occupancy sensor at the entrance area triggers the “energizer” control and
automatically activates a pre-set lighting configuration, enables all room circuitry
and ‘comfort” mode for climate control
- Absence of occupancy as determined by two occupancy sensors and the door
contact automatically turns off all lights in the room after a pre-programmed time
and switches the room climate control to “set-back” mode.
- Set-back made sets FCU at preset condition to:
 Lowest speed
 Room temperature at 26º C during summer and 20ºC during winter
- All lighting and power outlets in the room are controlled via the occupancy sensor
operated 'Energizer' except FCU, Desk, mini bar, TV set-top box, cordless phone
power, MP3 docking station, and guest convenience outlets at the bedside
 “Do Not Disturb” switch with LED indicator (alternate location by the bedside).
● One power outlet for general purposes.
● One power outlet (direct connection) for Fan Coil Unit.
● Minimum of two down lights. One down light for courtesy light purpose.
● Minimally one light in the guestroom entry vestibule area and one light in the bathroom
area remain lit when the building electrical supply goes into emergency mode.

Sleeping, Living, and Study

Sleeping Area
The following are minimum requirements for this area:
● Two reading lights, preferably from ceiling, one for each side of the bed. Cross
beamed.
● One telephone outlet at each side of the bed for bedside telephone (cordless type).
● One power outlet independent from occupancy sensor operated energizer to charge
cordless bedside phone.
● One power outlet at each side of the bed for loose nightstand lamps.
- Lamps individually switched on base. Wall switches may be used only if the fixture
cannot have a built-in switch.
● One power junction box for ceiling fan (if required)
● One easily accessible universal power outlet on each side of the bed for guest use that
is independent from the occupancy sensor operated ‘energizer’.
● At bedside one power outlet independent from occupancy sensor operated energizer
for MP3/ iPod docking station.
● Two group of light switches (one on each side of the bed), each consisting of:
- Three way master light switch
 Controlling entrance lights, floor lamp and general lighting
 Parallel with the occupancy sensor operated energizer
- Dimmer switch for reading light
- Two-way night light switches with LED indicator

205
GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

-Dimmer switch for general lighting (Grand THE OPERATOR hotels and Park THE
OPERATOR hotels)
- All on/off switch
- 3 speed on/off switch for ceiling fan if required.
- “Do Not Disturb” switch if not located in the entry vestibule.
Note:
- Switching shall be minimal in number and shall be grouped together in an
aesthetically and organized way to ensure ease of operation especially at night.
- Switches to have soft backlit feature to enhance guest vision at night.
- Dimming up and down functions to be push button style. Toggle type, rotating or
sliding dimmers are not acceptable.
- One (1) thermostat and one (1) shade switch may be placed by the bedside
provided they are separate from the light switches and do not create congestion at
the bedside. Location shall be at the window side of the bed.
- Fluorescent lights shall have limited use in guestrooms (i.e. in concealed
installation and coves).
Living Area
The following are minimum requirements for this area:
● One power outlet for floor lamp.
● A compact/slim, digital, communicating type thermostat with LCD display featuring:
- Digital room temperature and set point indication.
- On/off, auto, or 3-speed fan control.
- Connection to a centralized Building Automation System or Room Management
System.
- Micro-switch connections to operable windows, balcony/patio doors to disable FCU
when open.
- Integral PIR Sensor for notion detection; capable of interfacing with entry door lock
and /or room energy control system.
● TV connections:
- 4-pair CAT–6 cable connection.
- Coaxial connection.
- Duplex power outlet independent from occupancy sensor operated energizer for
TV set-top box.
- External HDMI MP3, PC and AV connection from the active multi-media jack-pack
(hub) to the TV.
- Coax connection to the bathroom speaker.
- One power outlet for High Definition Blu-ray DVD (for Park THE OPERATOR hotels).
- A/V connection from High Definition Blu-ray DVD to TV (for Park THE OPERATOR hotels).
 Power box and switches for drapes/curtains if applicable.
● Mini bar
- 4 Pair CAT-6 cable to link to management system.
- One power outlet independent from occupancy sensor operated energizer.
● Coffee or Tea hot water kettles (one power outlet).
● Power outlets for art lights and any additional lights specified by the lighting designer.

Study Area
The following are minimum requirements for this area:

206
GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

● Above desk height with graphic indication of intended use:

- Broadband Internet connection
- One power outlet independent from the occupancy sensor operated energizer
- Two Universal power outlets with voltage indication label supplied with clean
power and will not be connected to the occupancy sensor operated “Energizer”
● Under the table:
- One telephone outlet for digital desk phone
- One power outlet for desk lamp
● Active multi-media jack-pack (hub) connected to the TV. Location by the Interior
Designer. Jack- pack to support:
- VGA with Audio
- AV I/O (RCA Component)
- HDMI
- USB
- Bluetooth (optional)
- HDMI connection to TV
● Table down light, if applicable. Switch shall be added as required.
● One power outlet for art light, if applicable.
Note: Desk lamp, if loose, to have a built –in dimmer switch and be independent from the
bedside master switch, but not from all on/off switch.

Bathroom Wet Area

● A minimum of two waterproof down lights for each of the tub vestibule and shower
vestibule.
● Minimally one light in the guestroom entry area and one light in the bathroom area
remain lit when the building electrical supply goes into emergency mode.

Bathroom Dry/Dressing Area Closet

Bathroom Dry/Dressing Area
The following are the minimum requirements for this area:
● Two light switches to control bathroom lighting. For bathroom with two entrances, each
entrance shall have 2 sets of two-way light switches consisting of:
- One dimmer switch for down light circuit
- One switch for other lights
● Two or more down lights in bathroom dry and dressing areas.
● Two wall-mounted light fixtures in bathroom dry and dressing areas.
● One night-light located near the Bathroom/Vestibule path; controlled by wall switch
and motion detector.
● One occupancy / motion sensor operated night light located under the vanity center.
● Two light fixtures in WC area
● One power outlet for the iron at closet area.
● One power outlet for illuminated make-up mirror at vanity counters (optional).
● One dual voltage shaver outlet 110-220 V.
● One convenience GFCI power outlet.
 Anti-fog mirror including power connection above vanity.

207
GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

 Under floor heating and / or heated towel bar as required by local climatic conditions.
System shall either be electric or hot water based. Connected to the RCU or BAS.
Shall be addressable and centrally controlled through the integrated room
management solution.
● Connection for LCD TV (15” minimum or as per project specific requirement).
- Preferably integrated with vanity mirror
- Coaxial connection
- Data connection
- One power outlet with GFCI
● One telephone outlet for wall-mounted telephone slim type (with dial pad). Location
chosen by the Interior Designer.
● One power outlet for hair dryer (minimum 1600 W) at closet, dry or dressing area, or
near make-up table. Should the hair dryer outlet be located at or near the vanity then
a GFCI outlet shall be used.
● Audio Speakers
- Concealed location
- Volume switch (not required if the TV is provided in the bathroom), wired to Living
Area TV
- Connect to bathroom TV if TV is provided in bathroom
Closet
● One light fixture in closet controlled via micro switch in doorframe.
● Electric “door chime” (located inside the closet).
- Integrated with the “Do Not Disturb” switch.
 Room Control Unit (RCU)
- Programmable and addressable.
- Compatible with third party vendor controls, switches and thermostats.
- Interface with PMS, BAS, and electronic door locking system.
- Centrally monitored and controlled at Communication Center.

Suites

Operational Concept
All light fixture requirements shall be specified by the lighting consultant in coordination
with the Interior designer.
Minimum requirements for suites are identical to those of the Guestroom with the
following additions:

Entrance Area
● Localized electronic programmable dimming system
● Occupancy sensor operated “Energizer”

208
GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

Sleeping and Living Area

Sleeping Area
● TV connections similar to typical guestroom
● High Definition Blu-ray DVD player connected to the TV
● One power outlet for High Definition Blu-ray DVD player
● Localized electronic programmable dimming system
● Power connection for electric drapery

Living Area
● Audio/Visual System
- TV Connection similar to typical guestroom
- Connection for component audio systems to the TV consisting of:
 High Definition Blu-ray DVD/CD player
 Sources, mixers and amplifiers
 Surround sound system
 Designer type floor speakers
 Coax connection
 Data connection
 One duplex power outlet
 Active-multi media jack-pack (hub) outlets
● Localized electronic programmable dimming system
● Power and telephone outlets for hands-free speaker telephone
- Cordless

Bathroom Area
Bathroom Dry/Closet/Dressing Area
● Localized electronic programmable dimming system
● Power connections for sauna, steam room and whirlpools as required
● Additional speakers for sauna and whirlpool area
● Emergency stop and first aid alarm device is required for saunas and whirlpools
● Walk-in closets may need additional light fixtures and a local switch

Separate Dining
Dining Area
● Localized electronic programmable dimming system
● Power outlet for general purpose
● Telephone outlet
● Designer type floor speakers and connected to the living area AV systems
● Light fixtures as required

Kitchen/Pantry
● Power connections for dishwashers, toaster, microwave, ovens, refrigerators, sink
disposals, exhaust hoods, room service cart warmer, drink mixer, and as specified by
the kitchen designer
● Localized electronic programmable dimming system

209
GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

● Power outlet for loose equipment above counter with GFCI (2)
● Telephone outlet for slim-type phone

Separate Study Area

Guestroom study area to have the following addition:
● Power outlet for compact laser or inkjet printer concealed in drawer
● Lighting switch as required
● Light fixtures as required

Powder Room (if applicable)

● A minimum of two light fixtures
● Lighting switch
● Power outlet above vanity with GFCI

Exterior Balcony
All exterior balconies shall be provided with the following minimum features:
● Weatherproof light fixture with switch located in the room.
● Weatherproof duplex power outlets.

Graphics
 Provide graphics for switches to be coordinated with the Signage consultant. Graphics
shall be as follows:
- Master.
- Reading.
- Living areas (if applicable).
- DND.
- Night light.
- Bathroom.
- Vanity.
- Ceiling fan.
 Internationally accepted signage can be considered subject to approval from T.S.

See Attachment: Sample Typical Guestroom (King/Twin) Power/Lighting/ ELV Outlets

Provisions
See Attachment: Sample Lighting Control Matrix for Typical Guestroom
See Attachment: Sample 2-Bay Suite Typical Power/Lighting/ ELV Outlets Provision
See Attachment: Sample Lighting Control Matrix for 2-Bay Suite

210
 Attachments
Guestroom Technology
GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

Sample Typical Guestroom (King / Twin) Power / Lighting / ELV Outlets Provisions
09 BATHROOM
01 ENTRANCE
TYPE USAGE
TYPE USAGE
SW02 Bath 1 Light (All Down lights) Dimmer
OS1 Occupancy Sensor Operated Energizer
13 SW03 Bath 2 Light (Mirror Light + Cove Lights)
SW01 Do Not Disturb (DND) Switch (c/w LED Indicator) To be revisited for PH
OS03 Occupancy sensor for bathroom night light
DC Door Contact Switch for courtesy light
10 VANITY COUNTER
02 MINIBAR
TYPE USAGE
TYPE USAGE
SO Anti-fog Mirror
SO Coffee or Tea Hot Water Kettle
SO Hair Dryer (Hard wired type preferred)
05 SO* Mini-bar (country duplex outlet) SO Dual Voltage 110 – 220V for Shaver
DATA Mini-bar SO Shaving Mirror
03 TV SET SO GFCI General Purpose ( country standard for curling iron, etc.)
TV TV Point ( For Park THE OPERATOR)
TYPE USAGE SO TV( Country Simplex) ( For Park THE OPERATOR)
SO* TV (country outlet) SPKR Speaker (Bathroom without TV)
SO* Set-top Box( country outlet) VC Volume Control for Speaker (Bathroom without TV)
DATA IPTV AV Audio Connection from TV to Speaker (Bathroom without TV)
04 TV SMATV
AV High Definition Blue Ray DVD connected to TV( for Park THE OPERATOR) 11 WC CUBICLE
SO High Definition Blue Ray DVD ( for Park THE OPERATOR) TYPE USAGE
AV HDMI Connection from Active Multi-Media Jack Pack TEL Telephone (near to W.C.)
AV Audio Connection to Bathroom from TV
12 CLOSET
06 04 STUDY AREA
TYPE USAGE
TYPE USAGE
SW Door Micro-switch for Closet Light
SO* One Country and Two Universal Standard (above desk)
SO Iron (Regency, Grand and Andaz )
DATA Wired Broadband Internet (above desk)
SO Door Bell Chime
AV Active Multi-Media Jack Pack with HDMI Connection to TV (above desk)
SW13 Down Light ( if applicable) 13 BALCONY/PATIO DOOR OR OPERABLE WINDOW
03 SO Desk Lamp (below desk)( Switched at base on 3-level dimmer)
TYPE USAGE
TEL Telephone (below desk)
SW Micro-switch connected to FCU
05 BALCONY AND SITTING AREA
14 CORRIDOR
TYPE USAGE
02 SW12 Balcony Light (if any) TYPE USAGE
SO Balcony Country Weatherproof Power Outlet (if any) SW Door Bell Push connected to DND
SO Floor Lamp - LED for DND

06 BEDSIDE (RIGHT) LEGEND

TYPE USAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
07 SW05 Bedside Master R Thermostat with Digital Display + ON/OFF, Three Speed Control
08 AC + Temperature Control.
SW07 Reading Light R (“push down style” dimmer)(if Ceiling Mounted)
SW09 Night Light R (c/w LED indicator) AV Audio Visual Point
SW11 Bedside Lamp R( if wall mounted or out of guest reach) DATA 4 Pair CAT-6 Data Point
SW15 Bedside Lamp R ALL ON / OFF Power outlets not connected to Occupancy Sensor operated. Connected to
SO* the emergency power.
SW Electric Curtain – Sheer & Blackout (if any)
TEL Telephone (below nightstand) SO Power Outlet
09 SO* Cordless Phone SW# Lighting Switch (# should be refer to the Lighting Control Matrix)
SO* Bedside Lamp( if loose fixture) (below nightstand) TEL 4 Pair CAT-6 Telephone Point
SO* Universal Outlet (easily accessible by guest) TV Television Coaxial Point
SO* MP3 Docking Station (below nightstand) SPKR Speaker
VC Volume Control
07 BEDSIDE (LEFT) DC Door Contact Switch
TYPE USAGE OS Occupancy Sensor Switch
11 SW04 Bedside Master L
REMARKS
SW06 Reading Light L (“push down style” dimmer)( If Ceiling Mounted)
10 SW08 Night Light L (c/w LED indicator) TYPE DESCRIPTION
SW10 Bedside Lamp L 1 Should read in conjunction with the Lighting Control Matrix.
TEL Telephone (below night stand) Wireless broadband internet should be provided but the corresponding
SW14 Beside Lamp L ALL ON / OFF 2 MEP provisions are not shown as they should be included in the Data
SO* Cordless Phone Network Infrastructure.
SO Bedside Lamp( if loose fixture) (below nightstand) Active Multi-Media Jack Pack shall consist of VGA, AV, HDMI +
3 Bluetooth. HDMI cable Connection to TV.
12 SO* Universal Outlet (easily accessible by guests)
Micro-switch connections to operable windows and balcony/patio doors to
08 GENERAL 4 disable FCU when opened.
01 TYPE USAGE The selection and setting-out of all outlets that are exposed to view which
AC Thermostat 5 include socket outlets, switches, DND switch, AV points and thermostat
SO General Purpose (300mm AFFL) should be coordinated with the Interior Designer.
Proper labeling should be provided for lighting switches at bedside and at
OS2 Occupancy Sensor working together with OS1 and DC 6 locations where confusion may arise due to groups of switches.
14

210.1
 GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

Sample Typical Guestroom Lighting Control Matrix

ENTRANCE DND BATH 1 BATH 2 GENERAL READING READING NIGHT NIGHT BEDSIDE BEDSIDE DESK DESK FLOOR BALCONY
LIGHTING INDICATOR LIGHT CLOSET LIGHT LIGHT LAMP L LAMP R DOWN
LIGHT (Note 1) (Note 2) L R LAMP LAMP LIGHT
(LED) (Note 3) BATH ENTRY Note 7 Note 7 LIGHT
SWITCHES ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
COURTESY LIGHT
DC (DOOR CONTACT X X
ACTIVATED)
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
OPERATED
ENERGIZER
X X X X
(WELCOME MODE)
OS01
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
OPERATED
ENERGIZER
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
OFF
DND SWITCH (LED)
SW01
ON/OFF X X
BATH 1 ( Dimmer)
SW02
ON/OFF X X
BATH 2
SW03
ON/OFF X X
BATHROOM
OS03
NIGHTLIGHT X X
CLOSET (Door switch)
MSW
OPEN/CLOSE X X
BEDSIDE MASTER L
SW04
ON /OFF X X X X
BEDSIDE R
SW05
ON / OFF X X X X
READING L (Dimmer)
SW06 ON/OFF X X
READING R (Dimmer)
SW07 ON/OFF X X
NIGHT LIGHT L (LED)
SW08 ON / OFF X X X X
NIGHT LIGHT R (LED)
SW09 ON / OFF X X X X
BEDSIDE LAMP L
SW10
ON/FF X X
BEDSIDE LAMP R
SW11
ON/OFF X X
DESK LAMP (Built-in
-
switch) X X
BALCONY
SW12
ON/OFF X X
DESK DOWN LIGHT
SW13
ON/OFF X X
BEDSIDE ALL L
SW14
ON/ OFF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
BEDSIDE ALL R
SW15
ON / OFF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
FLOOR LAMP
-
ON/OFF X X
Notes:
1. Bath 1 (Dimmer)- All ceiling downlights at WC + Shower + Bathtub + Vanity Counter.
2. Bath 2 (On / Off)- Vanity Wall Sconces & Cove lights at WC + Shower + Bathtub. Welcome mode to include for open type bathroom only.
3. General light includes downlights, picture lights, minibar lights and cove lights at Living and Study Areas.
4. Room Control Unit (RCU) to be adopted for lighting control and should be interlocked with the BAS and Property Management System for enegy saving control as detailed in our Engineering Recommendations and Minimum Standards (ERMS).
5 In an open style bathroom or living areas with more lighting fixtures, the Lighting Control Matrix shall be different.
6 WC with two or more light fixtures shall require a separate switch.

210.2
 GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

7 For Loose Fixtures, dimmer swtches shall be built-in to the base

8. Guest should be able to turn on any light independently during ALL OFF mode.

9. Bathroom night light will be operated by an occupancy sensor in adition to the switches at the bedsice. Occupancy sensor should turn the bathroom night light on even when the lighting is in ALL OFF mode.

210.3
 GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

Sample 2-Bay Suite Typical Power / Lighting / ELV Outlets Provisions

01 LIVING AREA ENTRANCE 13 GENERAL (BEDROOM)
TYPE USAGE TYPE USAGE
OS01 Occupancy Sensor Operated Energizer SO Floor Lamp

15 DC Door Contact Switch 14 BEDSIDE (R)

13 14 SW01 Do Not Disturb (DND) Switch (c/w LED Indicator) To be revisited for PH TYPE USAGE
SO Door Chime
SW09 Bedside Master R
02 MINIBAR SW11 Reading Light R (“push down style” dimmer)( if ceiling mounted)
SW13 Night Light R (c/w LED indicator)
TYPE USAGE SW15 Bedside Lamp ( if wall mounted)
SO Coffee or Tea Hot Water Kettle SW17 Bedside ALL ON / OFF R
SO* Minibar SO Bedside Lamp( if loose fixture)
DATA Minibar SW02 Do Not Disturb (DND) Switch (c/w LED Indicator)
03 DINING/STUDY AREA TEL Telephone (below nightstand)
SO* For Cordless Phone
TYPE USAGE SO* Universal Power Outlet (easily accessible by guests)
SO* One Country and Two Universal Standard (above desk)
DATA Wired Broadband Internet 15 BEDSIDE (L)
12 TYPE USAGE
TEL Telephone (below desk)
SO Desk Lamp (below desk) SW08 Bedside Master L
04 CORRIDOR SIDE SW10 Reading Light L (“Push down style” dimmer)( if ceiling mounted)
SW12 Night Light L (c/w LED indicator)
TYPE USAGE SW14 Bedside Lamp L( if wall mounted)
SW Bell Push SW16 Beside ALL ON / OFF L
11 10 - LED for DND ( To be revisited for Park THE OPERATOR) SO Bedside Lamp( if loose fixture)
17 16 SO* MP3 Docking Station Power outlet( at window side)
05 LIVING AREA Electric Curtain/Blockout + Sheer (if any, locate at the Balcony/Window
SW side)
TYPE USAGE
09 SO* One Country and One Universal Standard (above desk) TEL Telephone (below nightstand)
AV Active Multi-Media Jack Pack with HDMI Connection to TV (above desk) SO* Cordless Phone
SO* MP3 Docking Station Power outlet SO* Universal Power Outlet (easily accessible by guests)
08 OS02 Occupancy Sensor for Living Area 16 CLOSET
07 05
06 BALCONY/PATIO/OPERABLE WINDOW AND SITTING AREA TYPE USAGE
TYPE USAGE SO Iron
06 MSW Door Micro-switch for Closet Light ( Local switch for walk-in closet)
SW03 Balcony Light (if any)
SO Sitting Area Floor Lamp 17 TV SET (BEDROOM)
02 03 SW Balcony/Patio/Operable Window Micro Switch connected to FCU TYPE USAGE
SW Electric Curtain – Sheer & Blackout (if any)
SO* TV (country duplex outlets)
SO Electric Curtain – Sheer & Blackout (if any)
SO Balcony Country Weatherproof Power Outlet (if any) DATA IPTV
SO* Set-top Box
TV SET + HIGH DEFINITION BLUE RAY DVD PLAYER TV SMATV
07
01 (LIVING AREA)
18 POWDER ROOM(If Any)
TYPE USAGE
TYPE USAGE
04 SO* TV + High Definition Blue Ray DVD Player (country duplex outlet)
SO* Set-top Box SW Powder Room lights
DATA IPTV SO GFCI Country Standard Power outlet
TV SMATV LEGEND
AV HDMI Connection from Active Multi-Media Jack Pack
TYPE DESCRIPTION
AV Audio & Visual Connection from DVD Player to Living Room TV
Thermostat with Digital Display + ON/OFF, Three Speed Control
AC + Temperature Control.
08 BEDROOM ENTRANCE (OUTSIDE BEDROOM)
TYPE USAGE AV Audio Visual Point
SW02 Dining /Study Table Light( Dimmer) DATA 4 Pair CAT-6 Data Point
SW04 Living / Dinning Area Master SO Socket Outlet
Power Outlets not connected to Key Card Energizer. Connected to the
AC Thermostat SO* emergency power.
SO General Purpose Country Standard ( 300mm AFFL)
SW# Lighting Switch (# should be refer to the Lighting Control Matrix)
09 BEDROOM ENTRANCE (INSIDE BEDROOM) TEL 4 Pair CAT-6 Telephone Point
TYPE USAGE TV Television Coaxial Point
SPKR Speaker
SW05 Bedroom Entrance Master DC Door Contact Switch
OS03 Occupancy sensor for bedroom entrance OS Occupancy Sensor Switch
11 VANITY COUNTER
TYPE USAGE 10 BATHROOM REMARKS
SO Anti-fog Mirror TYPE USAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
SO Hair Dryer (Hard wired type preferred) SW06 Bath 1 Light (All Down lights)( Dimmer) 1 Should read in conjunction with the Lighting Control Matrix.
SO Shaving Mirror SW07 Bath 2 Light (Wall Sconces + Cove Lights) Wireless broadband internet should be
provided but the
corresponding
SO Dual Voltage 110 – 220V for Shaver 2 MEP provisions are not shownthey as should be
included the Data
AC Thermostat
SO GFCI General Purpose Country Standard( for curling iron, etc) AV Bathroom TV Point Network Infrastructure.
OS04 Occupancy Sensor for vanity area Active Multi-Media Jack Pack shall consist of VGA, AV, HDMI
SPKR Speaker 3 + Bluetooth. HDMI cable Connection to TV.
SO Bathroom TV Micro-switch connections to operable windows and balcony/patio doors to
12 WC CUBICLE 4
disable FCU whenand
The opened. all that are to view w
TYPE USAGE selection
socket setting-out of outlets DND
outlets, switches, exposed points
TEL Telephone (near to W.C.) 5 include switch, AV and thermostat
should be coordinated with the Interior Designer.
Proper labeling should be provided for lighting switches at bedside and at
6 locations where confusion may arise due to groups of switches.

210.4
 GUESTROOM TECHNOLOGY

Sample Lighting Control Matrix for 2-Bay Suite

LIVING AREA DINING AREA BEDROOM
LIGHTING ENTRANCE DND GENERAL DESK SIDE FLOOR BALCONY GENERAL DINING BATH 1 BATH 2 NIGHT GENERAL CLOSET READING L READING NIGHT BEDSIDE BEDSIDE FLOOR
LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT LAMP TABLE LAMP LIGHT LIGHT TABLE (Note 1) (Note 2) LIGHT LIGHT R LIGHT LAMP L LAMP R LAMP
SWITCHES (Note3) (Note 7) LAMPS (Note 7) (Note 4) LIGHT BATH (Note 5) Bedroom (Note 7) (Note 7) (Note 7)
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
DND SWITCH (LED)
SW01
ON/OFF
X X
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
OPERATED ENERGIZER X X X X
OS01 ON (WELCOME MODE)
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
OPERATED ENERGIZER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
OFF
DC COURTESY LIGHT
(DOOR CONTACT X X
ACTIVATED)
DINNING TABLE
SW02
ON/OFF( Dimmer) X X
DESK LAMP
-
ON/OFF (Note 7) X X
BALCONY
SW03
ON/OFF (Note 7) X X
FLOOR LAMP
-
ON/OFF (Note 7) X X
LIV / DIN MASTER
SW04
ON / OFF
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
BEDROOM MASTER
SW05 ON X X
BEDROOM MASTER
ALL OFF X X X X X X X X X X X
BATH 1 ( Dimmer)
SW06
ON/OFF X X
BATH 2
SW07
ON/OFF X X
OS04 BATHROOM NIGHTLIGHT
X X
FLOOR LAMP ON/OFF (
-
Note 7)
X X
MSW CLOSET (Door Switch) X X
OPEN/CLOSE
SW08 BEDSIDE MASTER L X X
ON / OFF
SW09 BEDSIDE MASTER R X X
ON / OFF
SW10 READING L (Dimmer) X X
ON/OFF
SW11 READING R (Dimmer) X X
ON/OFF
SW12 NIGHT LIGHT L (LED) X X X X
ON / OFF
SW13 NIGHT LIGHT R (LED) X X X X
ON / OFF
BEDSIDE LAMP L
SW14
ON/OFF (Note 7) X X
BEDSIDE LAMP R
SW15
ON/OFF (Note 7) X X
SW16
BEDSIDE ALL L
ON /OFF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SW17
BEDSIDE ALL R
ON / OFF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SIDE TABLE LAMPS
SW (
Note 7) X X
Notes:
1. Bath 1 (Dimmer) - All ceiling downlights at WC + Shower + Bathtub + Vanity Counter.
2. Bath 2 (On/Off) - Mirror lights & Cove lights at WC + Shower + Bathtub. Switch ON from Bedroom Master(at entrance) only when bathroom is an open concept.
3. Living Area general light includes downlights and cove lights at Living and Study Areas.
4. Dinning Area general light includes downlights and cove lights at Dinning Area except the light fixtures directly above the dinning table.
5. Bedroom general light includes downlights, picture lights and cove lights at bedroom.
6. Three-level switch when built-in to the base.
7. All loose floor lamps, side table lamps and bedside table lamps shall be provided with built-in dimmer switch.
8. Room Control Unit (RCU) to be adopted for lighting control and should be interlocked with the FCU for enegy saving control as detailed in our Engineering Recommendations and Minimum Standards (ERMS).
9. Guest should be able to turn on any light independently during all OFF mode.
10. Bathroom night light will be operated by an occupancy sensor in addition to the switches at the bedside. Occupancy sensor should turn the bathroom night light on even when the light is in ALL OFF mode.

210.5
Operational Concept
The MATV (Master Antenna Television System) and ITV (Interactive Television) head
end equipment will be located in the same or adjacent room to the PABX, computer
equipment. It is from this location that the MATV and ITV will be distributed throughout
the building using the below defined infrastructure.

System Requirements
 System must totally be IP based in content, delivery and storage.
 A minimum of 30 High Definition and Standard Definition channels should be
provided. Channel line-up will be provided at a later date but must offer a mixture of
Local/ International News, Sports, Financial, and Entertainment channels.
● System should provide a minimum of 6 free-to-guest music channels.
● System should provide customizable wall screen in which the property can customize
the welcome page by displaying guest name, messages to the guest, as well as
services and amenities the hotel has to offer.
● Express Check-out and Folio review by the guest.
● Customizable channel Line-up based on guest preference or language preference.
● Provide full video control on ITV programming such as fast forward, rewind, pause,
etc.
● ITV to store content locally on server within hotel and to receive updated movies via a
satellite feed. Delivery of movies via a DVD is not preferred method and should be
avoided wherever possible.
● System must interface into the PMS system to receive guest preference as well as
perform billing to the PMS system.
● As an option High Speed Internet can be offered via the MATV/ITV solution, however
a dedicated wired and wireless High Speed Internet provider will also be installed in
the hotel.
● Both systems shall be provided with a minimum 30 minutes UPS power source.

System Cabling Requirements

● System should have no more than 1 second delay when changing channels and no
more than 2 seconds when changing screen.
● UTP/Fiber Ethernet network - cabling scheme will be utilized to support this system.

211
MASTER ANTENNA AND INTERACTIVE TV SYSTEMS

● The Ethernet solution for the MATV/ITV system will be a dedicated and completely
separate network from the BOH Ethernet network. It will utilize the guest network and
will need to be coordinated with the HSIA provider.
● Cabling specifications will need to be based on the requirements of the
manufacturers, however at minimum they must support the following:
- The Ethernet Riser cable will be fiber optic based
- The Ethernet horizontal cable will be Category 6, 4 pair cable at a minimum.
Preliminary MATV Outlet Schedule

Location Quantity

Typical Guestroom Bedroom (1)

Bathroom (1) if required
Junior Suites Bedroom (1)
Living room (1)
Bathroom (1) if required
Three Bays and above suites Bedroom (1)
Living room (1)
Bathroom (1)
Spa & Health Club*
 Reception Minimum (2)
 Exercise Room As needed
 Aerobics Minimum (2)
 Treatment room Bedroom (1)
Communication Center Minimum (1)
Restaurant
 Bar Minimum (2)
 VIP Room 1 per room
Meeting Rooms 1 per room
 Pre-Function Minimum (2)
Ballrooms 1 per room
 Pre-Function Minimum (2)
Employee Cafeteria 2
MATV room Minimum (3)
GM’s Office (1)
Electrical Shop (3)

* A coax solution shall still be provided to the cardio vascular equipment in the spa,
please coordinate with the spa equipment provider for details.

212
MASTER ANTENNA AND INTERACTIVE TV SYSTEMS

Note: All location shall be coordinated with the Interior Designer and Architect, and the
quantity of outlets per area might change based on specific requirements of each
project.

213
Operational Concept
Hotel security is a growing concern among travelers throughout the world. One only has
to look at the negative impact on hotel bookings, following a highly publicized tourist
attack, to see how important the perception of security is to the traveler.
When there is a choice, travelers will seek out a hotel property that has superior security
features and services, particularly if the destination is considered to be a potentially high-
risk environment for crime or terrorism. It is therefore compelling in today’s business
environment that security considerations are fully integrated into the design and
development attributes of a property.

Security Environment Rating

To determine the Security Environment of a property, open-source (i.e. non-classified
and publicly accessible) intelligence information will be obtained and reviewed by THE
OPERATOR
Corporate Security for every location where a THE OPERATOR brand property exists or is planned.
In addition to open-source intelligence information provided by commercial and
government databases, the security environment of a property will also incorporate local
intelligence information gathered by THE OPERATOR and security consultants
working on the company’s behalf.
Upon obtaining intelligence information from each of the above-named sources for each
country (and where possible, the specific city), a numeric value will be assigned to the
information from 1 through 4 corresponding to Low, Moderate, High and Extreme risk
ratings.
The numeric value system used will be as follows:
● International properties that receive a score of 2.5 or below will be considered by
THE OPERATOR Corporate Security to be located in a “Normalized Security Environment.”
● International properties that receive a score of 2.6 or greater will be considered by
THE OPERATOR Corporate Security to be located in an “Elevated Security Environment.”
● Domestic U.S. properties (assessed via the CAP Index program) that received a
score of 400 or greater will be considered by THE OPERATOR Corporate Security to be located in
an “Elevated Security Environment.”
- For all properties, the security environment will be used as a guide in determining
the level of physical, technical and operational security instituted at a THE OPERATOR Hotel
property.
- Security design considerations will identify enhancements required for those
properties where an “Elevated Security Environment” has been determined.

214
SECURITY SYSTEMS

As Security Environment is dynamic in that it is constantly changing and evolving, THE

OPERATOR Corporate Securitywill be regularly updating the security environment scores given to
each property around the world.
It must also be recognized that the security environment of any property can change as
a result of a temporary condition, potentially requiring the property to move from a
Steady State to a Heightened State of the security posture at the property. Steady State
Security are operational security measures used to mitigate the defined risks of the
property’s security environment whereas a Heightened Security State are the
operational security measures used to mitigate increased temporary risks identified in
that same environment.
It is critical for the security design team to plan proactively and anticipate future needs
for these Heightened Conditions.

Use of a Security Consultant

To assist Hotel owners and THE OPERATOR with appropriately determining a
hotel’s overall security environment and assistance in mitigating identified risks, it is
recommended by THE OPERATOR Technical Services that independent security
consulting services be obtained by the Owner when the following conditions are present:
a. The location of the site is generally considered to be at an elevated risk experiencing
either a terrorist act or major criminal act, OR
b. The site is located adjacent to or within close proximity of a critical infrastructure
(airport, utility company, etc.) or a potential terrorist target (embassy, government
building, national landmark, etc.), OR
c. The size or complexity of the development may create unique security challenges for
maintaining a safe and secure environment for our guests, employees and visitors,
OR
d. The property is anticipated to host foreign government officials and / or large events
that are likely to alter the risk to the hotel.
Security Consulting Services
● Security consultant will provide a written opinion as to the risk faced at the specific
site as a fundamental element. of one or more of the following services to the project
team (expanded information can be found in DR&MS and ER&MS Scope of Works
section dealing with “Specialist Consultants”):
● Security Basis of Design or Concepts report will be based on the determined risk
profile of the site; this report shall articulate general security concepts to be integrated
by the Architect into their schematic design of the site. Generally, reports include:
- The methodology used.
- Physical, Technical and Operational Security Concepts
- Outstanding architectural issues or vulnerabilities that cannot be effectively
mitigated based on the site plan or property limitations.
- An overview of security requirements and provisions that have been conveyed in
design criteria documents provided by THE OPERATOR.
- Assistance provided to the Architect during schematic design of the site.
- Assistance provided to the Architect during the Design Development (DD)
process.
- Construction Documentation (CD) preparation assistance.
- Tender and Negotiation assistance.
- Construction Management / Oversight.

215
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Testing / Commissioning.
Security Consultant Selection Criteria
● The following list will describe the information that will be requested and used by
T.S. in the vetting process and the selection of approved Security Consultants:
- Applicable Licensing and / or Certification of Project Director / Lead Consultant.
Acceptable licenses / certifications include:
 Professional Engineer (PE) OR
 Certified Protection Professional (CPP) OR
 Physical Security Professional (PSP) OR
 Applicable certification / experience gained through direct employment and
formal training from a military service or government agency specifically
relating to physical / facility security.
- Independence Attestation: No affiliation with security equipment suppliers,
manufacturers or distributors.
- Qualifications and Relevant Hotel Experience: Project size, location in the world,
complexity and overall security environment.
- Client References: Three references from recent project work. One client MUST
be from a Hotel / Hospitality organization.
- Defined Methodology: Identification of the exact industry-accepted methodology
used during assessment and design work.
- Resume and Profiles: of the Project Director / Lead Consultant and Relevant Staff.

Physical Security Requirements and Standards

Terrorism Mitigation Design

For locations, where the risk of terrorism is a concern the use of physical barriers and
controls to create a “standoff distance” at the property is viewed as critical in an effort to
mitigate the risk of terrorism and / or reduce the affect of a terrorist incident’s impact to
THE OPERATOR guests, employees and property.
For properties considered to be in Elevated Security Environments, the overall design of
the property must incorporate the following requirements and standards:
Terrorism Mitigation Design Requirements
● Consideration shall be given to mitigating the affects of the following types of terrorist
incidents:
- Moving Vehicle Bombs (Vehicle Borne Improvised Explosive Device or VBIED)
- Stationary Vehicle Bombs
- Improvised Explosive Device (IED)
- Suicide Bomber
- Exterior Attack by multiple aggressors using a variety of weapons including
firearms, explosive devices and hand grenades
● Design strategies surrounding the application of physical barriers and controls shall
include, but is not limited to the following:
- Maintain as much distance as possible between a location where an unscreened
vehicle is positioned and the hotel.
- Minimize accessible vehicle entrances and establish security screening processes
to safeguard against planted IEDs or Suicide Bombers.

216
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Harden the hotel, as much as practical, to minimize the resulting damage

associated with an explosion.
Terrorism Mitigation Design Standard
 Establishment of a Defined Perimeter to include:
- Natural or Structural perimeter protective barriers positioned throughout the
perimeter of the property that defines a hotel’s boundaries and deters penetration
by a vehicle.
 Natural barriers can include topographical features such as rivers, cliffs,
canyons, dense growth, trees, ditches, berms, etc.
 Structural barriers can include fencing with reinforced cable, installation of
high curbs, cement barricades, pipe bollards, concrete planters, etc.
- Through a defined and hardened perimeter, the “Standoff Distance” will have
been created which is the practical distance between the hotel structure and an
“unscreened” vehicle or parcel.
 The established Zone shall be clearly identified in the local security
documentation.
 The Safe Stand-Off Zone shall not extend to property that is outside of the
security control of the hotel owner, and the line delineating the Zone may be at
various distances from the target building at different points on its perimeter as
a result.
 Where it is practical, a distance of 45 meters should be used as the Zone for
vehicles and 15 meters for persons and small packages. Where these
distances are not reasonably possible, the maximum practical distance
available under the conditions and circumstances should be used.
- Permanent Guard Post Positions
 Depending on the layout and topography of the property, applicable locations
may need the ability to screen pedestrians and baggage at the perimeter of
the property which may include:
- Human Surveillance of all pedestrian entries / exits to and from the
property
- Identity Verification
- Hand-held and Walk-Through Metal Detectors
- Manual or Technical screening of baggage
- Installation of Speed Control Mechanisms to slow approaching vehicles where
obstacles are placed in a serpentine pattern in hotel driveways including
decorative ornaments, natural vegetation or other aesthetically pleasing items
- Installation of dynamic crash-rated vehicle barriers at all Vehicle Entrances such
as retractable bollards, drum-type barriers and reinforced sliding gate barriers to
allow Comprehensive Vehicle Screening Process prior to their admittance to the
grounds.
- Reinforcement of Building Exterior: Walls and Roofs use reinforced masonry,
reinforced concrete or constructing a second outer wall on the exterior of the
building to provide greater resistance to explosions
- Windows and Window Frames
 Installation of fragment-retention film or laminated glass.
 Use of a blast curtain or heavy drapes behind windows.
 Replacement of windows and window frames with blast resistant glazing
products or window laminates which all retain the appearance and aesthetics
of the window.

217
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Doors and Foyers

 Blast resistant doors and frames.
 Multiple sets of doors in a foyer.
 The ability to remotely and electronically lock and monitor all perimeter doors
from a central location.
- Restricted Parking
 Where possible, parking at hotels located in an elevated security
environments should be prohibited in the following locations:
- Underground.
- Adjacent to the Hotel.
- Controlled Access to the Hotel
 Limit all Primary and Secondary Entrances.
 Appropriate signage shall be used to direct visitors and guests to the proper
entrance location to the hotel.
 Main hotel doors shall be controlled and monitored, both in person and
remotely, at all times.
 Reduce employee entrances locations to one entry / exit.
 Reduce / Eliminate hotel access from retail or other connected
establishments.
 Ensure Emergency Exits are not accessible from the exterior and install
appropriate alarm and surveillance, so remote monitoring can be
accomplished.
 Maintain Security at Loading Docks.
 Provide handheld explosive detection equipment and x-ray screening, where
applicable.
 Provide security screening equipment at all approved pedestrian access
points.
- Interior Control Mechanisms.
- Restricted access to back-of-house from front-of-house.
- Restricted access to critical rooms within the back-of-house including the
computer / IT room, PABX, MEP and Security areas.
- Installation of keycard locks mechanisms on all Function Rooms.
- Restricted access to guestroom floors via elevator and stairwell controls.
- Application of all Pedestrian Access and Interior Security controls.

Static Barriers
The hotel’s perimeter should be clearly marked for both business and legal purposes so
that the line between public and private property is delineated. Walls, fences and natural
barriers are common structures for marking territory, controlling access to a facility and
to effectively deter or delay an intrusion attempt. The nature of a perimeter wall, fence or
natural barrier is to:
 Provide a legal boundary.
 Control & allow screening of authorized entries.
 Allow early detection of an intruder.
 Deter casual intruders.
 Cause an intruder to take an overt action that demonstrates intent.
 Establish a physical & psychological deterrent.
 Allow for effective use of officer & security monitoring forces.
 Make unauthorized entry difficult.

218
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Delay entry time, providing more chance for detection.

Static Barrier Requirements
 Must extend throughout the perimeter of the property and in accordance with needs
outlined in available security assessment / basis of design reports. Barriers can be
natural (e.g. a river) or manmade. Manmade can be as follows:
- Walls
 Walls must be at least 3 meters high.
 For locations where increased risk of crime is known, walls may include a top
guard of 3 or 4 strands of barbed wire set at a 45 degree angle away from the
interior of the compound. This application must be coordinated with T.S.,
where required.
 Openings such as culverts, tunnels, or manholes that extend under the wall
must be secured when larger than 620 sq cm.
 Maintain clear zones of at least 90-150 cm on both sides of the fence.
- Bollards
 88 cm high, 32 cm width, 154 cm foundation.
 Ornamental steel trim or cast sleeves.
 Galvanized for corrosion.
 Spaced no greater than 1.5 meters apart.
- Fences
 Fences must meet functional, environmental, local legal requirements and the
aesthetic needs of the business and community settings. If a chain link fence
surrounds the perimeter, it must consist of nine-gauge wire with a 50 mm
mesh. The height of the fence will depend on the projected risk to the area,
but 2.4 meters is the minimum.
 For locations where increased risk of crime is known, three-strand barbwire
(top guard) placed on a forty-five degree angle away from the interior is also
required. This application, where required, must be coordinated with T.S.
- Fixed/Portable Barriers
 Concrete.
 Cable.
 Mechanical (hydraulic, electrical).
 Active or passive.
These can be used in layers across entry roads, thereby slowing down vehicles,
and to allow for reaction time from security personnel at entry points.
- Gates
 Gates are breaks in perimeter barrier and therefore must provide the same
level of protection as the rest of the barrier. Where used, they must be
securable and able to withstand penetration by a vehicle.
 Use as few gates as possible. Establish a balance between traffic flow
requirements and security considerations.
 Gate construction material must be consistent with that of the surrounding
fence material.
 Leaf hinged gates are prohibited.
 Appropriate restricted access and traffic control signs must be posted to
indicate that vehicles should proceed only upon instructions from the gate
attendant.

219
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Gate Standards
 Secured either electronically or with heavy-duty padlocks and case hardened
chains.
 Drop-arm type gates with enough arm overhang to prevent it from slipping
easily off its hooked position. Sufficiently rigid to deter unauthorized entry by
bypassing, pushing through or scaling.
 Arms extending at least 60 cm beyond the bollards placed at both ends and
opening mechanism must be chain-driven.
 Automatic gates function manually as “fail safe”. Single locking, manual
locking device does not require the use of a chain.
Properties determined to have an Elevated Security Environment
- Must incorporate static perimeter barriers that adequately prevent unscreened
vehicles / persons from entering the standoff zone.
- Barriers must provide a uniform level of protection throughout the perimeter.
- Resort properties with unsecured beachfront will use a combination of manpower,
natural terrain and barrier walls in such a way that provides the maximum level of
protection along the beach perimeter that does not diminish the aesthetic quality
of the property.

Vehicle Barriers
Vehicle barriers’ purpose is to first prevent unauthorized vehicle access into a
predetermined standoff zone without being authenticated or physically screened and
searched by security personnel. Vehicle Barriers range from conventional traffic control
barriers used in parking garages and surface lots to crash-rated vehicle barriers
deployed at locations where a heightened security risk is present.
Vehicle Barrier Requirements
 Conventional traffic control barriers are acceptable for locations where control of
vehicle access to surface parking, garage parking or loading dock locations is
warranted as a result a crime risk.
 Crash-rated dynamic (operable) vehicle barriers should be employed at all vehicle
entrances for locations where control of vehicle access to surface parking, garage
parking or loading dock locations is warranted as a result of a terrorism risk.
 Traffic controllers enforcing one-way traffic flow at all exit locations may be installed at
dedicated exit points upon approval by T.S. at certain locations where the
reduction of vehicle access points is not possible and determined to be impractical to
install crash-rated vehicle barriers at all access points.
 For high volume areas, a series of barriers can also be employed.
 Vehicle barriers must be designed considering vehicle throughput.
 Suitable Traffic Control Barriers include:
- Parking Control Arms.
- Parking Control Sliding Gates.
 Suitable One-Way Traffic Controllers include:
- Tiger Tooth and related tire shredding devices
 Suitable Crash-rated Vehicle Barriers include:
- Raising Bollards.
- Surface Mount Plate Barriers.

220
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Cable & Chain Beam Barriers.

- Drum Barriers.
- Gate Barriers.
Drum, Plate and Bollard Barriers are generally the fastest acting, however Beam
barriers may be the least obtrusive.
Dynamic (active) crash-rated vehicle barriers can be hydraulic, electric or pneumatic
operated. The preferred method of operation is electric but hydraulic barriers are
acceptable; pneumatic should be avoided wherever possible.
Vehicle Barrier Standard
 All vehicle barriers deployed as a result of the risk of terrorism must have passed a
government-sponsored crash test including, but not limited to:
- United States of America (USA) Department of State (DS) Crash Test Certification
where the barrier achieved a rating of K4 / L1 or greater.
 Dynamic barrier with a rating greater than K4 / L1 may be required for loading
docks or vehicle paths where a speed greater than 48 kph is possible.
- United Kingdom / British Standards Institute (BSI) specification PAS 68:2007
where the barrier successfully prevented a penetration of a 6,800 kg vehicle
traveling at 48 kph.
- Applicable foreign government standard that attests to a successful barrier crash
test where the barrier successfully prevented a penetration of a 6,800 kg vehicle
traveling at 48 kph.
- Drum and Plate barriers should be able to be erected in a maximum of 3 seconds
in an emergency and in 3 to 15 seconds during normal operations.
- Beam barriers should close within 15-20 seconds.
- Depending on the barrier operation, excavation and suitable drainage will be
required with typically a 1.3 m depth for hydraulic operated barriers that require
regular maintenance.
- Dynamic barriers must be used in conjunction with static barriers installed
throughout the perimeter of the property that create the setback and / or standoff
distance.

Vehicle Access Points

Vehicle Access Requirement
 For security control purposes, arriving vehicles must be classified and routed as one
of the following:
- Guest (including visitors).
- Employee.
- Delivery.
- Emergency.
 The front drive must be controlled and surveillance (visual or other) must be in place
from the hotel lobby.
 Vehicular access must be designed to allow for installation of security measures that
will prevent a vehicle from penetrating the main entrance to the hotel (barriers,
bollards or anti-ram devices).
 Wherever possible, vehicle accessibility to a property will be limited.
 Hotels with an Elevated Security Environment
- A maximum of one vehicle access point for guest / visitor related vehicles and one
vehicle access point for hotel service vehicles is permitted.

221
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Landscaping
Landscaping at a property is an integral part of the overall site security plan and must be
incorporated into the site design at on the onset.
Landscaping Requirement
 Six areas of the site must be reviewed by the Landscape Architect including:
- Street.
- Parking Lanes.
- Sidewalks.
- Grounds.
- Building Exterior.
- Building Interior.
 Landscaping should not create a fortress-like effect but should be developed to
reinforce perimeter site security.
 Landscaping should not create areas where people or equipment can be easily
concealed.
 Landscaping should be designed with consideration given to reducing long-term
maintenance requirements.
 Landscaping should be minimized at main entry points to limit the potential for
Improvised Explosive Devices (IED) concealment.
 Natural terrain and Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design (CPTED)
principals shall be used as described below.
Landscaping Standard
 Site grading should limit and direct pedestrian access.
 Perimeters along beachfronts should incorporate both hardscape and softscape
landscape features to define the hotel’s perimeter.
 Ponds, lakes and streams will be considered as adequate perimeter control to prevent
vehicle access, where applicable.
 Shrubs along driveways, walkways and doors and gates should be no more than 60
cm high.
 Small gravel extending two feet from the building façade may be appropriate. Large
rocks and stones are prohibited.
 Tree limbs should be at least 2.15 m off the ground.
 Shrubs near a building should be no greater than 90 cm high.
 Landscaping should ensure a clear line of sight from public roadways.
 Thick borders of shrubs or a hedge should be used along beachfront perimeters to
reinforce the property line and monitor individual movement to and from the beach,
where appropriate and applicable.

Lighting
Lighting helps to decrease crime and provides a strong deterrent to intruders, prowlers
and vandals. Good lighting promotes a more secure environment because it illuminates
those who threaten your property and its occupants. In addition, security lights help to
prevent accidents due to inadequate lighting.
- For locations, Security Lighting must be supplied at entryways for both people and
vehicles. Parking lots and garages and Loading docks.

222
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Lighting at Hotels determined to be in an Elevated Security Environment shall be

equipped with additional lighting in the following locations:
 Grounds.
 Beach.
 Vehicle Screening Locations.
 Pedestrian Screening Locations.
 Perimeter.
Please refer to the Lighting Systems chapter of the ER&MS.

Parking
Parking Requirements
 Exterior building perimeter areas must be illuminated to a minimum maintained level
of 10 lux (one foot-candle) at ground level.
 Open parking lots must have a central control point for access and have the ability to
be monitored via human or technical surveillance where appropriate.
 Physical access measures shall be in place to control parking and limit the facility’s
use to the identified group (hotel guests, visitors, employees, etc.) where necessary
based on the risk of crime, terrorism or related vulnerabilities.
Parking Standard
 Surface Parking
- Surface parking shall be clearly defined with posted signs indicating the area is:
 Private property.
 Reserved for registered guests of the hotel and their visitors.
 Limitation of the hotel’s liability to guest vehicles and belongings.
 Valet & VIP Vehicles
- There must be designated parking for these vehicles and they must be under
constant control and/or surveillance at all times.
 Underground and Garage Parking
- Must have access control systems and CCTV at all entrance(s) and exit(s).
- Must be designed to deter vandalism and theft that can arise from unauthorized
access.
- Must have emergency call boxes positioned in reasonable distances throughout
the parking decks.
- Should include roll-down gates to secure the parking areas during late night or
early morning hours to prevent pedestrians from wandering into the parking
decks.
Parking Control Systems Specification
Car park management system to be microprocessor based with the minimum features:
 The system shall provide user selectable “hard” or “soft” anti – pass back on exits
only, entrances only, or both.
 The system shall provide levels of exception for specific cardholders not subject to
anti – pass back control.
 The system shall support Tenant Specific Space Allocation allowing a pre-designated
number of open parking spaces for each tenant.

223
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 The system shall provide Pre-Pay (Pay On Foot) cashiering with a user selectable
exit grace period.
 The Access Control software shall provide for an optional card use-debiting feature by
dollar amount or by number of uses.
 The system shall provide real time space counting with the ability to display the
status. Definable counters shall include:
- Number of vehicles presently in any lot
- Spaces available in any lot
- Lighted panel for car park area capacity
- Cumulative total entries by entry point
- Cumulative grand total
- Number of Tickets dispensed
- Number of monthlies in any lot
- Non resettable counters
- Cash drawer operations
- All counter transaction data shall be stored to the hard disk for future status
viewing and reports. It shall be possible at a later date to view and/or print out the
status of any counter.
- The system shall produce a counter report on demand recapping the prior 24 hour
period showing all count statistics on an hour- by- hour basis totalizing at the
bottom. Maximum occupancy during any period, or maximum spaces available
during any period shall be reported.
 Car park height sensor with indicating lamp and buzzer to be provided at the entrance
of the parking
 Parking gate arm to be manually and automatically operated
 Slave intercom to be connected at a master intercom in the parking gate house.
 Special Parking Management Software shall be provided with the following features:
- Hotel Guest Parking
- This feature shall allow a clerk to enable guest parking for a 24 hour period based
on the guest’s parking ticket. The ticket shall automatically expire unless
programmed for an extended period.
- Tenant Billing
- For parking operators requiring monthly billing of tenants, it shall be possible to
generate invoices showing one or more cardholders assigned to that tenant,
variable rates for each cardholders assigned to that tenant, variable rates for each
cardholder within a tenant group, extra services, and applicable local taxes.
- The system shall provide for positive posting of payments, which shall
automatically enable all Tenant cardholders as a group, or deactivate all Tenant
cardholders as a group for non-payment.
- A Tenant group may consist of a single cardholder, or a group of cardholders, and
there shall be no limit to the number of Tenant groups or individual Tenant
cardholders.
- Time Management
- It shall be possible to generate reports based on the amount of time cardholders
utilize a parking facility, and it shall be possible to create the reports based on any
time period such as daily, weekly, or monthly. The time calculation shall include
the ability to round up to the nearest half hour to create a basis for tenant billing. It
shall be possible to create reports by individuals, or individuals within tenant
groups with totals based on group totals.

224
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- The software shall permit the user to produce reports, which shall include the
following: System activity by location, time, cardholder, or transaction status.
Parking at Locations in an Elevated Security Environment
 Parking spaces directly adjacent to the hotel building should be avoided wherever
possible.
 Use of underground parking facilities should be prevented.
 Depending on the location, the inspection of vehicles by security personnel must be
designed into the entrance / exit areas of the parking facility to include appropriate
queuing space for vehicles prior to entry.
 Vehicle access into and out of the parking facility may be protected via the use of US /
UK government approved crash-rated vehicle barriers.
 CCTV shall be employed throughout the parking facilities.

Pedestrian Access and Internal Security

Pedestrian Door Requirements
 For security control purposes, pedestrian door designs shall consider the following
personnel classifications and provide security measures and systems based on the
classification of personnel who will be accessing the door:
- Guests.
- Visitors.
- Tenants.
- Employees.
- Contract Workers.
- Deliveries (courier, mail etc.).
 Wherever possible, perimeter access points should be limited.
 All Exterior/Perimeter Doors shall be identified as follows:
- Guest Entry Doors.
- Tenant Entry (where applicable).
- Employee / Contract Worker Entrance.
- Emergency Exits.
- Loading Dock Doors.
 Applicable to local law, signage shall be posted near the front door that notifies
arrivals that this is private property and some people may be asked to leave. The
notification should include that bags and people are subject to inspection, as
permissible by local law. The wording in the signage must be coordinated with
T.S.
 A sign shall be posted at the employee entrance providing notification to employees
that personal bags are subject to search coming in or going out.
 All perimeter and areas with increased security risks shall be monitored through
applicable technology.
 Doors shall be designed so that the lock cannot be reached by breaking out a
vulnerable panel, such as glass.
Exterior / Perimeter Door Standard
 Door hinges shall be designed so that the pins cannot be pulled from the outside.
 Door frames shall be constructed or reinforced to resist spreading or other tampering.

225
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Latch bolts shall be designed to (or reinforced to) prevent being sprung by a thin
instrument from the outside. Exterior doors shall be equipped with a metal “pry plate”
to avoid being sprung.
 Any doors controlled by an on-line access control system shall contain
electromechanical locks or electric strikes. These doors should be programmed to be
“fail-safe” and interface with the hotel’s fire alarm system as appropriate.
 Exterior doors shall be equipped with emergency release mechanisms in accordance
with health and safety requirements and concerns.
 Panic hardware shall be installed on locked entrance/exit doors allowing exit in an
emergency, i.e. "push bar.”
 Alarm shall sound at the Security Command Center (SCC) and locally when doors are
opened unauthorized.
 Guest Entry Doors
- The primary doors or “Main Entrance” should be in close proximity to the Guest
Check-in Desk.
- Shall include CCTV.
- Shall include security screening stations for properties considered to be in areas
with an Elevated Security Environment.
- Shall be controlled via electronic security method. Where possible, guest entry
doors shall be controlled via guest keycard lock devices.
- Should be limited in number wherever possible.
 Tenant Entry Doors (where applicable)
- Shall include CCTV.
- Shall include security screening stations for properties considered to be in areas
with an Elevated Security Environment.
- Should be limited in number wherever possible.
 Employee / Contract Worker Entrance
- Shall include CCTV.
- Shall include security screening stations for properties considered to be in areas
with an Elevated Security Environment.
- Shall be secured and controlled at all times via either an off-line guest keycard
reader or an on-line access control reader.
- Should be limited to one Employee / Contract Worker Entrance.
 Emergency Exits:
- May be maintained in the latched/closed position by electrical power. Loss of
power shall automatically unlock secured doors.
- Shall be equipped with panic devices that do not require prior or special
knowledge or effort by building occupants to exit. Pushing of the panic device
shall automatically unlock secured doors.
- All centrally lockable doors shall be fully addressable to allow full control of locking
and unlocking from the main security center and all duplicate/remote locations.
- Fire stairwell doors and emergency egressways shall be identified with signage
and shall be in accordance with prevailing federal, state and local laws (i.e. 6-A
North, 6-B South marked on the doors).
- Fire stairwells shall be kept free of obstructions and combustibles.
 Loading Dock Doors:
- Provide roll down overhead doors, which are lockable from the inside.
- Loading docks and overhead dock doors shall be monitored at all times.

226
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- The overhead dock doors shall effectively restrict access into the hotel during
times when the loading dock doors are left open.
- Should incorporate CCTV.
Interior Doors / Areas
 Guestrooms:
- Guestroom doors shall be solid core. Door frames must be reinforced.
- See more requirements in the DR&MS standards. In addition, Connecting Doors
shall be equipped with a passage lever door handle set (one handle only) and a
deadbolt lock with a thumb-turn unit and a 25mm throw bolt. As an option, the
thumb-turn can be replaced with a keyed 6 pin cylinder.
 Executive/Presidential/Chairman Suites:
- Corridor surveillance cameras with a local monitor in the suite.
- Ballistic film on windows.
- Self-contained HVAC and Telecommunications
- Analog Telephone line or a line that bypasses the Hotel PABX
- Connecting room.
- Adjacent standard guestrooms for security personnel and aides.
- Reinforced walls, ceiling and floor.
 Guestroom Floor Corridors:
- Floor reentry from emergency stairwells shall be minimized wherever possible,
except during evacuation and selected operational use.
- Any restriction on floor reentry shall be consistent with NFPA 101 where the use
of hi-tower electro-mechanical locking devices on stairwell doors be installed and
interfaced with the hotel’s fire alarm system to unlock when required.
 Function Rooms:
- All doors leading into a Function Room should be secured through the use of
electronic locks associated with the hotel’s off-line guestroom keycard system.
 Restricted Areas in BOH:
- Where on-line access control systems are not present, all corridors leading into
critical BOH areas shall be secured through the use of electronic locks associated
with the hotel’s off-line guestroom key system.
- Where on-line access control systems are present, all corridors leading into critical
BOH areas shall be secured through the use of a card reader and electro-
mechanical lock that is actively monitored.
- Critical areas within BOH that require locking mechanisms include:
 IT / MDF / IDF Rooms.
 MEP areas.
 Liquor storage.
 Executive and Management offices.
 High Value Storage.
 Locker rooms.
 Safe Deposit Box (SDB) Room:
- The door shall have a peephole.
- The door shall have a manual deadbolt with a thumb latch.
- The room shall include CCTV.
 Cashier’s Office:
- Same locking requirement as the Restricted Areas in BOH
- Shall include CCTV.

227
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Baggage Room / Bell Closet:

- Same locking requirement as the Restricted Areas in BOH.
 The bell closet shall be fully-enclosed (no windows).
 Shall be fitted with a lockable, secure storage area within the room for
securing high-value items.
 Shall have a space designated for long-term storage that has a separate lock
(i.e. a locked cage within the bell closet).
- Door to the room shall have door closure that is set properly.
- Shall include CCTV.
 Spa, Fitness Center and Pool Areas:
- All Spas, Fitness Centers and Pools shall be contained within a secure and
controlled environment (i.e. wall, fence, etc.).
- Access to the Spa, Fitness Center or Pool shall be restricted and controlled to
include a self closing door that latches and controlled via one of the following
three mechanisms at all times:
 The guestroom keycard lock system.
 A special electronic key access.
 Spa Attendant .
- For locations where no Spa Attendant is present on a 24 hour basis, access to
these locations shall be remotely monitored via door position switches on the door
that alarm to the Security Command Center (where present) or an 24 hour-staffed
location identifying after-hours access.
 Where present, the remote monitoring of this access point shall be an
extension of the Hotel’s on-line access control system.
- The access point to the Spa, Fitness Center or Pool should be remotely monitored
via fixed surveillance cameras interfaced with the door position switch.
- Any pool area not accessible on a 24-hour basis should be protected through the
use of a subsurface disturbance sensor placed at the furthest point to the water
entry location. Subsurface pool alarms should be manually placed in the pool at
the end of pool hours and remotely monitored by security / alternate personnel.
 The use of surveillance cameras to monitor the pool is prohibited.
Pedestrian Access Points at Properties determined to be in an Elevated
Security Environment
 Access points will be reduced to the bare minimum and tightly controlled.
 Depending on the security risk, the following designated access control points may be
fitted with adequate electrical wiring that will allow for the possible use of metal
detectors and bomb detectors at these locations (for current or future use as detection
sites):
- All guest and visitor entry points.
- Employee entry.
- Goods and delivery entry point.
 All entry/exit doors accessible from ground level shall have access control and be
covered by CCTV cameras from the exterior.
 Each door located at the building(s) perimeter shall be equipped with sensors to
monitor and report the status of the door position. These shall be monitored to ensure
they return to a closed and locked position after opening.
 A limited number of perimeter doors may be fitted with card readers for access
control, including entrance to the hotel via overhead walkways, underground parking,
employee entrances or adjacent / interconnected businesses.

228
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Windows
Window Requirements
 Windows at all Hotels must include the following:
- Windows in ground floor lobby areas and other public areas with exterior windows
such as restaurants, waiting areas, etc. must include laminated glass.
- Where windows at upper levels are operable, the maximum width of the opening
can be no more than 10 cm.
- Exterior, ground level windows shall be equipped with emergency release
mechanisms in accordance with health and safety requirements and concerns.
- The locks on exterior ground-level windows shall be made inaccessible to
someone intent on breaking the window. By use of decorative metal grills or heavy
gauge wire mesh to augment security of window on entry.
 In an Elevated Security Environment may be equipped with one or more of following
additional security enhancements windows:
- Blast-resistant window film on exterior windows in:
 Lobby areas.
 Public areas with exterior windows (restaurants, waiting areas, etc.).
 VIP or Presidential suites to reduce ballistic attack impact.
- Blast-resistant window blinds or treatments that one used as a way to deflect the
impact of an explosive as an alternate under certain conditions.
- Blast-resistant laminated glass.
- Ground-level windows shall be monitored by detection devices (alarms).
 Where windows are enhanced to mitigate the affects of an explosive or bomb blast,
the following standards will apply:
- All blast mitigation applied to exterior windows must conform to the United States
General Service Administration (GSA) blast protection condition 3b, equivalent
conditions set forth in the Interagency Security Committee (ISC) Security Design
Criteria or greater.
- All window laminate must include GSA certified mechanical, wet glaze anchoring
systems or other similar structural adhesive systems on all film to increase its
effectiveness and ensure laminate is anchored to the frame.
 Where windows are enhanced to mitigate the affects of a ballistic, the following
standard will apply:
- Windows must conform to Protection Level 4 using Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL)
standard UL 752.
- The total system of anchor, frame, door material and glazing material must absorb
the energy from the projectile.
- The framing system must also be capable of stopping the potential threat and
retain the glazing system during attack.
- Installing bullet resistant glazing in a non-certified frame will not ensure the
desired level of protection.
- Any ballistic glazing certified to meet a ballistic standard, must be retained in a
certified framing system.

229
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Locks & Keys

Locks and Key Requirements
A lock system is minimally required for all guestrooms, suites, perimeter doors and other
specific areas within front-of-house and back-of-house. The lock system may either be
an electronic lock system consisting of battery powered local door terminals, low voltage
wall terminals controlling multiple electric access control devices or a mechanical lock
system.
 Mechanical Locks and Keys
- Solid brass cylinder and plugs.
- Stainless steel latchbolts.
- Stainless steel mortise deadbolts with minimum of a 25 mm throw.
- ANSI or EN current issue.
- Pin restricted keyway interchangeable core.
 Electronic Locks
- Wireless real-time Online operation through Zigbee technology or equal
- Fully interfaced with property management and point of sale systems, where
applicable and as an option
- Utilize passive RFID with encrypted signal transponder card technology.
Locks and Key Standard
 Mechanical
- Lock systems must be based on Great Grand Master Keying operating concept
(GGMK). Refer to DR&MS for more details.
- Latch bolts shall be designed to (or reinforced to) prevent being sprung by a thin
instrument from the outside.
- Must be suitable for installation with rebated door and rebated door frame.
- Available in DIN Euroset standard, optional ANSI standard mortise locks with prior
written approval from T.S.
- Must be suitable for fitting with third party specified lever or knob.
- Must achieve a minimum fire rating of 90 minutes for DIN Euroset, or 30 minutes
for optional ANSI standard.
- Removable cylinder
- Equipped with lever or knob on corridor side and code compliant lever on room
side.
- Anti-friction latchbolt, anti-thrust device and manual dead bolt. Automatic dead
bolt shall be provided in countries where automatic dead bolt is a requirement.
- Anti friction latchbolt and anti thrust device must have a minimum throw of 20 mm
and be extended when door is open and when closed and aligned correctly with
strike plate.
 Electronic
- Lock systems must be based on Great Grand Master Keying operating concept
(GGMK). Refer to DR&MS for more details.
- Transponder Card:
 Contactless RFID transponder card.
 Complies with ISO 7810 for transponder technology.
 Contains secure manufacturer's unique code in secure, read only memory.
 Writeable, re-codable memory.
 Compatibility with COM multi-application requirements.

230
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Key Issuing Computer and Encoder:

 Vendor to offer portable encoding solution that connects to a wireless tablet
PC or Laptop.
 PIN security protected for each individual user and selected security levels.
 Audit trail of date, time and log-in ID of issuer for creation of each guest and
staff key.
 Mains powered and/or battery power for mobile units.
 Direct interface with property management and point of sale systems via
TCP/IP.
 Minimum programmable 16 coded log-in users for front desk units and mobile
units.
 Manual key encoding override in event of property management system
failure.
 Built in reader, as applicable, for either smart or transponder card.
- Portable Interrogator:
 Lock systems using radio frequency transponders must be able to work on all
areas of the property.
 Guest Room Door Locks
- Must be suitable for installation with rebated door and rebated door frame.
- Available in DIN Euroset standard, optional ANSI standard mortise locks with prior
written approval from T.S.
- Must be suitable for fitting with third party specified lever or knob.
- Must achieve a minimum fire rating of 90 minutes for DIN Euroset, or 30 minutes
for optional ANSI standard.
- All electronic circuitry and components must achieve a minimum rating of IP 54 for
transponder locks and IP 31 for smart locks.
- Minimum audit trail of preceding 500 entries with timing and or algorithmic
protection for unauthorized and sequentially repeated events.
- Latch bolts shall be designed to (or reinforced to) prevent being sprung by a thin
instrument from the outside.
- All locks shall be maintained in good working condition and mounted so that they
cannot be pried off.
- Audit trail to chronologically record all lock activities including: card use, card ID,
chronological sequence and time of activity, duration between events, lock and/or
door status, door opening and closing sequence, mechanical key override.
- Audit trail memory to be secured with interior room side battery location or with
hidden and high security back up battery location.
- Colored LED indication on corridor side for all unauthorized and out of sequence
activities.
- Colored LED indication on corridor side for low battery.
- Colored LED indication for dead lock confirmation signal to be displayed only
when authorized keys are presented.
- Colored LED indication on corridor side for authorized card acceptance and lock
operation
- AA type battery.
- Hidden high security mechanical override for emergency access.
- Removable cylinder with re-codable three-level hierarchy facility using sequential
master key.
- Anti tamper device with the following function:
 Removal of scutcheon shall disable system

231
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Requires coding through the Portable Interrogator to return lock to operation

- Lock set must be minimally equipped with lever or knob on corridor side and code
compliant lever on room side.
- Lock set must have the following minimum functions: anti-friction latchbolt, anti-
thrust device and automatic dead bolt.
- Anti friction latchbolt and anti thrust manual must have a minimum throw of 20 mm
and be extended when door is open and when closed and aligned correctly with
strike plate.
- Manual deadbolt must have a minimum throw of 20 mm for DIN Euroset standard,
or 25 mm for optional ANSI standard. Automatic deadbolt, if required, is thrown
when the door is closed properly and the latch and anti thrust device are aligned
with strike plate.
- Outside lever or knob retracts latchbolt and deadbolt only when an authorized key
card is used. Programmable timing feature to ensure only a single opening is
allowed by each authorized card reading.
- Inside lever is equipped with a panic device and will always retract latchbolt and
deadbolt when used.
- Tactile or audible feedback to confirm the automatic dead lock function is
activated by a thumb turn device located on the room side.
- Confirmation of automatic dead lock indication is given on the interior of the room
by either a mechanical indicator or by a LED which is permanently lit.
- When automatic dead lock confirmation is activated, an incorrect or service key
card will illuminate exterior colored LED indications indicating that the key was
read but access is denied due to confirmed dead lock activation. The guest
should not be disturbed by this event.
- Confirmed dead lock function can be overridden by authorized emergency key
card or by an emergency mechanical key.
- Finish as specified by Interior Designer or Architect to match all other hardware on
same door.
- Weather proof to a minimum IP rating of 31 for outdoor and damp areas.
- Guest rooms approved for balconies must have balcony doors with a decal and
interior lock that is unable to be bypassed. The lock must be childproof.
- Room doors shall have an automatic closure that is in working condition.
- Two separate locking devices shall be installed on sliding doors with instructions
posted on the door regarding lock operation and safety reminders.
- Connecting Doors should be equipped with a passage lever door handle set (one
handle only) and a deadbolt lock with a thumb-turn unit and a 25mm throw bolt.
As an option, the thumb-turn can be replaced with a keyed 5 pin cylinder.
 Back of House Door Locks:
- All features are same as guestroom units with the following options:
 Remotely mounted card reader unit with on and or off line connectivity.
 Programmable access delay.
- Portable Interrogator:
 Individually PIN or system key protected and requires additional PIN or system
staff key authorization for service or emergency openings.
 Able to update lock codes and timetable.
 Able to download audit trails of 500 preceding openings.
 Checks technical function of locks.
 Allows uninterrupted front desk operation at any time.
 Memory storage compatible with total quantity of lock sets installed.

232
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Portable interrogator use at lock to be part of audit trail.

Elevator Security
Elevator Security Requirement and Standard
 Elevators designed for guest use shall be designed in such a way that one set of
elevators service underground or attached parking garage (where applicable) with
accessibility only to common areas of the hotel and a second set of elevators serve
the guestroom floors. Unrestricted access to a guestroom floor from a parking deck
shall not be provided.
 Where possible, transfer from elevators servicing parking facilities to elevators
servicing guestroom floors shall occur at the lobby level and require individuals to
proceed past the front desk.
 Consideration shall be given to restricting floor access to guestroom floors whereby
the use of a valid hotel credential is required.
Elevators in properties considered to be in an Elevated Security
Environment
 Guest Elevators
- All guest elevators must be fitted with an access control system that is compatible
with the guest card system of the hotel.
- All guest elevator vestibules must be under constant video surveillance.
- Where the determined security risk is as a result of crime, individual elevator cabs
may be equipped with video surveillance.
 Service Elevators
- Same requirements as the guest elevators except cabs to be equipped with video
surveillance.

Technical Requirements & Standards

Critical Infrastructure
This section pertains to requirements for the following:
 Power
- Incoming Main switch gear.
- Transformer.
- UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).
- Emergency Generator and auxiliary equipment room.
 Water Supply and Storage.
 Air Handling Units.
 PBX (telephone private branch exchange).
 Heating and cooling Plant (boilers, etc.).
 Fuel Oil Supply and Storage.
 Gas Supply and Storage.
Critical Infrastructure Requirements and Standard
 In accordance with local law, utilities must arrive to the hotel under controlled access.
These must be secured. This includes such items as mechanical, electrical, plumbing,

233
SECURITY SYSTEMS

air intake, rooftop and utility routes, all of which are subject to possible compromise
from bio-threats and must be secured to prevent unauthorized access.
 Rooftop break-through locks at stair doors must be in place with an alarm that goes to
the SCC.
 Air intake is recommended to be located on high level. However, if located at lower
levels, must be fitted with a system that allows immediate shut off from the BAS
station at the SCC. These must be louvered in a way that protects the system from
tampering or being compromised.
 All equipment must have power and/or signal cables shielded in vandal and corrosion
resistant conduit.
 Fuel storage (gas or Diesel) must be physically secured with fencing and monitored
by CCTV coverage to deter sabotage and attack.
 The Hotel’s water supply and treatment plant must be restricted for access by
authorized engineering staff only.
 All security systems must be provided with emergency generator power and a
minimum 4-hour battery backup that is independent of the hotel’s generator system. It
must be located in an area that is access controlled and be tested quarterly.
 PBX System must be equipped with a Caller ID system to enable the identification of
all incoming calls.
 PBX System must be equipped to be capable of recording calls, such as bomb
threats.
Critical Infrastructure in Properties located in an Elevated Security
Environment
 All critical infrastructure rooms should be monitored remotely via the Hotel’s on-line
access control system.
 Rooms that are used regularly should be equipped with an access control card
reader. However, it is sufficient to secure infrequently used rooms with a mechanical
key with limited key distribution.
 The location of entry to the hotel of critical infrastructure shall be given appropriate
consideration during the design phase of the hotel. Electrical and Gas supply lines or
distribution boxes shall not be in close proximity to vehicle access points to the
property. Air intake and related ventilation systems shall be positioned in a location
not susceptible to malicious tampering, and be designed to prevent the entry of
foreign substances and provide a mechanism to close outside louvers in emergency
situations.

Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)

THE
OPERATOR Hotels Corporation sends the video feeds from the cameras to a local video
recorder and monitor(s). Where applicable, the video feeds can also be accessed by
Corporate Security over THE OPERATOR’s proprietary network.
CCTV Requirement
 Video surveillance cameras shall be monitored at all times by dedicated on-site
security force manning a Security Control Center.
 Digital Video Recorders (DVR) and Network Video Recorders (NVR) are the only
approved recording devices.

234
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Video shall be captured by high-resolution color cameras that are capable of adjusting
to the changes of day to night lighting so as to capture clear images and true
representations of skin tone and colors.
 Surveillance systems and cameras must be hard-wired, wherever possible. IP based
cameras and wireless cameras are acceptable, depending on the situation.
 The use of surveillance cameras to monitor the pool area is prohibited.
 Dummy or “Fake” cameras or camera housings that give the appearance of a camera
are prohibited at all times.
 No cameras may be placed in areas where there is a reasonable expectation of
privacy.
 Appropriate signage must be installed as required by local law / ordinance.
CCTV Standard
 Digital Video Recorder (DVR) / Network Video Recorder (NVR)
- DVR storage drives must be sized and programmed to maintain at least 30-day
history of images.
- Recording rates must adhere to the following minimum frame rate:
 Minimum / normal mode – 5 frames per second (FPS) .
 Alarm mode – 15 FPS.
- Resolution must be 4CIF (or D1 in the Sony format) or better for each camera.
See summary table below:

Format Video Resolution (NTSC) Format Video Resolution (PAL)

QCIF = 176 × 120 QCIF = 176 × 144
CIF = 352 × 240 CIF = 352 × 288
2CIF = 704 x 240 2CIF = 704 x 288
DCIF = 528 x 320 DCIF = 528 x 384
4CIF = 704 × 480 4CIF = 704 × 576
16CIF = 1408 × 960 16CIF = 1408 × 1152

- DVRs must be installed in a designated rack with tamper resistant hardware in a

limited access room or secured in the security office and password protected.
- All cameras must be labeled on the DVR by a unique alpha / numeric title.
- Storage drives must be 500gb or larger.
- DVRs must have a minimum of eight (8) channels.
- Video inputs must be equivalent or greater than the number of cameras being
used at the facility.
- DVR shall have a CD-RW or DVD-RW.
- DVR functionality must include video multiplexing, alarm / event detection, video
recording, live video display, playback, and archiving without interruption of
recording. The unit shall provide a smart search feature for allowing replay of
specific recorded events. The DVR must be compatible for upgrading and be
expandable with off-the-shelf, third party external storage devices.
- DVRs must be connected to the Hotel’s LAN network and have it is own static IP,
gateway and subnet addresses.
- All DVRs must incorporate remote-view software with open architecture (i.e.: non-
proprietary).

235
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Motion detection fields to initiate recording or change recording speed must not
identify activity outside of windows or doors in close proximity.
- A keyboard to control cameras must be installed for all camera systems with
greater than 16 cameras.
 Monitors
- CCTV monitors must be configured to provide individual view and / or a matrix
view of all cameras associated with the surveillance system; the monitor
associated with the DVR should not be used for active monitoring; separate
monitors shall be provided.
- A VGA monitor shall be connected to the CCTV system.
- Monitors shall be a minimum of 15-inch wide screen and rack, wall or desk
mountable.
- Where no 24-hour on-site uniformed security services are provided and cameras
are installed beyond the lobby or employee-only areas at least one monitor shall
be installed at the front desk of a property OR web-enabled access to the DVR
from the Point-of-Sale station.
- Where uniformed security services are provided and a 24-hour Security
Command Center (SCC) has been designated, security monitors shall be located
in this office exclusively. Depending of the size of the surveillance system, it is
ideal to have a minimum of four 42 inches flat panel monitors displaying all critical
cameras and an additional two to three smaller “call up” monitor in console to
display cameras triggered as a result of an alarm condition.
- The CCTV system head end shall be kept in the security office or IT room, if
applicable and only approved personnel shall have access.
 Cabling and Power
- All wiring for new CCTV systems, IP cameras or NVR solutions must use
Category 6 (Cat 6) cabling which is 23 AWG, 4 twisted pair UTP, PCV multi-color
jacket.
- All power wiring for cameras and low voltage transformers must use plenum, 18
gauge – 2 conductor (18 AWG, 2c) non-shielded CMP rated cabling.
- All coaxial wiring for legacy analog CCTV devices must use plenum RG 6 18
GAUGE (20AWG) solid bare copper, 95% bare copper braid CLP2/CMP rated
cabling.
- Low voltage cabling may be installed in runs with other low voltage cabling,
properly routed with cable ties, and indelibly identified with proper labeling.
Conduit may be required in many locations.
- Plug-in transformers must be enclosed in a 4-screw cover box containing 120
VAC receptacles. Exposed plug-in transformers may not be used.
- A UPS device must be installed to electrically segregate the DVR from its power
source to protect against power fluctuations.
 Cameras
- Cameras must be high resolution, fixed or variable focus lens with a minimum of
f=2.8-5.8mm, f1.4 auto iris or better.
- Effective picture of 380,000 pixels, 768 (H) x 494 (V) or better
- Horizontal resolution of 500 TV Lines or better.
- Signal to Noise ratio (S/N Ratio) must be at least 48 DB
- Minimum illumination 0.2 Lux.
- ATW color range of 2200 K to 10000 K or better
- Input voltage of DC12V and AC24V
- Operating temperature between -20 to 50 degrees Celsius

236
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Relative operating humidity 20 – 80 percent

 CCTV installer shall conduct a nighttime light meter reading and make lighting
recommendations.
- Cameras have to be able to be fitted with “zoned alarm monitoring” for motion
detection and other alarm activation incidents.
- Cameras must be interfaced to allow programmable control for constant
monitoring, manual selection by area or commanded by a third party system such
as a perimeter beam, door sensor, motion detector.
- Selected camera locations shall integrate with one way voice announcing
speakers to allow SCC staff to give warning or announcement to intruders.
- Interior cameras must be:
 Appropriate to the aesthetics of the application (generally within a surface
mount dome casing). They must provide clear visual images under all normal
lighting conditions and must be specified according to the nature of coverage
required. Minimum specifications must include digital color operation with
variable iris and pan/tilt/zoom capability. They should be housed in external
casings or surface mounted domes.
 Installed in the drop ceiling panel or on the ceiling grid. If ceiling mounting is
not possible, then the cameras must be installed on a wall at a height of three
(3) meters above the finished floor (AFF) or within 30 cm of the ceiling.
- Outdoor cameras must be:
 Color and Day/Night
 Installed on the top corners of hotels that are less than three (3) stories.
 On poles in parking lots, at a height of 5.0 m.
 On all vehicle entrance, exit and parking decks not less than 3.0 m high
wherever possible.
 Enclosed in housings that accommodate environmental conditions.
 External cameras must provide image capture under all lighting and weather
conditions and must be digital with pan, tilt, zoom, variable iris, lens cleaner
and wiper. Each camera shall be housed in a vandal and corrosion-proof case
with heater blowers and/or solar shielding adapted for functioning in adverse
weather and lighting conditions.
 Parking lot and roof-mounted cameras must use fiber optic wiring for data
control and video signal. When fiber optic wiring is used, the transmitter must
be installed in a weatherproof electrical j-box within 30 inches of the camera
housing.
 Recommended Locations Under Surveillance:
- Port Cochere / Main Guest Drop Off.
- Main Lobby Doors viewing pedestrian entry (multiple cameras may be needed).
- Alternate guest entrances to the property (mounted on the interior viewing the
door).
- Employee Entrances (internal and external cameras).
- Loading Dock Bays (mounted on the interior viewing the bay doors).
- Guest Elevator Vestibules on every floor OR Guest Cabs.
- Spa / Fitness Center Entry.
- Service Elevator Cabs.
- Front Desk Counter which covers all POS stations.
- Guest Kiosk Areas.
- Safe Deposit Box room.
- Cashier’s Room / Night Drop Safe.

237
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Emergency exit doors (mounted on the interior viewing the door) or exterior pan-
tilt-zoom cameras interfaced with an emergency exit’s door position switch.
- Roof areas where helicopter landing pads are present or adjacent building roofs
that present risks.
- General surveillance for attached surface parking lots.
- PABX/Computer room entry.
Properties located in Elevated Security Environments
 One or more of the following additional locations should also have surveillance
cameras and be actively monitored by security personnel:
- Vehicle and Pedestrian access points to the property.
- Vehicle and Pedestrian security screening locations.
- Main drive and entrance.
- Parking garage entrances and exits.
- Parking garage payment area.
- All Elevator Cabs or vestibules.
- Extensive coverage of all indoors parking floors.
- Individual Guestroom Floors.
- ATM – automated bank teller machine (in addition to any surveillance provided by
the ATM co.).
- All Common Areas within the property and Pre-Function areas.
- Designated club lounges (i.e. Regency Club Lounge, Grand Club Lounge).
- Executive and Presidential Suite Entry.
- Back-of-House Corridors.
- Employee locker room entries.
- Goods entry.
- High value goods storage.
- Entry into Human Resources.
- Entry into Management offices.
- Garage/recycling areas.
- Critical MEP Areas, Fuel storage.

Access Control and Alarm Monitoring (ACAM) Systems

ACAM Requirements
 ACAM systems will generally be installed in a Hotel as a result of its size, complexity,
determined risk and / or the number of employees that make the use of mechanical
keys impractical.
 The applicable security integrator shall provide an enterprise ACAM system that is
complete and fully functional with all components and accessories as show on the
contract drawings.
 Programming of device names, access levels, door set ups, identification badges,
alarm zones, camera tours / presets, etc. shall be coordinated either through the local
Security Director or T.S.
 Where ACAM systems are installed, they shall be the primary means of access and
used for all entry purposes on all exterior doors, with the exception of main guest
entry doors that are staffed at all times.
 Mechanical (i.e. hard) keys to card reader controlled door shall be limited and used
for emergency purposes only.

238
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Where a full time security force is present, all ACAM workstations should be installed
in the Security Command Center and monitored / maintained by the Hotel Security
Department.
 Shall be supported by a minimum four (4) hour battery back up in addition to a site
emergency generator, where present.
 Shall be programmed to historically document the access activities of all cardholders
and stored for a minimum of 60 days.
 Access to all critical infrastructures on site shall be monitored and controlled access.
 An interface between the property’s on-line ACAM system and the off-line Guestroom
Keycard system shall be done, wherever possible.
ACAM Standard
 ACAM systems shall consist of the following at a minimum:
- Monitoring workstation that displays ACAM Events and ACAM Alarms in real time.
- Video Imaging / Video Badging workstation
- Field Panels / Data Gathering Panels
- Field Devices including card readers, door contacts, motion sensors, glass break
detectors, duress alarms and related components.
- Locking Mechanisms
 Monitoring Workstation
- All card reader controlled doors shall report valid / invalid entry / exit events in real
time on the associated workstation.
- All card reader controlled doors shall report door held open / door open too long /
door forced open alarms in real time on the associated workstation.
- Alarm / Event Monitor will be integrated with the Video Badging workstation.
- Installed in the console provided in the Security Command Center.
 Field Panels
- Shall communicate either via TCP / IP over a dedicated LAN or the guest network
LAN, separate from the Hotel LAN network.
- Shall provide alarm input / output control, multiple card reader interface
configurations and local battery backup, and alarm as appropriate.
- Include tamper alarms that report to the ACAM workstation.
- Shall be mounted in lockable and secure locations on site (typically an IT / MDF
closet).
 Card Readers
- All card readers should utilize RFID proximity technology with a read range of at
least 5 cm or greater.
- Card readers deployed at the Hotel may vary by property but may include:
 Wall mounted card readers
 Mullion mounted card readers
 Long range card readers
- Card readers and associated door access devices shall be installed on the lock
side of the door (or the hinged side of the active double door) at approximately
1000 mm above the floor.
- All card reader controlled doors, equipped with a mechanical locking system shall
include a request-to-exit (REX) device in the form of a PIR motion sensor.
 Note that two-way card readers or push-button REX devices are prohibited,
unless in extreme cases and approved by T.S.

239
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- REX devices shall be programmed only to shunt the door contact / alarm and not
“unlock” the door. The device shall identify valid egress of personnel who are
between 1000 mm to 2000 mm away from the door.
- REX devices shall be installed at the center of the doorframe wherever possible
and not blocked by emergency exit signs.
- All card reader doors should have alarm contacts that are flush mounted,
wherever possible (surface mounted if necessary on the protected side of the
door).
- One door into every space secured by the ACAM system shall have a mechanical
key override capability.
 Locking Devices
- All card reader controlled doors shall be locked using:
 Electro-mechanical locks wherever possible.
 Electric lock strikes may be used as needed but shall include latch-guards.
Where electric lock strikes are used, Classroom-style Locksets will be used.
- Magnetic locks will be avoided wherever possible. Where magnetic locks are
used, the REX PIR Motion Sensor will also be programmed to temporarily
disengage power to the magnetic lock.
 In addition to the REX PIR, a manual push-button REX mounted on the secure
side of the door will also be provided that is connected directly to the power
supply of the magnetic lock.
 Magnetic locks used to secure doors in critical locations should also have a
keyed bypass lock installed on the unsecured side of the door, keyed to a
restricted mechanical keyway that is also connected to the power supply of the
magnetic lock to be used for emergency purposes only.
- Door hardware and related devices are to be powered by a power supply different
than the field panel.
- All electro-mechanical and electrified strikes shall be set to “fail-safe” or unlock
upon the loss of power.
- All electric locks for occupied areas in the “path of exit” shall be interfaced with the
Hotel’s fire alarm system, in accordance with NFPA or prevailing fire code.
 Stairwell Doors
- For stairwell doors that will be monitored and prohibit reentry to a floor, an
electrified lock set similar to the Hi Tower Locks shall be used in all cases.
- In order to allow re-entry during emergency passage, locksets shall be installed on
stairwell doors.
 Cabling
- Low voltage cabling may be installed in runs with other low voltage cabling,
properly routed with cable ties, and indelibly identified with proper labeling.
Conduit may be required in many facilities but shall conform to prevailing electrical
codes in all cases.
- All power wiring between panels and door locks shall use plenum, 18 gauge – 2
conductor (18 AWG, 2c) non-shielded, CMP rated cabling.
- All wiring between panels for data communications shall use plenum, 18 gauge –
4 conductor (18AWG, 4c) overall shielded, CMP rated cabling.
- All wiring between panels and alarm / signaling devices should use plenum, 20
gauges – 4 conductors (20AWG, 4c) overall shielded, CMP rated cabling.
- All wiring between panels and card readers shall use plenum, 20 gauge – 6
conductor (20 AWG, 6c) overall stranded CMP rated cabling.

240
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Access Credentials
- An access credential is required for every hotel employee.
- Due to the nature of their jobs and the distribution of employee name tags as part
of a uniform, the access credential may come in multiple forms:
 Imageable Proximity Access Card.
 Proximity Transponder Tag.
 Proximity Key Fob.
 Long Range Proximity Tag (for vehicles).
- A minimum of 500 access credentials is required upon the commissioning of the
system.
- A picture of all hotel workers permanently assigned to the hotel shall be taken and
maintained on the access control system.
ACAM Systems for properties located in an Elevated Security Environment
 Controlled access shall be provided into:
- All vehicle entrance / exits barriers
- All rooms containing critical infrastructure including Power, AHU,
Telecommunications and Water.
- Primary IT Room.
- Cashier’s Office.
- Human Resources.
- Security Office.
- Employee Entrance.
- Management offices.
- Service Elevators.
- Baggage / Luggage Storage Room.
- Limited Use / Restricted Areas.
 Remote Monitoring from the Security Control Room shall be provided at:
- All card reader controlled doors.
- All stairwell access doors.
- All exterior access points including pedestrian doors, overhead doors, roof
hatches or similar.
- All Point-of-Sale (POS) locations in the form of Duress Alarms.
st
- Exterior 1 ground floor windows in the form of Glassbreak detectors.
- Field panels in the form of tamper alarms.

Intrusion Detection System (IDS)

Intrusion Detection Systems (also known as “burglar” systems) are considered to be an
integral security component to hotels where full time, uniformed security service is not
provided.
IDS Requirements
 Provide to all hotels that do not have a full time 24/7 uniformed security.
 Where present, all IDS systems will be monitored by a UL-Listed Central Alarm
Station at all times and the response is documented and understood by the Hotel.
 The applicable security integrator must provide an IDS that is complete and fully
functional with all components, accessories and training as depicted on contract
drawings.

241
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 The purpose of the IDS is to:

- Provide a mechanism for hotel personnel to remotely and electronically monitor
perimeter access points and activity through a keypad installed near the front
desk.
- Provide the ability for hotel personnel to summon emergency assistance via
duress alarms monitored by a UL listed Central Station.
- Provide a mechanism to have a historical record of activity at the hotel.
 Programming of device names, door set ups, alarm zones and response must be
coordinated either through the local Security Director, General Manager or T.S.
 Where appropriate, such as in the pool area, the intrusion detection can be used for
detecting access outside of normal operating hours.
 Intrusion detection sensors must trigger a local and centralized alarm that goes to
both a keypad installed in close proximity to the Front Desk as well as the UL Listed
Central Station.
 IDS systems and applicable Central Stations must be able to provide reports of all
alarm activity at the Hotel.
 All equipment must have power and/or signal cables shielded in vandal and corrosion
resistant conduit. Alternatively, alarm system signals may be transmitted by encrypted
wireless operation. Alarm systems must be able to function during power loss.
 Infrared/radio/microwave beams must provide full coverage at pre-determined heights
and sensitivities for all designated areas and must be interfaced to all alarm systems.
They must provide both passive and active detection modes and must be fully digital,
providing addressable locations and self-diagnostic operations.
IDS Standard
 IDS will be comprised of the following equipment, at a minimum:
- Control Panel
- Wireless / Wired Receiver
- Keypad
- Door Position Switch (DPS) on all perimeter access points
- One (1) DPS on the cashier’s safe / drop safe, where present.
- Wired Duress Alarm at all POS stations at the guest check-in counter.
- Wired Duress Alarm in Cashier’s Office, where present.
- Wired Duress Alarm in Safe Deposit Box (SDB) room where present.
- One (1) wireless Duress Alarm.
- Cellular back-up unit
 Installation
- Where possible, field panels connected to IDS must be located in a secured,
limited access room (MDF / IDF rooms as example) and installed on wall board.
- Installation of IDS field panels should be on a 1200mm x 2400mm to 12mm to 19
mm fire rated plywood backboard.
 Cabling and Power
- Power is required and power supplies should be installed per local code. All wiring
between panels for data communications must use plenum, 18 gauge – 4
conductor (18 AWG, 4c) overall shielded (OAS), CMP rated cabling.
- All wiring between panels and alarm / signaling devices must use plenum, 20
gauges – 4 conductor (20AWG, 4c) overall shielded (OAS), CMP rated cabling.
- IDS panels must be equipped with tamper switch contacts.

242
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- IDS systems and associated panels must be supported by battery back-up with a
minimum of four (4) hour support capacity. Where available, the IDS should also
be connected to the site’s UPS system and emergency generator.
- A dedicated telephone line must be provided for the security alarm panel to
transmit alarm signals. No other devices may be connected that line.
- The wiring connecting the wireless back-up panel and the alarm panel must be
placed in conduit.
- The antenna cabling for the wireless back-up must be installed in 20mm conduit
extending above the ceiling or to a minimum height of 3 meters above the floor.
 Device Mounting
- IDS system must monitor every perimeter access point to the site.
- Contact points must be mounted in the top edge of a door, 50 mm from the strike
side of the door. The contacts must be recessed unless the door frames are filled.
- If the door frames are filled, a surface mounted door position switch (DPS) may be
used. The DPS may be mounted on the door frame and the magnet on the top
edge of the door at the same location.
- Duress (panic) alarms must be provided in at least two locations at the front guest
check-in desk. Devices should be mounted underneath the POS stations in a
discreet location. Similarly, duress alarms are required at the Regency/Grand
Club reception desks, as well.
- One additional wireless Duress Alarm should be provided for staff use.
For Properties located in an Elevated Security Environment
 One or more of the following additional devices may be installed in locations
determined to be at increased risk:
- Glass break detectors
 Installed on ground accessible windows in areas of the hotel not commonly
used during off-hours.
 Location shall be on the ceiling grid within 1500 mm of the glass, covering a
maximum of 400 mm on either side of the detector.
 Must be dual technology and be capable of identifying both audio (decibel
level) and shock sensing technology.
- Motion Sensors
 Dual Technology (microwave / passive infrared).
 Installed at a height of 2700 mm above the floor or within 300 mm of the
ceiling.

Duress Alarms
Duress Alarm Requirements
 There are two types of duress alarms that may be installed on a property; a security
duress alarm and a medical alert alarm. While the two may be similar in operability
and the technology used, they differ as to the circumstances surrounding their use
and the response they may generate.
 Security Duress (panic) Alarms are required for the following areas:
- Cashier’s room.
- Front desk stations and Regency/Grand Club reception (one per station).
- Safety Deposit Box (SDB) Room.
- Point-of-Sale Stations where large cash transactions are anticipated.

243
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- VIP / Presidential Suites (in applicable areas).

- Human Resources.
Duress Alarm Standard
 All Duress (panic) Alarms must be routed to annunciate in either the Security
Command Center or at an external monitoring service. Duress alarms cannot go
directly to the police.
 Monitoring of Duress (panic) Alarms must be located at the Security Command
Center (where available) and duplicate/remote panels. These alarms must be
constructed so that if there is no proprietary response within 1 minute it rolls directly to
a contracted, external, monitoring service.
 Duress (panic) alarms shall not produce an audible alarm at the point of initiation.
 Duress (panic) alarms must be operable by quiet foot or touch switch.
 All equipment must have power and/or signal cables shielded in vandal and corrosion
resistant conduit. Alternatively, signals may be transmitted by encrypted wireless
operation.

Medical Alert Alarms in the Spa and Fitness Center

Medical Alert Alarms Requirements
 Accessible at the following location:
- Accessible at the Sauna.
- Accessible at the Cold Plunge pool.
- Accessible near Whirlpools (Hot tub).
- Accessible near Steam rooms.
- Accessible near the Exercise Lap Pool.
- Accessible near the Recreational Pools.
- Accessible near Solarium.
 Consistent with the StayFit Implementation Guide, a Fitness Center and a Pool shall
both be equipped with a least one emergency telephone with the contact number and
location of the phone prominently displayed.
- A no-dial emergency telephone shall be prominently located in each area of a Spa
(including the pool and primary workout areas), visible and accessible to a
wheelchair-bound guest.
 In addition to an Emergency Telephone, Medical Alert Buttons are required in all Spa,
Fitness Center or Pool areas.
- Due to the uniqueness of each property, specific quantities of Medical Alert
Buttons may vary. However, it is anticipated that at least two device stations,
mounted at opposite ends of each area, will be needed to provide adequate
emergency communications.
- When alert buttons are activated the associated equipment shall shut off
automatically.
 The Emergency Telephone and Medical Alert Buttons shall ring and be monitored by
the following functional areas:
- The Spa Attendant as the primary monitoring entity, wherever present.
- The Security Command Center as a redundant monitoring entity in all cases or the
Primary entity if a Spa Attendant is not present.
- The Communication Center if any.

244
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Medical Alert Alarms Standard

 Where provided, Medical Alert alarms shall first annunciate at a continuously
monitored spa attendant location, with a repeater annunciation to hotel security and
communication center.
 Must be operated by foot or touch switch.

Security Command Center

Depending on the size of the property, the existence of a uniformed security force or the
determined level of risk at the property, a Security Command Center (SCC) may be
necessary in order to effectively maintain adequate site security at the Hotel. Where
applicable, the following provisions relating to the design, location and function of an
SCC will be used.
When the fire fighting/alarms, evacuation announcement, and other life safety monitoring
equipment are located in the same space coordination with other consultants in
necessary to ensure equipment and traffic management is properly planned.
Security Command Center Requirements
 The SCC will be established to monitor security related equipment and technology
including CCTV, emergency notifications and other security systems. In these
instances, the SCC shall be self-contained and adjacent to the employee entrance
wherever possible.
 Physical Requirements
- Ideally, the SCC should be split into three distinct areas for large properties (and
scaled back as need for smaller properties); an area dedicated for administrative
duties, equipment or technical room and an area dedicated to surveillance,
security dispatching and building alarm monitoring.
- A private Security Director’s office shall be planned within the hotel, which ideally
should be located in the same area as other executive offices, but may be located
in close proximity to the primary security office as necessary.
- Installation of all equipment must be ergonomically correct for monitoring function
and the room must meet OSHA or similar health and work environment standards.
This includes having adequate ventilation and heating for the occupants as well
as the equipment.
- The space must be appropriate to the size and amount of equipment and staff,
with expansion room available for future needs.
- All security systems must utilize modular components and dual redundancy where
possible to allow for hot swapping of any component while maintaining full system
integrity. Adequate backup must be in place to enable operations to continue
when primary system is repaired or down.
 Technical Requirements
- All security systems must be fully addressable and controllable from the main
security center and all duplicate/remote panel locations.
- All security systems must be provided with encrypted password and individual pin
number allocations allowing programmable and selectable levels of user access.
- The SCC must be surge protected, be on an UPS system, and have backup
generator power.
- All security systems must be modular in design for future expansion. They must
be built with proactive planning for better, future technology as much as possible.

245
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- All equipment must have power and/or signal cables shielded in vandal and
corrosion resistant conduit. Alternatively, signals may be transmitted by encrypted
wireless operation.
- Duplicate, remote security panels (preferably PC-based) and operations must be
made available at the Hotel Communication Center and/or as designated by
T.S.
- The Security Consultant must coordinate with the architect and MEP consultant to
ensure that space planning and MEP connections are available to allow the
suitable location and operation of electrically-powered security equipment.
Designation of power requirements must be included, as well as outlets to be
dedicated to security systems. Those systems to be supported by emergency
power must be specified and must include all emergency lighting. Systems must
be protected from electro magnetic interference and should be away from power
distribution equipment.
- All systems associated with telephone and computer equipment, including such
things as security panels, elevators, fire alarms and emergency evacuation must
be coordinated by the responsible consultant for interfacing and integration of
these systems into a cohesive solution.
Security Command Center Standard
 Physical Standards
- Rooms designated for monitoring and / or control of security equipment and
systems must:
 Hardened to withstand armed attacks.
 Have restricted access.
 Have an area dedicated for alarm monitoring.
 Have no exterior windows that permit viewing of the interior of the room.
 Have ergonomic consoles, furniture and chairs.
 Designed for serviceability with space and an access door behind the
equipment and console racks and have a raised floor.
- Location of SCC:
 Near the employee entrance.
 On an exterior wall on ground floor.
 Close to exterior access.
 Separated from break rooms or supervisor offices.
 Near a toilet.
 Technical Standards
- Remain at a constant temperature of:
 22– 24ºC degrees for personnel.
 22ºC degrees for equipment, if located in a separated space.
- Be equipped with hands-free telephones.
- Audible alarm signals in the room must be at least 10dB over the background
noise of the Security Command Center.
- Designed for future expansion.
- Have interior light that is adjustable and indirect.
- Have a noise level that does not exceed 50 dB.
- Have deck-to-deck walls and floor coverings that avoid build-up of static charges.
Hotels considered in an Elevated Security Environment
- Must have a Security Command Center that is operational and staffed 24/7.

246
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Location next to the Loading Dock of the Hotel is discouraged.

Explosive Trace Detection (ETD) Systems

ETD System Requirements
 Explosive Trace Detection will be done via Vapor & Particle detection systems only.
 Only devices that utilize Ion Mobility Spectrometry (IMS) technology or Canine are
approved for use.
 All equipment must be dual mode and have the ability to sample in either a Vapor or
Particulate mode.
 Equipment may be used to detect narcotics but the ability to do so is not a purchasing
requirement.
 Complete analysis time of a sample must be 20 seconds or less.
 Portable or desktop units may be used.
 For portable ETD equipment, a minimum of two batteries and a carry strap must be
procured.
 Equipment must have a USB port for data download.
Hotels considered in an Elevated Security Environment
 Must utilize ETD at the point of entry for all vehicle, goods and baggage.
 ETD screening must be in place at all times and include detailed security post orders
for its use and alarm resolution.

Metal Detectors
Metal Detector Requirements
 Where needed, both walk-through and hand-held metal detection systems must be
used.
 Where required, a custom unit that would be designed without an overhead bridge is
acceptable. This design would only be required for the main guest entrances.
 For other Front-of-House access points, elliptic style walk-through metal detectors
should be used whenever possible.
Metal Detector Standard
 Walk-through Metal Detectors:
- The unit must:
 Detect both ferrous and non-ferrous metallic objects.
 Provide for multi-zone detection.
 Visibly indicate the general location of a detected object.
 Be able to detect all concealed metal weapons with sufficient standard
programs and adjustable sensitivity levels.
 Be capable of bi-directional screening.
 Produce both audible and visual annunciation upon target detection. Audible
annunciation must be both volume level and tone programmable.
 Provide continuous detection maintaining a through put rate of not fewer than
fifty detections per minute.
 Have an interior opening of 700 mm or greater.
- The functionality of the walk-through metal detector must not be impacted when
applied to multi-unit installations.

247
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- The unit’s controls shall be contained in a touch pad panel with LCD or LED
display screens for system status information. This panel, along with all wiring,
connections and electronics should be integrated into a single overhead
compartment.
- The system shall be designed with programming to eliminate the detection signals
from two or more targets from canceling each other.
- The system shall be self-diagnostics, always maintaining system readiness and
annunciating any problems by way of the display panel.
- The unit shall have self-charging batteries for maintaining system operation of no
less than forty-five minutes during extended power interruptions.
- The unit is to be constructed of a scratch and mar resistant material with resilient
end caps. The control panel and cross member shall be constructed of aluminum
or stainless steel.
- Electrical power for the unit shall be fully automatic with a breaker and meet UL
code.
- The unit shall posses a magnetic field strength that will not affect magnetic
recording media including magnetic tapes, diskettes and cards.
- The unit must have been tested in accordance to and meet or exceed the
requirements of:
 The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers: Standards for Safety
Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic
Fields”.
 OSHA: Radiation Protection Guide, CFR 1910.97 section (2) I.
 National Institute of Law Enforcement and Criminal Justice: Standards for
Walk-Through Metal Detectors for Use in Weapons Detection, NILECJ-STD-
0601.00 section 4.11.
 U.S. Federal Aviation Administration airport application specifications of the
Undetectable Firearm Act of 1991.
 Hand-held Metal Detectors:
- Designed for hand-held non-contact body scanning to detect small metallic
objects.
- Detect both ferrous and non-ferrous metals equally from any direction.
- Contain an On/Off switch and integral Momentary-On function or other battery
conservation feature.
- Equipped with both audio and LED visual alarm annunciation. The audio
annunciation must have a preset minimum level to assure operator awareness of
detection whenever the unit is on.
- Shall have an adjustable sensitivity level based on the size of the object to be
detected.
- Must provide for rapid scanning over large surfaces allowing the operator to work
further away from subjects and must be free of any protruding components, which
could catch on clothing.
- Must be operational with Nickel Cadmium (Ni CD) or Nickel Metal Hydride (Ni MH)
rechargeable batteries and be provided with a recharging kit and extra batteries.
Must also be capable of operation using a standard nine-volt battery.
- Must be lightweight, well balanced and have a casing constructed of high impact
resistant plastics.
- Must not affect cardiac pacemakers.
- Minimum Specifications:
 Weight: No more than 0.5 kg.

248
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Low battery indicator: Audio or visual indicator.

 Auxiliary output jack for Audio headphone use.
 Battery life: 100 hours of operation with alkaline batteries and 24 hours with Ni
CD batteries.
Hotels located in an Elevated Security Environments
 Must have a metal detector at all active entrances to the Hotel.
 Metal detectors may be temporarily installed at locations where large functions are
being accommodated.

X-Ray Machines
To search bags and large luggage at hotel properties in a non-intrusive manner, X-ray
machines may be deployed. Software provides the ability for the machine and its
operator to differentiate inorganic substances from organic substances. County/State
regulations govern their use and safe application.
X-Ray Machine Requirements
 Must detect explosives, weapons currency and other contraband and used in both the
front-of-house and back-of-house areas.
 The type and size of X-Ray screening equipment may include:
- Desktop sized x-ray inspection systems designed to inspect and accommodate
small bags, briefcases, purses, etc.
- Parcel sized x-ray inspection systems designed to inspect and accommodate
bags up to the size of checked luggage (air travel standards).
- Cargo sized x-ray inspection systems designed to inspect and accommodate bulk
items or packages and other oversized articles.
- Pallet sized x-ray inspection systems designed to inspect and accommodate
shipping containers passing through the hotel loading docks.
 X-ray screening equipment must include the following general characteristics:
- Constructed of a heavy-duty steel cabinet and frame.
- Capable of annunciating an automatic density threat alert, which provides a visual
alarm on the system monitor when an area or item has not been penetrated.
- Include individual control buttons on the system keyboard to provide the following
standard functions:
 4X zoom function or greater.
 Conveyor direction.
 High/low density select.
 Edge enhancement.
 High penetration mode.
 High resolution mode.
 (Pseudo) Color On/Off.
- Capable of supporting remote operations.
- Contain self-diagnostics that shall annunciate any applicable system errors such
as X-ray generator or controller failure warning or high and low current protection
warning.
- Monitor(s) must be able to analyze and project imagery for dense objects and
distinguish between organic and inorganic material.

249
SECURITY SYSTEMS

- Capable of image stripping, which would allow for the image removal of either the
organic or inorganic items, without stopping the conveyor belt, to improve the
overall image clarity and highlight the potential threat areas.
- The conveyor belt must be constructed without the use of clamps or staples. The
conveyor belt shall also be partitioned from the electrical components to preclude
water or debris from entering these system sensitive areas.
- Capable of bi-directional scanning and able to produce an image in either
direction.
- Capable of annunciating an automatic density threat alert, which shall provide a
visual alarm on the system monitor when an area or item has not been
penetrated.
- The unit shall be installed in accordance with the most current version of and with
all applicable revisions pertaining to all applicable codes and standards.
X - Ray Machine Standard
 Capable of supporting conveyor extensions to assist in the loading and unloading of
items onto the screening unit.
 Must have an X-ray sensor of 1152 photo diodes in an “L” shaped array which
provides the ability to penetrate 25 mm of steel and display a .38 caliber 50mm
barreled pistol through that minimum.
 X-Ray equipment designed to check guest luggage must have a tunnel opening of
635mm wide by 430mm high or greater.
 For machines anticipated to be placed in Front-of-House (FOH) areas, x-ray
equipment should be “bottom up” shooters, meaning that the conveyor belt is above
the x-ray providing a better image.
 Must have a conveyor speed of not less than 12 meters per minute.
 Must be able to hold a parcel 10 kg or greater.
 Must have a video display that includes 17” color high-resolution flicker free monitors.
 Must have a lockable Keyboard to prevent unauthorized use.
Hotels located in an Elevated Security Environment
 Provide x-ray machines that accommodate the screening of both guest baggage as
well as parcel size deliveries to the hotel, employees and bulk goods arriving at the
hotel via the loading dock.

Intercom (IC) System

To provide for remote communication capabilities at vehicular and pedestrian entry
points as well as within applicable parking facilities, the use of an intercom system may
be appropriate. The following will provide guidance in selecting, installing and operating
an intercom system with the hotel.
Intercom System Requirement
 Locations identified to include an intercom station must be defined during schematic
design of the hotel.
 Exterior locations for intercom substations should be limited to primary guest and
employee entry doors, parking facilities and remote buildings or areas (in resort
properties where applicable).
 If a full-time security force is provided, master intercom stations should be installed in
the SCC.

250
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Only one intercom system should be used within the hotel although more than one
master station may be installed to incorporate operational considerations with regards
to parking management and building security.
 Where possible, it is recommended that the intercom system be interfaced with CCTV
and access control systems.
 Where possible, voice communication over the intercom system should be recorded
via a voice recording system.
Intercom System Standard
 Shall consist of a central exchange unit(s) to include desktop master control stations,
substations and security assistance stations and provide for the following:
- Two-way signaling and voice communication between master stations and
substations.
- Telephone quality communication at substations and master stations for both
handset and speakerphone conversation.
- Individual sound level adjustment for each substation and master station shall be
achieved by programming the appropriate subscriber board in the exchange.
- Master to master communication including all masters simultaneously designated
as “all call” or “conference call” features.
- Queuing of incoming calls at the master stations.
- The capability of programming each substation call button to call one or multiple
master stations. All substation call buttons shall activate an audible and visual
signal (LCD display) at the master station.
- An RS-232 / 422 interface with the SMS and CCTV Systems as required.
- Manual and automatic transfer of control of certain substations between master
stations.
 Substations shall consist of a tamper resistant call button and speaker mounted on a
finished flush mount wall / junction box mounting plate.
 Emergency call / assistance stations shall incorporate an exterior intercom substation
and lights in a vandal resistant housing with a constant blue station light for location
identification illuminated at all times.

Portable Radio System (Walkie-Talkies)

Portable Radio System
Portable radios equipment shall be provided for the exclusive communications use of the
staff. Due to various geographic conditions of the worldwide property sites, different
models of equipment may be used to accommodate the various frequencies in the
specific areas. The exact equipment model, frequency requirements and power
requirements to best meet requirements for each project site shall be considered.
Portable Radio System Requirements
 Must be the latest model with features available from the manufacturer at time of
substantial completion of the project.
 Quantity of hand held portable radio shall be determined by T.S., with belt clips,
leather holders, chargers and related accessories.
 Alternate, equivalent products may be used subject to approval by T.S.

251
SECURITY SYSTEMS

 Regulations and Standards: System components, part and installation are to comply
with the corresponding recommendations of the Electronic Industries Association
(EIA), and the International Electro-technical Commission (IEC).
Portable System Standard
 Shall be hand held two way mobile radios either very high frequency (VHF) with 5
watts power output or ultra high frequency (UHF) with a 4 watts power output. The
radios shall be minimum ten channel types and channels shall be dedicated to
departments as approved by T.S.
 Shall be equivalent to Motorola model No. HT1250-LS+ or better, with following
features:
- 16 channel capacity.
- 12.5/25 KHz switchable channel spacing.
- NiMH rechargeable batteries to provide up to 8 hours of operating time.
- Battery gauge.
- Emergency button.
- Switchable power levels.
 Accessories for the portable radios shall include:
- Chargers (a mix of single and multi-unit chargers permitting charging of all radios
at one time) with one spare of each type.
- Leather carrying cases with belt clip for each unit with five percent (5%) spares
- Remote speaker microphones for each unit with five percent (5%) spares and,
- Fifteen percent (15%) spare batteries.
 The base station for communications with the portable radios shall be minimally
equivalent to the Motorola model No. GR1225 base station/repeater unit or better,
with features as follows;
- 12.5/25 KHz frequency selection.
- VHF/UHF.
- Programmable power outputs.
- Omni directional antenna.
- Tone interface/adapter.
 For applications where transmission of greater than 300m is required, the design
should consider the use of a repeater unit and remote controller with desk top
microphone or tone type telephone set used at desk top. Antenna shall be provided to
best suit site conditions for the respective equipment.
Wiring Method
 Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters. Conceal cable
and raceway except in unfinished spaces.
Raceways
 Cables may run with other communication cables in dedicated raceways, which are
properly divided so as to assign a separate for each single system. Communication-
cable raceways must be totally segregated from power-cable raceways.
Grounding
 Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize
ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other
impairments.

252
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Pre-Handover Inspection of Security Systems

All security and safety system that have been planned and provided for a hotel must be
inspected by the Security consultant, other related consultants contractors and Owner’s
project management team prior to handover to THE OPERATOR.
The provided system, facilities and equipment must perform in accordance with the
agreed design criteria for the project and such performance must be demonstrated to
THE OPERATOR.
A sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report for Security can be found in the attached
document. The consultants and contractors should use this document in preparation for
the handover of the security systems to THE OPERATOR.
See Attachment: Pre-Handover Inspection Report- Security

253
 Attachment
Security Systems
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:

Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE

Fire Protection and Life Safety Systems OPERATOR Respo
Fully zoned addressable, digital, self-diagnostic fire
nse
1 detection and alarm system is operational.
Fully automated emergency evacuation and paging
2 system is operational.
Fully zoned addressable, digital, self-diagnostic
3 hazardous gas detection system is operational.
Includes a main control panel located at the Security
Control Room or another location as required by local
4 authority, and shall be repeated in the Building
Control Room via repeater panels and the
Communications Center via an integrated PC based
system.
The fire alarm and evacuation system shall operate
on the basis of a two level escalation procedure which
includes a LEVEL ONE that automatically initiates a
call to the municipal fire station serving the hotel and
a 180 second investigation time frame before
5
automatically escalating to a LEVEL TWO whereby
the system automatically sets the fire alarm sounders
at a higher volume level and causes the evacuation
system to transmit the "evacuation message in all
zones. See HITS ER&MS for specific guidance.
The Evacuation System must automatically broadcast
6 pre recorded alert and evacuation messages
minimally in local and English languages with
microphone input for live voice manual override.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.1
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:

Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE

The Evacuation System is designed in a similar OPERATOR Respo
7 fashion as the Fire Alarm system with a two level
escalation procedure. nse
Hotels with externally occupied areas require
8
speakers throughout all external areas.
Porte Cochere

9 Includes Fixed and Pan-Tilt-Zoom CCTV cameras

(amount and type specific to hotel)
Provides for "after hours" guest operated access
10 system using guestroom door lock system integrated
with CCTV and intercom system in accordance with
HITS ER&MS.
Main Entry Doors and Public Areas
Includes Fixed Camera and Pan-Tilt-Zoom Camera
CCTV coverage providing general surveillance of
11
access into the hotel and public areas. (amount and
type specific to hotel)
Below Ground Car Parking
Includes Fixed Camera CCTV coverage of Garage
12 Entry and Exit lanes as well as payment kiosks.
(amount and type specific to hotel)
Includes Fixed Camera and Pan-Tilt-Zoom Camera
13 CCTV coverage providing general surveillance of the
parking decks. (amount and type specific to hotel).
Includes Emergency Intercom station at key intervals,
14 interfaced with CCTV system, to summon emergency
assistance. (amount and type specific to hotel)
Proprietary and Confidential

253.2
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:

Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE

Front Office OPERATOR Respo

15 Includes one Fixed Camera CCTV coverage of night-

nse
drop safe.
16 Includes a drop safe in open sight of office occupants.

Front Desk

17 Includes Duress (Panic) alarms at all POS stations.

Includes one Fixed Camera CCTV to provide general
18
monitoring of transactions.
Safe Deposit Box (SDB) Room
Designed as two rooms separated by half height
19 bullet-proof class with pass through window and
ledge.
20 Deposit Boxes configured in accordance with site
dimensions on staff side.
Includes one Fixed Camera CCTV to generally
21 monitor transactions with a primary focus on deposit
boxes.
Includes entry door to guest side of room that is
22 electronically controlled from the Front Desk.

23 Includes a Duress (panic) button on the guest side of

the room
Includes a maximum of two keys per box for the
24 deposit boxes - one to issue by Front office staff and
one to be retained in the safe in the General Cashier's
office.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.3
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:
Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE
Luggage Room OPERATOR Respo
25 Secured via keycard lock. nse
Contains one Fixed Camera CCTV to monitor
26
luggage.
27 Includes lockable cabinets with adjustable shelving.

Meeting Rooms, Function Rooms and Ballrooms

28 Includes electronic keycard lock
Includes Fixed Camera CCTV coverage in Pre-
29
Function areas (amount and type specific to hotel)
Ballrooms in High Risk hotels includes Fixed and Pan-
30 Tilt-Zoom Camera CCTV (amount and type specific to
hotel)
Hotel Bars
Includes Fixed Camera CCTV to provide general
31
monitoring of bar service area / POS.
32 Includes Duress (panic) button at main POS station.

Public Area to Back-of-House Transition Doors

Include Utility Locks (a lock where both levers or
33 knobs are always free turning except when locked by
a key).
Includes signage on the door indicating the area is for
34
employee use only.
Includes an emergency alarm system that engages a
35 local alarm and which relays the alarm to a centralized
location.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.4
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:

Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE

Spa / Fitness Center
OPERATOR Respo
nse
Includes an emergency telephone system that
automatically engages a prioritized connection to the
36 Hotel PABX at all exercise, lap pool, whirlpool, plunge
pool, recreational pools, sauna, steam and solarium
areas.
37 Has signage in both English and local language which
gives clear instructions for use.
Entry door includes a programmable electronic key
38
card lock.
Entry into Spa includes one Fixed Camera CCTV to
39
record access.
Fitness center includes one Fixed Camera CCTV to
40
monitor activities in the room.
Has entry and exit points that are equipped with an
41
alarm system and / or Fixed Camera CCTV coverage.
Spa locker rooms includes individually lockable digital
42
(master key system) lockers.
All Pool areas (indoor and outdoor) have entry doors
43 with self closing latching systems and electronically
time controlled locking hardware.
All Pool areas (indoor and outdoor) have a minimum
44 of two entry and exit points located so as to service
both ends of the pool and at intervals not to exceed 2
2
meters.
All Pool areas (indoor and outdoor) include a pool
alarm system connected to the Spa attendant and
45 Security Control Room that provides a rapid detection
o fan entry into the water of a swimming pool or spa
during off hours or when facilities are unattended.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.5
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:
Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE

46 All Pool areas include Fixed Camera CCTV coverage OPERATOR Respo
of entryways onto the pool deck.
nse
Guestrooms
Door frame and door panel includes door frame
47 acoustic seal and door panel acoustic seal which
drops down and forms acoustic seal at floor level.
48 Includes door closure mechanism.
49 Includes Door Viewer with privacy flap.
50 Includes Door chain.
Includes Guestroom electronic keycard lock with
51
manual deadbolt.

52 Includes Emergency escape route instructions on the

back of the main door into the guestroom.
53 Includes Rechargeable Torch (Flashlight) mounted
inside the closet and clearly identified.
54 Includes Convenience Safe securely affixed to the
wall or floor of the guestroom.
Presidential / Executive Suites
Includes an air conditioning system that is a separate
self-contained system with fresh air intake located in a
55
secure location and isolated from public and
unauthorized access.
At High Risk locations, includes the ability for guest
56
corridor CCTV cameras to be monitored.
Guestroom Connecting Doors and Sliding Doors (patio / balcony)
Connecting room doors includes a knob or lever door
57 hardware set that is locked or unlocked by thumb turn
with a blank plate on the interior panel face.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.6
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:

Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE

Connecting room doors include a manual deadbolt OPERATOR Respo
58 lock that is locked and unlocked either by thumb turn
or staff mechanical key. nse
Sliding Doors include surface-mounted deadbolt locks
59
that manually lock into the ceiling or floor.
Guestroom Corridors
Includes unimpeded egress into emergency stairwells
60
- doors are unlocked, but latched, in both directions.
In High Risk hotels, includes Fixed Camera CCTV to
61 provide general surveillance of corridors (amount and
type specific to hotel)
In High Risk hotels, includes doors leading into
emergency stairwells that are equipped with locks that
62
do not provide re-entry to corridor except during
emergency conditions.
Includes signage on all doors indicating re-entry is
63 prohibited (at applicable properties) and directing
where re-entry to the floor is possible.
Employee Entrance – Security / Timekeepers Office

64 Include half height glazed partition wall incorporating a

sliding pass through section.
65 Entry door includes a programmable electronic key
card lock.
Includes one Fixed Camera CCTV to monitor entry
66
and exit doors.
67 Includes Fixed Camera CCTV in Back-of-House
service hallways (amount and type specific to hotel)
68 At High Risk locations, includes barrier turnstiles and
space for x-ray machine and metal detector.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.7
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:
Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE OPERATOR Response
Employee Locker Rooms

69 Contains one Fixed Camera CCTV to monitor entry /

exit into locker rooms.
70 Contains electronic key access.

Entry to Administrative Offices, Public Area Room and Toilets

Include either a classroom lockset (outside lever that
71 is locked / unlocked by a key - inside lever always
unlocked) OR an electronic keycard lock.
Includes Fixed Camera CCTV coverage of doors
72
leading into Executive Office area.

Accounting Offices
Director of Finance & General Cashier should have
73 offices that include locks that are not part of the hotel
mechanical key system.
74 General Cashier's office should have a separate
vestibule with electronic access control.
Cashier's office equipped with electronic access
control for vestibule entry, pass through window
75
lockable from Cashier's side, clerk's desk, chair, filing
cabinet and fireproof cash safe.
76 Cashier's office includes one Fixed Camera CCTV to
monitor transactions between office and vestibule.
77 Cashier's office includes duress button to Security
Control Room.
Human Resources Offices
Includes one Fixed Camera CCTV on the interior of
78
the room to monitor access.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.8
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:
Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE
79 Includes electronic keycard lock. OPERATOR Respo
Includes Duress (panic) button in Director of Human nse
80
Resources office or wherever interviews take place.

IS / MDF / IDF/ Rooms and Closets

IS Room has full height walls, ceiling and floors that
81 are sealed to allow successful deployment of free
agent fire suppression system.
IS Room includes one Fixed Camera CCTV on the
82
interior of the room to monitor access
All IS, MDF and IDF Rooms and Closets Include
83
electronic keycard lock to provide audit trail.
MEP Plant Rooms

84 Includes mechanical lock sets on all MEP rooms with

critical rooms having electronic keycard lock (optional)
85 Equipped with first aid equipment (all rooms)
Generator sites, boiler and electrical distribution
86 rooms shall each have a minimum of two egress
points.
Lock Hardware Specifications and Door Functionality
Lock systems must be based on the Great Grand
87
Master Keying system

88 Guestroom electronic lock systems conform to HITS

specification.
Mechanical lock sets include interchangeable cores
89
with 6 pin restricted keyway.
Doors within fire exiting routes leading to external
90
areas are equipped with panic exit devices.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.9
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:
OPERATOR
Item # HOTELS System
CORPORATIO
or Component Yes No Comment THE
N
Doors leading to external areas must also be OPERATOR Respo
91 equipped with an independent centralized alarm nse
system which is activated in the event of the door
being opened.
92 Revolving Doors include an emergency collapsing
feature.
Revolving Doors include surface-mounted deadbolt
93 locks with removable keyed cylinders that lock into the
ceiling or floor on two interior door wings.
Guest and Service Lifts

94 Electronic keycard locks to call and use the lift,

interfaced with guestroom / staff keycards.
95 Includes Fixed Camera CCTV coverage in vestibule
areas (amount and type specific to hotel)
Is equipped with an operating panel that includes an
Alarm button, intercom or emergency telephone, Door
96
open / close, and a key switch or card reader for
secure access operation.
Emergency alarms should be connected to the main
97 control panel located in the Security Control Room, in
the Building Control Room, or both.
Service Lift Lobbies

98 Are generally free of any impediment to emergency

stairs (where applicable).
Loading / Goods Receiving Dock
Includes Fixed Camera CCTV providing general
99
surveillance of good receiving.
Includes electrically operated roll down shutters to
100
secure receiving dock when required.
Proprietary and Confidential

253.10
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE OPERATOR HOTELS CORPORATION PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:
Item # System or Component Yes No Comment THE
Emergency Exits and Emergency Exit Doors OPERATOR Respo
Doors leading to exits must open in the direction of
nse
101
travel.
All doors must be equipped with self-closing devices
102 and non-lockable hardware except where exiting
directly to building exterior.
Exiting route must be unlockable and equipped with a
103
panic device, entry from exterior must be lockable.
Emergency exit doors leading to the outside include
104 Fixed Camera CCTV coverage of the door viewing the
door from the inside.
Emergency Exit Signs and Lighting
Exit signs must be permanently illuminated with dual
105 energy efficient LED laps running with one lamp
running from the main power and the other running
from a constantly re-charging batter power supply.
Emergency lighting shall be provided in all areas of
106 the hotel which responds within a period not to exceed
10 seconds in the event of an interruption to normal
power.
Emergency Stairwells
Must include self-illuminating markings that indicate
107
the floor number and direction of travel.
108 Must include battery operated emergency lighting.

Proprietary and Confidential

253.11
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Sample Pre-Handover Inspection Report

THE PRE-HANDOVER INSPECTION REPORT HOTEL NAME:
OPERATOR
Item # HOTELS CORPORATIO
System or Component Yes No Comment THE OPERATOR Response
N
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lights must be protected against tampering or
109 vandalism with protective lenses and secured switch
boxes; cabling must be housed in a metal conduit.
Security lighting must be connected to normal and
110 emergency power system and switch boxes must be
secured.
Any exterior door intended for employee or visitor use
111
shall maintain level of 50 lux.
Building surroundings shall maintain a minimum level
112
of 10 lux at ground level.
Exterior lighting shall be adequate for the proper use
of the CCTV system. CCTV cameras require a
113 minimum of one (1) foot candle for minimum image
quality.
Below grade Parking should utilize glare-free lighting
and utilize motion detector activation (dual occupancy
114
sensors in addition to local switching to enhance
sustainability).
External and internal security lighting shall be fully
115 interfaced with the security systems.

Proprietary and Confidential

253.12
General Introduction
The goal of the Testing & Commissioning (T&C) process is to verify proper start-up and
operation of the building MEP systems, and provide documented confirmation that the
facility meets the performance requirements of the design intent. Fully functional and
verified MEP systems must comply with the operational needs of the THE OPERATOR hotel and its
occupants. The commissioning process shall be developed by T & C Consultant and be
executed closely with the Sustainability Consultant to ensure implementation of THE
OPERATOR’s Sustainable Design Criteria,and other green building initiatives, to reduce energy use
and lower operating costs.

It is a requirement of THE OPERATOR that the Testing & Commissioning Consultant be

hired at an early stage of the project to guide the Owner during the preparation of the
Owner’s Project Requirements and also assist core discipline consultants in developing
the Basis of Design. Testing & Commissioning Consultant’s other tasks are outlined in
the Scope of Work of MEP Consultants chapter of the ER&MS.
THE PERATOR will not accept the hand off or turnover of any MEP system or component that has
not been fully commissioned with the required recorded documentation.

Instruction to T&C Consultant

The T&C Consultant must have documented experience in commissioning at least two
hotel building projects, and will be required to lead, review and oversee the completion
of the commissioning process. The credentials of this consultant shall be provided to
THE OPERATOR for review and approval.
This T&C Consultant shall be independent of the owner’s project design and
construction management, and he/she shall report directly to the owner. THE
OPERATOR shall receive copies of all interim, draft and final reports.
The T&C Consultant is to conduct commissioning design reviews prior to the mid-
construction document phase.
The T&C Consultant must refer to the Scope of Work for T&C Consultant’s section for
detailed description of his/her activities and tasks.
The T&C Consultant shall obtain a copy of the Project Completion chapter from ER&MS
and familiarize with the requirement of the project completion and handover of
systems/equipment.

254
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

General Requirements

All systems, components and equipment must at the time of hand over to THE OPERATOR be:
 Substantially completed and installed, including FF & E equipment.
 Substantially free of defects
 In a clean and securable condition
 Fully inspected by the authority having jurisdiction (if applicable), and with
approval/certification of usage and occupancy.
Equipment Readiness
 All equipment presented by the respective contractor for commissioning, testing and
hand over must be in a state of readiness to allow a complete performance test.
Documentation
 Suppliers/Contractors will minimally furnish two sets of all operating and maintenance
manuals for all equipment as soon after awarding of the contract as practical, but no
less than three months before commencement of the hotel operation.
 Suppliers/Contractors will minimally furnish two sets of all specifications related to the
equipment, including load performance and pressure drop curves, and other
documentation required for a thorough performance test of the equipment. If the
equipment has been factory tested, or inspected by an official government inspector,
any certificates to that effect must also be provided to the owners and T.S.
 Contractor’s Notification
- Each supplier/contractor must provide notification, in accordance with the MEP
commissioning timetable, to the Owner/Developer, MEP Consultant and THE
OPERATOR that their equipment or systems are ready for testing and commissioning.
Execution of Tests and Commissioning
 Suppliers/Contractors will furnish all instruments of required accuracy to carry out
complete performance tests of the equipment, demonstrating the entire range of load
of the respective equipment, and performance ratios at these loads.
 The contractor of each system must follow the Testing & Commissioning
requirements incorporated in the Construction Documents by T & C consultant.
 T & C consultant shall prepare a Commissioning plan and specify, review and
oversee the execution of commissioning process.
 Once completed, Testing and Commissioning finding and results will be reported to
the Owner and THE OPERATOR by the T & C consultant together in a T & C report including a
summary.
 The contractors must demonstrate the installation and performance of equipment and
systems to the T & C consultant for verification.
Demonstration of Equipment Performance
 THE OPERATOR shall not be required to prove non-erformance or unsatisfactory performance
of any equipment. It shall be the responsibility of all Suppliers/Contractors to prove
the satisfactory performance of the equipment in accordance with all related
performance and characteristic specifications.

255
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Guarantee/Warranty
 Contractors, manufacturers and equipment suppliers must minimally provide an
equipment and labor guarantee/warranty for a minimum of 12 months following the
date of hand over of the respective system.

Systems to be Commissioned
 Heating, ventilating, air – conditioning and refrigeration (HVA&R) systems
(mechanical and passive) and associated controls.
 Lighting, dimming and daylighting controls
 Building Automation System (BAS)
 Domestic water system (hot and cold) pumps, pressure controls, and temperature
controls.
 Sanitary/drainage system including sewage treatment plant
 Renewable energy systems (e.g. wind, solar)
 Electrical systems
 Fire and Life Safety Systems
 Lift & Escalator
 Water Features and Irrigation System
 Gas & Fuel System
 Acoustics
Note: Special System such as Security, Audio Visual, Communications and MATV/ITV
will need to be commissioned by their respective consultants. However, there may be
some overlaps of their scopes with other T&C Consultant’s scope, which shall be
mutually coordinated.
Please also refer to the Sample Flow Diagram for MEP Testing, Commissioning and
Handover in the Project Completion chapter that outlines activities and responsibilities
for each party i.e. Consultants, Contractors, Owner and T.S. / THE OPERATOR.

256
General Introduction
In order to allow THE OPERATOR to adequately plan and conduct its pre opening activities, the
Owner/Developer will confirm to THE OPERATOR, in writing the formal opening date, within a period
not less than twelve (12) months prior to it. Any change to this formal opening date will
require the written mutual consent of both Owner/Developer and THE OPERATOR.
To achieve a satisfactory hand over of the hotel to THE OPERATOR, a sequential area-by-
area completion, as illustrated in the attached pro-forma hand over schedule, is required.
The MEP Consultant shall alert the owner/developer, contractors, subcontractors and
installers of MEP equipment of the following requirements, which are to become an
integral part of all contractual documents related to the installation of all MEP systems
and equipment.

Pre Hand Over Inspection Report

Upon reaching completion, an area shall be inspected by the Owner/Developer, together
with the relevant Consultants, Contractors, and Project Management. A coordinated
report will be prepared by either the relevant consultant or the project management team
detailing:
 Testing and Commissioning report and summary prepared by T & C consultant.
 Inspection reports by other consultants.
 Variances from approved contract specifications.
 Defective architectural, MEP or interior works.
 Defective, missing or incomplete FF&E.
The coordinated pre - handover inspection report shall be circulated to THE
OPERATOR and anythird parties as necessary.

MEP Hand Over and Training

Following successful Testing & Commissioning results and receipt of Consultants’
inspection reports, THE OPERATOR will carry out a recorded final inspection of all systems and
components.
Prior to hand over of any system or component,THE OPERATOR will require adequate professional
training for operational usage, together with minimally two sets of documentation relating
to Testing & Commissioning, operation servicing, maintenance, and warranty conditions,
together with all “as-built” information. This training must allow the personnel to become

257
PROJECT COMPLETION

thoroughly familiar and conversant with proper operation, maintenance and diagnostic
procedures of the equipment. No hand over can occur if training procedures have not
been satisfactorily carried out.
All MEP systems and components, together with areas housing these, will be inspected
to determine compliance with approved contract specifications/minimum standards.
THE OPERATOR will be unable to take over any system or omponent for which the above have not
been completed.
Any take over will not imply THE OPERATOR’s final acceptance of systems or components, which
will be subject to remedy of all recorded, hidden and latent defects.
 The following tables indicate training periods for each system.
See Attachment: MEP Training Schedule
 Please also refer to the attached Sample Flow Diagram for MEP Testing,
Commissioning and Handover that outlines activities and responsibilities for each
party.
See Attachment: Sample Flow Diagram for MEP Testing, Commissioning and Handover

Inspection by THE OPERATOR

Following receipt of the pre hand over Inspection Report and subject to a satisfactory
level of completion achieved, THE OPERATOR shall conduct their own inspection and detail:
 Variances from approved minimum standards/contract specifications.
 Defective architectural, MEP or interior works.
 Defective, missing or incomplete FF&E.
THE OPERATOR will issue this report to the Owner/Developer and any third parties as instructed.
THE OPERATOR will be unable to take over any areas for which a report detailing their comments
has not been prepared and circulated, or any areas which have not been substantially
completed and installed with FF&E.

Take Over by THE OPERATOR

Following preparation and submission to the Owner/Developer of all inspection reports
containing THE OPERATORcomments, and the remedy of any substantial defects contained herein,
THE OPERATOR will take over occupancy of a relevant area and the operation of any supporting
MEP system and components. Any take over will not imply THE OPERATOR’s final acceptance of
the area, system or component, which will be subject to remedy of all recorded, hidden
and latent defects.
THE OPERATOR will be unable to take over any areas in which non-hotel personnel have access.
Such areas may be mutually utilized by all parties until they can be secured, completed,
inspected and prepared for hand over to THE OPERATOR.
All areas, which have been provisionally taken over by THE OPERATOR will be under their full
control including all keying systems and issuance of keys and, therefore,THE OPERATOR will be
responsible for any damage that is not recorded, not a hidden or not a subsequent latent
defect.

258
PROJECT COMPLETION

All costs including those associated with area occupation, energy consumption,
(including MEP systems and components commissioning) and security attendance at the
project site prior to the formal opening, shall be appropriated according to the terms and
conditions of the Management Agreement.

Remedy of Notified, Hidden or Latent Defects

Access into areas provisionally taken over by THE OPERATOR will remain at all times under the
control of THE OPERATOR. In order to avoid interruption to training and operational commission
activities, advance notification for remedial work access must be given for THE OPERATOR’sreview
and approval.
Upon completion of notified defects, the work will be re-inspected and accepted or
detailed as requiring further remedy.
In the event of a hidden or latent defect becoming apparent, THE OPERATOR will notify the
Owner/Developer in writing of the defect and it shall be repaired accordingly.
Should any notified defect remain unresolved and cause interruption to the hotel
operation, or discomfort or jeopardize the safety of the building occupants, THE OPERATOR may
elect to resolve the defect according to the terms and conditions of the Management
Agreement.

Consultant’s Responsibilities
The MEP and T&C Consultant will insure that all activities required for the
commissioning of major equipment be undertaken by factory trained personnel. In
addition, factory trained personnel shall provide adequate attendance at site dedicated
to instructing and training the hotel’s maintenance personnel in proper operation,
maintenance and diagnostic procedures of the equipment.
 Specifications will require the installer to operate the equipment for the purpose of
running the components and to maintain safety, sanitary and comfort conditions for on
- site personnel.
 Specifications will call for the transfer to THE OPERATORof minimally two sets of: as built
drawings, test and balance records, fan and pump performance curves, manuals
covering installation, start up, operation, maintenance, diagnosis, and parts
catalogues, minimally 2 weeks prior to testing related equipment.
 The MEP consultant will bear in mind that contractors and construction personnel at
the job site may not be completely familiar with procedures, equipment and
interpretation of plans for the type of installation required. Sufficient details must be
included in the plans and specifications to compensate for such lack of familiarity.
 The MEP consultant will apply his knowledge of the local conditions in specifying an
inventory of parts and consumables required by the operation of each system for a
minimum period of three months.
 The attached List of Spare Items will be modified to reflect local conditions and will be
integrated into the specifications after approval by THE OPERATOR Technical
Services.
 Testing & Commissioning consultant shall be required to perform the tasks described
in Phase 4 – Acceptance Phase and Phase 5 – Warranty Phase including but not

259
 PROJECT COMPLETION

limited to reviewing the performance of building systems within 10 months after

completion and handover to THE OPERATOR.
 Also see Testing and Commissioning chapter of ER&MS more details on the activities
to be performed during this very important phase of the construction prior to handover
to THE OPERATOR.

Pro-Forma Hand Over Schedule

Ten Weeks Eight Weeks Six Weeks Four Weeks Three Two Weeks One Week
Prior to Prior to Prior to Prior to Weeks Prior Prior to Prior to
Opening Opening Opening Opening to Opening Opening Opening

Purchasing Employee Café 50%

All Lockers Remaining
/Materials Restaurant remaining
Restaurants
Management Storerooms Employee Receiving Restaurants
and Bars
Offices Dining Room Areas and Bars

Personnel Ballrooms
/Training
All and Meetings Reception/ Fitness
Offices
Storerooms Support Concierge Center
Executive
Areas
Offices

All Hotel Laundry & Indoor & Hotel Entry Outdoor

Shops Valet Area Outdoor Facilities, car
Pools & Spa park and
Landscaping

Computer Uniform Remaining Hotel Lobby

Equipment Issue Area Meeting and
Room Rooms remaining
Public Areas
Main Kitchen Banquet Remaining Regency and
& Cold Kitchen Kitchens Grand Club
Rooms Lounge &
Party
PABX
Equipment
Room &
Operators
Area
15 % of 30% of 50% of 80% of Remaining
Guestroom Guestroom Guestroom Guestroom Guestrooms,
Count, Count. Count, Count, Corridors, &
Corridors & Corridors & Corridors & Corridors & BHO Areas
BOH Areas BOH Areas BOH Areas BOH Areas
1 X Service 1 X Service All Remaining
Elevator Elevator Guestroom Elevators
Elevators

260
 PROJECT COMPLETION

Hotel Operation & Contractors Shared Facilities

Ten Weeks Eight Weeks Six Weeks Four Weeks Three Two Weeks One Week
Prior to Prior to Prior to Prior to Weeks Prior Prior to Prior to
Opening Opening Opening Opening to Opening Opening Opening

Receiving MEP System

Area BOH
&
Security/ Corridors
Components
Timekeeper

1 X Service 1 X Service
Elevators Elevator

Trash &
Garbage

Handling
areas

261
 Attachments
Project Completion
PROJECT COMPLETION

MEP Training Schedule

Component / System - Mechanical Instruction Period

Chillers 5 Days
HVAC Components 4 Days
HVAC Fire Mode 3 Days
Boiler/Boiler Plant 2 Days
Temperature Control System 2 Days *
Central Compressed Air System ½ Day
Cooking Hood Exhaust System ½ Day

Component/System - Electrical Instruction Period

Standby Generator 1 Day *

Incoming Services 1 Day
Building Electrical Distribution System 1 Day
Dimming Systems 1 Day *
Building Automation System/Energy Management 3 Days
Guest and Preventive Maintenance Management System 2 Days
(PMMS)
Motor Control Centre ½ Day *
Lightning Protection System ½ Day
Fire Alarm System 3 Days
Telephone System 3 Days
Telephone Attendant Console (By a Professional Instructor) 5 Days
Audio / Visual Systems 3 Days
Security Systems and Electronic Locks 3 Days
Lift/Escalator Systems 3 Days
Computer LAN/UPS 1 Day
Miscellaneous Systems 3 Days

261.1
PROJECT COMPLETION

MEP Training Schedule

Component/System – Plumbing Instruction Period

Water Supply System(s) 1 Day *

Water Treatment 1 Day
Cold Water Distribution System ½ Day *
Hot Water Distribution System ½ Day *
Sanitary Waste and Vent System 1 Day *
Hot Water Heaters / Generators 1 Day *
Storm Drain System ½ Day
Swimming Pool Filtration System ½ Day
Fire Protection System 3 Days *
Gas Supply and Distribution ½ Day
Sewage Treatment Plant 1 Day
Grey Water Treatment ½ Day
Desalination Plant 1 Day
Water Features System 1 Day
Irrigation System ½ Day

* Minimum period, adjust for complexity of system.

261.2
PROJECT COMPLETION
SAMPLE FLOW DIAGRAM FOR MEP TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER
OWNER’S SCOPE
OF Consultant Review of Governmental Body Review of
RESPONSIBILITY System Installation Installation, if applicable

Project T&C Consultant Written Governmental Body Written

Consultants Consultant Approval of System Approval of System Installation,
Installation if applicable
MEP
Life Safety Yes
Yes No No
Lighting
Lift / Escalator
Water Features/ Contractors Rectify Defects
Irrigation
Audio Visual
Communication T&C Consultant, Project
Security Consultants, Contractors
MATV / ITV Execution of Individual
Acoustic System T&C Activities

T&C Consultant &

Project Consultants

Develop T&C Plan for Review Results of Pass

Every System System T&C
Fail
HVAC&R Results Signed Off by
Lighting System T&C Consultant and
Building Automation Contractors
Consultants. T&C
System Rectify Defects Report Issued to Owner
Domestic Hot & Cold and THE OPERATOR
Water System
Sanitary System
Electrical System Governmental Body Written
No
Fire & Life Safety System Approval of System Operation
Water Feature System
Yes
Irrigation System
Gas & Fuel System
Contractors
Audio Visual System
Communication Training
Security Contractors
Contractors and Provided to THE OPERATOR
MATV / ITV Operating Staff
Consultants Spare Items Provided to
Documentation THE OPERATOROperating Staff
Provided to THE OPERATOR Per ER&MS Ownership Notifies
T&C Consultant Instructs As Built Drawings THE OPERATORof Dates of
Relevant Contractors on System Handover
O&M Manuals
T&C Requirements
Specifications Preparations for
Warranties Handover to HITS
Required Licenses /
Government
Inspections Inspection by THE OPERATOR
Operating Staff

Report Issued by HITS:

Contractors Ownership Defects Hidden and Latent Defects
Rectify Defects

OWNER’S SCOPE No Defects

OF
RESPONSIBILITY Acceptance by HITS

Operation and
Maintenance by THE OPERATOR
Notes: Operating Staff
1. Area framed with red dotted line includes activities within Owner’s scope of responsibility
2. Area framed with blue dotted line includes activities within HITS/THE OPERATORscope of responsibility
TS/THE OPERATOR
SCOPE OF
RESPONSIBILITY
261.3
 List of Spare Items
This document summarizes the minimum spare parts that are to be included in the
original equipment purchase.
Quantities shown in the List of Spare Items is to be assessed carefully by the consultant
and contractors and adjusted to local conditions of availability and re-order lead times.

See Attachment: List of Spare Items

262
 Attachment
List of Spare Items
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Architectural

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Imported Equipment
Equipment
Acoustical Ceiling Tile 15 m² 20 m²
Acoustical Ceiling Grid To match acoustical ceiling To match acoustical
tile ceiling tile

Balcony Doors/Hardware:
 Balcony Doors one complete set 2 complete sets
 Rollers, Locks & Pulls 3 complete sets 4 complete sets
 Tracks one complete set per type
2 complete sets per type
installed installed
Balcony Finishes:
 Baseboard and Trim 8m 10 m
 Ceramic Tile (all types) 5 m² 8 m²
 Resilient Flooring 8 m² 10 m²
Bathroom Accessories:
 Bathrobe Hook 6 12
 Bath Wall Tiles or Marble min. 1 bath Equiv. min. 2 bath Equiv.
 Door Track, Rollers, Guides and 1% of each 2% of each
Pulls
 Facial Tissue Plates 2 per 100 installed 2 per 100 installed
 Floor Tile (bath) or Marble min. 1 bath Equiv. min. 2 bath Equiv.
 Mirror, Guest Bath and Room 3 per 100 installed 4 per 100 installed
 Rollers, Toilet Paper 6 12
 Shower Rods 2 per 100 installed 3 per 100 installed
 Toilet Tissue Dispensers 6 10
 Towel Bars 2 per 100 installed 4 per 100 installed
 Vanity Marble Tops 1 for each size & type 1 for each size & type

262.1
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Architectural (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Carpeting:

 Carpeting Minimum 4 rolls per type Minimum 8 rolls per type

installed installed

 Fabrics Minimum 2 rolls per type Minimum 4 rolls per type

installed installed
 Padding, Adhesive/Tackless, etc. To match carpeting To match carpeting

Closet Lockset:

 Closet Door Locksets See Hardware See Hardware

Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS

 Closet Door Cylinders See Hardware See Hardware

Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS
Door Hardware:
 Closers 4 per type installed 6 per type installed
 Door Chains 4 per 100 installed 4 per 100 installed
 Hinges 4 per type installed 4 per type installed
 Strikes 4 per type installed 4 per type installed

Do Not Disturb 1 per 100 installed 4 per 100 installed

Door Chimes 2 per 100 installed 2 per 100 installed

Door Viewer 4 per 100 installed 6 per 100 installed

Drapery:
 Fabric Material 1% of each type installed 2% of each type installed
 Traverse Rods 3 4
 Rollers, Hooks, Pulleys, etc. 8 8
 Closing Mechanism or Batons 1% 2%

Furniture and Millworks

 Guest Room Furniture Minimum 1 per 100 each Minimum 1 per 100 each
type installed type installed
 Stains & Finishes 1 gallon per type 1 gallon per type

262.2
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Architectural (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

 Hardware Hinges, Pulls, Rollers,

etc. as used on all Guest Room & Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit
Public Area millwork.
Key Card Energizer 1 per 100 installed 2 per 100 installed

Locksets:
 Locksets See Hardware See Hardware
Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS
- Cylinders See Hardware See Hardware
Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS
 Removable Core Cylinders See Hardware See Hardware
Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS

 Electronic Door Locks See Hardware See Hardware

Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS
 Bath, Closet, Communicating Door See Hardware See Hardware
Locksets Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS

- Cylinders See Hardware See Hardware

Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS
See Hardware See Hardware
 Service Area Locksets Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS

- Cylinders See Hardware See Hardware

Specifications - DR&MS Specifications DR&MS
Marble Thresholds 2 per 100 installed 4 per 100 installed
Paver Tile, etc. 3 m² 5 m²
Quarry Tile 3 m² 5 m²

Wall Finishes:
 All Door Trims, etc. 6 gallons 6 gallons
 Paint to Match All 20 gallons 10 gallons
 Walls, Baseboards 10 gallons 10 gallons
 Wall Covering Common 1% of each type installed 2% of bulk
Windows:
 Glass None 1% or special glazing
 Windows None Min. 1% replacement

262.3
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Electrical

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Audio Visual:
 Audio System Wire, Cable
3% 1% each type
Connectors, Switches,
 Guest Room Audio System 1% complete 2% complete
Escutchons, Plates, Switches,
 Taps and Splitters 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
 TV Outlets 10 10
 TV Outlet Plates 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
Building Automation System Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit each
Circuit Breakers:
 20 A & smaller 1% 2%, min. 5
 30 A 1%, min. 1 2%, min. 1
 50 A 1%, min. 1 2%, min. 1
 100 A 1%, min. 1 2%, min. 1
 150 A – 1000 A min. 1% of each min. 1% of each
 Fuses 3%, 1 set min. 10%, 2 sets min.
 Amptraps 1 set each size 1 set each size

Decorative Water Display Fountains 1 spare pump, 1 underwater 1 spare pump,

fixture 2 underwater fixtures
Dimmers: Ballroom, Meeting Rooms, Mfg. Recommendations
Suites, R.C. Lounge & other Mfg. Recommendations or or
applications 2 each type 2 each type
Electric Starters:

1 set each size & type 2%,

 Set of Contacts
min. 1 each size & type
1 coil each size & type 1%,
 Solenoid Coils
min. 1 each size & type

1 set each size & type 3%,

 Starter Heaters
min. 1 each size & type
262.4
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Electrical (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Electric Motors:

 Auto-Off-Hand Switch 1 each type & size 3%,

min. 1 each size & type
 Electrical Motors As noted below Export Kit
1 set 3%,
 Start-Stop-Reset Button
button each type & size min. 1 each size & type
 Starter Breakers 1 each size & type 1 each size & type
 Supply and other Motor Loads None 1 for each vital function
Emergency Generator Mfg. Recommendations Export Kit each
Emergency Exit Signage 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
1 each type & size per type
Exhibitors’ Receptacles installed 1 each type and size

Junction Boxes None 1% each type

Life Safety:
 Fire Alarm Panels
 P.A. & Emergency Paging Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit each
 P.A. Speakers for Public Areas None 1%
 Security CCTV System Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit each
Lighting Accessories:
 Ballasts/Starters 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
 Lenses – Diffusers 0.5% per type installed 1% per type installed
 Sockets & Lamp Holders 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
Light Bulbs:
 Long Life Bulbs 4000/8000 20 % 30 %
hours +
 Shorter Life Bulbs 30 each type installed 60 each type
PABX Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit each

262.5
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Electrical (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Panel Type Meters None 1 set

Projector Lamps 1 lamp each type Export Kit plus 2 lamps

Power Outlets:
 Receptacles 6 per type installed 10 per type installed
 Metal Plates 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
 Plastic Plates 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
Signal Lamps Signal lamping + 25% Signal lamping + 25%
Shaving Outlets:
 Current Limiting Type 3 5
 Plates for Shaving Outlets 6 10
Swimming Pool:
 Underwater Fixture 2% 3%
 Replacement Bulbs, Vacuum
Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit each
Hose, Attachments
 Gaskets for Pumps, Valves, etc. 1 complete set 1 complete set
 Consumable Filters 100% per type installed 100% per type installed
 Other as detailed under
Chemical Treatment
Theatrical:
 Theatrical Lights 3% complete 5% complete
15% bulbs 20%bulb,
1 fan for each size, 8%fans,
 Theatrical Spotlights 1 lens each type, 1 complete lens set for
50% gel filters, each size & type,
1 reflector each type, 100% gel filters,
1 special connector each 100% special connectors
type
Transformers:
 Current Transformers 1 set 1 set of each type / size

262.6
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Electrical (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

 Low Voltage Transformer for None 8% per type installed

Lighting
Utility Fixtures 0.5% per type installed 1% per type installed
Wall Switches:
 Switches 6 per type installed 10 per type installed
 Metal Plates 0.5% per type installed 1% per type installed
 Plastic Plates 0.5% per type installed 1% per type installed
Weatherproof Fixtures 1 of each type 1 of each type

Plumbing

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Automatic Valves:
 6.35mm - 25.4mm 1 each type 1 each type
 31.7mm - 101.6mm Mfg. Recommendations 1 Export Kit each type

Bathtubs:
 Bathtubs 1 unit 1 unit
 Pop up Drains 1 kit 2 kits
 Overflow Escutcheon 1% 2%
Guest Room Lavatories:
 Lavatories 4 4
 Lavatory: Trim 1% per type installed 1% + Export Kit
 “P” Traps 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
 Angle Valves 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
 Connectors 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
 Escutcheons 1% per type installed 1% per type installed

262.7
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Plumbing (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

 Pop-up drains 1% per type installed 1%, min. 6

1% + 2% +
 Flush tanks 2% rebuilding kits 4% rebuilding kits

1% + 1% +
 Flush valves 2% rebuilding kits 4% rebuilding kits
Insulation:
 Insulation (pipe) 0.2% each size & type 0.5% each size & type
 Insulation (cement) None 1% each component
Sewage Treatment Special Tools Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit
Shower:
1% + 1% +
 Shower Mixers/Heads
2% rebuilding kits 3% rebuilding kits
 Shower Mixer Escutcheon 2% 2%
 Shower Arms and Escutcheons None 2%
1% each size & type, 1% each size & type,
Shut-off Valves min. 1 each, min. 1 each,
5% repacking / reseating 5% repacking / reseating
kits kits
Sinks / Basins:
 Sinks / Basins 1 units per type installed 2 units per type installed
 Sinks / Basins Trim 2 units per type installed 2 units per type installed
Water Closets:
 Water Closets 1% per type installed 1% per type installed
 Brass Rings-Flanges 2% per type installed 2% per type installed
 Gaskets, Bolts & Caps 2% per type installed 2% per type installed
 Seats 2% per type installed 5% per type installed
 Valve Sets 1% + 2% rebuilding kits 1%+3% rebuilding kits
 Washlets w/Electronic Controls 2% rebuilding kits 3% rebuilding kits
Water Treatment Chemical (Domestic 3 months per system 3 months per system
water, pools, etc)

262.8
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Laundry, Kitchen, and Bar Equipment

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Kitchen:
 Bar and Restaurant Equipment Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit
1 set of controls
 Condensing Units 35% of dryers,
min. 1 of each size Mfg. Recommendations

 Freezer Alarm 1 complete thermostat Mfg. Export Kit

 Ice Machine Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit min.
 Kitchen & Bakery Equipment Mfg. Recommendations 1 Mfg. Export Kit
 Reach-in Refrigerator None Mfg. Export Kit
 Walk-in Freezers & Refrigerator None Mfg. Export Kit
Laundry and Dry Cleaning Equipment Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Recommendations

Fire Protection Systems

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

1 station + 1 pull station +

Alarm Gongs, Claxon, etc. Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Recommendations
Alarm Panel Relays, Resistors, Voltage
Dividers, Switches, Reset Buttons,
Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Recommendations
Meters, etc.
Charging Cartridges 50% 100%
Extinguishers 1% each class 3% each class
Extinguisher Rebuilding Kits none 10%
1 set of links ea. system
Extinguishing Systems 1 set of links and 1 cylinder +
1 spare cylinder for each
1 pull station + 1 pull station +
Fire Alarm Sending Stations Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Recommendations
Fire Hose 1% 1%

262.9
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

Fire Protection Systems (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Fire Hose Nozzle 1% 2%

Fire Sprinkler Pump Controls None Mfg. Recommendations
Flow Switches None Mfg. rebuild kit
1 each size or
Pressure Reducing Valves 1 each size orifice - valves Mfg. Recommendations
Smoke & Heat Detectors 2% 3%
Sprinkler Alarm System Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Recommendations
Sprinkler Heads 1% each type 1% each type

HVAC

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

AHU Temperature Control including

Valve Operator 1 set 1 set

Air Handling Units

 V-belts 100% 100% rated for 6 month’s
life
 Motor Bearings 1 set for each type 1 set for each type
 Pneumatic-Electrical 1% 1%
 Valve & Damper Operators 1% 2%
Automatic Valves:
 Casings 1% each size & type 2% each size & type
 Check Valves 31.7 mm - 63.5 mm None 1 for each size & type
 Check Valves 6.35 mm - 25.4 mm 1%, min. 1 each 1%, min. 1 each
Boiler:
 Nozzle Assembly 1 set Mfg. Export Kit

262.10
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

HVAC (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

 Controls None Mfg. Export Kit

 Gauges 1 set Mfg. Export Kit
1% repl., 1% repl.,
 Steam Traps
min. 1 each size & type min. 1 each size & type
Central A/C Plant:
 Central Air Conditioning Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit
Enough packing to repack 1 Export Kit for each type
 Chilled & Condenser Water pumps all pumps or & size of pump
1 set of mechanical seals 1 gasketing & bearing set
for each + items in
C l #1
 Spare Parts Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit
 Starters Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit
Convectors:
 Control Valves 1% 1%
 Finned Sections 1% 1%
 Covers/Brackets 1% 3%
Cooling Towers Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit
 Relief Valve 1 set 1 set
 Electrodes 1 set 1 set
 Tube Brushes 1 set 1 set
 Tube Plugs 6 12

Dampers None 5% nylon bearing sets,

2% rods
Duct Insulation 1% each size & type 1% each size & type
Fan Coil Units:
1% complete unit 1% complete unit
 Fan Coil Units
min. 1 each size min. 1 each size
 Control Valves 2% 2%

262.11
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

HVAC (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Grills:
 Guest Rooms 1% 2%
 Public Areas None 3% or as practical
HVAC Status Lights and Switches 2% 3%
Instruments: Thermostats 1 set of each type 1 set for each type
Main Plant:
 Pilot Lights 25% 50%
 Replacement Lens Switches, Push 5% 10%
Buttons
 Building Automation System Mfg. Recommendations Mfg. Export Kit
 Variable Speed Drive Sheaves None 1 each size & type
 Drive Belts 50% in matched sets 100% matched sets

 Chemical Treatment (all systems) 1 year contract 1 year contract

including chemicals including chemicals
 Pressure Reducing Valves 10% diaphragms
5% diaphragms
Stations min. 2 each
 Fan & Motor Assembly 1% 2%
Room Thermostat
(Guestrooms, public areas, BOH) 1% 2%

Steam Expansion Joints None 1 set each size & type

Stop Valves 10%, min. 1 each size 10%, min. 1 each size
Unit Heaters or Infrared tubes
 Controls 1 set 1%
 Fan Motors 1% 1%
 Finned Coils 1% 2%

262.12
LIST OF SPARE ITEMS

List of Spare Items

HVAC (continued)

Locally Manufactured
General Areas Equipment Imported Equipment

Vibration Eliminator:
 Floor Vibration Eliminators None 1%
 Slab Vibration Isolation 1 set each type 1 set each type
 Valve Gland Packing 5% 10%
 Vibration Eliminator None 1 set each size & type

262.13